Technical Bulletin

Technical Bulletin PAGE: 1/1

Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 12-Mar-15 No.: RM205003

Subject: Firmware Release Note: NetworkDocBox Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui

From: 1st PP Tech Service Sect., PP Tech Service Dept.

Classification: Troubleshooting

Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required

Service manual revision

Retrofit information

Product Safety Other (Firmware) Tier 2

This RTB has been issued to announce the firmware release information for the NetworkDocBox.

Version Program No. Effective Date Availability of RFU

1.00 M2056030A 1st Mass production Not available

Note: Definition of Availability of RFU via @Remote “Available”: The firmware can be updated via RFU or SD card. “Not available”: The firmware can only be updated via SD card.

Version Modified Points or Symptom Corrected

1.00 1st Mass production


Reissued: 31-Aug-16

Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 12-Mar-15 No.: RM205004d

RTB Reissue The items in bold italics have been corrected or added.

Subject: Firmware Release Note: OpePanel Prepared by: H. Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




This RTB has been issued to announce the firmware release information for the OpePanel.


1.05 M2056027E August 2016 production Not available

1.04 M2056027D September 2015 production Not available

1.03 M2056027C July 2015 production Not available

1.02 M2056027B 1st Mass production Not available



1.05 Specification change: Improved usability of the IMSS functions - In "Edit Custom Paper" settings, multiple papers can be selected for "Print

the Settings" and "Delete." - A new button "New Program" was added to enable easier registration of new

paper. - Numbers assigned for existing custom paper can be changed. - Several terms used in the paper library were changed for better

comprehensibility. - Better display of search result of paper. Improved usability of the "Adjustment Settings for Operators" and "Adjustment Settings for Skilled Operators" menus - Numeric keypad on the operation panel can be used to enter values. - Changed the descriptions of several items in the menu. This firmware is dependent on the following firmware modules. Please be sure to update all of them: - System firmware ver.2.06 or later - Web Support firmware ver.2.05 or later

1.04 Specification Change: - Optimization of the paper transfer current - Addition of a fusing belt smoothing mode for media prone to cause belt

scratches


Reissued: 31-Aug-16



Error Correction: - The following typo in the banner message in Spanish language:

(Incorrect) Aministrador de la máquina (Correct) Administrador de la máquina

1.03 Error Correction: - Backup and restore Custom media data Specification Change: - Added Media identification button in Edit custom paper screen




Subject: Firmware Release Note: PowerSaving Sys Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




This RTB has been issued to announce the firmware release information for the PowerSaving Sys.


1.26 M2056023A 1st Mass production Not available





Reissued: 09-May-16



Subject: Firmware Release Note: TDCU Prepared by: H. Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




This RTB has been issued to announce the firmware release information for the TDCU.


1.07:05 M2055342F March 2016 production Not available

1.06:05 M2055342E November 2015 production Not available

1.05:05 M2055342D August 2015 production Not available

1.04:05 M2055342C June 2015 production Not available

1.03:05 M2055342B April 2015 production Not available

1.01:05 M2055342A 1st Mass production Not available



1.07:05 Error Correction: Incorrect speed control processing of the ITB causes color shift.

1.06:05 Specification Change: SC499 occurs, due to dirt on the sensor part of ITB FB sensor by toner scattering in print.

1.05:05 Error Correction: Countermeasure against SC472-00: Belt Centering Roller Motor HP error

1.04:05 Error Correction: 23 mm pitch Banding in BK mode.

1.03:05 Specification Changes: Countermeasure for SC39X-52 Error Correction: Image transfer motor movement failure (FC and Bk) will be corrected.

1.01:05 1st Mass production


Reissued: 02-Jun-15

Model: BR-C1/Leo-C1/Leo-P1/Andromeda-P1/BR-P1 Date: 23-Aug-13 No.: RD179017k


Subject: Firmware Release Note: BookletFinisher_SR5060 Prepared by: J.Ohno



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




This RTB has been issued to announce the firmware release information for the BookletFinisher_SR5060.


02.590:10 D7345620Q July 2015 production Not available

02.570:10 D7345620P May 2015 production Not available

02.530:10 D7345620M March 2015 production Not available

02.510:10 D7345620L January 2015 production Not available

02.500:10 D7345620K December 2014 production Not available

01.460:10 D7345620J September 2014 production Not available

01.420:09 D7345620H June 2014 production Not available

01.410:09 D7345620G March 2014 production Not available

01.400:09 D7345620F February 2014 production Not available

01.390:09 D7345620E January 2014 production Not available

01.380:09 D7345620D January 2014 production Not available

01.350:09 D7345620C 1st Mass production Not available



02.590:10 Specification Change: To match the spec with the GBC StreamPunch Ultra, print operation was made to suspend when the paper size switches during the job. Error Correction: Jam occurs when punching with the GBC StreamPunch Ultra, because the paper interval is too short.


Reissued: 02-Jun-15



02.570:10 Symptoms corrected: 1. Wrinkles or folds might occur when feeding Z fold paper. 2. After Shift tray keeps down by pressing the Emergency Shift Tray Stop

Switch and system is turned off power, stall might occur after turning on the power.

3. SC 990 might occur on Plockmatic system when Jams occur in SR5050 and SR5060.

4. Operation panel indicates that printed papers remain in Plockmatic when stacker of Plockmatic is full.

Note: Version 02.560:10 is missing.

02.530:10 Symptoms corrected: 1. If sheets are fed through SR5050/5060 and saddle-stitched booklets created

in Plockmatic and jam occurs in SR5050/5060, the saddle-stitching operation immediately stops.

2. Line speed automatically set for feeding out jobs to the SR5050/5060 shift tray according to paper size, type and weight might not be correct.

3. If the system internally detects a SC720-41 (stapling related SC) while running a non-stapling job, Jam106 might occur.

Note: This version or later is required to install Plockmatic to Leo-C1/P1.

02.510:10 Symptom corrected: When the Stream Punch Ultra is connected and paper longer than 431.9 mm is used, jams might occur at finisher.

02.500:10 Software bugs were fixed before the mass production of Leo-C1/P1.

01.460:10 Additional Model Information - Leo-C1/P1 are applied - Banner paper is applied Symptom Corrected: - The Entrance Motor might not work and jam might occur. - Stall might occur if printing on mixplex and shift mode. - Jam 125 might occur if postcard is fed with SEF direction. - Operation panel indicates the wrong location of jammed paper when jam

126 occurs.

01.420:09 Symptom corrected: SC720-35 might occur, caused by the position of the swing unit. Firmware of the home position detection and the swing plate motor is modified.


Reissued: 02-Jun-15



01.410:09 Specification Change : Waiting time before feeding the 1st sheet of a job was extended to 15sec

from the previous 7sec to prevent jams with the Plockmatic RCT5030 finisher. (1st sheet enters the finisher before the finisher completes the initialization process, resulting in the jam.)

Interval between sheets when connecting Plockmatic finisher was reduced to maintain the productivity prescribed by the engine specifications.

To prevent Jam115 that occur with booklets consisted of 2-5 sheets, an extra 500msec was added to create booklets when the number of folding operation in SP6-203-001 is set to '0'.

Symptom corrected: The shift jogger motor remains active during the job, if the previous job was

run using a custom paper of a length between 323.94mm and 324.30mm in feed direction.

The following problems occur, if creating a booklet with 14 or more sheets and reducing the number of folding operation in SP6-203-001: - JAM115 or JAM124 occurs in jobs with number of copies set to 2 or

more. - Motors that drive the paper transport rollers remain active in jobs with

number of copies set to 1.

01.400:09 Error Correction: 1. Jam could occur, if specifying Z-fold and staple options in the same job. 2. Jam80 or Jam111 or Jam103 could occur, if stapling only a few sheets. 3. Jam could occur, if stapled in mixed size mode. Specification Change: Higher productivity is achieved for jobs specified with both Z-fold and staple options.

01.390:09 Error Correction: Jam and miss staple might occur in the fold and staple job when system includes both FD5020 and SR5050/SR5060.

01.380:09 Error Correction: 1. Job process timings were modified to enhance productivity for stapling jobs

run together with the z-fold option. 2. Valid sheets contained in the Plockmatic connected to the downstream of

the Finisher is detected as invalid sheets. 3. If selecting the saddle-stitch option on the operataion panel while the shift

tray ascends after pressing the emergency stop button on the Finisher, the machine continues to run idle.

4. If a jam occurs at the entrance of the TR5040 and the jam sheet is removed, jam indication message does not disappear or the job in process does not resume.



Reissued: 4-Jun-15

Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 24-Apr-15 No.: RM205009a

RTB Reissue The items in bold italics were corrected or added.

Service Manual Correction The following section is to be replaced with the Main Machine installation procedure described in this bulletin.

2. Installation > Main Machine Installation Corrections are described in red.

Main Machine Installation

Important Notice on Security Issues

In order to increase the security of the machine, and to ensure that the customer sets the administrator password, an administrator set/change prompt display is shown up at the first power-up.

Overview

The following Program/Change Administrator screen is displayed at the first power-up.

When the customers set the administrator/supervisor login password, the display

disappears and the home display will appear. The customers, however, can erase this screen with the following procedure if they think there is no need to set the password.

Subject: Manual Correction: Main Machine Installation Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui

From: PP Tech Service Dept., 1st PP Tech Service Sect.


Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP1 On the Program/Change Administrator screen, press [Change] next to Supervisor and then touch [OK] without inputting any password.

STEP2 Touch [OK] again when the Confirm password display shows up. STEP3 For Administrator 1, do the same procedure as steps 1 and 2. STEP4 Press the [OK] button, then the home display appears.

SP5-755-002 allows you to skip this screen temporarily and continue the installation

procedure without setting an administrator password. However, the Program/Change Administrator screen appears every time you turn the power OFF/ON, if the password is not set.

Password Setting Procedure

For more details about this security issue, see “Notes on Using Multi-Function

Printers Safely” supplied with the machine.

When Supervisor / Administrator 1-4 passwords are configured via network,

the “Change Supervisor login password” window will not display. The passwords for Supervisor or Administrator 1 to 4 can be set via “System

Settings”. But the Program/Change Administrator screen appears every time the power switch is turned ON if the passwords are input this way. So we recommend the customers to set the passwords via network or the Program/Change Administrator screen.

STEP1 Install the machine. STEP2 Turn the main power switch ON. STEP3 Change the Supervisor login password.

STEP4 Input the password.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP5 Press [OK].

STEP6 Confirm the Password.

STEP7 Press [OK].


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP8 Change the Administrator 1 login password.

STEP9 Input the password.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP10 Press [OK].

STEP11 Confirm the password.

STEP12 Press [OK].

STEP13 Cycle the power OFF/ON.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


Installation Flow Chart


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


Accessory Check


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


No. Description Q’ty

1 Operation panel 1

2 Paper Transport Belt (PTB) Unit 1

3 Status Lamp 1

4 Guide Plate 1

5 Wrench (Hexagon head bolt: 13-17) 1

6 Wrench (Hexagon head bolt) 1

7 Media identification unit 1

8 Operation Panel Rear Upper Cover 1

9 Operation Panel Rear Lower Cover 1

10 Heater Tube 1

11 Fusing Knob 1

12 Sponge Strip 1

13 ITB Replacement Sheet 1

14 Positioning Pin 2

15 Drum Unit Knob 1

16 Developer Bottle 1

17 Leveling Shoes 8

18 Date Transfer Unit Cable 2

19 Harness Bracket 1

20 Binding Head Screw - M3×8 3

21 Cable Clamp 1


23 Hexagon Flange Screw - M4×6 5

24 Hexagon Flange Screw (blue, rounded end) - 4×8 3

25 Hexagon Flange Screw - M4×6 2

26 Vertical Standing Support Jig B for Paper Transfer Unit 2

27 Vertical Standing Support Jig A for Paper Transfer Unit 1

28 Bolt M8×16 2

29 Harness Clamp 1

30 Decal - EMC Address (EU Only) 1

31 Sheet - Safety (EU Only) 1

32 Decal - Paper Set Direction 1

33 Decal - Function : Blank (NA/EU Only) 1

34 Decal - Paper Tray 1 1

35 Decal - Paper Tray 2 2

36 Logotype Plate (NA Only) 1

37 Sheet - Logo (NA Only) 1


Reissued: 4-Jun-15



38 Decal - Application: EFI 1

39 Decal - PDF 1

40 Decal - Ink Jet Paper Caution (NA only) 1


42 Paper Towel 1

43 Accessory Box 1

44 Sheet - Security 1

45 Paper (EU/AA: A3, NA: 12”×18”) 1

46 Print Sample 1

- Decal - Function : Multiple 1

- Operating Instructions 1

Assembling the Accessory Box

After checking the accessories, assemble the accessory box. Then store the following items in the accessory box. STEP1 Assemble the accessory box [A] as shown below.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP2 Store the following items in the accessory box.


[A] Heater Tube 1

[B] Fusing Knob 1

[C] ITB Replacement Sheet 1

[D] Drum Unit Knob 1

[E] Paper Towel 1

[F] Vertical Standing Support Jig B for Paper Transfer Unit

2

[G] Vertical Standing Support Jig A for Paper Transfer Unit

1

[H] Developer Bottle 1

STEP3 After installing the main machine, open the left door [A] and right door [B] of

the right unit (imaging section).


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP4 Store the accessory box [A] beside the waste toner bottle [B].

Installation Procedure

Remove Tapes, Shipping Materials

Do not discard the sponge strips attached to the front left door and paper tray on

both right (imaging) and left (fusing) units. These sponge strips are to be reused when the units need to be transported. Store the sponge strips in the accessory box beside the waste toner bottle. - Left unit -

[A]: Sponge strip attached to the front left door [B]: Sponge strip attached to the paper tray


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP1 Unpack the right unit (imaging section) and left unit (fusing section) and remove all the wrapping.

STEP2 Place the right unit (imaging section) and left unit (fusing section) at the installation site.

STEP3 Remove all filament tape from the right unit (imaging section). STEP4 Open paper tray 1 [A] and remove the shipping materials.

STEP5 Remove all filament tape from the left unit (fusing section).


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP6 Open paper tray 2 [A] and remove the shipping materials.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


Removing the Supporting Plate from the Right Unit

STEP1 Remove the red tag attached to the left side of the right (imaging) unit.

STEP2 Remove the supporting plate [A]. ( ×2: M4×8)

Store the supporting plate and fixing screws in the accessory box beside

the waste toner bottle for use when the unit needs to be transported.

Attaching the Grip to the ITB Unit

STEP1 Open the toner supply unit cover [A] and left/right front door [B] of the right unit.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP2 Remove the grip [A] and two screws.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP3 Turn the release lever [A] and handle [B] counter-clockwise to separate the ITB unit from the PCU.

STEP4 Remove the inner cover [A]. ( ×4)

STEP5 Remove the red tag and tape [B] from the ITB separation bracket [A].


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP6 Attach the grip [A] removed in Step 2 to the following position. ( ×2)

STEP7 Turn the grip [A] counterclockwise to bring the ITB unit into contact with the ITB cleaning unit.

STEP8 Re-attach the inner cover. ( ×4)


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP9 Close the front right/front left door of the right unit and toner supply unit cover.

Make sure to remove the grip and retain the ITB separation bracket with tape

when moving the unit on its caster or transporting it on a vehicle. 1. Turn the grip [A] clockwise as shown below to separate the ITB unit from the

ITB cleaning unit.

2. Remove the grip [A] and store the grip with the screws in the accessory box

beside the waste toner bottle. ( ×2)

3. Retain the ITB separation bracket [A] with 150 mm tape [B] as shown below.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


Removing the Supporting Plate from the Fusing Section

STEP1 Open the front doors [A] and [B] of the left (fusing) unit.

STEP2 Turn the handle [A] of the fuser unit counter-clockwise and pull out the fuser unit [B].


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


The paper cooling unit [A] automatically opens when the fuser unit is pulled

out. Close the paper cooling unit when putting back the fuser unit.

STEP3 Release the locks [A] and [B] and fully pull out the fuser unit.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP4 Remove the supporting plate [A]. ( ×4: M4×8)

STEP5 Put back the fuser unit, close the paper cooling unit, and close the front doors.

Installing Paper Transport Belt (PTB) Unit

STEP1 Install guide plate [A] to the fusing section. ( ×2, ×3: 4×8: blue hex-head screws, rounded-tip)

STEP2 Open the front left door [A] and front right door [B] of the fusing section.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP3 Rotate handle [A] of the fuser unit counter-clockwise and pull out the fuser unit [B].

The paper cooling unit [A] automatically opens when you withdraw the fuser unit. When you set back the fuser unit, do not forget to close the paper cooling unit.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP4 Pull out the fuser unit more by holding the pawls [A] and [B] on the guide rail down.

STEP5 Put paper transport belt (PTB) unit [A] into the space [B] from the left side of

the fuser unit.

Insert the positioning pin [A] of paper transport belt (PTB) unit into the hole [B] of the main machine.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


When holding the paper transport belt (PTB) unit, be careful not to

remove the spring [A] on the underside of the unit.

STEP6 Secure the front side of the paper transport belt (PTB) unit [A] and connect

the connector at the rear. ( ×1, ×2: M4×6: hex-head screws)

STEP7 Set back the fuser unit, paper cooling unit, and the front right/front left door of the fusing section.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP8 Attach the sponge strip [A] as shown below.

Docking the Right Unit (Imaging Section) and Left Unit (Fusing Section)

STEP1 Install the positioning pins [A] and [B] by hand on the left side of the imaging section.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP2 Bring the fusing section [A] close to the imaging section [B].

Be careful of paper transport belt (PTB) unit of the fusing section hitting the

imaging section.

STEP3 Remove the rear upper left cover [A] of the fusing section. ( ×4)

STEP4 Remove the two fixing screws of duct cover [A] of the fusing section. ( ×2)


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP5 Remove the rear lower cover [A] of the fusing section. ( ×6)

STEP6 Remove the five fixing screws of IOB bracket [A] on the rear of the fusing

section. ( ×5)

STEP7 Open IOB bracket [A].

STEP8 Remove the toner supply rear cover [A]. ( ×6)


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP9 Remove the fixing screws of the rear box [A]. ( ×4)

STEP10 Open the rear box [A] as shown below.

STEP11 Confirm that the height of the positioning pin [A] of the imaging section is at

the same height as the hole [B] of the fusing section.

STEP12 If the height is not the same, do steps 13-15 and adjust the height of the

lower unit. STEP13 Place the four shoes [B] under each leveling bolts [A] of the lower unit.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP14 Continue to turn the nut until the leveling bolt [A] reaches the shoe [B]. (Use the large diameter side of the wrench (hexagon head bolt: 13-17)) Example below: front side of the imaging section

Two types of wrench are provided with the main machine. Use the

proper wrench depends on the purpose.

Name Description

A Wrench (hexagon head bolt: 13-17)

Small diameter side: Use to fasten the M8 bolts when securing main machine (right unit and left unit).

Large diameter side: Use to adjust the casters of rear box.

B Wrench (hexagon head bolt)

Small diameter side: Use to adjust the leveling bolts of option units.

Large diameter side: Use to adjust the leveling bolts of the main machine (right unit and left unit).


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP15 Adjust the height of each leveling bolt [A] until the positioning pin of the imaging section and the hole of the fusing section is level.

STEP16 Move the unit whose height was not adjusted with the leveling bolt and dock

the imaging section [A] and fusing section [B].


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


See the connected part [A] of the imaging section and the fusing

section. Confirm that the positioning pin is inserted into the hole of the fusing section.

STEP17 Open the front right door and front left door of the imaging section.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP18 Rotate handle [A] of the fuser unit counter-clockwise and pull out the fuser unit [B].

The paper cooling unit [A] automatically opens when you withdraw the fuser

unit. When you set back the fuser unit, do not forget to close the paper cooling unit.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP19 Pull out the fuser unit more by holding the pawls [A] and [B] on the guide rail down.

STEP20 Secure the imaging section and fusing section with M8 bolt [A]. ( ×1:

M8×16) Use the small diameter side of the wrench (hexagon head bolt: 13-17).


Reissued: 4-Jun-15




Name Description







“CONNECT-BOLT” is engraved on the small diameter side of the

wrench (hexagon head bolt: 13-17). Do not tighten the bolt too much. Tighten the bolt until there is no

space between the washer and the bolt, as shown below. Furthermore tightening, the bolt may break the screw.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP21 Set back the fuser unit, paper cooling unit, and the front right/front left door of the fusing section.

STEP22 Secure the imaging section and fusing section from the rear with M8 bolt

[A]. ( ×1: M8×16) Use the small diameter side of the wrench (hexagon head bolt: 13-17).

Do not tighten the bolt too much. Tighten the bolt until there is no

space between the washer and the bolt, as shown below. Furthermore tightening, the bolt may break the screw.

STEP23 Re-attach the IOB bracket. ( ×5)


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


Machine Level Adjustment

STEP1 Place eight shoes [B] under each leveling bolts [A] of the imaging section and the fusing section.

STEP2 Continue to turn the nut until the leveling bolt [A] reaches the shoe [B]. (Use the large diameter side of the wrench (hexagon head bolt)) Example below: front side of the fusing section


Reissued: 4-Jun-15




Name Description







STEP3 Open the front left door [A] of the imaging section and place a level [B] as

shown below.

[C]: 5.0 mm


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP4 Adjust the height of the each leveling bolt [A] to level the unit (front and rear) within the specification (±1.0mm/1000mm).

When the front side is lower: Lower the nuts of the front side of the unit (left and

right) to lift the front side of the unit. When the rear side is lower: Lower the nuts of the rear side of the unit (left and

right) to lift the rear of the unit. STEP5 Open the front left door [A] of the imaging section and place a level [B] as

shown below.

[C]: 5.0 mm

STEP6 Adjust the height of the each leveling bolt [A] to level the unit (left and right)

within the specification (±0.5mm/1000mm). When the right side is lower: Lower the nuts of the right side of the unit (front

and rear) to lift the right side of the unit. When the left side is lower: Lower the nuts of the left side of the unit (front and

rear) to lift the left side of the unit.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP7 Open the front left door [A] of the fusing section and set a level [B] as shown below.

[C]: 5.0 mm

STEP8 Adjust the height of the each leveling bolt to level the unit (front and rear)

within the specification (±1.0mm/1000mm). When the front side is lower: Lower the nuts of the front side of the unit (left and

right) to lift the front side of the unit. When the rear side is lower: Lower the nuts of the rear side of the unit (left and

right) to lift the rear side of the unit. STEP9 Open the front left door [A] of the fusing section and set a level [B] as

shown below.

[C]: 5.0 mm

STEP10 Adjust the height of the each leveling bolt to level the unit (left and right)

within the specification (±0.5mm/1000mm). When the right side is lower: Lower the nuts of the right side of the unit (front


rear) to lift the left side of the unit. STEP11 Do Steps 3-6 and check the level of the imaging section again. STEP12 Close the front left door of the imaging section/fusing section.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


Connecting Connectors (Between Imaging Section and Fusing Section)

STEP1 Check that the seven harnesses shown below reside on the rear side of the fusing section.

STEP2 Connect the harnesses that you checked in Step 1 to the panel mount on the

imaging section shown below. ( ×7)

STEP3 Unlock the clamp and release the connector [A]. ( ×1)


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP4 Route the connector [A] released in Step 3 through the hole [B] in the Right (imaging) unit to the hole [C] in the left (fusing) unit.

STEP5 Connect the connector [A] that you inserted through a hole at the fusing section to the IOB2 board. ( ×1)

STEP6 Clamp the connector [A] that you connected in Step 5 as shown below. (×3)


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP7 Make sure the operation panel cables [A] are bundled and set inside the space [B]. The following two cables for the operation panel are bound together. USB cable (black) Power supply harness (red/black)

STEP8 Route the operation panel cable [A] through the hole [B] in the left (fusing unit) to the right (imaging) unit.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP9 Route the operation panel cable through the eleven clamps ( to ) and

lock the clamps. ( ×11)

1. Fix the operation panel cable [A] with clamp .

2. Fix the operation panel cable [A] with clamps .

Fix the cable between two binds [A] with clamp .


Reissued: 4-Jun-15




STEP10 Route the operation panel cable [A] through clamps ~ . ( ×3)

STEP11 Connect the operation panel cable to the IPU as shown below.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


USB cable (black) [A]: Connect to CN583 [C] of the IPU [B]. Connect the power supply harness (red/black) [D] to the relay harness [E]

of the IPU [B].

STEP12 Attach the rear lower cover and rear upper left cover of the left (fusing) unit.

( ×10)

STEP13 Put back the rear box. ( ×4)

STEP14 Attach the toner supply rear cover. ( ×4)


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


If the height of the rear box and the imaging section are not the same,

adjust the height by rotating the screw [A] of casters at each corner. (Use the large diameter side of the wrench (hexagon head bolt: 13-17))

Example below: rear side



Name Description






Large diameter side: Use to adjust the leveling bolts of the main machine


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


(right unit and left unit).

“REAR-BOX” is engraved on the large diameter side of the wrench

(hexagon head bolt: 13-17).

Operation Panel: Standard Installation

There are two ways to install the operation panel.

1. Standard installation. The operation panel position: Operate the machine standing at the front of the machine.

2. Easy access installation.

The operation panel position: Operate the machine from a sitting position.

STEP1 Install the operation panel [A] to the operation unit arm [B] of the fusing

section.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


Hang the pawls (×2) of the operation panel on cutouts (lower side) of

operation unit arm.

STEP2 Secure the operation panel [A]. ( ×4: M4×6: binding screws, ×3)

Fix the ground wire [A] as shown below.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP3 Install the rear lower cover [A] of the operation panel. ( ×2: M4×6: hex-head screws)

Hang the lower hole of the operation panel rear cover to the lower pawl [A] of the operation panel.

STEP4 Install rear upper cover [A] of the operation panel. ( ×2: M4×6: hex-head screws)


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP5 Peel the protect sheet [A] of the operation panel.

Operation Panel: Easy Access Installation

There are two ways to install the operation panel.

1. Standard installation. The operation panel position: Operate the machine standing at the front of the machine.

2. Easy access installation.

The operation panel position: Operate the machine from a sitting position.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP1 Remove the rear upper left cover [A] of the fusing section. ( ×4)

STEP2 Remove the five fixing screws of IOB bracket [A] on the rear of the fusing

section. ( ×5)

STEP3 Open IOB bracket [A].

STEP4 Open the four clams which are fixing operation panel harness.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP5 Remove the cap [A] from the operation panel arm cover of the fusing section.

STEP6 Remove the operation panel arm cover [A]. ( ×2)

STEP7 Remove the fixing screws from the operation panel arm. ( ×4)


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP8 Push the operation panel arm [B] forward while pulling the operation panel

harness [A] out of the machine with your other hand. ( ×1) Pull the operation panel arm forward until you see the four holes where you just moved the screw in the previous step.

STEP9 Secure the operation panel arm [A] and operation panel harness [B]. ( ×4,

×1) Use the screw removed in Step 7.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP10 Remove the operation panel hinge [A]. ( ×4)

STEP11 Remove the fixing material [A] of operation panel harness. ( ×1)

STEP12 Remove the operation panel harness [B] from fixing material [A].

STEP13 Re-attach the fixing material [A]. ( ×1)


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP14 Re-attach the operation panel hinge [A]. ( ×4) Rout the operation panel harness [B] down as shown below.

STEP15 Rout the USB cable [A] as shown below.

STEP16 Install the operation panel [A] to the operation unit arm [B].


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


Hang the pawls (×2) of the operation panel on cutouts (upper side) of

operation unit arm.

Be careful not to put USB cable between operation panel and

operation unit arm.

STEP17 Secure the operation panel [A]. ( ×4: M4×6: bind screws)

Fix the ground wire [A] as shown below.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP18 Connect the two operation panel harness [A] to the operation panel. ( ×2)

STEP19 Install the clamp [A] provided with the main machine to the position shown

below.

STEP20 Connect the USB cable [A] routed in Step 15 to the USB cable [B] of the

main machine, and then secure it as shown below. ( ×1, ×1)


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP21 Secure the harness shield plate [A] at rear lower side of the operation panel. ( ×1: M4×6: hex-head screw)

STEP22 Fold up the USB harness and other harness, and then rout behind the harness shield plate [B]. The picture below shows rear lower side of the operation panel.

STEP23 Install the rear lower cover [A] of the operation panel as shown below. (

×2: M4×6: hex-head screws)

STEP24 Install the rear upper cover [A] of the operation panel as shown below. (

×2: M4×6: hex-head screws)


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP25 Peel the protect sheet [A] of the operation panel.

STEP26 Secure the operation panel harness [A] released in Step 4 with four clamps.

( ×4)

STEP27 Re-attach the IOB bracket. ( ×5) STEP28 Re-attach the rear upper left cover of the fusing section. ( ×4)

Operator Call Light Attachment

STEP1 Connect a connector [B] to the operator call light [A]. ( ×1)


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP2 Set the projection of the operator call light [A] to the main machine.

STEP3 Attach the operation call light [A]. ( ×3: M3×8: binding screws)

Media Identification Unit Installation

Make sure that the main power switch and AC power switch of the machine

are switched off and that its power cord is disconnected before doing the following procedure. Doing the following procedure in an energized state constitutes an electric shock hazard and could cause a malfunction.

If media identification unit can not be installed at left side of the main machine,

install it on a safe and level surface.

STEP1 Place the media identification unit [A] at the left side of the operation panel.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP2 Connect the USB cable [A] of the media identification unit to USB port at right side of the operation panel.

STEP3 Attach the accessory clamp and then route the USB cable so that it does not

spread over.

Attaching the Decals

STEP1 Prepare the paper tray decals [A] provided with the main machine.

STEP2 Attach the paper tray decal “1” to the position [A] along the LED of paper

tray 1 as shown below.

STEP3 Attach the paper tray decal “2” to the position [A] along the LED of paper

tray 2 as shown below.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP4 Attach the Adobe decal [A] and EFI decal [B] to the front right door of the

right (imaging) unit.

Storing the Factory SP Sheet

The factory SP sheet [A] is taped on the right side of waste toner bottle [C] when you open the front left door [B] of the imaging section. Leave it as it is in order not to lose it.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


Breaker Switch Test

The breaker switches are at the rear of the imaging section [A] and the fusing section [B]. The breaker switch should be tested at installation, and then inspected, cleaned, and tested at least once a year thereafter.

To prevent damage to the breaker switch, installation of a voltage stabilizer

(constant voltage transformer) is recommended for work sites where there is significant fluctuation in the AC power source.

STEP1 Open the front right door [A] of the fusing section, and then turn off the AC

power switch [B].


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP2 Plug the power cord [A] of the imaging section and power cord [B] of fusing section into its power source.

Do not turn on the main power switch.

STEP3 Push the breaker switch [A] of the imaging section up to “ON” position.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP4 Test the breaker switch of the imaging section. 1. Push the breaker test button [A]. 2. Confirm that the breaker switch flip to “OFF” position. This indicates that the

breaker switch is operating normally. 3. Push the breaker switch up to “ON” position (normal position).


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


If the breaker switch does not flip to “OFF” position, replace the breaker switch. If you push the breaker switch back to the normal position, the machine does

not turn on when you push the main power switch.

STEP5 Push the breaker switch [A] of the fusing section up to “ON” position.

STEP6 Test the breaker switch of the fusing section. 1. Push the breaker test button [A]. 2. Confirm that the breaker switch flip to “OFF” position. This indicates that the

breaker switch is operating normally. 3. Push the breaker switch up to “ON” position (normal position).


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


If the breaker switch does not flip to “OFF” position, replace the breaker switch. If you push the breaker switch back to the normal position, the machine does

not turn on when you push the main power switch.

STEP7 Turn on the AC power switch, and then close the front fight door of the

fusing section.

Connecting a Color Controller to the Main Machine

Connect a color controller to the main machine. For details, see page 183 "Color Controller E-43 (M465)" or page 200 "Color Controller E-83 (M466)".

Turning the Machine On/Off

STEP1 Plug the power cord [A] of the imaging section and power cord [B] of fusing section into its power source.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP2 Open the front right door [A] of the fusing section and confirm that the AC

power switch [B] is set to ON.

STEP3 Lift the switch cover at the front left side of the fusing section and press the

main power switch [A].

Before the machine leaves the factory, the AC power switch is set to ON. If this switch is OFF, it must be set to ON.

As a safety precaution set the main power switch and the AC power switch to OFF and disconnect the main machine power cord before servicing the machine.

After servicing the machine, be sure to set the AC power switch back to ON.

STEP4 After the [Please Wait] message, the initial screen appears. STEP5 At the front left corner of the fusing section, open the cover, and then press

the main power switch [A].


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


A message appears and after normally shut down, the machine powers down automatically.

Since the AC power switch is equipped to cutoff the power easily, keep the

switch ON except during special situations such as maintenance.

Registering the Serial Number of the Left Unit (Fusing Section)

The right unit (imaging section) and left unit (fusing section) each have separate serial numbers. When installing the main machine, the serial number of the left unit (fusing section) must be registered in SP mode.

STEP1 Check the rating name plate at the rear of the left unit (fusing section), and then write down the serial number.

STEP2 Enter SP mode. STEP3 Enter the serial number in SP5-811-006 (MachineSerial: Left).


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


Install Toner Bottles

Before you begin this procedure, confirm that the machine main power switch is

turned on.

STEP1 Open the toner supply front cover [A].

STEP2 Remove a new toner bottle from the packing. STEP3 Turn the toner bottle upside down, and shake it 5-6 times with both hands. STEP4 Remove the cover of the toner bottle. STEP5 Set each color of the toner bottle to the unit.

Toners are placed from left to right in this order Y, M, C, K.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP6 Push the bottle in with your palm until you hear it click and lock.

When removing the toner bottle, press the green lever [A] and pull out the toner

bottle.

STEP7 Close the toner supply front cover.

A short time later, [Self checking] message appear in the banner and process control automatically starts.

Paper Tray Settings

<Loading the Paper Trays> STEP1 Move the side fence and bottom fence to the correct positions for the paper. STEP2 Load A4/LT paper which is provide with the main machine in paper tray 1

and 2, and then confirm that the paper size is detected automatically. <Paper Tray Settings> STEP1 Press the [Paper Settings] key on the operation panel. STEP2 Select the Tray icon. STEP3 Select the paper type and paper weight for each tray.

The paper type and paper weight for the paper provided with the machine should

be set to "Plain Paper" and "Weight 2".


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


Adjusting the Color Registration

STEP1 Press the [User Tools] key. STEP2 Press [Maintenance]. STEP3 Press [Color Registration].

Auto color registration takes about 30 seconds.

Test Print

STEP1 Press the [Home] key on the operation panel of the main machine and wait for a few minutes until the Fiery icon appears on the Home screen.

STEP2 Press the Fiery icon to access to the Fiery menu screen.

STEP3 Move to the [Fiery] tab.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP4 Press [Printable Info].

STEP5 Press [PS Test Page].

STEP6 Check the solid color and density difference on the test page.

Check if each 100% pattern [A] has a solid color without imperfections (not blotched or scratched).

Check if the density difference between the 60% [B] and 50% [C] patterns is clearly visible.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


Paper Library Data Installation

Follow this procedure to install the Paper Library data. STEP1 Create a folder in the root directory of an SD card and name the folder

"mqp". STEP2 Copy the paper database file into the "mqp" folder, and then rename the

copied file "library.mqp". STEP3 Make sure that the machine is OFF.

STEP4 Remove the controller cover [A] from rear side of the main machine. ( ×2)

STEP5 Remove the SD card slot cover [A]. ( ×1)

STEP6 Insert the SD card containing the "library.mqp" file into SD card Slot 2 (lower

slot) [A].

STEP7 Turn the machine main power ON. STEP8 Make sure that the data version of the SD card is newer than the data

version of the flash ROM on the controller. If it is not, store the latest data version of the Paper Library onto an SD card. The version of the data on the SD card can be checked with SP5-711-202. The version of the data in the flash ROM on the controller can be checked with


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


SP5-711-201. STEP9 Access SP5-711-001 and tap [EXECUTE]. STEP10 Tap [EXECUTE] again. STEP11 When the machine displays "Completed" and prompts you to re-boot, tap

[Exit] to exit SP mode. STEP12 Turn the machine main power OFF and remove the SD card from Slot 2. STEP13 Turn the machine main power ON. STEP14 Check the Paper Library data version in SP5-711-201 (Flash ROM) to confirm

that the Paper Library data has been updated. Backing up and restoring paper library data

This table describes the methods for backing up and restoring Paper Library data.

Adjustment Setting

for Skilled Operators SP mode SD slot

MQP data Install No Yes: SP5-711-001

Lower slot

Custom paper Library

Back up Yes No Slot on operation panel

Restore Yes No Slot on operation panel

Saved paper Library

Back up Yes No Upper slot

Restore No Yes: SP5-711-002

Lower slot

How to back up and restore Custom paper library/Saved paper library in

Adjustment Settings for Skilled Operators STEP1 Insert the SD card into the SD card slot [A] on the operation panel.

STEP2 Press [User Tools] key, and then press [Adjustment Settings for Skilled

Operators]. STEP3 Press [05: Machine Maintenance]. STEP4 Press [0511: Backup / Restore Custom Paper Data]. STEP5 Press [Back Up Saved Paper Library], [Back Up Custom Paper Settings],

or [Restore Custom Paper Settings].


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


SMC Report

STEP1 Insert the SD card to SD card slot [A] on operation panel.

STEP2 Go into the SP mode. STEP3 Do SP5992-001 to store a list of the SP code settings in SD card for future

reference. STEP4 Remove the SD card from operation panel.

The customer engineer keep and carry this SD card which stores list of the SP

code settings.

Moving and Transporting the Machine (Short Distance)

Do the following procedure when moving the machine to another floor of the same building. Turn the main power switch off. Grip the power cord by its head, and then unplug the power cord. Make sure all doors and trays are closed. The machine is heavy. To avoid damaging the machine, place your hands at the

corners of the main frame and push it slowly and straight.

Do not push the rear box [A] when moving the machine.

When moving Finisher SR5050 and Finisher SR5060, adjust the level and height

with the main machine after moving the unit. And then adjust the height of casters under the stacker/stapler unit.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP1 Remove the left unit (fusing section) from the right unit (imaging section). 1. Disconnect the connectors which connect fusing section and imaging section.

(page 136) 2. Remove the eight shoes under the imaging section and the fusing section.

(page 132) 3. Remove two M8 bolts which are fixing the imaging section and the fusing

section, and then remove the fusing section from the imaging section. (page 120)

4. Remove the positioning pins from the imaging section. (page 120) 5. Remove the paper transport belt (PTB) unit from the imaging section. (page

115) 6. Install the supporting plate in the right (imaging) unit. (See “Removing the

Supporting Plate from the Right Unit”)

If the Finisher SR5050 or Finisher SR5060 is installed on the main machine,

follow the procedure below. 1. Turn off the main power switch. 2. Grip the power cord by its head, and then unplug the power cord. 3. Disconnect the interface cable from the main machine and other downstream

units. 4. Make sure the front doors of the main machine and all other peripherals are

closed. 5. Loosen the screws that hold the caster of stacker/stapler unit.

The caster should be raised before the finisher is moved. This prevents the caster from snagging on a carpet or door jam when the finisher is moved.

Transporting the Machine (Long Distance)

Do the following procedure when you ship the machine by truck or move the machine to another building. Turn the main power switch off. Grip the power cord by its head, and then unplug the power cord. Make sure all doors and trays are closed. The machine is heavy. To avoid damaging the machine, place your hands at the

corners of the main frame and push it slowly and straight.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


Do not push the rear box [A] when moving the machine.

When moving Finisher SR5050 and Finisher SR5060, adjust the level and height

with the main machine after moving the unit. And then adjust the height of casters under the stacker/stapler unit.

STEP1 Remove the left unit (fusing section) from the right unit (imaging section).

1. Disconnect the connectors which connect the fusing section and the imaging section. (page 136)

2. Remove the eight shoes under the imaging section and the fusing section. (page 132)

3. Remove two M8 bolts which are fixing the imaging section and the fusing section, and then remove the fusing section from the imaging section. (page 120)

4. Remove the positioning pins from the imaging section. (page 120) 5. Remove the paper transport belt (PTB) unit from the imaging section. (page

115) 6. Install the supporting plate in the right (imaging) unit. (See “Removing

the Supporting Plate from the Right Unit”) 7. Turn the grip of the ITB unit clockwise, remove the grip, and fasten the

ITB separation bracket with tape. (See “Attaching the Grip to the ITB Unit”)

8. Attach the retainer to the front left doors and paper trays on both right (imaging) and left (fusing) units. (See “Remove Tapes, Shipping Materials”)

STEP2 Clear the waste toner path.

1. Make sure that the waste toner bottle is set in the machine. 2. Close the front door. 3. Enter the SP mode and do SP5-804-071 to turn on the waste toner transport

motor (lower). 4. While the toner feed motor is running, do SP5-804-070 to turn on the waste

toner transport motor (upper). These two SP codes should execute at the same time.

5. Wait at least 2 min. and then switch off SP5-804-071 and SP5-804-070.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP3 Remove the toner bottles (machine should be moved with the bottles removed) If there are any bottles which do not come out by pressing the green lever, set following SP to “0”.

Toner bottle which do not

come out SP No. SP Name

Y1 SP3-162-004 Bottle Open/Close: Open/Close: Y1: Left Bottle

Y2 SP3-162-008 Bottle Open/Close: Open/Close: Y2: Right Bottle

M1 SP3-162-003 Bottle Open/Close: Open/Close: M1: Left Bottle

M2 SP3-162-007 Bottle Open/Close: Open/Close: M2: Right Bottle

C1 SP3-162-002 Bottle Open/Close: Open/Close: C1: Left Bottle

C2 SP3-162-006 Bottle Open/Close: Open/Close: C2: Right Bottle

K1 SP3-162-001 Bottle Open/Close: Open/Close: K1: Left Bottle

K2 SP3-162-005 Bottle Open/Close: Open/Close: K2: Right Bottle

STEP4 When you arrive at the new site:

1. Turn the main power switch ON. 2. Open the toner supply front cover, and then install the toner bottle. 3. Close the toner supply front cover.

If the Finisher SR5050 or Finisher SR5060 is installed to the main machine,

follow the procedure below. 1. Turn off the main power switch. 2. Grip the power cord by its head, and then unplug the power cord. 3. Disconnect the interface cable from the main machine and other downstream

units. 4. Make sure the front doors of the main machine and all other peripherals are

closed. 5. Loosen the screws that hold the caster of stacker/stapler unit.

The caster should be raised before the finisher is moved. This prevents the caster from snagging on a carpet or door jam when the finisher is moved.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


If the Machine is too large to Transport

Remove the rear box only when the machine is too large to pass through a narrow door or passageway. When the rear box is removed, depth dimension of a machine (980 mm) become 760 mm. STEP1 Remove the toner supply rear cover [A]. ( ×6)

STEP2 Remove the fixing screws of rear box [A]. ( ×4)

STEP3 Open the rear box from right side.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP4 Remove the two ground cables inside rear box [A]. ( ×2)

STEP5 Open the clamps, then disconnect the connectors and USB cables inside

rear box as shown below. ( × ALL, × ALL, USB cables × ALL)

When connecting the USB cables back to IPU [A], match the numbers

marked on IPU and USB cables.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP6 Remove the rear box [A], so that you can access to the upper and lower hinges on left side of controller box [B].

STEP7 Remove the pins from upper and lower hinges on left side of the controller

box [A]. ( ×4)


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP8 Remove rear box [A] from main machine.

After the rear box is removed from the main machine, it become unstable and

can be fell over. To avoid personal injury or damage on the rear box, use caution when you leave or transport the rear box.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15



Service Manual Correction The following section of the field service manual was corrected:

2. Installation > Vacuum Feed LCIT RT5100 (D777) > Installation Procedure > Tray Heater (Option) (page 229)

Corrections are described in red. NOTE for revision a: Not only the Tray Heater (Option), but also the whole installation procedure has been added with some new information in STEP2.


The unit must be connected to a power source that is close to the unit and

easily accessible. Make sure that the main power switch and AC power switch of the main

machine are turned OFF and that its power cord is disconnected before doing the following procedure. Doing the following procedure in an energized state constitutes an electric shock hazard and could cause a malfunction.

This option is installed on the main machine as an upstream unit. Up to three

LCIT can be connected on the main machine using the Bridge Unit BU5010. The installation procedure is the same, whether you install the LCIT on the main machine, or install on the Bridge Unit BU5010. This section describes how to install the LCIT on the main machine.

STEP1 Remove all tape and retainers from the exterior of the LCIT.

Subject: Manual Correction: Vacuum Feed LCIT RT5100 installation procedure

Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP2 Open the bottom tray [A] and remove the shipping materials.

STEP3 Remove the LCIT connecting covers from the main machine.

STEP4 Install the joint pins [A] and [B] on the right side of the main machine, and then tighten

them with a wrench.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP5 Install the joint bracket [A] on right side of the main machine. ( ×2: M5×10)

STEP6 Remove the rear left cover [A] from the LCIT. ( ×6)

STEP7 Remove the rear right cover [A] from the LCIT. ( ×10)


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP8 Open the front door [A], and then unlock the connecting lever [B]. ( ×1) Keep the screw. It will be needed to lock the connecting lever after connecting LCIT with the main machine in Step 11.

STEP9 Remove the ground plate [A], and then reinstall it as shown below. ( ×2)


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP10 Attach the sponge strip [A] to the top left edge of the LCIT as shown below.

STEP11 Push the LCIT [B] onto the right side of the main machine [A] slowly, and then install it.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


When you install the LCIT, align the notched pins [A] and joint bracket [B] on the right side of the main machine with the pin holes [C] and bracket [D] of the LCIT.

To disconnect the LCIT from the main machine, open the front door [A] of the LCIT, and then disconnect the LCIT while pressing the connecting lever [B] in the direction indicated with the arrow.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP12 Open the front door [A], and then secure the connecting lever [B]. ( ×1)

Use the screw removed in Step 7.

STEP13 Place the four shoes [B] below the bolts [A] under each corner of the LCIT. STEP14 Turn the nuts [A] until the bolts reach the leveling shoes [B].

Example below: Front side


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP15 Place a level on the top of the LCIT, and then adjust the machine level until the machine

is less than 5mm from level (measure from left-to-right/measure from front-to-rear). When the right side of the machine is lower: Lower the nuts of the right side of the machine

(front and rear) to lift the right side of the machine. When the left side of the machine is lower: Lower the nuts of the left side of the machine

(front and rear) to lift the left side of the machine. When the front side of the machine is lower: Lower the nuts of the front side of the machine

(left and right) to lift the front of the machine. When the rear side of the machine is lower: Lower the nuts of the rear side of the machine

(left and right) to lift the rear of the machine.

When you adjust the machine level, open the front door [A] and then confirm that the height of the LCIT exit [B] is at the same height as the main machine’s paper entrance [C].


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP16 Open the front door [A], and then secure the front side of the main machine [B] and

LCIT [C]. ( ×1: 4×10)

STEP17 Secure the rear side of the main machine [A] and LCIT [B]. ( ×1: 4×10)

STEP18 Reattach the rear left cover and rear right cover of the LCIT.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP19 Connect the LCIT I/F cable [A] to the main machine.

STEP20 To attach the tray number decals [A] provided with the LCIT, attach them to the

position [B] (above the LEDs).

Attach the decal “3” on the top tray, attach the decal “4” on the bottom tray.

When you install two or three LCIT on the main machine, attach the tray number decals [A] provided with Bridge Unit BU5010 on 2nd LCIT [B] and 3rd LCIT [C]. Attach the decal “5” on the top tray, attach the decal “6” on the bottom tray of 2nd LCIT. Attach the decal “7” on the top tray, attach the decal “8” on the bottom tray of 3rd LCIT.


Reissued: 4-Jun-15


STEP21 Connect the power cord [A] provided with the LCIT to the power inlet on the LCIT.

STEP22 Plug the power cord of the LCIT into the power source.

Plug the power cord of the main machine into the power source, and then turn on the main power switch.

Tray Heater (Option)

An optional tray heater can be installed under Paper Tray 2. (See page 510 "Tray Heater (Vacuum Feed LCIT RT5100).") This heater is independent of the ON/OFF power switch of the main machine and is constantly activated if the power cord of the vacuum feed LCIT is plugged in.


Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 24-Apr-15 No.: RM205011

Subject: Manual Correction: General specifications Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2


1. Appendices: Specifications > Specifications > General Specifications (pg 5) Note: The areas highlighted in red were revised.

General Specifications

Item Spec.

Configuration Console

CPU Intel(R) Celeron(R) Processor U3405 1.07GHz

RAM 1.0GB (Standard)

Hard disk 320GB

Color Support Full Color

Photoreceptor Type OPC Drum

Print Process Dry Electrostatic Transfer System

Development System Dry Two-component Magnetic Brush Development System

Fusing System Oil-less Belt Fusing System

Warm-up time 540 Sec. or less (23C/73.4F, rated voltage)

First Print Time M205: 14.9 Sec. or less M238: 13.1 Sec. or less

Print Speed M205: 110 Pages/Min. (A4/LT LEF), 61 Pages/Min. (A3/DLT SEF)

M238: 130 Pages/Min. (A4/LT LEF), 75 Pages/Min. (A3/DLT SEF)

Recommended Paper Size

Main Unit Tray 1, 2, LCT (Trays 3 to 8): A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, B4 SEF, B5 SEF/LEF, 11"×17"(DLT) SEF, 8.5"×14"(LG) SEF, 8.5"×13"(Foolscap) SEF, 8.5"×11"(LT) SEF/LEF, 8.25"×14"(Government LG) SEF, 8.25"×13"(Folio) SEF, 8"×13"(F/GL) SEF, 8"×10"(Eng Quatro) SEF, 7.25"×10.5"(Executive) SEF/LEF, 5.5"×8.5"(Half Letter) SEF/LEF, 8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF, 12"×18" SEF, 11"×15" SEF, 11"×14" SEF, 10"×15" SEF, 10"×14" SEF, 13"×19.2" SEF, 13"×19" SEF, 12.6"×19.2" SEF, 12.6"×18.5" SEF, 13"×18" SEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4 SEF/LEF, 226×310mm SEF/LEF,



Item Spec.

310×432mm SEF, 4.2"×5.5" SEF, Envelopes (240×332mm, 235×120mm, 120×235mm, 105×241mm, 110×220mm)

Multi Bypass Tray: A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, A6 SEF, B4 SEF, B5 SEF/LEF, B6 SEF, 11"×17"(DLT) SEF, 8.5"×14"(LG) SEF, 8.5"×13"(Foolscap) SEF, 8.5"×11"(LT) SEF/LEF, 8.25"×14"(Government LG) SEF, 8.25"×13"(Folio) SEF, 8"×13"(F/GL) SEF, 8"×10"(Eng Quatro) SEF, 7.25"×10.5"(Executive) SEF/LEF, 5.5"×8.5"(Half Letter) SEF/LEF, 8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF, 12"×18" SEF, 11"×15" SEF, 11"×14" SEF, 10"×15" SEF, 10"×14" SEF, 13"×19.2" SEF, 13"×19" SEF, 12.6"×19.2" SEF, 12.6"×18.5" SEF, 13"×18" SEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4 SEF/LEF, 226×310mm SEF/LEF, 310×432mm SEF, 4.2"×5.5" SEF, Envelopes (Horizontal:100mm to 330.2mm/3.9"×13", Vertical:139.7mm to 487.7mm/5.5"×19.2")

Custom Paper: Horizontal:100mm to 330.2mm/3.9"×13" Vertical:139.7mm to 487.7mm/5.5"×19.2"

Paper Thickness Main Unit Tray 1, 2, LCT (Trays 3 to 8): 52.3 to 400.0 g/m2 Multi bypass tray: 52.3 to 216.0 g/m2

Resolution 1200dpi (Main Scan)×4800dpi (Sub Scan)

Tone 256

Feeding System / Paper Capacity

Standard: 2500 Sheets×2 Optional: Vacuum Feed LCIT RT5100: 2500 Sheets×2 Multi Bypass Tray BY5010: 500 Sheets

Power Source NA: 220-240V/60A (30A×2), 50/60Hz EU/AP: 208-240V/60A (30A×2), 50/60Hz

Max. Watts 9000W or less (full system) *Optional Power Source not included

Dimensions (W×D×H) 2520×990×1500 mm (99.3”×39.0”×59.1”) * Up to the top of the toner cartridge compartment (excluding the control panel and the attention light)

Unit Occupation Dimensions (W×D) for Main Unit

2,520×990 mm (99.3”×39.0”)

Weight 1013.4kg (Imaging section: 617.4kg, Fusing section: 396.0kg)



Subject: Manual Correction: Tray Heater (Main Machine) installation procedure




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

Service Manual Correction The following section is to be replaced with the Tray Heater (Main Machine) installation procedure described in this bulletin.

2. Installation > Tray Heater (Main Machine) Corrections are in red.

Tray Heater (Main Machine)

Always switch the machine off and unplug the machine before doing the following

procedure.

Tray Heater (Imaging Section)

This heater is independent of the ON/OFF power switch of the main machine and is

constantly activated if the power cord of the vacuum feed LCIT is plugged in.

STEP1 Remove the toner supply rear cover [A]. ( ×6)



Check the position of the hooks in the photo below before removing.

STEP2 Remove the screws on the rear box [A]. ( ×4)

STEP3 Open the rear box from right side.



STEP4 Open two clamps which holding the harness [A]. ( ×2)

STEP5 Connect the harness [A] to the connector CN403 [B] on AC drive board 1 [C]. ( ×1,

×2)

STEP6 Reassemble the machine.



Tray Heater (Fusing Section)

This heater is independent of the ON/OFF power switch of the main machine and is

constantly activated if the power cord of the vacuum feed LCIT is plugged in. STEP1 Loosen the lower screws on the duct cover (fusing section) [B] so that you can remove

the rear lower cover (fusing section) [A] easily. ( ×2)

STEP2 Remove the screws on the rear lower cover (fusing section) [A]. ( ×6)

STEP3 Remove the 2 hooks located on the lower side of the rear lower cover (fusing section)

[A], and then move it downward to remove it.



Check the position of the hooks in the photo below before removing.

STEP4 Open two clamps which holding the harness [A]. ( ×2)



STEP5 Connect the harness [A] to the connector CN403 [B] on AC drive board 2[C]. ( ×1, ×2)

STEP6 Reassemble the machine.



Subject: Manual Correction: Tray Heater (Vacuum Feed LCIT RT5100) installation procedure




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2


2. Installation > Tray Heater (Vacuum Feed LCIT RT5100) > Installation (pg 510) Corrections are in red.

Installation

Make sure that the main power switch and AC power switch of the main machine are

turned OFF and that its power cord is disconnected before doing the following procedure.

The tray heater is independent of the ON/OFF power switch of the main machine and

is constantly activated if the power cord of the vacuum feed LCIT is plugged in.

STEP1 Pull paper tray 2 from the vacuum feed LCIT.



Subject: Manual Correction: Vacuum Feed Banner Sheet Tray Type S3 installation procedure




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

Service Manual Correction The following section is to be replaced with the Vacuum Feed Banner Sheet Tray Type S3 installation procedure described in this bulletin.

2. Installation > Vacuum Feed Banner Sheet Tray Type S3 (D777) Corrections are in red.

Vacuum Feed Banner Sheet Tray Type S3 (D777)

Vacuum feed banner sheet tray type S3 is connected to the vacuum feed LCIT. When two or more vacuum feed LCITs are connected, vacuum feed banner sheet tray

type S3 can be connected to only the upstream vacuum feed LCIT.

Accessories

No. Description Q'ty

1 End Fence (Short) 2

2 End Fence (Long) 1

3 Front Cover 1

4 Upper Bottom Plate 1

5 Lower Bottom Plate 1

6 Rear Cover 1

7 Support Plate 1

8 Relay Tray 1

9 Extension Tray 1

10 Safety Cover 1

11 Stopper Plate 4

12 Edge Saddle 2

13 HP Sensor Bracket 1

14 Tapping Bind Screw – M3×6 2

15 Tapping Bind Screw – M4×6 6

16 Tapping Screw – M4×8 6




17 Tapping Screw – M3×10 2

18 Decal Sheet: Scale 1

19 Decal: Position Indicator 2

20 Side Fence 2

21 Wire Cover 4

22 E-ring 4

23 Sponge Strip 1

24 Support Bracket *1 2

*1: The support brackets are to be used only if feeding problems occur with thin media. Do not use for Weight 6 ~ 9 (220.1-400.0g/m2) media, because there is a risk of double feeding.



Installation

Make sure that the main power switch and AC power switch of the main machine are

turned OFF and that its power cord is disconnected before doing the following procedure. Doing the following procedure in an energized state constitutes an electric shock hazard and could cause a malfunction.

STEP1 Remove all visible external tapes on the external surfaces of the vacuum feed banner

sheet tray type S3.

STEP2 Lift the right top cover [A] of the vacuum feed LCIT and remove it. ( ×4)

Removed screws are used when attaching the front cover and rear cover provided with this option.



STEP3 Lift the rear right cover [A] of the vacuum feed LCIT and remove it. ( ×6)

STEP4 Lift the rear left cover [A] of the vacuum feed LCIT and remove it. ( ×10)

STEP5 Pull paper tray 1 from the vacuum feed LCIT.

STEP6 Lift the tray 1 front cover [A] and remove it. ( ×4) screws [B]: shoulder screws

Remove the tray 1 front cover beforehand so that it does not hit the floor

when putting the paper tray 1 on the floor.



STEP7 Paper tray 1 [A] ( ×4)

Two or more customer engineers are required to lift the paper tray 1 off the rails because paper tray 1 is extremely heavy. Work carefully when lifting and moving it.

STEP8 Remove the stay [A] on the right side of the vacuum feed LCIT. ( ×4)

After removing the stay, keep it in storage in case the vacuum feed banner

sheet tray is dismantled at some point in the future.

STEP9 Attach the safety cover [A] (provided with this option) to the far side of the vacuum

feed LCIT. ( ×6: M4×6)



STEP10 Pull the harness of the vacuum feed banner sheet tray to the outside of the tray.



STEP11 Mount the shoulder screws [B] on the front/rear of the vacuum feed banner sheet tray into the holes [A] that receive the shoulder screws on the vacuum feed LCIT.



STEP12 Fix the vacuum feed banner sheet tray with the screws provided with this option.

Near side: ( ×3: M4×8)

Far side: ( ×2: M4×8)

STEP13 Attach the front cover [A] provided with this option. ( ×2)

Use the screws removed from the right top cover in Step 2.



STEP14 Attach the edge saddles [A] provided with this option and pass the harnesses of the

vacuum feed banner sheet tray through the rear side.

STEP15 Route the harnesses as shown below and connect it to the board of the vacuum feed

LCIT ( ×3).

① CN36

② CN60

③ CN40

Disconnect the terminal connectors and connect the harness because CN60

is connected with terminal connectors [A] as shown below.



STEP16 Disconnect the connectors [A] [B].

STEP17 Connect the relay connectors, which were routed from above, to the connectors [A] [B]

disconnected in step 16. ( ×2)

The harnesses [C] disconnected from connectors [A] [B] in step 16 are

connected nowhere.

STEP18 Attach the rear cover [A] provided with this option. ( ×2)

Use the screws removed from the right top cover in Step 2.



STEP19 Remove the support plate [A] on the side of the paper tray removed from the vacuum

feed LCIT.

STEP20 Widen the side fences of the paper tray and attach the support plates on the inside of

the side fences.

The support plates are held in place by magnets on both sides of the paper tray.



STEP21 Remove the side plate [A] from the paper tray. ( ×4)

Keep the plate in storage in case the vacuum feed banner sheet tray is dismantled at some point in the future.

Lift up the operating lever to remove the screws on the front.

STEP22 Remove the left cover [A] from the paper tray. ( ×4)

Lift up the operating lever to remove the screws on the front.



STEP23 Remove the sensor bracket [A] from the paper tray. ( ×1, ×1)

STEP24 Remove the HP sensor [A] from the bracket and replace it with the HP sensor bracket

[B] provided with this option. (pawl×3)

STEP25 Attach the HP sensor bracket to the paper tray. ( ×1, ×1)

STEP26 Re-attach the left cover.



STEP27 Turn the roller [A] clockwise, and lift up the bottom plate above the embossed part [B].

STEP28 When the bottom plate has been lifted above the embossed part, insert an object such

as a screwdriver into the hole in the sheet metal to hold the pin [A].

STEP29 Attach the four stopper plates [A] provided with this option. ( ×2 each)

Screws with washers are mounted in advance on the stopper mounting

position. Remove the washers from the screws when attaching the four stopper

plates. TITLE: Front left and front right

TITLE: Rear left and rear right

STEP30 Remove the screwdriver or other object inserted in step 28.



STEP31 Remove the jam removal lever [A] on the front of the paper tray. ( ×3)

STEP32 Disconnect the connector [A]. ( ×1)

STEP33 Stay [A] ( ×6)



STEP34 Re-hang the wire.

TITLE: Before

TITLE: After



1. Turn the wire take-up roller clockwise and loosen the wire.

2. Remove the pulley [A] in the middle and then install it into the position [B]. ( ×1) 3. Re-hang the long wire as shown below.

Remove the pulley cover [A] and then remove the pulley.

4. Attach the removed pulley cover. ( ×1) 5. Unhook the wire [A] from the wire hook.



6. Replace the wire hook with the one on the rear side and attach it so that the hook faces

down. ( ×1 each)

Before replacing the wire hook, check the position of the reference line

and the graduation on both front and rear hooks. Make sure the hook retains the original position when reattached.



7. Re-hang the wire as shown below and then hook the wire [A] on the wire hook.

Hang the wire into the groove of the pin on the frame.

At the upper pulley, pass the long wire through the pulley and pass the

short wire between two E-rings.

After re-hanging the wire, change the position where it hangs from the

top to the bottom.



8. Attach the pulley covers (provided with this option) to the 2 pulleys. ( ×2)

Two E-rings are also provided with this option.

STEP35 Similarly to the front side, move and add pulleys on the rear side and re-hang the wires.

STEP36 Attach the stay and jam removing lever removed in steps 31 and 33.



STEP37 Attach the decals [A] and [B] (provided with this option) to the bottom plate of the paper tray.

Align the decals so that the bottom edge aligns with the bottom edge of the bottom plated (indicated with the red lines).

Decal [A]: mm scale

Decal [B]: inch scale

Decal [C] is used in step 47. So do not discard the decal sheet after attaching

decals [A] and [B]. STEP38 Attach the decals (position indicator) [A] (provided with this option) to both side

fences.



STEP39 Remove the screws from the end fence [A], and then remove the end fence from the

paper tray as it falls down diagonally. ( ×2)

STEP40 Pull out the vacuum feed LCIT slide rails and mount the paper tray on them, and fasten

it in place. ( ×4)

Two or more customer engineers are required to mount the paper tray 1 on the rails because paper tray 1 is extremely heavy. Work carefully when mounting it.

STEP41 Push the paper tray and close it.



STEP42 Turn the wire take-up roller [A] at the front of the paper tray counter-clockwise to raise

the bottom plate until you can see it completely from the vacuum feed banner sheet tray.

The raised bottom plate will not lower even if the wire take-up roller is released. However, if the bottom plate is raised too high, pulling out the paper tray will cause it to lower.

STEP43 Remove the screws on the bottom plate. ( ×3)



STEP44 Attach the upper bottom plate [A] provided with this option. ( ×3)

Use the screws removed in step 43.

STEP45 Insert the lower bottom plate [A] (provided with this option) to attach it. ( ×2: M3×6)

If the bottom plate is lifted too far and a screwdriver cannot get in, pull the

paper tray out slightly so it can be lowered. Please note that if you pull the tray out too far, it may come in contact with and deform the extension tray, so be very careful when doing this.

STEP46 Re-attach the tray 1 front cover.



STEP47 Attach the decal [A] (provided with this option) to the upper bottom plate.

Decal [A]: Rear end scale and end fence installation diagram

STEP48 Open the front door of the vacuum feed LCIT and lock the paper tray 1. ( ×1)

Once the paper tray 1 is locked, it cannot be pulled out.

STEP49 Re-attach the rear covers.



Attaching the Sponge Strip

STEP1 Cut the cushion at the position [A] along the groove of the left top cover of the vacuum feed LCIT.

STEP2 Remove the screws on the left top cover. ( ×2)

STEP3 Slide the left top cover [A] in the direction of the blue arrow and remove it.

STEP4 Slide the center top cover [A] in the direction of the blue arrow and remove it. ( ×3)



STEP5 Slide the right top cover [A] in the direction of the arrow and remove it. ( ×3)

STEP6 Attach the sponge strip (provided with this option) to the right side of the right top

cover removed in step 5.

Insert the rib [B] into the notches [A] of the sponge strip.

STEP7 Re-attach the covers. STEP8 Close the top cover [A] and then confirm that there is no gap.



Attaching the Side Fences and End Fences

STEP1 Attach the side fences [A] provided with this option as shown below.

The side fences are held to the vacuum feed banner sheet tray by magnets.

STEP2 Stand the end fence (long) [A] provided with this option as shown below. Put the end

fences (short) [B] (provided with this option) on the side of the tray.

The end fences are held to the vacuum feed banner sheet tray by magnets.

Attaching the Extension Tray to the Finisher

STEP1 Pull out the extender of the finisher's shift tray.



STEP2 Insert the relay tray [A] provided with this option.

STEP3 Fasten the relay tray together from the bottom with the screws provided with this

option, so that it does not come apart. ( ×2: M3×10)

STEP4 Insert the extension tray [A] provided with this option.



STEP5 Use the shift tray emergency stop switch of the finisher to lower the shift tray and then attach the support plate [A] provided with this option.

Raise the shift tray by using the shift tray emergency stop switch after attaching the support plate.

Insert the pins [A] of the support plate into the holes [B] of the shift tray.

SP Setting

After starting up the main machine, it is necessary to make sure the vacuum feed banner sheet tray is recognized by using the following SP. STEP1 Enter the SP mode. STEP2 Change SP5-150-002 from [0] to [1]. STEP3 Exit the SP mode. STEP4 Restart the main machine.


Model: Andromeda-P1 Date:24-Apr-15 No.: RM205015

Subject: Manual Correction: High Capacity Stacker SK5030 installation procedure




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2


2. Installation > High Capacity Stacker SK5030 (D776) > Installation > STEP4 > Note (pg 376)

Note: The areas highlighted in red were revised.

STEP4 Install the joint bracket [A] to the left side of the upstream unit. ( ×4: M4×14)

When installing the high capacity stacker right next to the main machine, use

the screws (M4x8) provided with the main machine.

Example below: When installing the high capacity stacker to the main machine


Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 24-Apr-15 No.:RM205016

Subject: Manual Correction: Installation Requirements Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

Service Manual Correction The following section of the field service manual was corrected: 2. Installation > Installation Requirements > System Dimensions > Main Machine (pg 97) Note: The areas highlighted in red were revised.

System Dimensions

Main Machine

[A]: 1250 mm (49.3") [B]: 1250 mm (49.3") [C]: 1500 mm (59.1") [D]: 1870 mm (73.7")


Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 24-Apr-15 No.:RM205016

[E]: 1250 mm (49.3") [F]: 1250 mm (49.3") [G]: 765 mm (30.2") [H]: 990 mm (39")

The main machine weighs 1013.4 kg.

Left side Right side Total Weight

Imaging Section Front side 216.5 kg 174.9 kg 617.4 kg

Rear side 88.8 kg 137.2 kg

Fusing Section Front side 91.2 kg 104.5 kg 396.0 kg

Rear side 93.4 kg 106.9 kg

Total Weight 1013.4 kg



Subject: Firmware Release Note: DTU Image Processing Parameter Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




This RTB has been issued to announce the firmware release information for the DTU Image Processing Parameter.


1.00 M2056115 1st Mass production Not available






Subject: Manual Correction: Quenching Lamp 2 cleaning procedure




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

Service Manual Correction Please add the Quenching Lamp 2 cleaning procedure in this bulletin to the following section.

3. Preventive Maintenance > Cleaning Points (1) > PCDU (pg 556)

Quenching Lamp 2

Clean the quenching lamp 2 when the afterimage of the previously printed image appeared on the printouts. STEP1 Pull out the PCDU. (PCDU) STEP2 Clean the quenching lamp 2 [A] with a blower brush.


Reissued: 17-Jun-15

Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 30-Apr-15 No.:RM205019a

RTB Reissue The items in bold italics were changed.

Service Manual Correction 1 The following section is to be replaced with the replacement procedure for ITB belt speed sensor described in this bulletin.

4. Replacement and Adjustment > Intermediate Transfer Belt Unit (ITB) > ITB Belt Speed Sensor (pg.781)


ITB Belt Speed Sensor

STEP1 Intermediate Transfer Belt (page 762)

STEP2 ITB belt speed sensor [A] ( ×3, ×1)

Subject: Manual Correction: Replacement and cleaning procedure for ITB belt speed sensor




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2



Adjustment after replacing the ITB belt speed sensor

After replacing the ITB belt speed sensor, adjust the SP settings by referring to the procedures below. Adjusting the light intensity of the ITB Belt Speed Sensor

STEP1 Execute SP2-912-001 (light intensity adjustment: execute). STEP2 Check that the value of SP2-912-002 (result of light intensity adjustment)

is “1” (executed normally). If you see any other numbers, the sensor may be damaged.

ITB Belt Speed Sensor Initialization Be sure to do the ITB Belt Speed Sensor initialization after adjusting the light intensity. STEP3 Set the value of SP2-914-003 (normal phase display/setting) to “0”. STEP4 Execute SP2-914-001 (achieving normal line speed: execute). STEP5 Confirm that the value of SP2-914-003 is updated.

If the value is still “0”, it is not finished correctly. Execute SP2-914-001 again. If the value is not updated, the sensor may be damaged.

Force color adjustment (MUSIC (mode d)) STEP6 Execute SP2-111-004 (MUSIC (mode d)) after executing the sequences

above.



Service Manual Correction 2 The following section is to be replaced with the cleaning procedure for ITB belt speed sensor described in this bulletin.

3. Preventive Maintenance > Cleaning Points (1) > Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB) Unit > ITB Belt Speed Sensor (pg.575)


ITB Belt Speed Sensor

ITB belt speed sensor needs cleaning every 900K prints. It also needs cleaning when you replace the EM/PM parts in the intermediate transfer belt (ITB) unit. STEP1 Withdraw the ITB unit to the service position (page 758). STEP2 Tension spring (front) [A], tension spring (rear) [B]

STEP3 Remove the pressure plate [A] on the belt. ( ×1)



STEP4 Clean the lens [A] on the ITB belt speed sensor with a blower brush or with a vacuum cleaner.

STEP5 Clean the lens with a wetted swab. STEP6 Illuminate the lens with a pen type light, and then make sure that there is no

toner.

Use a swab which is not fluffed. After cleaning the ITB belt speed sensor, adjust the SP settings. (See

“Adjustment after replacing the ITB belt speed sensor”.)



Subject: Manual Correction: Replacement and adjustment for ID/MUSIC Sensors




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2


4. Replacement and Adjustment > Paper Transfer Unit (PTR) > ID/MUSIC Sensors (TM/P Sensors) (pg 839)


ID/MUSIC Sensors (TM/P Sensors)

STEP1 Remove the paper transfer unit (PTR) from the drawer unit. (page 825 "Paper Transfer Belt Unit")

STEP2 ID/MUSIC sensor bracket [A] ( ×2)



After the ID/MUSIC sensor bracket is removed, MUSIC/ID sensors are in a line as shown below.

MUSIC Sensor (Front)

ID Sensor (K)

ID Sensor (C)

ID/MUSIC Sensor (M/Center)

ID Sensor (Y)

MUSIC Sensor (Rear)

Do not touch the detecting surface [A] of the MUSIC/ID sensors by hands. If

you touched the surface of the MUSIC/ID sensors, clean them with damp cloth. Example below: MUSIC sensor (front)



STEP3 MUSIC sensor (front) [A] ( ×1, ×2)

Remove MUSIC/ID sensor (K), (C), (M/center), (Y), (rear) as well. ( ×1,

×2)

Adjustment after replacing the ID/MUSIC Sensors

Because each ID/MUSIC sensor has different characteristics, you need to enter the characteristic values for the new ID/MUSIC sensor in the SP mode. Perform the following procedure to enter the characteristic values, then execute the process control. STEP1 Connect the two power cords into the power plugs. STEP2 Turn on the AC power switch, and then the main power switch. STEP3 Check the six numbers [A] written on the sheet provided with the new

ID/MUSIC sensor.

STEP4 Enter the SP mode, and then enter the characteristic values of new

ID/MUSIC sensor. Enter the six numbers written on the sheet provided with the new ID/MUSIC sensor into the SP (001 to 006) shown below. (Example: When “2=1.02” is written on the sheet provided with the new MUSIC Sensor (Front), enter “1.02” in SP3-333-002.)



TITLE: When replacing the MUSIC Sensor (Front)

SP No. SP Name

SP3-333-001 ID.Sens Coef :Set(Front): K2: Check

SP3-333-002 ID.Sens Coef :Set(Front): Diffuse Corr

SP3-333-003 ID.Sens Coef :Set(Front): Vct_reg_Slope Check

SP3-333-004 ID.Sens Coef :Set(Front): Vct_reg_Xint Check

SP3-333-005 ID.Sens Coef :Set(Front): Vct_dif_Slope Check

SP3-333-006 ID.Sens Coef :Set(Front): Vct_dif_Xint Check

TITLE: When replacing the ID Sensor (K)

SP No. SP Name

SP3-334-001 ID.Sens Coef :Set(K): K2: Check

SP3-334-002 ID.Sens Coef :Set(K): Diffuse Corr

SP3-334-003 ID.Sens Coef :Set(K): Vct_reg_Slope Check

SP3-334-004 ID.Sens Coef :Set(K): Vct_reg_Xint Check

SP3-334-005 ID.Sens Coef :Set(K): Vct_dif_Slope Check

SP3-334-006 ID.Sens Coef :Set(K): Vct_dif_Xint Check

TITLE: When replacing the ID Sensor (C)

SP No. SP Name

SP3-335-001 ID.Sens Coef :Set(C): K2: Check

SP3-335-002 ID.Sens Coef :Set(C): Diffuse Corr

SP3-335-003 ID.Sens Coef :Set(C): Vct_reg_Slope Check

SP3-335-004 ID.Sens Coef :Set(C): Vct_reg_Xint Check

SP3-335-005 ID.Sens Coef :Set(C): Vct_dif_Slope Check

SP3-335-006 ID.Sens Coef :Set(C): Vct_dif_Xint Check

TITLE: When replacing the ID/MUSIC Sensor (M/Center)

SP No. SP Name

SP3-336-001 ID.Sens Coef :Set(M): K2: Check

SP3-336-002 ID.Sens Coef :Set(M): Diffuse Corr

SP3-336-003 ID.Sens Coef :Set(M): Vct_reg_Slope Check

SP3-336-004 ID.Sens Coef :Set(M): Vct_reg_Xint Check

SP3-336-005 ID.Sens Coef :Set(M): Vct_dif_Slope Check

SP3-336-006 ID.Sens Coef :Set(M): Vct_dif_Xint Check

TITLE: When replacing the ID Sensor (Y)

SP No. SP Name

SP3-337-001 ID.Sens Coef :Set(Y): K2: Check

SP3-337-002 ID.Sens Coef :Set(Y): Diffuse Corr

SP3-337-003 ID.Sens Coef :Set(Y): Vct_reg_Slope Check

SP3-337-004 ID.Sens Coef :Set(Y): Vct_reg_Xint Check

SP3-337-005 ID.Sens Coef :Set(Y): Vct_dif_Slope Check

SP3-337-006 ID.Sens Coef :Set(Y): Vct_dif_Xint Check



TITLE: When replacing the MUSIC Sensor (Rear)

SP No. SP Name

SP3-338-001 ID.Sens Coef :Set(Rear): K2: Check

SP3-338-002 ID.Sens Coef :Set(Rear): Diffuse Corr

SP3-338-003 ID.Sens Coef :Set(Rear): Vct_reg_Slope Check

SP3-338-004 ID.Sens Coef :Set(Rear): Vct_reg_Xint Check

SP3-338-005 ID.Sens Coef :Set(Rear): Vct_dif_Slope Check

SP3-338-006 ID.Sens Coef :Set(Rear): Vct_dif_Xint Check

STEP5 Execute the process control manually with SP3-011-002 (Manual

ProCon :Exe: Density Adjustment).



Subject: Manual Correction: Image Adjustment procedure Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

Service Manual Correction Please add the Image Adjustment procedure described in this bulletin to the “4. Replacement and Adjustment” section.

Image Adjustment

Adjusting the Image Position on Side 1

<If custom paper is used>

Perform the solution described in "(a) Adjust the image skew", "(b) Adjust the image position (If custom paper is used)", "(c) Adjust the magnification (Across feed direction)" and then "(d) Adjust the magnification (With feed direction)".

<If custom paper is not used>

Perform the solution described in "(a) Adjust the image skew", "(e) Adjust the image position (If custom paper is not used)".

You cannot adjust the vertical magnification and horizontal magnification of all

types of paper other than custom paper. Therefore, it is recommended to pre-register the type of paper in use as a custom paper.

If it is difficult to check and adjust the image position on the printed sheet, print one side of the format used in "Aligning the Image Position on Side 2 to That on Side 1 (Using a Template to Align the Image Position on Side 1 and 2)".

(a) Adjust the image skew

Adjust the vertical position of the print image.



STEP1 Print the image in black and white. STEP2 Check the direction of the skew. STEP3 In the 01: [Machine: Image Position] group on the [Adjustment Settings for Skilled

Operators] menu, select 0107: [Perpendicularity Adjustment] and adjust the value.

Move the cursor to [+] to skew the image counterclockwise or to [-] to skew it clockwise.

STEP4 Print the image in black and white. Check the image skew. If the problem persists, increase the value slightly.

STEP5 Execute color registration.

Press [User Tools] key, and then press [Maintenance] > [Color Registration]. Press [OK] to execute color registration. In executing color registration, the black adjustment will also be applied to cyan, magenta, and yellow.

In 0107: [Perpendicularity Adjustment], you cannot individually adjust the

image position on sides 1 and 2.

(b) Adjust the image position (If custom paper is used)

Adjust the vertical and horizontal image position so that the center (A) of the leading edge of the image is aligned to the registration mark.

In [Advanced Settings] for the custom paper, adjust the image position. 001: [Adj Image Position of Side1 Across Feed] 003: [Adj Image Position of Side1 With Feed]

(c) Adjust the magnification (Across feed direction)

Adjust the horizontal magnification to adjust the width between the front (B) and back corners (B) on the leading edge of the image.



In [Advanced Settings] for the custom paper, adjust the value in 005: [Adj Magnification of Side1 Across Feed]. Press [+] to increase the scaling and [-] to reduce it.

(d) Adjust the magnification (With feed direction)

Adjust the vertical magnification to adjust the length (position of (C)) of the image.

In [Advanced Settings] for the custom paper, adjust the value in 007: [Adj Magnification of Side1 With Feed]. Press [+] to increase the scaling and [-] to reduce it.

(e) Adjust the image position (If custom paper is not used)


In the 01: [Machine: Image Position] group on the [Adjustment Settings for Skilled Operators] menu, adjust the image position. 0101: [Adjust Image Position Across Feed Direction] 0102: [Adjust Image Position With Feed Direction]



Adjusting the Image Position on Side 2

If you want to align an image position on Side 2 to an image position on Side 1 that has been adjusted, see "Aligning the Image Position on Side 2 to That on Side 1 (Using a Template to Align the Image Position on Side 1 and 2)". <If custom paper is used>

Perform the solution described in "(a) Adjust the image skew", "(b) Adjust the image position (If custom paper is used)", "(c) Adjust the magnification (Across feed direction)" and then "(d) Adjust the magnification (With feed direction)".

<If custom paper is not used>

Perform the solution described in "(a) Adjust the image skew", "(e) Adjust the image position (If custom paper is not used)"

You cannot adjust the vertical magnification and horizontal magnification of all

types of paper other than custom paper. Therefore, it is recommended to pre-register the type of paper in use as a custom paper.

If it is difficult to check and adjust the image position on the printed sheet, print one side of the format used in "Aligning the Image Position on Side 2 to That on Side 1 (Using a Template to Align the Image Position on Side 1 and 2)".

(a) Adjust the image skew

Adjust the vertical position of the print image.

STEP1 Print the image in black and white. STEP2 Check the direction of the skew. STEP3 In the 01: [Machine: Image Position] group on the [Adjustment Settings for Skilled

Operators] menu, select 0107: [Perpendicularity Adjustment] and adjust the value.

Move the cursor to [+] to skew the image counterclockwise or to [-] to skew it clockwise.

STEP4 Print the image in black and white. Check the image skew. If the problem persists, increase the value slightly.

STEP5 Execute color registration.

Press [User Tools] key, and then press [Maintenance] > [Color Registration]. Press [OK] to execute color registration. In executing color registration, the black adjustment will also be applied to cyan, magenta, and yellow.

In 0107: [Perpendicularity Adjustment], you cannot individually adjust the

image position on sides 1 and 2.

(b) Adjust the image position (If custom paper is used)




In [Advanced Settings] for the custom paper, adjust the image position. 002: [Adj Image Position of Side2 Across Feed] 004: [Adj Image Position of Side2 With Feed]

(c) Adjust the magnification (Across feed direction)

Adjust the horizontal magnification to adjust the width between the front (B) and back corners (B) on the leading edge of the image.

In [Advanced Settings] for the custom paper, select 006: [Adj Magnification of Side2 Across Feed]. Press [+] to increase the scaling and [-] to reduce it.

(d) Adjust the magnification (With feed direction)

Adjust the vertical magnification to adjust the length (position of (C)) of the image.

In [Advanced Settings] for the custom paper, select 008: [Adj Magnification of Side2 With Feed]. Press [+] to increase the scaling and [-] to reduce it.



(e) Adjust the image position (If custom paper is not used)


In the 01: [Machine: Image Position] group on the [Adjustment Settings for Skilled Operators] menu, adjust the image position. 0101: [Adjust Image Position Across Feed Direction] 0102: [Adjust Image Position With Feed Direction]

Aligning the Image Position on Side 2 to That on Side 1 (Using a Template to Align the Image Position on Side 1 and 2)

This section explains how to adjust settings so that images on both sides are aligned using duplex printing. First, print the format and measure the length of specified parts. By specifying the measured length on the machine, you can adjust the image position automatically. It is necessary to specify the settings for each paper size being used. The adjusted settings are stored as custom paper presets and can be applied again in the future. To adjust the image position, the machine administrator privilege is required.

Preparation

Before adjusting image positions, perform the following: 1. Prepare the template file.

The templates for each paper size are included as PDF file on the CD-ROM provided with this machine. Paper size of PDF file templates

A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B4 SEF, B5 SEF/LEF, DLT SEF, Legal SEF, Letter SEF/LEF, Government LG SEF, 8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF, 12×18 SEF, 13×19.2 SEF, 13×19 SEF, 13×18 SEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4 SEF/LEF

Unsupported paper types Index paper, tracing paper, label paper, envelope, magnet paper, clear file No restrictions for paper thickness

2. Prepare a 500 mm or longer stainless steel ruler (with the scale in 0.5 mm) and magnifier (for measuring the format)

3. Adjust the image position on Side 1. For details about adjusting the position, see "Adjusting the Image Position on Side 1".



4. To adjust the following settings, pre-register the type of paper in use as a custom paper.

In [Advanced Settings] for the custom paper, set the value in the following settings to "0.000". 002: [Adj Image Position of Side2 Across Feed] 004: [Adj Image Position of Side2 With Feed] 006: [Adj Magnification of Side2 Across Feed] 008: [Adj Magnification of Side2 With Feed]

Printing and Measuring the Format

STEP1 Using the computer and the machine, print the format matching the size of the paper requiring image position adjustment.

Continuously print the format on both sides of 10 sheets.

STEP2 Measure the length of specified parts on the 6th sheet among the printed copies of the format.

The format has arrows on 4 corners. Using the ruler and magnifier, measure the length between each corner of the paper and the top of its adjoining arrow, and the length between the top of arrows with the scale in 0.1 mm.

1. Length between the top of each arrow 2. Length between each corner and the top of its adjoining arrow 3. Length between the top of each arrow 4. Length between each corner and the top of its adjoining arrow 5. Length between each corner and the top of its adjoining arrow 6. Length between the top of each arrow 7. Length between each corner and the top of its adjoining arrow 8. Length between the top of each arrow

STEP3 Write the measured value within the framework of the format.

In total (including both sides of the sheet), measure the position of 16 parts.

Depending on the paper size, the paper transport interval for the first 3-4

sheets and the last 3-4 sheets may differ from the middle sheets when performing continuous duplex printing. This causes discrepancy in the extent of thermal contraction for paper. Therefore, we recommend measuring the middle sheets when adjusting front/back register for which continuous printing may be performed. (When printing 10 sheets, the 6th sheet is considered as the final middle sheet.)



Entering the Value

When you specify the lengths of the template after measuring them, the values to adjust the image position are automatically calculated and applied. STEP1 In [Advanced Settings] for the custom paper, select [Registration to Align Front and

Back Images Using Template]. STEP2 Enter the value you wrote on the printed template.

Select the item, enter the value using the number keys, and then press [#]. You can enter values from 0.1 to 999.9 mm in 0.1-mm increments.

STEP3 Press [OK]. STEP4 Press [Exit]. STEP5 Press [OK]. STEP6 Press [Overwrite]. STEP7 Press [Yes]. STEP8 Press [Exit].

Checking Adjusted Results

STEP1 Print the file of the format matching the size of the paper requiring image position adjustment. Continuously print the format on both sides of 10 sheets.

STEP2 Using the 6th sheet among the printed copies, check whether any misregistration occurs on the front and back of the paper. When using thin paper, check for misregistration by seeing through the paper. When using thick paper or paper that cannot be seen through, pierce the paper with a tool

such as an eyeleteer and check for misregistration.

Eliminating misregistrations on the front and back of the paper

Adjust the image position and magnification on Side 2 to match those on Side 1.



Adjustment Method STEP1 Print the file of the format matching the size of the paper requiring image position

adjustment. Continuously print the format on both sides of 10 sheets.

Use the 6th sheet among the printed copies for adjustment. STEP2 Through visual inspection of the 4th, 5th, and 6th sheets, check that

misregistrations on Side 1 and 2 are almost the same.

If not, adjust the misregistrations according to the usual method. STEP3 In [Advanced Settings] for the registered custom paper preset, adjust the following

settings to match the image position on Side 1.

002: [Adj Image Position of Side2 Across Feed] 004: [Adj Image Position of Side2 With Feed] 006: [Adj Magnification of Side2 Across Feed] 008: [Adj Magnification of Side2 With Feed]

Adjusting the image position in the vertical and paper feed directions

<Across feed direction> Adjusting the center line [A] on Side 2 to match the center line [B] on Side 1

In [Advanced Settings] for the custom paper, select 002: [Adj Image Position of Side2 Across Feed]. Press [+] to shift the image to the top. Press [-] to shift the image to the bottom.

<With feed direction> Adjusting the image [A] on the leading edge of the paper on Side 2 to match the corresponding image [B] on Side 1



In [Advanced Settings] for the custom paper, select 004: [Adj Image Position of Side2 With Feed]. Press [+] to shift the image to the left (trailing edge). Press [-] to shift the image to the right (leading edge).

Adjusting magnification in the vertical and paper feed directions

<Across feed direction> Adjusting magnification to match the length between the arrows [A] on the leading edge of the paper on Side 2 to the length between the arrows [B] on Side 1

In [Advanced Settings] for the custom paper, select 006: [Adj Magnification of Side2 Across Feed].



Press [+] to increase the scaling. Press [-] to reduce the scaling. The adjustment value is applied evenly both upward and downward. To feed A3 paper with its short side parallel to the paper feed direction, increase the value by 0.025 percentage point to move the image by approximately 0.1 mm (0.004 inches).

<With feed direction> Adjusting magnification to match the position of the arrow [A] on the trailing edge of the paper on Side 2 to the position of the arrow [B] on Side 1

In [Advanced Settings] for the custom paper, select 008: [Adj Magnification of Side2 With Feed]. Press [+] to increase the scaling. Press [-] to reduce the scaling. To feed A3 paper with its long side parallel to the paper feed direction, increase the value by 0.025 percentage point to move the image by approximately 0.07 mm (0.0028 inches).



When to check for misregistrations on the front and back of the paper

Check for misregistrations on the front and back of the paper when: Using paper of a different lot, means of acquisition, or storage condition Changing an advanced fusing settings The machine's ambient temperature has changed drastically. For instance, the machine's

adjustment values and settings are checked in summer while the machine is used in winter) Changing the paper size in a custom paper preset Registering a custom paper preset based on an already registered custom paper preset


RTB Reissued: 22-Jun-15




2. Appendices: Preventive Maintenance Tables > Maintenance Tables > Preventive Maintenance Items > Mainframe (Replacement) (pg 57)


Mainframe (Replacement)

PCDU

Items 450K 600K 900K 1800

K EM Remarks

PCU (OPC DRUM) R

Charge Unit

Items 450K 600K 900K 1800

K EM Remarks

Grid R

Corona Wire R

Grid Cleaner R

Wire Cleaner R

Wire Tension Spring R

Corona Wire Cushion R

Subject: Manual Correction: Maintenance tables for main machine




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2




PCU Cleaning Unit

Items 450K 600K 900K 1800

K EM Remarks

PCU Cleaning Roller R

PCU Cleaning Blade R

PCU Cleaning Lubrication Roller

R

PCU Cleaning Lubrication Blade

R

Lubricant Bar R

PCU Cleaning Collection Blade

R

Intermediate Transfer Belt Unit (ITB)

Items 450K 900K 1800K

2800K

EM Remarks

Intermediate Transfer Belt R

Image Transfer Roller (KCMY)

R

Paper Transfer Bias Roller

R

ITB Belt Speed Sensor Cover (Upper)

R Description in parts catalog: PLATE:UPPER:POSITIONING SENSOR

ITB Belt Speed Sensor Cover (Lower)

R Description in parts catalog: PLATE:LOWER:POSITIONING SENSOR




ITB Cleaning Unit (Consists of three different sub units , and .)

Items 450K 900K 1800

K 2400

K EM Remarks

ITB Cleaning Roller R

Each sub unit has a different P/No.

ITB Cleaning Blade R Used in each sub unit.

ITB Cleaning Collection Roller

R Each sub unit has a different P/No.

ITB Cleaning Vibrating Plate

R Used in each sub unit.

See related RTB#RM205030a and #RM205031a. ITB Lubrication Unit

Items 450K 900K 1800K

2400K

EM Remarks

ITB Lubrication Roller R

ITB Lubricant Bar R

Paper Transfer Unit (PTR)

Items 450K 900K 1800K

2400K

EM Remarks

Paper Transfer Belt R

Paper Transfer Cleaning Blade

R

Paper Transfer Lubrication Roller

R

Paper Transfer Lubricant Bar

R




Fuser Unit

Items 450K 900K 1200K

1800K

EM Remarks

Fuser Belt R

Fusing Roller R

Pressure Roller R

Cleaning Web R

Thermistor R*1

Fusing Separation Subunit

R

Smoothing Roller R

*1: The following thermistors need replacement. Hot Roller Core Thermistor Heating Roller Thermistor (Edge) Fusing Belt Thermistor (Edge)

Filters

Items 220K 900K 1200K

1800K

EM Remarks

Dust Filter R

Ozone Filter R

Paper Tray

Items 450K 900K 1200K

7000K

EM Remarks

Paper Feed Belt (Tray 1/2)

R

Waste Toner Bottle

Items 220K 900K 1200K

1800K

EM Remarks

Waste Toner Bottle R


Reissued: 12-Sep-18


RTB Reissue The item in bold italics were corrected or added.

Subject: Manual Correction: Retrieving the Debug Logs Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2


5. System Maintenance Reference > Capturing the Debug Logs > Retrieving the Debug Logs (pg 1437)

Note: The descriptions highlighted in red were revised.

Retrieving the Debug Logs

Retrieve debug logs to identify the date of occurrence of the problems and to find

details of the problems e.g.: At around 8:00 am on March 10, an engine stall occurred. The operation panel does not respond. Turn the main power supply off / on.

You need to retrieve the debug logs dating back three days from the date of the problem.

Analysis of the debug log is effective for problems caused by the software. Analysis of the debug log is not valid for the selection of defective parts or problems caused by hardware.

‘0’ is the recommended value for SP 5-857-001 [Save Debug Log]. If an SD card (8GB) is inserted to the Service Slot Board on the controller

box, capture the logs by referring to the procedure announced in bulletin #RM205150.

[A]: Master, [B]: Slave


Reissued: 12-Sep-18


Procedure for Retrieving the Debug Log

STEP1 Open/close the front doors as necessary. NOTE: Logs of SCs and jams are stored automatically onto the HDD, so you can download the logs from the HDD to the SD card using SP5857 without opening/closing the door. However, if the logs you are trying to capture are not of SCs or jams; not stored onto the HDD yet, you need to open/close the door. The door open/close action is a trigger to store the logs onto the HDD.

STEP2 Insert the SD card into the SD card slot [A] on the operation panel.

It is recommended to use the SD card supplied as a service part,

because the logs can be downloaded faster than SD cards purchased from the market.

STEP3 Enter the SP mode.

STEP4 Specify the date to start the logging in SP5-857-101 (Start date of debug log

output). For example, to start logging from March 28, 2013, enter ‘20130328’ (yyyymmdd).

Set the date three days earlier than the occurrence of the problems.

STEP5 Specify the date to finish the logging in SP5-857-102 (End date of debug log

output). For example, to finish logging on March 31, 2013, enter ‘20130331’ (yyyymmdd).

STEP6 Execute SP5-857-103 (Get a debug log of all) to download the debug logs to the SD card. SP5-857-104 gets controller debug log (GW debug log) SP5-857-105 gets engine debug log SP5-857-107 gets operation panel debug log The operation panel displays ‘Completed’ to indicate a successful download.

STEP7 Wait for the SD card access LED to turn Off, and then remove the SD card.


Reissued: 12-Sep-18


If the operation panel displays ‘Failed’, turn Off the main power switch

and redo the procedure Step 1.

Debug logs are saved with the following filenames.

Controller debug log (GW debug log) /LogTrace/machine number/watching/yyyymmdd_hhmmss_unique identification number.gz

Engine debug log /LogTrace/machine number/engine/yyyymmdd_hhmmss.gz

Operation panel debug log /LogTrace/machine number/opepanel/yyyymmdd_hhmmss.tar.gz

Approximate Time Required to Transfer Debug Logs to the SD Card

GW controller debug logs : 2 - 20 min Engine debug logs : 2 min Operation panel debug logs : 2 - 20 min

Note that the transfer speed depends on the type of SD card and how it is formatted. For fast transfer, it is recommended to use the Panasonic SD Formatter (freeware).

Approximate time display The approximate time required to transfer the debug logs to the SD card can be viewed in the following SP.

SP Description

Get All Debug Logs Time Disp SP5-857-151

For all of the following: Controller debug log Engine debug log Operation panel debug log SMC

SP5-857-152 Get Controller Debug Logs Time Disp

For the controller debug log

SP5-857-153 Get Engine Debug Logs Time Disp

For the engine debug log

SP5-857-154 Get Opepanel Debug Logs Time Disp

For the operation panel debug log

SP5-857-155 Get SMC Time Disp

For the SMC

Error Code

If an error occurs, a negative value is displayed instead of the approximate log transfer time.

Error Code Meaning

-1 min Error other than below.

-2 min SD card slot is not inserted to the card slot or service slot.

-3 min The SC card is write-protected.

-4 min Logging start date (SP5-857-101) is set to a date later than the logging finish date (SP5-857-102).



Subject: Manual Correction: Correspondence Table for IMSS Settings and SP Mode




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

Service Manual Correction This bulletin has been issued to announce a correction in the following section.

6. Troubleshooting > Correspondence Table for Adjustment Settings > Correspondence Table for IMSS Settings and SP Mode (pg 2123)

The Adjustment Settings for Skilled Operators and SP settings shown in the table do not correspond. When the paper being used is registered as Custom Paper by selecting the paper name from the paper library, settings configured in IMSS Settings apply to the paper being used. When the paper being used is registered as Custom Paper by selecting the paper's type (paper type and paper weight) from the paper library, settings configured in IMSS Settings do not apply to the paper being used. The settings configured in SP mode apply to the paper being used.


Reissued: 17-Jun-15



Service Manual Correction Please add the Horizontal white streaks in the area 21mm from trailing edge troubleshooting described in this bulletin to the following section.

6. Troubleshooting > Image Quality > Image Quality 002: Streaks (pg 2158)

Horizontal white streaks in the area 21 mm from the trailing edge

Symptom Horizontal white streaks [A] appear in the area 21 mm (20 to 22 mm) from the trailing edge.

The arrow indicates the paper feed direction.

Occurrence Conditions

The above problems are likely to occur under the following conditions: Printing on thick paper or coated paper Creating a poster-size output in 1200 dpi by enlarging a single-page document to cover four

sheets of paper using the poster function Creating a poster-size output in 1200 dpi by enlarging a single-page document to cover sixteen

sheets of paper using the poster function Cause

The machine transfers toner from the intermediate transfer belt to the paper by providing an electrical transfer field between the paper transfer bias roller and the paper transfer roller. There is a paper transfer entrance plate just before the transfer bias roller for adhering the intermediate transfer belt to the paper.

Subject: Manual Correction: Troubleshooting for Horizontal white streaks in the area 21mm from trailing edge




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2


Reissued: 17-Jun-15


When the trailing edge reaches the paper transfer entrance plate, toner on the intermediate transfer belt scatters. Then the horizontal white streaks occur.

Action

*1: See page 2168 "Horizontal streaks on thick paper".



Subject: Manual Correction: Optional equipment specifications




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

Service Manual Correction The following section is to be replaced with the Optional Equipment specifications described in this bulletin.

1. Appendices: Specifications > Optional Equipment (pg 29) Note: The areas highlighted in red were revised.

Optional Equipment

Vacuum Feed LCIT RT5100

Item Specifications

Configuration Console, attached to right side of main machine

Paper Weight Tray1: 52.3 to 400.0g/m2

Tray2: 52.3 to 400.0g/m2

Paper Size

13" x 19.2" SEF, 13" x 19"SEF, 12.6" x 19.2"SEF, 12.6" x 18.5" ,13" x 18" SEF, SRA3 SEF, 12" x 18" SEF,SRA4 SEF/LEF,A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, A6 SEF, B4 SEF, B5 SEF/LEF, B6 SEF,DLT SEF, LG SEF, 8.5" x 13" SEF, LT SEF/LEF, 8.25" x 14" SEF, 8.25" x 13" SEF, 8" x 13" SEF, 8" x 10.5" LT SEF/LEF, 8" x 10" SEF/LEF, Executive SEF/LEF, HLT SEF/LEF, Line slider1 SEF/LEF, Line slider2 SEF, 8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF,11" x 15" SEF, 11" x 14" SEF, 10" x 15" SEF, 10" x 14" SEF, Postcard SEF Custom size:

Width: 100mm to 330.2mm Length: 139.7mm to 487.7mm

Paper Tray Capacity (In 0.11mm paper)

Tray1: 2200 sheets

Tray2: 2200 sheets

Power Source NA: AC100-127V, 8.6A, 50/60Hz EU/AP: AC220-240V, 4.4A, 50/60Hz

Power Consumption Less than 860W

Dimensions (W x D x H) 1,054mm x 730mm x1,000mm



Item Specifications

(Excluding protrude)

Weight Less than 220kg (Excluding accessories)

Bridge Unit BU5010

Item Specifications

Configuration Horizontal transport unit, Bridge unit

Paper Thickness 40.0 to 400.0g/m2

Paper Size

Postcard (Width: 100mm): up to 13×19.2 Length: 139.7mm to 487.7mm Width: 100.0mm to 330.2mm

Power Source DC: 24V±10%, DC: 5V±5% (Draw from vacuum feed LCIT RT5100)

Dimensions (W x D x H) 330×730×1,000mm (Bridge unit excluding protrude)

Weight 60kg or less (Excluding accessories)

Vacuum Feed Banner Sheet Tray Type S3

Item Specifications Notes

Paper Capacity 800 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)

Paper Thickness 52.3 to 400.0 g /m2

Paper Size Length: 420mm to 700mm Width: 210mm to 330.2mm

Require the installation of vacuum feed banner sheet tray type S3 to the exit tray side.

Tray

1 * Connects to the paper feed unit (Tray1) of the vacuum feed LCIT RT5100.

When linked, it connects to the most upstream of the vacuum feed LCIT RT5100.

Output Paper Capacity (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)

200 sheets Install the sheet tray to the shift tray of the finisher.

Dimensions (W×D×H)

1,310mm x 730mm x 1,000mm This option only: 286mm x 540mm x 294mm

Weight Less than 7kg



Cover Interposer Tray CI5030

Item Specification Notes

Dimension (W x D x H) 540 x 730 x 1290mm


Power Source From mainframe

Paper Size A5/HLT – 13” x 19.2” <Custom Size Paper> Width: 139.7 to 330.2mm (5.50 to 13.00 inch) Length: 139.7 to 487.7mm (5.50 to 19.20 inch)

Paper weight 64.0 – 216.0g/m2

17 –58lb Bond /110 lb index

Paper capacity (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)

200 sheets x 2 trays

Original set position Center position

Original Set Face Up, First sheet on top

Size change Touch screen User changeable

Multi Bypass Tray BY5010

Item Specification

Paper Capacity 550 sheets (80g/m2, 20lb Bond)

Paper Size A5 (LEF)/5.5”x8.5” (LEF) – 13” x 19.2” <Custom Size Paper> Width: 100.0 to 330.2mm (3.94 to 13.00 inch) Length: 139.7 to 487.7mm (5.50 to 19.20 inch)

Paper Weight 52.3 to 216.0 g/m2, 14lb Bond to 80lb Cover

Power Source From LCT

(From Mainframe -->LCT)

Paper Volume Sensors In 4 steps: Near end, 0%, 50%, 100%

Dimension (W x D x H) 690 mm x 561 mm x 210mm


Multi Bypass Banner Sheet Tray Type S3


Paper Capacity (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)

500 sheets

Paper Weight 52.3 to 216 gsm

Paper Size Length: 139.7mm to 700mm

Width: 210mm to 330.2mm

Require the installation of multi bypass banner sheet tray type S3 to the exit tray side.

Tray 1




* Connects to Multi Bypass Tray BY5010

Output Paper Capacity (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)

200 sheets Install the sheet tray to the shift tray of the finisher.

Dimension (W x D x H) 553 x 364 x 142mm

Weight Less than 3.5kg

Booklet Finisher SR5060

Basic Specifications

Item Specification

Dimensions (W x D x H) 996 x 730 x 1126mm

*Not includes projections. When all extendable trays are closed.


Configuration Console type

Power Source NA: 120V, 2.0A, 60Hz EU/AP: 220-240V, 1.2A, 50/60Hz

Power Consumption Less than 150W (Excluding peak consumption)

Output Jogger Standard

Staple Position Adjustment

Yes (Two position staple only)

Proof Tray Stack capacity

250 sheets: Without folding (A4, 8.5” x 11” or smaller) 50 sheets: Without folding (B4, 8.5” x 14” or larger) 30 sheets Z folding (B4 or larger) 20 sheets: Z folding (A4 SEF, LT SEF)

Paper size A5-13” x 19.2”

Paper weight

<Without Z-folding>

52 g/m2-216g/m2 16-40 lb. Bond, 50-80 lb. Cover, 90-110 lb. Index <Z-folding> 64-105 g/m2, 20lb Bond

Shift Tray Stack capacity

2,500 sheets: A4 LEF, B5 LEF, 8.5” x 11” LEF 1,500 sheets: A3, A4 SEF, B4, B5 SEF, 11” x 17” SEF, 8.5

“ x 11” SEF, SRA4, 226 x 310mm 1,000 sheets: 12” x 18”, SRA3, 13”x18”, 12.6”x18.5”,

12.6”x19.2”, 13”x19”, 13” x 19.2”, 310 x 432mm 500 sheets: A5 LEF, 5.5” x 8.5” LEF 100 sheet: A5 SEF, 5.5” x 8.5” SEF 30 sheets: Z-folding paper

Paper size <Without Z-folding>

Max Up to 330.2 x 487.7 mm (13” x 19.2”) <Z-folding> Up to 12”x18”

Paper <Without Z-folding>



Item Specification

weight 52-400g/m2, 14.0 lb. Bond–221.0 lb. Index (350 to 400g/m2: paper type is limited.) <Z-folding> 64-105 g/m2, 18-28lb Bond

The capacity to be calculated with 80g/m2, 20lb Bond paper.

Staple specifications

Item Specification

Paper Size B5-A3

8.5” x 11” – 11” x 17”

Paper Weight <Without Z-folding>

63.1–200.0 g/m2 (17.0 lb. Bond–110.7 lb. Cover) <Z-folding> 64.0–105.0 g/m2 (17.1–28.0 lb. Bond)

Staple Position 8 positions (Top, Top Slant, Bottom, Top 2, Left 2, Right 1, Right 2, Center)

Staples Capacity*

A4, B5, 8.5” x 11”

2-100 sheets

A3, B4

11”x17”, 8.5”x14”

2-50 sheets

Z-folding 10 sheets

Staple Replenishment Cartridge exchange / 5,000 pins per cartridge

The capacity to be calculated with 80g/m2, 20 lb Bond paper.

Saddle stitch specifications

Item Specification

Paper Size B5-SRA3

8.5”x11”-13”x19.2” <Custom Size> Length: 257 to 487.7mm Width: 182 to 330.2mm

Paper Weight 64.0-163g/m2 (17.1 lb. Bond–60.0 lb. Cover)

Staple Position Center 2 position

Staples Capacity*

64-80g/m2

(18-20lb Bond)

20 sheets

80-90g/m2

(20-24lb Bond)

15 sheets

Cover Sheet

One cover sheet (up to 163g/m2) can be included in the above stapling capacity.




Punch specifications (Option)

Item Specification Remarks

Number of Punch NA: 2 or 3 holes

EU: 2 or 4 holes Scandinavian: 4 holes

Punch option is required.

Punch Registration Yes (Resist Roller and Side Registration Sensor)

Max. Thickness 2 or 3 holes: 52 -209g/m2

4 holes: 52 - 163g/m2

Supported model M205 (110ppm) M238 (130ppm)

Performance Same as engine speed (110/130ppm)

Stack Capacity after Finishing

Item Paper size

Number of Pages per set

Number of Sets

Without Z-folding A4 LEF, B5 LEF

8.5” x 11” LEF

20-100 125-25

10-19 200-105

2-9 150

A4 SEF, B5 SEF

8.5” x 11” SEF

10-100 150-15

2-9 150

A3, B4

11” x 17”, 8.5” x 14” 10-50 150-30

2-9 150

When mix-sized A3 & A4, B4 & B5

11” x 17 & 11” x 8.5” 2-50 30

With Z-folding (One size or mix-sized)

One size

A3 Z-folding & A4 B4 Z-folding & B5 11” x 17” Z-folding + 11” x 8.5”

1-10 30-3

When Saddle Stitch

All size 2-5 45

6-10 23

11-15 15

16-20 10

Limitless stack mode Supported

Finisher SR5050

Basic Specifications

Item Specification

Dimensions (W x D x H) 996 x 730 x 1126mm



Item Specification

*Not includes projections. When all extendable trays are closed.



Power Source NA: 120V, 2.0A, 60Hz EU/AP: 220-240 V, 1.2 A, 50/60Hz

Power Consumption Less than 150W (Excluding peak consumption)

Output Jogger Standard

Staple Position Adjustment

Yes (Two position staple only)

Proof Tray Stack Capacity

250 sheets: Without folding (A4, 8.5” x 11 or smaller) 50 sheets: Without folding (B4, 8.5” x 14” or larger) 30 sheets: Z folding (B4 or larger) 20 sheets: Z folding (A4 SEF, LT SEF)

Paper Size A5 - 13” x 19.2”

Paper Weight

<Without Z-folding>

52.3–216.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Bond–79.9 lb. Cover) <Z-folding> 64.0–105.0 g/m2 (17.1–28.0 lb. Bond)

Shift Tray Stack Capacity

3,000 sheets: A4 LEF, B5 LEF, 8.5” x 11 LEF 1,500 sheets: A3, A4 SEF, B4, B5 SEF, 11” x 17” SEF, 8.5“ x

11” SEF, SRA4, 226 x 310mm 1,000 sheets: 12” x 18”, SRA3, 13”x18”, 12.6”x18.5”,

12.6”x19.2”, 13”x19”, 13” x 19.2”, 310 x 432mm 500 sheets: A5 LEF, 5.5” x 8.5” LEF 100 sheet: A5 SEF, 5.5” x 8.5” SEF 30 sheets: Z-folding paper

Paper Size <Without Z-folding>

Max Up to 330.2 x 487.7 mm (13” x 19.2”) <Z-folding> Up to 12”x18”

Paper Weight

<Without Z-folding> 52.3–400.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Bond–221.0 lb. Index) (350 to 400g/m2: paper type is limited.) <Z-folding> 64.0–105.0 g/m2 (17.1–28.0 lb. Bond)


Staple specifications

Item Specification

Paper size B5-A3

8.5” x 11” – 11” x 17”

Paper weight <Without Z-folding>

63.1 - 200.0 g/m2 (17.0 lb. Bond–110.7 lb. Cover) <Z-folding>



Item Specification

64.0 - 105.0 g/m2 (17.1–28.0 lb. Bond)

Staple position 7 positions (Top, Top Slant, Bottom, Top 2, Left 2, Right 1, Right 2)

Staples Capacity*

A4, B5, 8.5” x 11”

2-100 sheets

A3, B4

11”x17”, 8.5”x14”

2-50 sheets

Z-folding 10 sheets



Punch Specifications (Option)

Item Specification

Number of Punch NA: 2 or 3 holes

EU: 2 or 4 holes Scandinavian: 4 holes

Punch Registration Yes (Resist Roller and Side Registration Sensor)

Max. Thickness 2 or 3 holes: 52 -209g/m2

4 holes: 52 - 163g/m2

Supported model M205 (110ppm) M238 (130ppm)

Performance Same as engine speed (110/130ppm)

Stack Capacity after Finishing

Item Paper size

Number of Pages per set

Number of Sets

Without Z-folding A4 LEF, B5 LEF

8.5” x 11” LEF

20-100 150-30

10-19 200-105

2-9 150

A4 SEF, B5 SEF

8.5” x 11” SEF

10-100 150-15

2-9 150

A3, B4

11” x 17”, 8.5” x 14” 10-50 150-30

2-9 150

When mix-sized A3 & A4, B4 & B5

11” x 17 & 11” x 8.5” 2-50 30

With Z-folding (One size or mix-sized)

One size

A3 Z-folding & A4 B4 Z-folding & B5 11” x 17” Z-folding + 11” x 8.5”

1-10 30-3



Trimmer Unit TR5040


Dimension (W x D x H) 1,115 x 591 x 555mm

Weight 75kg

Configuration Console type / Optional unit for Finisher

Finisher SR5060 is necessary

Power Consumption Universal Power Supply 100V - 240V NA: 60Hz EU: 50Hz Ave. 75W, Max. 250W

Plug

Trimming Type One side edge

Trimming Capacity 1-20 sheets (2-40 pages after folding)

20lb, 80g/m2

Paper Size 13” x 19.2”, 13” x 19”, 12.6” x 19.2”, 12.6” x 18.5” 13” x 18”, SRA3 (320 x 450mm), 12” x 18”, A3, B4 SRA4 (320 x 225mm), 226 x 310mm, 310 x 432mm, A4, B5, DLT, LG, LT <Custom Size> Width: 182 to 330mm Length: 257 to 488mm

*sizes before folding

Stack Capacity 1 sheet: 60 sets*1

2 - 5 sheets: 60 sets 6 - 10 sheets: 35 - 40 sets*1 11 - 20 sheets: 20 - 25 sets*1

Stacker Full Detection Yes

Limitless Stack Yes*2

*1: The stack capacity varies according to the size of the sheets. *2: The limitless stack is enabled by removing the end stopper.

High Capacity Stacker SK5030



Speed 169 to 758mm/s

Dimension (W x D x H)

900×730×1,000mm

Weight Stacker: Less than 120kg Cart: Less than 15kg

Power Supply NA: 100-127V, 50/60Hz, 2.0A EU: 220-240V, 50/60Hz, 0.8A

DC power supply from the main machine: 5V AC power supply: no supply from the main machine

Power Consumption NA: 91.6 W




EU: 105 W

Shift Tray

Stack Capacity

5,000 sheets

A3 (max.13"×19.2"), A3 SEF,B4 SEF, A4 SEF, A4 LEF, DLT SEF, LG SEF, T

SEF, LT LEF

In 0.1mm paper

More than 80 g/m2 :

provisions in weight 2,500 sheets

B5 SEF, B5 LEF, A5 SEF, A5 LEF, HLT

SEF, HLT LEF

Paper Size 331×488mm (13"×19.2") to A5

Paper Weight 40 to 400g/m2

350 to 400g/m2: paper type is limited.

Proof Tray

Stack Capacity 250 sheets (more than A4,LT) In 0.1mm paper

More than 80 g/m2 :

provisions in weight

Paper Size 331×488mm (13”×19.2”) to A6 SEF / postcard

Paper Weight 40 to 400g/m2 350 to 400g/m2: paper type is limited.

Relay path

Paper Size 331×488mm (13"×19.2") to A6SEF/ postcard

Stack Capacity 40 to 400g/m2 350 to 400g/m2: paper type is limited.

Ring Binder RB5020

Item Specification

Configuration Console

Paper Transport Centered in paper path

Operation Modes Punching + ring binding Punching only Straight-through (downstream delivery)

Signature Thickness

2 to 100 sheets

Paper Size

Punching, binding A4 LEF, LT LEF, Tab Sheets for each size

Straight-through (no punching)

Unfolded A6 to A3 SEF, DLT, HLT, 12"x18", 13"x19", 12.6"x19.2", 13"x19.2", Tab sheets (A4, LT, LG)

Z-Folded A3, B4, A4 SEF, DLT, LG, LT SEF 12"x18" (from upstream Z-Folder unit).

Paper Weight 64.0–216.0 g/m2 (17.1 lb. Bond–79.9 lb. Cover)

Ring Sizes 2 (50-sheet, 100-sheet)

Punching EU: A4 LEF: 23 holes NA: LT LEF: 21 holes

Ring Supply Cartridge feed: capacity: 80 rings max.

Output Tray 51 to 100 leaf binding: 11 sets



Item Specification

Capacity In comb binding punch mode: 100 sheets

Punching Only Up to 100 sheets

Size 870 x 730 x 1010mm (34.3 x 28.7 x 38.8 in.)

Weight 140 kg (308 lb)

Power Supply NA: 120V, 2.8A, 50/60Hz EU: 220–240V, 1.9–1.7A, 50/60Hz

Power Consumption

Less than 400 W

DIP SW Settings All OFF

Perfect Binder GB5010

Cover Interposer (Inserter)

Item Specification

Feed System Automatic Paper Feed

Trays Two. Tray A (upper), Tray B (lower)

Cover Setting Face-up stacking

Feed Top to bottom

Transport Mode Simplex

Cover Paper Type Standard PPC, Color Paper, Coated Paper

Paper type mixing not recommended

Cover Size

Standard: A4 SEF, A4 LEF, B5 SEF, B5 LEF, LT SEF, LT LEF, EXE SEF

Width: 257 to 330.2 mm

Length: 364 to 487.7 mm

Recommended: 13"x19.2", 13"x19", 13"x18", A3, B4

Stack Capacity 200 sheets (or up to 24 mm in height) × 2

Paper Weight 90 g/m2 to 300 g/m2

Paper Positioning Center aligned

Paper Size Detection

Width: Adjustable slide-fence contact sensors

Tray A, Tray B: 1 sensor each

Length: Pulse count photo-sensors

Size (w x d x h) 621 x 679 x 213 mm (24.5 x 26.7 x 8.4 in.)

Weight Approximately 17 kg (37.4 lb)

Power Supply DC 24V (supplied from host machine via Perfect Binder)

Power Consumption

Less than 103 W (maximum at operation)

Perfect Binder

Item Specification

Paper Positioning Center aligned

Delivery Face-down

Signature Thickness 10 to 200 sheets (64 to 80 g/m2)



Item Specification

10 to 150 sheets (81 to 105 g/m2) Max. thickness: Up to 23 mm (0.9 in.)

Paper Size

Signature Width: 182 to 228.6 mm Length: 257 to 320 mm

Cover Width: 257 to 330.2 mm Length: 364 to 487.7 mm

Paper Thickness Signature 64 to 163 g/m2

*106 to 163 g/m2 :Up to 10 slip sheets

Cover 90 to 300 g/m2

Finished Size Width 139.7 mm to 216 mm

Length 201 to 297 mm

Trimming Range

Top 6 to 28 mm

Bottom 6 to 28 mm

Fore Edge 6 to 50 mm

Item Specification

Recommended Cover/Signature Size Ratios

Target Signature Cover

A4 SRA4 13"x19.2" 13"x19" 13"x18" SRA3

B5 A4 A3

A5 B5 B4

LT 9"x12" 13"x19.2" 13"x19"

Trimming Modes 3 cuts: Bottom, top, fore edge 1 cut: Fore edge (Limit: 297 mm) No cuts

Downstream Delivery

Straight-through, no binding

Size Width: 98.4 to 330.2 mm Length: 139.7 to 487.7 mm

Paper Weight 52 to 300 g/m2

Book Output Tray Max.: 23 mm (80g/m2) Book door locked during operation

Warm-up Time Less than 440 sec. (6.3 min.)

Glue Capacity Glue vat 380 g (continuous pellet supply) Approximately A4 to B5 100 books

Trimmings Box Capacity More than 15 books Approx. A4 to B5 of 100 sheets each, 80 g/m2

Dimension (W x D x H) 1090 x 791 x 1387 mm (43 x 31 x 53.5 in.)


Power Supply EU: 220 to 240V 50/60 Hz NA: 208V 50/60 Hz

Power Consumption Less than 623 W (with inserter)



Multi-Folding Unit FD5020

General

Operating Environment Temperature and humidity ranges: Same as main machine.

Service Life Expected: 5 years or 60,000 K (A4 LEF)

Paper Weight With Z-fold, Half Fold, Letter Fold-out, Letter Fold-in, Double Parallel Fold, and Gate Fold: 64.0–105.0 g/m2 (17.1–28.0 lb. Bond)

With Multi-sheet Fold: 64.0–80.0 g/m2 (17.1–21.0 lb. Bond)

Speed Straight-Through 100 to 758 mm/s

Folding 169 to 758 mm/s

Straight-Through Feed Size Postcard to 13"x19.2"

Type Used paper: A3, A4, B4, B5 OHP: A4, B5 Tap paper: A4 LEF, LT LEF

Folding Methods 6 methods (FM1 to FM6)

Paper Sizes (Straight Through)

--- Postcard to 13 x 19.2 in.

Paper Sizes & Weight (Folding)

FM1 A3, B4, DLT, LG, A4, LT, 12"x18", 8K

FM2 A3, B4, DLT, LG, A4, B5, LT 12"x18", 12.6"x18.5", 12.6"x19.2", 13"x18", 13"x19", 13"x19.2", 226x310 mm, 310x432 mm, SRA3, SRA4, 8K (64 to 105 g/m2)

FM3 A3, B4, DLT, LG, A4, LT, B5, 12"x18", 8K (64 to 80 g/m2) FM4

FM5

FM6

Multiple Folding FM1 Not allowed

FM2 Max. 3 (64 to 80 g/m2 only)

FM3 Max. 3 (64 to 80 g/m2 only)



FM4 Max. 3 (64 to 80 g/m2 , B4, A4, LT, B5 only)

FM5 Not allowed

FM6

Line Speed (Only FM1 Z-Folded paper can exit downstream)

No Fold 350 mm/sec. to top tray To downstream: Same as main machine.

FM1 758 mm/sec. to top tray (paper < 355.6 mm long) 450 mm/sec. to top tray (paper < 355.6 mm long) To downstream: Same as main machine.

FM2 1 Sheet: Same as main machine 2-3 Sheets: 454 mm/sec. 758 mm/sec. to top tray (paper <355.6 mm long) 350 mm/sec. to top tray (paper < 279.4 <355.6 mm long) 250 mm/sec. to top tray (paper < 279.4 mm long)

FM3 FM4

1 Sheet: Same as main machine 2-3 Sheets: 454 mm/sec. to top tray 350 mm/sec. to top tray (paper < 420 mm long) 250 mm/sec. to top tray (paper < 420 mm long)

FM5 1 Sheet: Same as main machine 350 mm/sec. to top tray (paper < 420 mm long) 250 mm/sec. to top tray (paper < 420 mm long)

FM6 1 Sheet: Same as main machine as far as 3rd Stopper. At 3rd stopper feeds 50 mm at 100 mm/sec. 350 mm/sec. to top tray (paper < 420 mm long) 250 mm/sec. to top tray (paper < 420 mm long)

Power Supply NA AC 120V 60 Hz, 2.0A

EU AC 220-240V, 50/60 Hz 1.2A

Power Consumption 240 W

Dimension (W x D x H) 470 x 730 x 1000 mm (18.5 x 28.7 x 39.4 in.)

Level Less than 5 mm deviation at front/back, left/right


Noise Level (dB A) Mode Alone System

No Folding < 72 dB ---

Folding < 72 dB < 76 dB

Tray Capacity

The capacity of the tray on top of the unit for folded paper is determined by these variables: Folding Methods (FM1 to FM6) Paper size Paper weight



Folding Mode FM1

Size Weight (Standard)

64 to 80 g/m2 Weight (Heavy) 64 to 80 g/m2

8K 35 20

12"x18" 35 20

A3 SEF 35 20

DLT 35 20

B4 SEF 35 20

LG SEF 35 20

A4 SEF 30 20

LT SEF 30 20

Folding Mode FM2



13"x19.2" 40 25

13"x19" 40 25

12.6"x19.2" 40 25

12.6"x18.5" 40 25

13"x18" 40 25

SRA3 (320x450 mm) 40 25

SRA4 (225x320 mm) 40 25

226x310 mm 40 25

310x432 mm 40 25

8K 40 25

12"x18" 40 25

A3 SEF 40 25

DLT 40 25

B4 SEF 40 25

LG SEF 40 25

A4 SEF 50 50

LT SEF 50 50

B5 SEF 50 50



Folding Mode FM3



8K 30 20

12"x18" 30 20

A3 SEF 30 20

DLT 30 20

B4 SEF 30 20

LG SEF 30 20

A4 SEF 40 30

LT SEF 40 30

B5 SEF 40 30

Folding Mode FM4



8K 40 20

12"x18" 40 20

A3 SEF 40 20

DLT 40 20

B4 SEF 40 20

LG SEF 40 20

A4 SEF 50 40

LT SEF 50 40

B5 SEF 50 40

Folding Mode FM5



8K 30 20

12"x18" 30 20

A3 SEF 30 20

DLT 30 20

B4 SEF 30 20



Size Weight (Standard) 64 to 80 g/m2

Weight (Heavy) 64 to 80 g/m2

LG SEF 30 20

A4 SEF 30 30

LT SEF 30 30

B5 SEF 30 30

Folding Mode FM6



8K 50 20

12"x18" 50 20

A3 SEF 50 20

DLT 50 20

B4 SEF 50 20

LG SEF 50 20

A4 SEF 30 30

LT SEF 30 30

B5 SEF 30 30

RPIP Interface Box Type S3


Number of Connection 1 I/F (to the main machine)

RPPI

I/F (to the peripheral)

RPIP2 Serial RS232 port.

Power Source Draw from the main machine

Supplied via RPPI cable

Dimensions (W x D x H) 150.2mm x 156.7mm x 53.9mm

Weight 554.5 g


Reissued: 17-Jun-15




4. Replacement and Adjustment > Registration Unit > Rotary Gate Motor (pg 1044) Note: The areas highlighted in red were revised.

Rotary Gate Motor

STEP1 Drawer unit (page 1016)

STEP2 Motor cover [A] ( ×1)

STEP3 Disconnect a connector and open 6 clamps. ( ×1, ×6)

Subject: Manual Correction: Replacement and adjustment for Rotary Gate Motor




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2


Reissued: 17-Jun-15


STEP4 Rotary gate motor [A] ( ×3, ×1)

Do not remove the motor bracket [B] from rotary gate motor [A]. The tension

of the timing belt is adjusted at the factory and cannot be adjusted in the field.

When installing the rotary gate motor, make sure that the flat sides of shafts

[A] and [B] are parallel.


Reissued: 24-May-16

Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 30-Apr-15 No.: RM205028d

RTB Reissue The items in bold italic in blue were changed.

Service Manual Correction The following section is to be replaced with the procedure for applying the zinc stearate and yellow toner to the PCU cleaning roller and lubrication roller described in this bulletin.

4. Replacement and Adjustment > Around the Drum > PCU Cleaning Unit Internal Components > Applying the Zinc Stearate and Yellow toner to the PCU Cleaning Roller/Lubrication Roller (pg.730)

Note: The descriptions in red were revised.

Applying the Zinc Stearate and Yellow toner to the PCU Cleaning Roller/Lubrication Roller

After you replace the PCU cleaning roller or lubrication roller individually, you need to apply the zinc stearate and yellow toner to them. This procedure is also required when replacing the entire PCU cleaning unit (especially with the brand-new unit). NOTE: This procedure is also required if Drum Motor Error SC39X appears during a print job just after installing a brand-new machine.

Use a soft brush to apply the zinc stearate and yellow toner. To prevent the PCU cleaning blade edge from being cracked or scratched, do not press the brush against it strongly. If a mass of the powder adheres to the front side of the PCU cleaning blade, remove it with the brush to prevent the powder from entering the development unit.

Subject: Manual Correction: Procedure for applying the zinc stearate and yellow toner to the PCU cleaning roller and lubrication roller




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2


Reissued: 24-May-16


TITLE: PCU Cleaning Lubrication Roller STEP1 Prepare a 1:4 mixture (2.5g) of the lubricant powder (D0159501) (zinc

stearate) [A] and yellow toner (D0159500) [B].

NOTE: Mixture ratio 1:4 (2.5g) for one roller can be measured by filling the cap [C] 50% as shown.

[A]

Fill 50% of the cap [C]

[B]

Mixture rate of [A] : [B] = 1: 4

[C]


Reissued: 24-May-16


STEP2 Apply the mixture to the PCU cleaning lubrication roller [A] evenly.

STEP3 Rotate the PCU cleaning lubrication roller [B] using shaft [A], and then

repeat Step 2 until the white part of the roller cannot be seen at all.


Reissued: 24-May-16


STEP4 Make sure that enough zinc stearate and yellow toner are applied to the PCU cleaning lubrication roller [B]. The lower limit is shown in the following picture. Lower limit (2.5g)

STEP5 After the procedure above, tilt the drum cleaning unit to drop the excess toner onto some paper, in order to prevent toner dropping onto the PCU frame [D] when the unit is installed in the main frame.

NOTE: If excess toner was not removed, there is a chance that the toner will slip through from the front edge of the roller to the ITB, then the ITB speed sensor will get dirty. (SC499 will occur.)


Reissued: 24-May-16


TITLE: PCU Cleaning Roller STEP6 Prepare a 1:1 mixture (3.5g) of the lubricant powder (D0159501) (zinc

stearate) [A] and yellow toner (D0159500) [B].

NOTE: Mixture ratio 1:1 (3.5g) for one roller can be measured by filling the cap [C] 80% as shown.

80% of the cap [C]

[A] [B]

[C]

Mixture rate of [A] : [B] = 1: 1


Reissued: 24-May-16


STEP7 Apply the mixture to the PCU cleaning roller [A] evenly.

To prevent the blade edge from being cracked or scratched, apply the mixture in a state that the PCU cleaning blade [A] does not contact the PCU cleaning roller [B].

OK NG


Reissued: 24-May-16


STEP8 Rotate the PCU cleaning roller [B] using shaft [A], and then repeat Step 2 until more than the lower limit amount (3g) of the mixture has been applied to the whole part.

Lower limit (3g)

STEP9 Remove the application blade [C] from the unit. Then, apply the yellow toner (D0159500) to the edge of the blade [C]

STEP10 Reinstall the blade [C] in the unit.


Reissued: 24-May-16


STEP11 Clean the upper face and bottom face of the PCU frame [D] if needed.


Reissued: 24-May-16


TITLE: Installing the Photoconductor and PCU Cleaning Unit STEP1. Install the photoconductor in the unit.

STEP2. Attach the PCU cleaning unit and rotate the photoconductor more than one-half turn in the direction of the arrow, while applying setting powder (B1329700) from the black bag shown above. While rotating, lightly press the PCU cleaning unit.

NOTE: The powder must be applied within the blue range [A] shown above. If there is powder within the red range [B], powder may adhere to the development unit entrance seal and it could cause vertical lines in printouts.


Reissued: 24-May-16


STEP3. Install the unit in the main frame.

STEP4. Before closing the machine front doors, change SP3032-021 from 6 (default)

to 16 (this setting changes the number of A4 full coverage pages created when setting Cleaning Initial Setup). Then clear the PM counter(s) of the PCU cleaning unit(s) you replaced.

STEP5. Close the machine front doors (after closing the front doors, cleaning unit initial setting starts automatically).

STEP6. After the machine stops, do again the cleaning unit initial setting for the

color(s) you have been working on (SP3032-001 to 006) manually.

STEP7. Do initial process control and MUSIC APPENDIX: Use the service part “BRUSH: BLOWER” (p/n: D0747690) when applying yellow toner or zinc stearate to the lubricant roller and cleaning roller.

"BRUSH: BLOWER"



Subject: Manual Correction: Removal procedure for ITB cleaning unit




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

Service Manual Correction The following section is to be replaced with the removal procedure for ITB cleaning unit described in this bulletin.

4. Replacement and Adjustment > ITB Cleaning Unit (pg. 812) Note: The areas highlighted in red were revised.

ITB Cleaning Unit

STEP1 Open the front left door [A] and front right door [B] of the imaging section.

STEP2 ITB cleaning unit inner cover [A] ( ×2)



STEP3 Rotate the release lever [A] clockwise and separate the ITB cleaning unit from the ITB.

STEP4 Remove the fixing screw [B] of the ITB cleaning unit [A]. ( ×1)

STEP5 Hold the grip [A] of the ITB cleaning unit, and then pull it out of the machine until it stops.



STEP6 Hold the grips [B] and [C] with both hands while unlocking the lock bar [A] by pushing it, and then remove the ITB cleaning unit.


Reissued: 29-May-15



NOTE for revision RM205030a In this revision, the names of the ITB Cleaning Sub Units have been changed.

Call out RTB No. RM205030 RTB No. RM205030a Note

[C] ITB cleaning sub unit ITB cleaning sub unit

[B] ITB cleaning sub unit ITB cleaning sub unit No change

[A] ITB cleaning sub unit ITB cleaning sub unit

Reason for this change: As shown below, the ITB cleaning order is sub unit [A] sub unit [B] sub unit [C] due to the direction of ITB rotation. Corresponding to this cleaning order, the ITB cleaning sub units' names have been changed as shown in the above table.

Subject: Manual Correction: Replacing procedure for ITB cleaning sub unit




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

Diagram from TTP slide#396

[A]

[B]

[C]


Reissued: 29-May-15


Service Manual Correction The following section is to be replaced with the replacement procedure for the ITB cleaning sub unit described in this bulletin.

4. Replacement and Adjustment > ITB Cleaning Sub Unit (pg.814) Note: The areas highlighted in red were revised.

ITB Cleaning Sub Unit

There are three ITB cleaning sub units ( ) in the ITB cleaning unit. Each unit contains an ITB cleaning roller, an ITB cleaning collection roller, and

an ITB cleaning blade. The material of the ITB cleaning roller is different for

each unit. In ITB cleaning sub unit it is a black colored brush roller, in unit

it is a gray colored brush roller, and in unit it is a sponge roller. Therefore, the three ITB cleaning sub units are not interchangeable.

The ITB cleaning sub unit is taken in the photos in the replacement procedure of this section as an example, but you can replace other ITB cleaning sub units in the same way. When the procedure is different depending on the units, the required procedure is indicated in a note.

STEP1 ITB cleaning unit (page 812)


Reissued: 29-May-15


STEP2 Bracket [A] ( ×3)

STEP3 Remove the fixing screws of ITB cleaning sub units ( ). ( ×6)

STEP4 Pull out ITB cleaning sub unit and place it on a flat surface.

STEP5 Pull out ITB cleaning sub unit as well and place them on a flat surface.


Reissued: 29-May-15


ITB Cleaning Roller

STEP1 ITB cleaning sub unit (page 814) STEP2 Release two pawls of bracket [A].

STEP3 Open the bracket [A] by rotating approximately 90 degrees.

STEP4 Remove the bracket [A] by lifting it.


Reissued: 29-May-15


The bracket cannot be removed when it is closed since the shaft [A] of the

bracket is caught in the housing as shown in . When you open the bracket to

90 degrees, the shaft rotates as shown in and you can remove the bracket.

STEP5 Gears [A] and [B] ( ×2)

3


Reissued: 29-May-15


STEP6 Coupling [A], pulley [B], timing belt [C] ( ×1, ×1)

When replacing the ITB cleaning roller of ITB cleaning sub unit , remove only

the coupling [A]. ITB cleaning sub unit does not have the pulley and timing belt.

STEP7 Bracket [A] ( ×2)


Reissued: 29-May-15


STEP8 Pull the ITB cleaning roller [A] towards the front. Check that the bearing [B] on the back side is detached.

STEP9 Remove bearing [A] on the front and pull out the ITB cleaning roller [B]

backwards.


Reissued: 29-May-15



STEP1 ITB cleaning roller (page 815) STEP2 Pull the ITB cleaning collection roller [A] towards the front. Check that the

bearing [B] on the back side is detached.

STEP3 Remove bearing [A] on the front and pull out the ITB cleaning collection roller [B] backwards.

ITB Cleaning Blade

STEP1 ITB cleaning collection roller (page 819)

STEP2 ITB cleaning blade [A] ( ×2)


Reissued: 29-May-15



STEP1 ITB cleaning collection roller (page 819)

STEP2 Sponge [A], spring [B] ( ×1)

STEP3 ITB cleaning vibrating plate [A] (pawl ×3)

The PM unit is "ITB cleaning vibrating plate [A]", which includes the slider [B]. Replace the whole assembly [A] (including the slider [B]) with a new one at PM.


Reissued: 19-Jun-15


RTB Reissue: The items in bold italics were corrected or added.


2. Appendices: Preventive Maintenance Tables > Maintenance Tables > Preventive Maintenance Items > Mainframe (Replacement) > ITB Cleaning Unit (pg.58)


ITB Cleaning Unit (Consists of three different sub units , and .)

Items 450K 900K 1800

K 2400

K EM Remarks

ITB Cleaning Roller R

Each sub unit has a different P/No. See the parts catalog.

ITB Cleaning Blade R Used in each sub unit.


R Each sub unit has a different P/No. See the parts catalog.


R Used in each sub unit.

See related RTB#RM205030a

Subject: Manual Correction: Maintenance tables for ITB cleaning unit




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2


Reissued: 19-Jun-15


APPENDIX: Descriptions and P/No. cross reference table

Descriptions used in this RTB

P/No.and location Description in 3D parts catalog

ITB Cleaning Roller M2053481 (for ITB cleaning sub unit #3) ROLLER:CLEANING:ASS'Y

M2053787 (for ITB cleaning sub unit #2) BRUSH ROLLER:CLEANING:NO.2:ASS'Y

M2053782 (for ITB cleaning sub unit #1) BRUSH ROLLER:CLEANING:ASS'Y

ITB Cleaning Blade M2053763 (commonly used) CLEANING BLADE:ROLLER:ASS'Y


M2053776 (for ITB cleaning sub unit #3) ROLLER:COLLECT:NO.3:ASS'Y

M2053760 (for ITB cleaning sub unit #1 and #2)

ROLLER:COLLECT:ASS'Y


M2053479 (commonly used) VIBRATING PLATE:BELT CLEANING:ASS'Y



Subject: Manual Correction: Information about controller cover Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

Service Manual Correction The controller cover [A] has been added at the rear side of the main machine.

Please remove the controller cover before removing the SD card slot cover in the

following sections. 2. Installation > Main Machine Installation > Installation Procedure > Paper Library

Data Installation (pg.169) 5. System Maintenance Reference > Firmware Update (pg.1404) 5. System Maintenance Reference > Updating the EXJS (pg.1474) 5. System Maintenance Reference > NVRAM Data Upload/Download (pg.1420) 5. System Maintenance Reference > Address Book Export/Import (pg.1432) 5. System Maintenance Reference > Capturing the Engine Debug Log (pg.1439)

Please remove the controller cover before performing the installation/replacement

procedures in the following sections. 2. Installation > Service Slot Board > Installation (pg.515) 4. Replacement and Adjustment > Main Boards/HDD Unit > Controller Board

(pg.1310) 4. Replacement and Adjustment > Main Boards/HDD Unit > Data Transfer Unit

(pg.1316) 4. Replacement and Adjustment > Fans/Filters > Registration Exhaust Fan (pg.1372)



Note: When removing the controller cover [A], remove the two screws shown below.

After removing the controller cover, you can access the SD card slot cover [B] and [C].

For details about each SD card slot, see “List of Slots and Ports” (page 181)

Make sure to attach the controller cover after machine servicing is completed. ( ×2)



Subject: Manual Correction: Insatllation procedure for color controller




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

Service Manual Correction The controller cover [A] has been added at the rear side of the main machine.

Please remove the controller cover before performing the installation procedures in the

following sections. 2. Installation > Color Controller E-43 (M465) > Installation (pg.183) 2. Installation > Color Controller E-83 (M466) > Installation (pg.200)



Note: When removing the controller cover [A], remove the two screws shown below.

Make sure to attach the controller cover [A] as shown below after the installation is

completed. ( ×2)

When attaching the controller cover [A], route the interface cable [B] and two data transfer unit cables [C] through the cutouts in the controller cover.



Subject: Manual Correction: Replacement procedure for VOC filter, exhaust fan 5-7, pressure roller exhaust fan, anti-condensation fan




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

Service Manual Correction 1 Please add the replacement procedure for VOC filter described in this bulletin to the following section.

4. Replacement and Adjustment > Fans/Filters (pg.1349)

VOC Filters

STEP1 Rear upper left cover (fusing section) (page 665) STEP2 Remove the VOC filter (upper) [A] from the IOB bracket.

When removing the VOC filter (upper), pull out from the cutout at left side of the VOC filter (upper).



STEP3 Remove the VOC filter (right) [A].

When removing the VOC filter (right), pull out from the two cutouts at left side of the VOC filter (right).



Service Manual Correction 2 The following section is to be replaced with the replacement procedure for exhaust fan 5-7 described in this bulletin.

4. Replacement and Adjustment > Fans/Filters > Exhaust Fan 1-9 > Exhaust Fan 5-7 (page 1363)


Exhaust Fan 5-7

STEP1 VOC filter (upper) (See "VOC Filter")

STEP2 Exhaust fan ( ×2, ×1, ×1)

[A]: Exhaust fan 5 [B]: Exhaust fan 6 [C]: Exhaust fan 7



Service Manual Correction 3 The following section is to be replaced with the replacement procedure for pressure roller exhaust fan described in this bulletin.

4. Replacement and Adjustment > Fans/Filters > Pressure Roller Exhaust Fan (pg. 1384)


Pressure Roller Exhaust Fan

STEP1 VOC filter (right) (See "VOC Filter")

STEP2 Pressure roller exhaust fan [A] ( ×2, ×1, ×1)



Service Manual Correction 4 The following section is to be replaced with the replacement procedure for anti-condensation fan described in this bulletin.

4. Replacement and Adjustment > Fans/Filters > Anti-condensation Fan (page 1385) Note: The areas highlighted in red were revised.

Anti-condensation Fan

STEP1 VOC filter (right) (See "VOC Filter")

STEP2 Anti-condensation fan [A] ( ×2, ×1, ×1)



Subject: Manual Correction: Cleaning procedure and maintenance table for VOC filter




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

Service Manual Correction 1 Please add the cleaning procedure for VOC filter described in this bulletin to the following section.

3. Preventive Maintenance > Cleaning Points (2) > Filters (pg.620)

VOC Filter

STEP1 Rear upper left cover (fusing section) (page 665) STEP2 Remove the VOC filter (upper) [A] from the IOB bracket.

When removing the VOC filter (upper), pull out from the cutout at left side of the VOC filter (upper).



STEP3 Clean the VOC filter (upper) [A] with a vacuum cleaner.

STEP4 Remove the VOC filter (right) [A].



When removing the VOC filter (right), pull out from the two cutouts at left side of the VOC filter (right).

STEP5 Clean the VOC filter (right) [A] with a vacuum cleaner.



Service Manual Correction 2 The following section of the field service manual was corrected:

2. Appendices: Preventive Maintenance Tables > Maintenance Tables > Preventive Maintenance Items > Mainframe (Cleaning) > Filters (pg. 63)

Note: The areas highlighted in red were revised. Filters

Items 220K 900K 1200K 1800K EM Remarks

Development Filter

C Clean with vacuum cleaner.

PSU Filter C

Clean with vacuum cleaner.

Controller Filter C


Ozone Filter C


VOC Filter C



Reissued: 17-June-15



Service Manual Correction Please add the procedure for applying the grease to the bearings of PCU cleaning unit described in this bulletin to the following section.

4. Replacement and Adjustment > Around the Drum > PCU Cleaning Unit Internal Components (pg.723)

Applying the Grease to the Bearings of the PCU Cleaning Unit

Apply grease (Barrierta S552R) to seven bearings shown below every 900K.

Subject: Manual Correction: Procedure for applying the grease to the bearings of PCU cleaning unit




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2




The maximum and minimum amount of grease you should use is shown below.

[A]: Maximum amount (54mg) [B]: Minimum amount (16mg)


Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 7-May-15 No.: RM205037

Subject: Manual Correction: Replacement procedure for paper cooling belt (upper)




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

Service Manual Correction The following section is to be replaced with the replacement procedure for paper cooling belt (upper) in this bulletin.

4. Replacement and Adjustment > Paper Cooling Unit > Paper Cooling Belt (Upper) (pg.1163)


Paper Cooling Belt (Upper)

STEP1 Open the left front door [A] and right front door [B] of the fusing section.

STEP2 Paper cooling unit inner cover (upper) [A] ( ×3)



STEP3 Lift the lever [A] to open the paper cooling unit [B].

STEP4 Wire cover plate [A] ( ×1, hook×2)

STEP5 Upper tension roller [A] ( ×1)

STEP6 Gear [A] ( ×1)



STEP7 Exit guide plate (upper) [A] ( ×1)

When installing the exit guide plate (upper), make sure that the sheet [A] of the exit guide plate (upper) contacts the paper cooling belt (upper).



STEP8 Pull out the paper cooling belt (upper) [A] to remove it.

Installing the Paper Cooling Belt (Upper)

When installing the paper cooling belt (upper), insert the belt [A] in the opening of belt overrun sensor (upper) [B]. If the belt is not installed correctly, SC518-01 (Paper Cooling Belt (Upper) Overrun Error) will occur.



After installing the paper cooling belt (upper), check that belt [A] is in between the opening of belt overrun sensor (upper) [B] as shown below.

When you re-attach the paper cooling belt, rotate it 3 times to relieve excessive tension

in the belt. The belt edge must be positioned between the lines engraved on the roller.



Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 7-May-15 No.:RM205038a


Service Manual Correction Please add the cleaning procedure for lubricant end detection switch described in this bulletin to the following section.

4. Replacement and Adjustment > Around the Drum > PCU Cleaning Unit Internal Components (pg.723)

Cleaning the Lubricant End Detection Switch

Clean the lubricant end switch with a vacuum cleaner every 1800K. STEP1 PCU cleaning unit (page 721)

STEP2 PCU cleaning lubrication blade [A] ( ×2)

STEP3 Lubricant cover [A] ( ×2)

Subject: Manual Correction: Cleaning procedure for lubricant end detection switch




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2




STEP4 With a vacuum cleaner, clean the sensor holes [A] of the lubricant end detection

switch.



Subject: Manual Correction: Notes on installation of the PCU cleaning unit




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

Service Manual Correction Please add the notes on installation of the PCU cleaning unit in this bulletin to the following section.

4. Replacement and Adjustment > Around the Drum > PCU Cleaning Unit Removal (pg.721)

When installing the PCU Cleaning Unit

Before installing the PCU cleaning unit on the PCDU, check if there is toner remaining at [A] on the PCDU unit. If there is toner at [A] on the PCDU, remove it.


Reissued: 25-May-15




2. Appendices: Preventive Maintenance Tables > Maintenance Tables > Preventive Maintenance Items > Mainframe (Replacement) > PCU Cleaning Unit (pg.58)

Note: The areas highlighted in red were revised. PCU Cleaning Unit

Items 450K 600K 900K 1800

K EM Remarks

PCU Cleaning Roller R

PCU Cleaning Blade R

PCU Cleaning Lubrication Roller

R

PCU Cleaning Lubrication Blade

R

Lubricant Bar R

PCU Cleaning Collection Blade

R

ITB Cleaning Swinging Plate Slider

R

Subject: Manual Correction: Maintenance tables for PCU cleaning unit




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

PCU Cleaning Blade: 900K PCU Cleaning Roller: 1800K PCU Cleaning Collection Blade: 1800K

PCU Cleaning Lubricant Blade: 900K PCU Cleaning Lubrication Roller: 1800K Lubricant Bar: 1800K


Reissued: 25-May-15



2. Appendices: Preventive Maintenance Tables > Maintenance Tables > Preventive Maintenance Items > Mainframe (Cleaning) > PCU Cleaning Unit (pg.61)


Items 450K 600K 900K 1800

K EM Remarks

PCU Cleaning Gears L

Lubricate with the grease (Barrierta S552R) after replacing the PCU cleaning gears.

PCU Cleaning Bearings L Lubricate with the grease (Barrierta S552R).

Lubricant End Detection Switch


PCU Cleaning Gears: Lubricate at 900K PCU Cleaning Bearings: Lubricate at 1800K Lubricant End Detection Switch: Clean at 1800K


Reissued: 25-May-15


Service Manual Correction 3 Please add the following information. As shown in the above tables, the PCU cleaning unit contains 900K PM items and 1800K PM items. In order to make it clear which PM items have been maintained for the PCU cleaning unit inside the machine, the PM check sheet decal [A] is available. This decal should be pasted on the PCU cleaning unit as shown below. NOTE: 1. The PM check sheet decal [A] is available as a service part P/No. M2053627. 2. From May 2015 production, this decal is attached to the PCU cleaning unit at the factory.

[A]


Reissued: 25-May-15


How to use the PM check sheet decal 1. When the PCU cleaning unit is brand new (0KP), there are no check marks on the decal. 2. When the 900KP PM is applied, check the 1st 900K column as shown. 3. When the 1800KP PM is applied, check the 1st 1800K column as shown.

NOET: Keep making the check mark at every PM. For example, when the 6300KP PM is performed, the check marks should be as shown.

1800 KP completed. All PM parts were replaced.


Reissued: 25-May-15


IN THE CASE OF TCRU/ORU SERVICE

Using the PM check sheet decal, technicians can recognize which maintenance items should be performed for the PCU cleaning units, which are used alternatively as shown in above diagram. The customers should not make marks on the decals, or this system will not work. In the above example, at the customer’s site, there are two cleaning units; one is in the machine (‘In Use’) and one is standing by (‘Removed’). At the start of the machine’s life, neither of the units have any check marks on the decal. The customer exchanges the units at 900k. The unit that was previously ‘in use’ is now ‘removed’, and vice versa. When the technician visits, the customer says that a unit needs servicing. The technician looks at the decal and sees no check marks. From that, the technician deduces that PM has not been done yet on this unit, so 900k PM must be performed. After servicing, the technician puts a check mark on the decal and tells the customer it can be used again. The customer exchanges the units again at 1800k. The unit serviced by the technician, with one check mark on the decal, is now back in the machine ‘in use’. When the technician visits, the customer says that a unit needs servicing. The technician looks at the decal and sees no check marks (this unit has not been serviced yet). From that, the technician deduces that 900k PM must be performed on this unit. After servicing, the technician puts a check mark on the decal. The customer exchanges the units again at 2700k. When the technician visits, the decal has one check mark (this is the cleaning unit that was serviced at 900 k). From that, the technician deduces that 1800k PM must be performed on this unit. After servicing, the technician puts the second check mark on the decal. And so on.



Subject: Manual Correction: Maintenance tables for PCU cleaning unit




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2


2. Appendices: Preventive Maintenance Tables > Maintenance Tables > Preventive Maintenance Items > Mainframe (Cleaning) > PCU Cleaning Unit (pg.61)


Items 450K 600K 900K 1800

K EM Remarks

PCU Cleaning Gears L

Lubricate with the grease (Barrierta S552R) after replacing the PCU cleaning gears.

PCU Cleaning Bearings L Lubricate with the grease (Barrierta S552R).

Lubricant End Detection Switch




Subject: Manual Correction: Replacement procedure for PSU filter




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

Service Manual Correction The following section is to be replaced with the replacement procedure in this bulletin.

4. Replacement and Adjustment > Fans/Filters > PSU Filter (pg.1392) Note: The areas highlighted in red were revised.

PSU Filter (Imaging Section)

STEP1 Rear box right lower cover (page 661) STEP2 Turn over the removed rear right lower cover, and then remove the PSU filter

(imaging section) [A].



PSU Filter (Fusing Section)

STEP1 Rear lower cover (fusing section) (page 667) STEP2 Turn over the removed rear lower cover, and then remove the PSU filter

(fusing section) [A].



Subject: Manual Correction: Cleaning procedure for PSU filter Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

Service Manual Correction The following section is to be replaced with the cleaning procedure in this bulletin.

3. Preventive Maintenance > Cleaning Points (2) > Filters > PSU Filter (pg.624) Note: The areas highlighted in red were revised.

PSU Filter (Imaging Section)

STEP1 Rear box right lower cover (page 661) STEP2 Turn over the removed rear right lower cover, and then remove the PSU filter

(imaging section) [A].



STEP3 Clean the PSU filter (imaging section) [A] with a vacuum cleaner.

PSU Filter (Fusing Section)

STEP1 Rear lower cover (fusing section) (page 667) STEP2 Turn over the removed rear lower cover, and then remove the PSU filter

(fusing section) [A].



STEP3 Clean the PSU filter (fusing section) [A] with a vacuum cleaner.


Reissued: 15-Jun-15

Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 8-May-15 No.: RM205044a

RTB Reissue The items in red were corrected or added.


4. Replacement and Adjustment > Fuser Unit > Fuser Cleaning Unit > Cleaning Web (pg.1133)


Cleaning Web

STEP1 Fuser cleaning unit (page 1129 “Fuser Cleaning Unit”)

STEP2 Frame [A] ( ×4)

When installing the frame, make sure that the spring plate [A] is located at

right side of the supply shaft [B] when viewed from the front side of the fuser cleaning unit.

Subject: Manual Correction: Replacement procedure for cleaning web




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2


Reissued: 15-Jun-15


STEP3 Bracket (rear) [A] ( ×3)

STEP4 Remove two bearings and three gears.

STEP5 Gear [A] ( ×1), Bearing [B] ( ×1)


Reissued: 15-Jun-15


STEP6 One way clutch [A]

STEP7 Bracket (front) [A] ( ×3)

STEP8 Bearing [A]


Reissued: 15-Jun-15


STEP9 Bearing [A] ( ×1), Gear [B] ( ×1)

When installing the gear, make sure that the flange with hexagonal hole [A]

is at the outer side.

STEP10 Bearing [A] ( ×1)


Reissued: 15-Jun-15


STEP11 Cleaning web [A]

When installing the cleaning web, rotate the spring pin [A] clockwise to remove slack in the web.

If you replace the web contact roller [A], make sure that the bearing [B] is at the rear side and that the one way clutch [C] is at the front side when installing the web contact roller.



Subject: Manual Correction: Troubleshooting for small granular toner fixation




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

Service Manual Correction The following section is to be replaced with the troubleshooting described in this bulletin.

6. Troubleshooting > Image Quality > Image Quality 001: Spots > Small granular toner fixation (pg.2142)


Small granular toner fixation

Symptom Small clumps of toner are offset and appear as spots (0.5 to 1 mm in diameter) or short lines.

1. Short line 2. Spots (0.5 to 1 mm)

Conditions that increase the risk of this symptom

Image pattern Isolated dot halftone image

Paper Type Uncoated (especially rough-surfaced) paper

Paper feed mode Duplex mode

Cause Toner clumps adhered to the pressure roller are not picked up by the cleaning web and are offset to the printed paper. The amount of toner that the cleaning web fails to pick up differs depending on the image data, paper feed mode and paper type, so the symptoms also differ.



Action





Subject: Manual Correction: Troubleshooting for wrinkles in paper, white area in a shape similar to an earthworm, paper creasing




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

Service Manual Correction Please add this troubleshooting to the following section.

6. Troubleshooting > Image Quality > Image Quality 004: Unevenness (pg.2188)

Wrinkles in paper, white area in a shape similar to an earthworm, paper creasing

Symptom When printing on thin paper, wrinkles in paper or white area in a shape similar to

an earthworm appear.

[A]: Wrinkles in paper [B]: White area in a shape similar to an earthworm

When printing on thin paper, paper creasing is generated.

[C]: Paper creases [D]: Paper creases are generated on the first side of duplex printing



Occurrence Conditions The above problems are likely to occur under the following conditions: Printing on thin paper (paper weight is less than 120gsm) Printing an image which has high image area ratio of solid image Duplex printing Printing on paper which is larger than A3 DLT

Action Action 1: Narrowing the nip width Change the nip width setting 1 step at a time.

Action 2: Lowering the fusing temperature





Subject: Manual Correction: Troubleshooting for image scratches at trailing edge




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

Service Manual Correction Please add the troubleshooting described in this bulletin to the following section.

6. Troubleshooting > Image Quality > Image Quality 002: Streaks (pg.2158)

Image scratches at the trailing edge

Symptom Scratched image appears at the trailing edge when feeding paper which has a high degree of rigidity.

Cause The paper touches the ITB belt when the trailing edge of the paper exits the paper transfer entrance guide, and then the image scratches appear.

Action 1. When storing the paper in a low humidity environment, make sure to package the

paper with a packaging paper (the rear surface of the packaging paper must be coated) or with a plastic bag.

2. When loading the paper in the paper tray, make sure that the grain of the paper is fed at right-angles to the paper feed direction.


Reissued: 15-Jun-15



Service Manual Correction Please add the troubleshooting for vertical white streaks on sides of paper when feeding large size paper after small size paper described in this bulletin to the following section.


Vertical white streaks at the sides of paper when feeding large width paper after small width paper

Symptom Vertical white streaks appear at the sides of the paper (outside the width of the small width paper). It is more distinguishable on a halftone image.

Standards for judgment

The white streaks appear after performing continuous printing of more than 500 sheets.

The width of the inner high density area matches the width of the small width

paper. Occurrence Conditions

The above problems are likely to occur when the intermediate transfer belt is new.

Subject: Manual Correction: Troubleshooting for vertical white streaks on sides of paper when feeding large size paper after small size paper




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2


Reissued: 15-Jun-15


Cause When performing continuous printing on small width paper, lubricant is removed from the area of the intermediate transfer belt where the paper passes. The amount of lubricant on the area of belt where the paper passes differs from the amount outside this area. Therefore, when feeding large width paper after feeding small width paper, image density differs between inside and outside of this area.

Action



Subject: Manual Correction: Troubleshooting for foreign objects on the printed paper




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2


6. Troubleshooting > Image Quality > Image Quality 005: Stains >Foreign objects on the printed paper (pg.2235)


Foreign objects on the printed paper

Symptom Foreign objects like shown in the picture below appear at the pressure roller separation pawls position on the printed paper (1st side).

[A]: Front side [B]: Rear side [C]: Pressure roller separation pawl (7) [D]: Feed direction [E]: The area where foreign objects are most likely to appear (corresponds to the positions of the pressure roller separation pawls).



Cause During duplex printing, the 1st side of fed paper catches the paper dust and toner on the pressure roller separation pawls.

Conditions A large amount of paper with a lot of dust and offset toner has been fed first. And then images that cause paper to wind around the pressure roller are printed in duplex mode. Feed mode: Duplex mode (The 1st side consumes more toner than the 2nd side). Relatively thin paper. Weak paper tends to wind around the pressure roller.

Action

[A]: Remove the foreign material from the pressure roller separation pawls.


Reissued: 15-Jun-15


RTB Reissue

The items in red were corrected or added.

Service Manual Correction Please add the troubleshooting for skewed image of small size paper described in this bulletin to the following section.

6. Troubleshooting > Image Quality (pg.2131)

Image Quality 006: Irregularity

Overview

Image or text becoming irregular in comparison with the original.

Item Description

Skewed image on small width paper

Skewed image is generated when using small width paper.

Skewed image on small width paper

Symptom Skewed image is generated when using small width paper.

Subject: Manual Correction: Troubleshooting for skewed image of small size paper



Classification: Troubleshooting Mechanical Paper path Product Safety

Part information Electrical Transmit/receive Other ( )

Action required Service manual revision Retrofit information Tier 2


Reissued: 15-Jun-15


Cause In the registration unit, paper skew is corrected by feeding the paper against the gates located between the rotary gate drive rollers. When the paper width is narrower than 160mm, the paper is fed against the two innermost gates. If the skew is large, the edge of the paper is nipped by the rotary gate roller before being fed against the gates. Therefore, the machine cannot correct the skew sufficiently. Then J097 (Over skew) or J098 (Over Shift) occurs.

Occurrence Conditions Printing on paper with a paper weight of “Paper Weight 1-4 (52.3 – 163.0 g/m2)”. Printing on A5 SEF, HLT SEF paper.


Reissued: 15-Jun-15


Action *1: See “Errors for Pre-punched Paper” (page 2266) *2: See “J098 occurs when printing on color paper or transparency” (page 2321)


Reissued: 15-Jun-15




Subject: Manual Correction: Troubleshooting for vertical black streaks when using Vacuum Feed LCIT RT5100




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2


6. Troubleshooting > Problems Related to Peripheral Devices > Peripherals 005: Vacuum Feed LCIT RT5100 (pg.2317)

Vertical Black Streaks

Symptom The vertical black streaks appear within the area [B] shown below.

[A]: The vertical black streaks do not appear within 110mm from the leading edge of the paper. [B]: The vertical black streaks appear in 60mm intervals from the center of the paper.

The vertical black streaks appear on the first side of the printed paper. The vertical black streaks appear when creating a poster-size output by enlarging a

single-page document to cover four sheets of paper using the poster function The vertical black streaks stand out on the first printed paper.



Cause The paper surface is scratched by the paper feed belt. This is caused by the variation in the air volume of the suction fans and the quantity difference of loaded paper. The black vertical streaks are formed at the scratched part of the paper surface.

Action


Reissued: 15-Jun-15


RTB reissue The items in red were corrected or added.

Service Manual Correction Please add the troubleshooting for flaws on the image described in this bulletin to the following section.

6. Troubleshooting > Image Quality > Image Quality 002: Streaks (pg. 2158)

Flaws on the image

Symptom Flaws are generated on the image on the paper surface.

Cause Flaws are generated when the paper surface is scratched by toner which is adhered to the metal plates/roller edges/ribs of the paper transfer guide plates inside the machine.

Subject: Manual Correction: Troubleshooting for flaws on the image




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2


Reissued: 15-Jun-15


Action


Reissued: 15-Jun-15



Reissued: 15-Jun-15


Checking and cleaning procedure when flaws are generated on the image When flaws are generated on the image, check whether toner or foreign objects

are adhered in the fusing unit or to the paper transfer guide plates of the paper transport paths shown below. Then clean them if needed.

A) Straight-through Transport B) Invert/Exit Transport C) Duplex Transport

When cleaning the rubber rollers/transfer belts/paper transfer guide plates/pawls of junction gates, clean with a dry cloth. When the foreign objects such as toner cannot be removed, clean them with a cloth made damp with ethanol.


Reissued: 15-Jun-15


Check the fourteen paper transfer guide plates shown below. Make sure to clean

the bending ridgelines of the paper guide plates ( , , , , ) since flaws are likely to be caused by foreign objects adhered to those bending ridgelines.

When cleaning the paper transfer guide plates ( , , ), check and clean the

bending ridgelines indicated with red arrows below.


Reissued: 15-Jun-15


When cleaning the paper transfer guide plate ( ), check and clean the tip [A] of the gates shown below.

When cleaning the paper transfer guide plate ( ), check and clean the bending ridgeline indicated with a red arrow below.



Subject: Manual Correction: Troubleshooting for density difference when printing a high coverage image continuously




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2


6. Troubleshooting > Image Quality > Image Quality 004: Unevenness (pg.2188)

Density difference when printing a high coverage image continuously

Symptom Uneven image density appears when printing a high coverage image continuously.

Occurrence Conditions Density difference can be large when the printing coverage becomes high. Density difference becomes largest when printing a full solid image (printing

coverage is 100%).

Cause When high coverage printing has been performed continuously, toner consumption per unit time is increased which causes a large fluctuation in charge. Therefore the machine changes the toner density to stabilize the image density. When starting the high coverage printing, there are cases where the machine cannot stabilize the image density since the limiter inhibits the changes of toner density.



Action



Subject: Manual Correction: Troubleshooting for required operation when using A5 LEF/HLT LEF paper




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2


6. Troubleshooting > Paper Transport (pg.2264)

Paper Transport 002: Plain Paper

Required operation when using A5 LEF/HLT LEF paper

Overview When using the following paper sizes, position adjustment of the entrance roller [A]

at the paper cooling unit is required. The position adjustment is performed using the lever [B]. Fixed size: A5 LEF, HLT LEF

Custom size: Less than 164.0mm or over 139.7mm horizontally

The position of the entrance roller at the paper cooling unit can be moved 1mm in

the vertical direction.



Operation STEP1 Open the left front door [A] and right front door [B] of the fusing section.

STEP2 Rotate the lever [A] at the paper cooling unit clockwise.

The position of the entrance roller shifts to the lower position.

Side effect

Wrinkles as shown below can be generated in an oblique direction when printing with “Paper Weight 3” (105.0g/m2) while the entrance roller of the paper cooling unit is at the lower position. When wrinkles in an oblique direction are generated, set the entrance roller back to the upper position.



Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: ８-May-15 No.: RM205055

Subject: Manual Correction: Troubleshooting for the streaks when using the Print Silk 130gsm paper




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

Service Manual Correction Please add the troubleshooting described in this bulletin to the following section. 6. Troubleshooting > Paper Transport (pg. 2264)

Paper Transport 002: Plain Paper

Symptom Streaks appear in black halftone areas on the second side when printing on Print Silk 130gsm paper in full-color mode.

Action

1. Open the left front door [A] and right front door [B] of the fusing section.



2. Rotate the lever [A] at the paper cooling unit clockwise. The position of the entrance roller shifts to the lower position (The entrance roller lowers 1mm). This brings the entrance roller into strong contact with the paper cooling belt.

The machine is equipped with a structure which adheres the paper cooling belt to the paper by shifting the position of the entrance roller when transporting the short length paper (such as A5 LEF, HLT LEF).



Effect The streaks on the second side of the paper disappear.

The streaks [A] may appear at the trailing edge of the second side of the first

printed paper.

Side effect

Wrinkles as shown below can be generated in an oblique direction when printing with “Paper Weight 3” (105.0g/m2) while the entrance roller of the paper cooling unit is at the lower position. When wrinkles in an oblique direction are generated, set the entrance roller back to the upper position.



Reissued: 15-Jun-15

Model: Andromeda-P1 Date 8-May-15 No.: RM205056a

RTB Reissue The items in red were corrected or added.


6. Troubleshooting > Image Quality > Image Quality 002: Streaks > Vertical black (color) streaks (pg.2159)


Vertical black or colored streaks, dim white streaks

Symptom Black or colored streaks 5 or 6 mm wide appear in halftone areas. Dim white streaks appear in halftone areas.

Subject: Manual Correction: Troubleshooting for vertical black (color) streaks, dimly white streaks




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2


Reissued: 15-Jun-15


Cause

Black or colored streaks and dim white streaks may appear occasionally, caused by foreign objects sticking to the corona wire or grid in the charge unit. Correct this by executing Actions A and B. The color of the streak shows the color of the charge unit that needs maintenance.

Black or colored streaks may also appear at the end-of-life of the corona wire, when smudges accumulate on it. Correct this by executing Action C.

Action


Reissued: 15-Jun-15


Cleaning procedure for the grid of the charge unit

Carefully wipe off the toner from the stained area [A] with a dry cloth. To prevent damage to the grid, move the dry cloth in the direction of the arrow. (Do not press the dry cloth against the stained area. Wipe off the toner with a stroking action.)

Clean the area [B] between the two end blocks [A].



Subject: Manual Correction: Troubleshooting for J086 Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

Service Manual Correction Please add the troubleshooting for J086 described in this bulletin to the following section.

6. Troubleshooting > Other Problems > Other 002: SC (pg. 2321)

Troubleshooting for J086

Symptom When the fusing temperature is at the recommended temperature or at the generic temperature, J086 (fusing exit stagnation) occurs.

Action

Action 1: Lowering the adding fusing temperature



Action 2: Lowering the fusing heat roller temperature

Action 3: Lowering the process speed



Subject: Manual Correction: Troubleshooting for stained at trailing edge when changing the paper type




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2


6. Troubleshooting > Image Quality > Image Quality 005: Stains (pg.2233)

Stains at the trailing edge when changing the paper type

Symptom Stains on the trailing edge of the paper when the paper type has changed.

The arrow indicates the paper feed direction



Cause

The toner on the ITB belt is scattered, and then is deposited on the image transfer entrance guide plate, since the image transfer entrance guide plate is close to the ITB belt. When the paper type is changed from plain paper to thick paper, the trailing edge of the paper vibrates the image transfer entrance guide plate. Then the stained image is generated since the deposited toner is scattered on the paper or ITB belt.

Occurrence Conditions The above problems are likely to occur under the following conditions: When the paper type has been changed from plain paper to thick paper. When printing a two-color solid image which area rate of the concentration part is

low.



Action

*1 See “Cleaning procedure of image transfer entrance guide plate” *2 See page 610 ”Paper Transfer Entrance Plate, Paper Transfer Exit Plate”

Simple procedure of cleaning the image transfer entrance guide plate 1. Remove the ITB cleaning unit. (page 810) 2. Withdraw the drawer unit. (page 1016) 3. Fold the dry cloth provided with the main machine in four. 4. Insert 10mm of dry cloth between ITB belt and image transfer entrance guide plate.

Then clean the image transfer entrance guide plate from the front to the rear side.



Be careful not to rub the ITB belt strongly when cleaning the image transfer

entrance guide plate. Use the dry cloth which is provided with the main machine or its equivalent.

Cleaning procedure of image transfer entrance guide plate STEP1 Withdraw the ITB unit to the service position. (page 758) STEP2 Clean the image transfer entrance guide plate [A] using the dry cloth

provided with the main machine.

Use the dry cloth which is provided with the main machine or its equivalent.



Subject: Manual Correction: Cleaning procedure of image transfer entrance guide plate




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

Service Manual Correction Please add this cleaning procedure to the following section.

3. Preventive Maintenance > Cleaning Points (1) > Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB) Unit (pg.569)

Image Transfer Entrance Guide Plate

STEP1 Withdraw the ITB unit to the service position. (page 758) STEP2 Clean the image transfer entrance guide plate [A] with a dry cloth.


Model: Andromeda-P1 Date:21-May-15 No.: RM205061

Please replace the NVRAM replacement procedure described in the following section of the Andromeda-P1 field service manual with the procedure described in this bulletin:

Replacement and Adjustment > Main Boards/HDD Unit > NVRAM replacement

procedure>NVRAM (EEPROM) on the BCU Note: The areas highlighted in red were revised.

Replacement Procedure of NVRAM (EEPROM) on the BCU NOTE: Before starting this procedure, prepare a blank SD card to upload the back-up data.

NVRAM (EEPROM) on the BCU Before performing the following procedure, contact your supervisor to obtain information on how to input the machine serial number in the new NVRAM. 1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes with the

machine. 2. Print out the SMC data (SP5-990-001). 3. Turn off the main power switch. 4. Install an SD card into SD card slot #2 and then, turn on the main power switch. 5. Copy the NVRAM data to an SD card (SP5-824-001). 6. Turn off the main power switch, and then unplug the power cord. 7. Replace the NVRAM on the BCU and put back the covers. 8. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the main power switch.

Select the paper-size system in SP5-131-001 (Paper Size Type Selection). 0: DOM (JAPAN) 1: NA 2: EU

Subject: Manual Correction:Replacement Procedure of

NVRAM(EEPROM) on BCU Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui

From: 1st PP Tech Service Sec., PP Tech Service Dept.


Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2


Model: Andromeda-P1 Date:21-May-15 No.: RM205061

9. Specify the area code in SP5-807-001. 1: DOM (JAPAN) 2: NA 3: EU 4: TWN 5: AA 6: CHN

NOTE: Setting the wrong area code will cause the system to display SC995-04(CPM

Set Error). Setting the wrong area code will cause "Fusing Unit is not set correctly. Open

the part as shown and set the unit." to appear on the operation panel, even though the fusing unit is set correctly.

10. Input the machine serial number according to the procedure instructed by your

supervisor. NOTE: Inputting an incorrect serial number will cause the system to display SC195-00

(Serial Number Set Error).

11. Turn the main power switch off and on. 12. Copy the data from the SD card to the NVRAM (SP5-825-001). 13. Turn off the main power switch, and then remove the SD card from SD card slot #2. 14. Turn on the main power switch. 15. Specify the SP and UP mode settings, if necessary. 16. Do the self-check Process Control. 17. Do ACC for the copier application program. 18. Do ACC for the printer application program.

NOTE: If the message “SD card for restoration is required.” appears after the NVRAM

replacement, restore the encryption key.


Reissued: 31-Oct-16

Model: Andromeda-P1 Date:21-May-15 No.: RM205062c


Please replace the NVRAM replacement procedure in the following section of the Andromeda-P1 field service manual with the procedure in this bulletin:

Replacement and Adjustment > Main Boards/HDD Unit > NVRAM replacement

procedure>NVRAM on the Controller Board

Note: The areas highlighted in red were revised from the FSM.

NVRAM Replacement Procedure

NVRAM on the Controller Board NOTE: Before starting this procedure, prepare 2 blank SD cards to upload the back-up data. 1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes with the

machine. 2. Print out the SMC data (“ALL”) in SP5-990-001. 3. Turn off the main power switch and unplug the AC power cords. Make sure that none

of the LEDs on the controller board are lit after you do this. 4. Insert blank SD card#1 into slot #2, plug the AC power cord, and then turn on the main

power switch. 5. Upload the Address Book Data to the blank SD card#1 in SP5-846-051 (UCS Setting /

Back Up All Addr Book). 6. Turn off the main power switch, and then unplug the AC power cord. 7. Remove SD card#1 containing the Address Book Data.

Subject: Manual Correction: NV-RAM replacement procedure Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2


Reissued: 31-Oct-16


8. Insert another blank SD card#2 into slot #2, plug the AC power cord, and then turn on

the main power switch. 9. After the machine became ready condition, upload the NVRAM data to the blank SD

card#2 in SP5-824-001 (NVRAM Data Upload).

IMPORTANT: Make sure to note the following SP settings as they will not be automatically uploaded to the SD card. These settings will be input manually in Step 16. See APPENDIX of this RTB concerning the SP settings, which will be back upped in SD card by SP5-824-001 (NVRAM Data Upload)

SP5-193-001 (External Controller Info. Setting)

0: No external controller, 1: EFI controller SP5-895-001 (Application invalidation / Printer )

0: valid, 1: invalid SP5-895-002 (Application invalidation / Scanner )

0: valid, 1: invalid 10. Turn off the main power switch, and then unplug the AC power cord. 11. Remove the SD card#2 containing the NVRAM data from slot #2.


Reissued: 31-Oct-16


12. After confirming all LED on the controller board turned off, replace the two NVRAMs on

the Controller Board with the new ones.

NOTE: There are two NVRAMs on the controller board as mentioned in the following section

of the manual: Controller Board > When installing the New Controller Board. Make

sure to replace the two NVRAMs as a set.

NVRAMs [A] and [B] installed on the Controller Board at the factory are labeled "2M-1" and "2M-2" respectively. NVRAMs procured as service parts are labeled "FRAM1/M205E" and "FRAM2/M205E".

[A]

[B]


Reissued: 31-Oct-16


Install NVRAM "FRAM1/M205E" in the socket printed "FRAM-1" [C] on the controller

board. Install so that the indentation [E] on the NVRAM faces toward the direction indicated with the arrow [G] printed on the controller board.

Install NVRAM "FRAM2/M205E" in the socket printed "FRAM-2" [D] on the controller board. Install so that the indentation [F] on the NVRAM faces toward the direction indicated with the arrow [H] printed on the controller board.

Work carefully to avoid mistakes when installing the NVRAMs. Incorrect installation

will damage both the NVRAM and controller board. 13. Plug in the AC power cord, and then turn ON the main power switch.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT insert the SD card containing the NVRAM data that you removed in Step 7 before turning on the main switch.

The message "Connection to Fiery disconnected. Turn the main power switch off." will appear after turning ON the main power switch, but ignore this message and go to Step No.14.

14. Re-insert the SD card#2 containing the NVRAM data that you removed in Step 9 back

into slot #2.

[F]

[E]

[G]

[H]

[C]

[D]


Reissued: 31-Oct-16


15. Download the old NVRAM data from the SD card#2 onto the new NVRAM in SP5-825-001 (NVRAM Data Download).

Note: This will take about 2 or 3 minutes. IMPORTANT: After the download completes, message "Completed. You have

to reboot." will appear, but ignore this message and press the “Exit” button. DO NOT reboot at this moment.

SC870-11 (Address Book Data Error) may appear in the banner, but DO NOT turn off the main power switch. Continue with this procedure.

16. Input the following SP settings according to the notes took in Step 5.

SP5-193-001 (External Controller Info. Setting) SP5-895-001 (Application invalidation / Printer) SP5-895-002 (Application invalidation / Scanner)

Message "Completed. You have to reboot." will appear after inputting each of

the above SP settings, but ignore this message and press the “Exit” button. DO NOT reboot at this moment.

17. Turn off the main power switch. This will take about 3 minutes. Wait until the machine

power is turned off completely, and then remove the SD card#2 from slot #2. 18. Turn on the main power switch. 19. Insert the SD card#1 containing the Address Book Data removed in Step 7 into slot

#2. 20. Execute SP5-846-052 (UCS Setting / Restore All Addr Book) to download the Address

Book Data on to the new NVRAM. NOTE: SP5-846-052 will fail, if the settings in SP5-193-001, inputted in Step 16 are

incorrect. Message "Completed. You have to reboot." will appear if SP5-846-052 results

in success. 21. Turn off the main power switch and remove the SD card#1 from slot #2. 22. Turn on the main power switch. 23. Print out the SMC data (“ALL”) in SP5-990-001, and make sure that it matches with the

SMC data printed out in Step 2 (except for the total counter value). Note: The total counter value is reset to “0” when the NVRAM is replaced.

24. Do the self-check Process Control. 25. Do ACC for the copier application program. 26. Do ACC for the printer application program.

It turned out that the APPENDIX added in RTB revision "b" is not required.



Subject: Manual Correction: DEMS after PCDU maintenance Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

Service Manual Correction Please add the following procedure concerning PCU maintenance to the following section.

4. Replacement and Adjustment > Around the Drum > PCDU (pg.719) NOTE: The areas highlighted in red were revised.

After you pull out the PCDU (including the development unit) and push the PCDU back into the machine, be sure to do SP3-040-001 to SP3-040-005 (DEMS: Execute) for the required color stations forcibly. DEMS must be executed because the phase of an OPC drum is changed when the PCDU is pulled out and pushed back.

The PCDU must be pulled out and pushed back when the following parts are removed or replaced. Because of this, DEMS must be executed forcibly after the following procedures.

1. OPC drum (removed or replaced); not necessary to do DEMS if the

PM counter was reset (DEMS will be done automatically) 2. Drum Cleaning Unit (removed or replaced); not necessary to do



DEMS if the PM counter was reset (DEMS will be done automatically)

3. Toner Shield Glass (removed for cleaning or replaced) 4. Development Unit (removed for cleaning or replaced)



Subject: Manual Correction: Automatic adjustment after PM counter clear




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

Service Manual Correction Please add the following NOTICE after PM counter reset is performed to the following section.

3. Preventive Maintenance > PM counter display > Opening the PM counter pg.549) NOTE: The areas highlighted in red were revised.

NOTE:

1. Adjustments shown in the following table will be executed automatically after the following conditions are satisfied. The corresponding PM counter clear button(s) is/are pressed. The front cover of the machine is closed.

2. Do not perform these adjustments manually, because these adjustments are programmed to start automatically when these conditions are satisfied.

No. PM item Adjustments executed automatically after the PM counter is cleared and the front cover is closed.

1 OPC drum (Photoconductor Unit)

Drum cleaning initialization (SP3032-001 through 006 for the required colors)

Process control (Density Adjustment) (SP3011-002) MUSIC (SP2111-001) DEMS (SP3040-001 through 005 for the required

colors) Main scan shading correction (SP3069-001 through

005 for the required colors)

2 PCU Cleaning Unit Drum cleaning initialization (SP3032-001 through 006 for the required colors)

Process control (Density Adjustment) (SP3011-002)



No. PM item Adjustments executed automatically after the PM counter is cleared and the front cover is closed.

DEMS (SP3040-001 through 005 for the required colors)

3 ITB (Intermediate Transfer Belt)

Process control (Density Adjustment) (SP3011-002) MUSIC (SP2111-001)

4 Image Transfer Roller

Process control (Density Adjustment) (SP3011-002) MUSIC (SP2111-001)

5 Paper Transfer Unit Paper Transfer Unit Set Up (SP3033-001) Process control (Density Adjustment) (SP3011-002) MUSIC (SP2111-001)

6 Developer (C,M,Y,K)

TD sensor initialization (SP3030-001 through 006 for the required colors)

Process control (Density Adjustment) (SP3011-002) Main scan shading correction (SP3069-001 through

005 for the required colors)

7 Drum Charge Unit Drum Charge Unit cleaning (SP2222-001 through 004 for the required colors)

Process control (Density Adjustment) (SP3011-002)


Reissued: 1-Jun-15

Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 8-May-15 No.: RM205060b


Problem

Front and back image position misalignment with feed direction even after using the template

Fig. 1

Details

In the Troubleshooting manual;

11. Advanced Instructions > Adjusting the Image Position of the Either Side of the Paper > Aligning the Image Position on Side 2 to That on Side 1 (Using a Template to Align the Image Position on Side 1 and 2)

Fig.2 Fig.3

When inputting the measured length of the template (Fig.2), which can be printed from the button circled in red (Fig.3), appropriate settings about image position and magnification will be automatically reflected in that Custom Media. However, we have to print this template image with the same margin settings at both the leading edge and the trailing edge, or the image position will be misaligned in the paper-feed direction by that difference as shown in Fig.1

Subject: (Notice) Image Position Adjustment when Using the Template

Prepared by: Takatsugu Komori



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required





Reissued: 1-Jun-15

Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 8-May-15 No.: RM205060b

Actions

1. Notice when printing the template Whenever printing the template image, make sure that Advanced Setting “No.13 Adjust Erase Margin of Leading Edge” and “No.14 Adjust Erase Margin of Trailing Edge” have the same value. (If not, change the smaller one to the bigger).

2. Paper Library Change the library file to version Rev.5 or later, because there are some media which have different values for Advanced Settings No.13 and No.14 in the old version.

3. SP Settings Change the SP settings as follows. If not, when newly creating a custom media, some combinations of paper type and weight will have different margins in Advanced Settings No.13 and No.14. This SP change has been applied in the factory after the mass production June, 2015.


Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 5-Jun-15 No.: RM205065

Subject: Manual Correction: Troubleshooting for horizontal streaks on the first side of a long sheet of thick paper




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2



Horizontal streaks on the first side of a long sheet of thick paper

Symptom Horizontal streaks appear on the first side of a long sheet of thick paper. They only appear in the area between 370 mm and 440 mm from the leading edge on the first side of the sheet.

Conditions that increase the risk of this symptom

Paper weight 350 gsm or heavier

Paper length 630 mm or longer



Cause

[A]: Rotary gate roller [B]: S-shaped area of the paper path [C]: Paper fed from the vacuum feed banner sheet tray

[D]: Rotary gate home position [E]: The gate position, which sticks out from the bottom of the paper path [F]: The gate position, which is the correct waiting position When printing on the first side of a long sheet, the rear of the sheet is in the S-shaped area of the paper path [B], causing the load to be 2 to 3 times higher than usual. The high load leads to rotation irregularities of the rotary gate roller [A]. The gate of the rotary gate roller [A] is supposed to be waiting at the bottom of the path at [F] until the trailing edge passes but when the sensor detects the position incorrectly because of too many rotation irregularities, the gate may stick out from the bottom of the paper path at [E] and hit the sheet, resulting in a shock jitter.



Action

If [0303 Adjust Registration Paper Buckle] is set to 3 mm or a larger value and 350 gsm or heavier paper is fed, the Registration Timing Motor may become out of step and cause Jam 98.



Service Manual Correction This bulletin has been issued to announce additional information in the following section. 6. Troubleshooting > SC500 (Engine: Paper Transport, Fusing)> SC518(Paper Cooling Belt Overrun Error) (pg. 1574) SYMPTOM: SC518-01: Paper Cooling Belt (Upper) Overrun Error or SC518-02: Paper Cooling Belt (Lower) Overrun Error appears even though the belt is inserted in the opening of the belt overrun sensor correctly. (See the related diagrams in the FSM on pg. 1166 and 1171). CAUSE: The amount of cooling belt shifting exceeds the normal range. ACTION: Adjust the amount of cooling belt shifting to be within the normal range. Confirm that the belt centering roller sensor home position plate is in the correct

position. For the Upper Cooling Belt Step 1: Remove the duct cover [A] (fusing section) (4 screws) See FSM pg. 666 for more details.

Subject: SC518（Paper Cooling Belt Overrun Error) Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2



Step 2: Open the radiator unit [A] (1 screw) (See FSM pg.1381) Step 3: Check if the edge [B] of the upper belt centering roller sensor home position plate is at the middle of the upper belt centering roller sensor [C].

[B]

[C]



NOTE: If the edge [B] of the upper belt centering roller sensor home position plate is not at the middle of the upper belt centering roller sensor [C], insert your hand and adjust the position of the upper belt centering roller sensor home position plate [B] with your finger as shown in the photos below. (Insert your hand and adjust from the front, then go to the rear and check if the adjustment is correct.) Step 4. Rotate the paper cooling belt (upper) about 5 times (by manually rotating the gear [A]) until the belt moves smoothly.

View from the front View from the rear



Step 5. Put a piece of adhesive paper [A] on the belt to use as an indicator of the rotation start point. Step 6. Measure the distance between the edge of the roller and the edge of the belt [B].



Step 7. Rotate the paper cooling belt (upper) once. Then measure the distance between the edges of the roller and the belt again, and compare it with the initial distance to see how much it has changed with one rotation of the belt. If the difference is 0.5 mm or larger, loosen 2 M3 screws ([A], [B]) and move the adjuster plate [C] until the difference is smaller than 0.5 mm.

[D]: Graduations Move the adjuster plate in the following direction one graduation at a time.

If the cooling belt (upper) has shifted to the rear side: Move the adjuster plate in the direction [1].

If the cooling belt (upper) has shifted to the front side: Move the adjuster plate in the direction [2].

NOTE: Remove the adhesive paper put on the belt in step 4 after the adjustment is completed.



For the lower cooling belt Step 1: Remove the LED cover bracket [A] (1 screw)

[A]



Step 2: Check if the edge [A] of the lower belt centering roller sensor home position plate is at the middle of the lower belt centering roller sensor [B].

NOTE: If the edge [A] of the lower belt centering roller sensor home position plate is not at the middle of the lower belt centering roller sensor [B], insert your finger into the opening [C] and adjust the position of the lower belt centering roller sensor home position plate [A] (for the lower cooling belt mechanism, it is not necessary to go to the other side of the machine to check)

[A]

[B]

[B]

[C]



Step 3. Rotate the paper cooling belt (lower) about 5 times (by manually rotating the gear [A]) until the belt moves smoothly.

Step 4. Put a piece of adhesive paper [A] on the belt to use as an indicator of the rotation start point. Step 5. Measure the distance between the edge of the roller and the edge of the belt [B].



Step 6. Rotate the paper cooling belt (lower) once. Then measure the distance between the edges of the roller and the belt again, and compare it with the initial distance to see how much it has changed with one rotation of the belt. If the difference is 0.5 mm or larger, loosen 2 M3 screws ([A], [B]) and move the adjuster plate [C] until the difference is smaller than 0.5 mm.

[D]: Graduations Move the adjuster plate in the following direction one graduation at a time.

If the cooling belt (lower) has shifted to the rear side: Move the adjuster plate in the direction [1].

If the cooling belt (lower) has shifted to the front side: Move the adjuster plate in the direction [2].

NOTE: Remove the adhesive paper put on the belt in step 4 after the adjustment is completed.



SETTING THE UPPER AND LOWER BELT IN THE CORRECT INITIAL POSITION. After adjusting the amount of cooling belt shifting to be within the normal range, check if both upper and lower cooling belts are set in the correct initial position. How to check the position of the upper belt. Step 1. Rotate the paper cooling belt (upper) about 5 times. Then, check if the edge of the paper cooling belt (upper) [A] is between the two lines engraved on the roller.



If the edge of the paper cooling belt (upper) [A] is not between the two lines engraved on the roller, the upper belt can be moved as explained below. To move the paper cooling belt (upper), rotate the belt centering roller motor (upper) manually. Insert your hand and adjust the position of the upper belt centering roller sensor home position plate [A] with your finger as shown in the following pictures.

[1]:If you rotate the sensor home position plate [A] to this direction, the paper cooling belt (upper) moves to the rear when you rotate the upper belt manually to the direction [B] [2]:If you rotate the sensor home position plate [A] to this direction, the paper cooling belt (upper) moves to the front when you rotate the upper belt manually to the direction [B] NOTE: Rotate the paper cooling belt (upper) about 5 times. Then, check if the edge of the paper cooling belt (upper) is at the correct position.

View from the front View from the rear

(2) (1)

[A]

View from the rear

[B]



How to check the position of the lower belt Step1. Rotate the paper cooling belt (lower) about 5 times. Then, check if the edge of paper cooling belt (lower) [A] is between the two lines engraved on the roller.

If the edge of the paper cooling belt (lower) [A] is not between the two lines engraved on the roller, the belt can be moved as shown on the next page.



To move the paper cooling belt (lower), rotate the belt centering roller motor (lower) manually.

Step 1: Insert your finger into the opening [A] and adjust the position of the lower belt centering roller sensor home position plate [B]

[A]

[B]



[1]: If you rotate the sensor home position plate [A] to this direction, the paper cooling belt (lower) moves to the front when you rotate the lower belt manually to the direction [B] [2]: If you rotate the sensor home position plate [A] to this direction, the paper cooling belt (lower) moves to the rear when you rotate the lower belt manually to the direction [B]

NOTE: Rotate the paper cooling belt (lower) about 5 times. Then, check if the edge of the paper cooling belt (lower) is at the correct position. IMPORTANT After confirming the upper and lower belt positions, be sure to return the upper belt centering roller sensor home position plate and lower belt centering roller sensor home position plate to the initial position. (See the procedures on pg 2 and 7 of this RTB). Otherwise, SC517-01 (Belt Centering Roller (Upper) HP Error) or SC517-02 (Belt Centering Roller (Lower) HP Error) may appear when the main power turned ON.

View from the front

[A]

[B]


Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 1-Jul-15 No.: RM205067

Subject: Technical Training Package Correction: Components Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

Correction of the Technical Training Package:

Image Transfer Unit - Components - slide #396

The six ITB cleaning HVPs were described as components used for each color (YMCK), but this is incorrect.

These components are used for the ITB cleaning sub unit#1, #2 and #3.

Please apply the corrections highlighted in red.

1. Image Transfer Roller 2. Paper Transfer DC Power Pack 3. ITB Cleaning HVP (-) (M, Y) for ITB cleaning collection roller of ITB cleaning sub

unit#1



4. Paper Transfer AC Power Pack 5. TDRB 6. ITB Cleaning HVP (-) (K, C) for ITB cleaning roller of ITB cleaning sub unit#1 7. Transfer Power Pack 8. ITB Belt Speed Sensor 9. ITB Drive Roller 10. ITB Cleaning HVP (+) (K) for ITB cleaning roller of ITB cleaning sub unit#2 11. ITB Cleaning HVP (+) (C) for ITB cleaning collection roller of ITB cleaning sub

unit#2 12. Paper Transfer Bias Roller 13. ITB Cleaning HVP (+) (M) for ITB cleaning roller of ITB cleaning sub unit #3 14. ITB Cleaning HVP (+) (Y) for ITB cleaning collection roller of ITB cleaning sub

unit#3 15. Belt Centering Roller

Reference 1

There are three ITB cleaning sub units ( ) in the ITB cleaning unit. Each unit contains an ITB cleaning roller, an ITB cleaning collection roller, and an ITB cleaning blade. The material of the ITB cleaning roller is different for each unit. In ITB cleaning sub

unit it is a black colored brush roller, in unit it is a gray colored brush roller, and in

unit it is a sponge roller. Therefore, the three ITB cleaning sub units are not interchangeable. (See relating RTB#RM205030a for more in detail).



Reference 2 The reason why (-) HVP is applied to ITB cleaning sub unit#1, (+) HVP is applied to ITB cleaning sub unit#2 and #3 (1) Remaining toner on the ITB after the image was transferred will be charged (-) by the

(-) HVP applied to ITB cleaning sub unit#1. (2) (-) charged remaining toner will be attracted to the cleaning sub unit #2, which is

charged (+) by the (+) HVP applied to ITB cleaning unit#2. Then the remaining toner will be cleaned off by the cleaning roller and cleaning collection roller of the ITB cleaning unit#2.

(3) In case some of the collected (-) toner on the cleaning roller of sub unit#2 is attracted to

ITB again, cleaning roller and cleaning collection roller of (+) charged sub unit#3 cleans off the remaining toner on the ITB again.

This is the reason why (-) HVP is applied to ITB cleaning sub unit#1 and (+) HVP is applied to ITB cleaning sub unit#2 and #3



Subject: Time stamp in the GW log for investgations on image quality issues




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other (Instruction for Operator)

Action required



Tier 2

How to insert a time stamp in the GW log for investigations on image quality issues

For the benefit of prompt and effective investigations on image quality issues, please instruct the operators of the following procedure on how to insert a time stamp in the GW log. with the time stamp inserted in the GW log, detailed machine status at the time of problem occurrence can be identified.

Procedure When the image quality issue is confirmed, press Reset Key [A] Clear Key [B] Start Button [C] on the operation panel. The three buttons must be pressed within 5 seconds.

[A]

NA/Asia model

[B]

[C]

EU model [A]

[B]

[C]


Reissued: 2-Nov-15

Model: Andromeda-P1 Date:15-Jul--15 No.: RM205069a


Application of multiple fusing units per mainframe

On the ProC9100/9110 series, a maximum of four fusing units can be registered per mainframe with a separate PM counter for each fusing unit.

Fusing unit 1 : Originally installed at the factory Fusing unit 2, 3 & 4 : Optional

The purpose of this feature is to prevent unwanted lines from appearing on the prints, an image quality issue caused by a scratched fusing belt. Constantly printing on same paper size eventually causes the paper edges to scratch the fusing belt, resulting in the problem when printed on paper of a larger size. Therefore, users can apply multiple fusing units and assign units by paper size.

Note: The optional fusing unit (procured as ‘TCRU C or D’) does not have the fusing belt smoothing roller unit and cleaning unit. Procure these two units separately and install them on the optional fusing unit.

Decal for managing the PM counters for each fusing unit

Two decals (p/n: M205 3981) are supplied as accessories to the optional fusing unit. Attach one to the fusing unit originally installed at the factory and the other to the optional fusing unit and circle the fusing unit number (1~4) on the decals to distinguish the units. Details are described in Steps 23~30 of the procedure on the following pages.

Procedure

Subject: Management procedure of multiple fusing units Prepared by: Takezoh Miyamoto



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other

Action required



Tier 2 Tier 0.5

Attach the decal here.

Cleaning web counter value

Belt smoothing roller counter value

Fusing unit counter value

Indicates the Adjustment for Skilled Operators menu items. Enter the menu and transcribe the counter values to the decal using a ball-point pen or a marker when swapping the fusing unit. Use an eraser to renew the counter values.

Circle the fusing unit number. (This is an example.)


Reissued: 2-Nov-15


Part 1: Removing the fusing unit (Steps 1~8)

Part 2: Installing the fusing belt smoothing roller unit and cleaning unit on the optional fusing unit (Steps 9~22)

Part 3: Transcribing the counter values from the Skilled Operators menu to the decal (Steps 23~30)

1. Open both front doors [A] and [B] of the left unit.

2. Rotate the handle [A] counter-clockwise and pull out the fusing unit [B] until it stops (service position 1).


Reissued: 2-Nov-15


3. Press the rail release levers [A] and [B], and pull out the fusing unit [C] again until it stops (service position 2).

4. Remove the screw, pull the black lever [A], and press down the purple TCRU lever. (Screw ×1)

NOTE: Pressing the purple lever unlocks the cleaning web contact cam unit [A].


Reissued: 2-Nov-15


5. Remove the TCRU screw, and then slide the lever to the left.

6. Hold the grip and remove the cleaning web contact cam unit [A] by sliding it to the left.

(Screw ×2)


Reissued: 2-Nov-15


7. Attach the purple TCRU handle to the fusing unit.

8. Remove the fusing unit and gently place it on a strong and flat surface. (If placing on a

table, you may want to spread a few sheets of paper to prevent scratches.) NOTE: The fusing unit is heavy. Two persons are required to remove the fusing unit.

The fusing unit shown from the next step is the fusing unit to be replaced with.

Brand new fusing units procured as TCRU set C or D do not have the fusing belt smoothing roller unit and cleaning unit. (Procure these units separately.)

Steps 9-15 describe the procedure for installing the fusing belt smoothing roller unit and cleaning unit. Skip these steps when swapping with a fusing unit that has already been registered.

9. Open the fusing cover [A].


Reissued: 2-Nov-15


10. Hold the grip and install the fusing belt smoothing roller unit [A].

11. Fasten the screws to fix the fusing belt smoothing roller unit [A]. (Screw ×3)

12. Remove the fusing entrance guide plate [A]. (Screw ×2)

13. Install the fusing cleaning unit [A] by holding the grips and tilting the unit upward.


Reissued: 2-Nov-15


14. Re-install the fusing guide plate [A]

NOTE: Re-install carefully and do not scratch the fusing belt.

15. Gently place the fusing unit on its rails by referring to the marks indicated on the

covers.

NOTE: Do not release the unit from a height or put weight on the unit. 16. Remove the purple TCRU handle from the fusing unit.


Reissued: 2-Nov-15


17. Install the cleaning web contact cam unit at an angle and slide it toward the non-operator side.

NOTE: Rotate the purple TCRU knob as you slide the unit toward the non-operator side so that the shaft connects to the coupling.

18. Slide the lever to the right, and then fasten the TCRU screw (x1).


Reissued: 2-Nov-15


19. Pull up the lever and confirm that the pin is in the hole. Then fasten the TCRU screw (x1).

NG: The pin is not in the hole. OK: The pin is in the hole.

20. Press the release levers [A] and [B] and push the fusing unit [C] into the mainframe.


Reissued: 2-Nov-15


21. Press down the ‘E1’ plate and turn the ‘D1’ lever clockwise.

22. Close the front doors.

23. From the operation panel, enter the Adjustment Setting for Skilled Operators menu and press ‘Administrator login.’

24. Press ‘05 Machine: Maintenance.’ From 2/2 of the menu, select ‘521: Counter Setting for Fusing Unit Replacement.’


Reissued: 2-Nov-15


25. Make sure that the fusing unit number in #0521 001 is for the unit you just removed from the mainframe (in Step 8). Then, transcribe the current page counter values of #521 010 (fusing unit page counter), 016 (belt smoothing roller) and 017 (cleaning web) onto the decal.

26. Press ‘Fusing Unit No.’


Reissued: 2-Nov-15


27. Specify the fusing unit that has been installed and press OK.

28. Enter 0521: Counter Setting for Fusing Unit Replacement again. At this step, the

counter values shown are still for the previously installed fusing unit. Press ‘Back’ to display the counter values for the currently installed fusing unit.

29. Make sure the values are updated.

Ed

Sticky Note

This example shows that all the counters are 0, so this is a new fusing unit. If you installed a unit that had been used before, you would see counter values that would correctly show the use of that fusing unit


Reissued: 2-Nov-15


30. Exit the Adjustment Settings for Skilled Operators menu.

Finished.



Important Notice Regarding Part Number of the Development Unit The development unit was originally common for all colors, but has been separated with three different part numbers, one each for K, C/M and Y. The difference is the development roller, which is scrupulously examined and selected for the appropriate stations to achieve better control over color/density.

Part Number Description

M2052316 PCU:ANDROMEDA:BK:ASS'Y

(Development Unit: for K)

M2052317 PCU:ANDROMEDA:CM:ASS'Y

(Development Unit for C and M)

M2052318 PCU:ANDROMEDA:Y:ASS'Y

(Development Unit for Y)

NOTE:

1. The three development units are physically interchangeable, but are different in the anti-radial run-out reliability, which is high to low in the following order:

M/C K Y NEVER use the development units of the wrong color. Doing so will cause uneven

colors. 2. Identification decals are attached to the development units as shown below.

Subject: Part Number of the Development Unit Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

K M/C Y


Reissued: 6-Oct-15


RTB Reissue The items in bold italics were changed

This RTB consists of two types of information. INFORMATION FOR TECHNICIANS ONLY (page 1/9 through 2/9) INFORMATION FOR TCRU/ORU USERS (page 3/9 through 9/9)

(this is also reference information for Technicians) This bulletin smmarizes the following procedures regarding the Browser Option (included in the TCRU/ORU Type S4 Set A) for the service and user manuals.

Browser option installation procedure (for service technicians) Setting the browser option icon on the operation panel (for TCRU/ORU users) Setting up the browser feature (for TCRU/ORU users) Uninstalling the EXJS (Extended JavaScript) (for TCRU/ORU users) Note that the browser feature is activated by the SD card, so the SD card must always be inserted in the card slot (option slot). The EXJS is installed on the HDD once, after it is downloaded from the SD card.

Subject: Browser Option Installation Procedure Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive


Action required



Tier 2 Tier 0.5

Contents of the browser option SD card

Browser

EXJS

Web browsing HTML printing Network communication

Ricoh original extended JavaScript

SD Card


Reissued: 6-Oct-15


INFORMATION FOR TECHNICIANS ONLY Browser option installation procedure 1. Turn off the main power switch and unplug the power cords. 2. Remove the SD card slot cover [A]. (screw x1; controller box mounted on the back

side of the imaging section) 3. Insert the SD card containing the "Browser Option" into the upper slot [A] (1 Option

Slot). Reattach the SD card slot cover. (screw x1)


Reissued: 6-Oct-15


INFORMATION FOR TCRU/ORU USERS. "How to use the Browser Option (included in the TCRU/ORU Type S4 Set A)

NOTE: Contact your service representative for installing the browser option SD card in your printer.

Setting the browser option icon on the operation panel. 1. Plug in the power cords and turn the main power switch ON. 2. Press the [User Tools] key on the operation panel. 3. Confirm that the "Browser Feature" button [A] appears on the screen. 4. Press the [Extended Feature Settings] button [B].

5. Press the [Extended Feature Settings] button [A].

[A]

[B]

[A]


Reissued: 6-Oct-15


6. Confirm that the "Extended JS" application [A] appears next to the Startup Setting tab.

7. Turn the main power switch OFF/ON. 8. Press the [User Tools] key. 9. Press the [Edit Home] button [A].

[A]

[A]


Reissued: 6-Oct-15


10. Press the [Add Icon] button [A]. 11. In the [Application] tab, press the Browser icon [A].

[A]

[A]


Reissued: 6-Oct-15


12. Press the [Blank] button [A] to select the destination of the browser icon. 13. Press [Exit]. 14. Confirm that the browser icon [A] has been added on the home screen.

[A]

[A]


Reissued: 6-Oct-15


INFORMATION FOR TCRU/ORU USERS. Setting up the browser 1. Press the "User Tools" key on the operation panel. 2. Select "Browser Features" [A].

3. Make the browser settings according to the network environment of the site.

NOTE: Be sure to specify the following URL as the Home Screen.

http://www.ricoh.com/support/

The Knowledge Base site and TCRU/ORU manuals can be viewed from the above website for key operators. Contact your service representative for the procedure on how to log in to the key operator site.

[A]

http://www.ricoh.com/support/


Reissued: 6-Oct-15


INFORMATION FOR TCRU/ORU USERS. Uninstalling the EXJS (Extended JavaScript) 1. Turn the main power switch ON. 2. Press the [User Tools] key on the operation panel. 3. Press the [Extended Feature Settings] button [A].

4. Press the [Extended Feature Settings] button [A].

[A]

[A]


Reissued: 6-Oct-15


5. Select the "Uninstall" tab [A], then the EXJS (Extended JavaScript) button [B].

6. Press “Yes” at the message "Are you sure you want to uninstall the following extended

feature?"

NOTE: "Uninstalling the extended feature...Please wait" will appear during the uninstallation process.

7. After "Completed" appears, turn the main power switch OFF. 8. Remove the SD card from the card slot.

NOTE: Contact your service representative for removing the SD card. The browser option can be removed only by taking out the SD card from the card slot.

[A]

[B]

Ed

Sticky Note

As mentioned on the 1st page of this RTB, the SD card slot cover should be removed with a normal screw driver. Only a technician can use a normal screw driver on the machine.


Reissued: 11-Nov-16

Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 30-Jul-15 No.: RM205072e


Subject: Firmware Release Note: MediaLibEUa AB Prepared by: H. Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




This RTB has been issued to announce the firmware release information for the MediaLibEUa AB.


13 M2381915_R13 - Not available





6 M2381915_R6 1st Mass production Not available



13 [R13] - Paper Weight values were modified from "135" to "162" for the

following: RE_00517

- "Notes" were revised for the following media:

RE_00517 - The media name was corrected.

RE_00517 - "Paper Feed Mode (Adjust Fan Level)" were modified from "0" to "2"

for the following: RE_00517

12 [R12] - 1 new media were added to the media list.

RE_00517 - Bulky media test results are added:

RE_00001 - "Notes" were revised for the following media:

RE_00021, RE_00265


Reissued: 11-Nov-16



- Bulky media test results are added RE_00030, RE_00031

- "Evalution with Actual Machine" was corrected from "Y" to "-" for the

following: RE_00021, RE_00022, RE_00226, RE_00228, RE_00263, RE_00266, RE_00267, RE_00271, RE_00273, RE_00274, RE_00275, RE_00285, RE_00286, RE_00287

- 1 new media were added to the media libraly.

11 [R11] - Bulky media test results are added

RE_00082, RE_00199, RE_00213, RE_00214 [R10] - Bulky media test results are added

RE_00039, RE_00039A, RE_00049, RE_00058, RE_00065, RE_00073, RE_00077, RE_00078, RE_00089, RE_00090, RE_00099, RE_00100, RE_00105, RE_00109, RE_00110, RE_00114, RE_00116, RE_00117, RE_00125, RE_00126, RE_00136, RE_00149, RE_00169, RE_00170, RE_00171, RE_00172, RE_00181, RE_00202, RE_00229, RE_00232, RE_00235, RE_00240, RE_00241, RE_00247, RE_00298, RE_00312


RE_00244, RE_00426, RE_00427 - The value of "Load_upper_limit_selection" for Paper Weight 1, 2 and 3 was

changed form 1 to 0.


RE_00028, RE_00029, RE_00030, RE_00031, RE_00040, RE_00040A, RE_00042, RE_00044, RE_00054, RE_00059, RE_00060, RE_00069, RE_00104, RE_00121, RE_00122, RE_00153, RE_00153A, RE_00154, RE_00154A, RE_00200

- Paper Weight was corrected from "Wt.1" to "Wt.4" for the following:

RE_00136

8 [R8] - Add "Fuser Belt Smoothing Execution Pattern" Setting (SetValue: 1) - Change Generic name - Moses data are newly added.

RE00021, RE00022 - Delete duplicate entry

mondi_color copy 300gsm - Bulky media test results are added

RE_00294,RE_00022 to RE00431


Reissued: 11-Nov-16



[R7] Add the following media in Paper Library - POD Gloss 128gsm Deleted the following media - RE_00167, RE_00291, RE_00295, RE_00296, RE_00297, RE_00306,

RE_00307, RE_00308, RE_00309, RE_00310, RE_00311 Moses data are corrected in the following media - RE_00109, RE_00110, RE_00204, RE_00285, RE_00286, RE_00292,

RE_00298 Changed index number - RE_00290 -> RE_00250 Corrected Moses data - RE_00109, RE_00110

6 1st Mass production


Reissued: 11-Nov-16



Subject: Firmware Release Note: MediaLibEUb AB Prepared by: H. Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




This RTB has been issued to announce the firmware release information for the MediaLibEUb AB.










13 [R13] - Paper Weight values were modified from "135" to "162" for the

following: RE_00517


RE_00517 - The media name was corrected.

RE_00517 - "Paper Feed Mode (Adjust Fan Level)" were modified from "0" to "2"

for the following: RE_00517

12 [R12] - 1 new media were added to the media list.

RE_00517 - Bulky media test results are added:


RE_00021, RE_00265


Reissued: 11-Nov-16



- Bulky media test results are added RE_00030, RE_00031

- "Evalution with Actual Machine" was corrected from "Y" to "-" for the

following: RE_00021, RE_00022, RE_00226, RE_00228, RE_00263, RE_00266, RE_00267, RE_00271, RE_00273, RE_00274, RE_00275, RE_00285, RE_00286, RE_00287

- 1 new media were added to the media libraly.


RE_00082, RE_00199, RE_00213, RE_00214 [R10] - Bulky media test results are added

RE_00039, RE_00039A, RE_00049, RE_00058, RE_00065, RE_00073, RE_00077, RE_00078, RE_00089, RE_00090, RE_00099, RE_00100, RE_00105, RE_00109, RE_00110, RE_00114, RE_00116, RE_00117, RE_00125, RE_00126, RE_00136, RE_00149, RE_00169, RE_00170, RE_00171, RE_00172, RE_00181, RE_00202, RE_00229, RE_00232, RE_00235, RE_00240, RE_00241, RE_00247, RE_00298, RE_00312





RE_00028, RE_00029, RE_00030, RE_00031, RE_00040, RE_00040A, RE_00042, RE_00044, RE_00054, RE_00059, RE_00060, RE_00069, RE_00104, RE_00121, RE_00122, RE_00153, RE_00153A, RE_00154, RE_00154A, RE_00200


RE_00136




RE_00294, RE_00022 to RE00431


Reissued: 11-Nov-16



[R7] Add the following media in Paper Library - POD Gloss 128gsm Deleted the following media - RE_00167, RE_00291, RE_00295, RE_00296, RE_00297, RE_00306,

RE_00307, RE_00308, RE_00309, RE_00310, RE_00311 Moses data are corrected in the following media - RE_00109, RE_00110, RE_00204, RE_00285, RE_00286, RE_00292,

RE_00298 Changed index number - RE_00290 -> RE_00250 Corrected Moses data - RE_00109, RE_00110



Reissued: 2-Mar-16

Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 30-Jul-15 No.: RM205074b

RTB Reissue

Description in bold and italic has been newly added or corrected.

Revision b: Description and captured image on page 5/6 and 6/6 have been replaced.

SYMPTOM

SC694-01 (Data Transfer Unit: Ready notification timeout) occurs when turning ON the machine power.

CAUSE 1

The symptom is observed under the following condition:

The power synchronization feature on the Fiery controller is disabled.

When the power synchronization feature is disabled, the Fiery controller is not powered on exactly in sync with the engine, but after a slight delay. This causes a delay in the calibration calculation because the image data is not transferred from the controller to the DTU, resulting in the timeout.

See the next page for the recommended action to resolve the problem.

Subject: Troubleshooting SC694-01 (Data Transfer Unit: Ready notification timeout)

Prepared by: Takezoh Miyamoto



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2


Reissued: 2-Mar-16


ACTION for CAUSE 1

Enable the power synchronization feature by following the procedure below.

1. Turn OFF the power on both engine and Fiery controller.

2. Locate the power synchronization switch at the non-operator side of the Fiery controller, and set the switch to the ON position.

IMPORTANT: Make sure the power is turned OFF on both engine and controller.

3. Turn the engine power ON and confirm that the Fiery controller activates simultaneously.

4. Confirm that the symptom (SC694-01) was resolved.


Reissued: 2-Mar-16


CAUSE 2

The DTU did not receive the calibration data from the Fiery controller within 420 seconds after the DTU was activated, because the engine detected an error in the calibration data, resulting in a time-out.

In this case, the SC occurs approximately 420 seconds after powering up every time.

In detail Shown below is the calibration graph indicating the target and measured density curves. (The thin line indicates the measured density, and the bold line indicates the target density.) In incorrect calibration data (bottom right), the target density curve is not constantly increasing, but decreases at one point.

Good Bad


Reissued: 2-Mar-16


ACTION for CAUSE 2

Delete the calibration setting that contains invalid data by following the procedure below. 1. In Command WorkStation, go to [Device Center].

2. In the [General] tab, select [Tools] and click [Manage] for [Calibrate] to open the [Calibrator] screen.


Reissued: 2-Mar-16


3. Select a newly created calibration setting from the list and click [View Measurements].

4. Confirm that the target density curves (bold lines) are constantly increasing.

Good Bad


Reissued: 2-Mar-16


5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for all newly created calibration settings.

For the newly created calibration settings in which the density curve is not constantly increasing, delete that setting by selecting it from the list and clicking [Delete].

NOTE: 1. Do not try to delete default calibration settings. They are locked and cannot be deleted. 2. The captured image below shows the case when deleting the newly created calibration setting "Plain #1".


Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 4-Aug-15 No.: RM205075

Subject: Temporary Developer Replacement Procedure Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

Important Notice Regarding Developer Replacement

The current Engine firmware DOES NOT support the following SP functions pertaining to developer replacement:

1. TC reduction/stabilization (SP3-028-XXX) 2. Emptying (SP3-022-XXX) and filling (SP3-025-XXX) the developer

The above limitations will be resolved in the following Engine firmware:

1. TC reduction/stabilization : December 2015 2. Emptying/Filling developer : September 2015

SYMPTOM

Described below are the symptoms observed when emptying old developer and filling new developer according to the procedure described in the service manual with the current engine firmware.

1. TC down function (SP3-028-001 to 006) never starts even though the "Execute" button is pressed. Therefore, this functions never ends. 2. In the case of a failure during developer emission.

(1) During the developer emission function. SP3-022-XXX (Developer Emission: Exe) starts and looks like it functions.

However, "failed" appears after around 3 minutes. If you check the results with SP3-023-001(Developer Emission: Exe Result),

"2" (No developer exited) is displayed. (2) During the developer fill after developer emission failure. If you perform SP3-024-XXX (Developer Fill: Exe), "failed" appears. If you check the results with SP3-025-001(Developer Fill: Exe Result), "2"

(No developer exited) is displayed. 3. In the case of a failure during the developer fill function.

SP3-024-XXX (Developer Fill: Exe) starts and looks like it functions. However, "failed" appears after around 1 minute.

If you check the results with SP3-025-001(Developer Fill: Exe Result), "3" (No developer entered) is displayed.



TEMPORARY SOLUTION Refer to the APPENDIX on page 5 to see the flowchart showing the whole procedure. 1. Reducing/stabilizing the TC (TD sensor output Vt)

1-1. Check the latest TD Sensor Output (Vt) in SP3-210-001 ~ 004 for the color

requiring the developer replacement.

SP3-210-001: TD.Sens:Vt :Disp Current K SP3-210-002: TD.Sens:Vt :Disp Current C SP3-210-003: TD.Sens:Vt :Disp Current M SP3-210-004: TD.Sens:Vt :Disp Current Y If the value is 2.9V or greater, go to step 2: Emptying/Filling the Developer.

If the value is smaller than 2.9V, go to step 1-2.

1-2. Change the Toner Supply Type from “2: PID (factory default)” to “0: FIXED” in SP3-440-XXX for the color requiring the developer replacement.

SP3-400-001: Selects Toner Supply Type: K SP3-400-002: Selects Toner Supply Type: C SP3-400-003: Selects Toner Supply Type: M SP3-400-004: Selects Toner Supply Type: Y

1-3. Change the Fixed Toner Supply Rate from “5% (factory default)” to “0%” for the color requiring the developer replacement.

SP3-440-001: Fixed Rate: K SP3-440-002: Fixed Rate: C SP3-440-003: Fixed Rate: M SP3-440-004: Fixed Rate: Y

1-4. Select and print the Full Dot Pattern in SP2-109-003 to reduce the toner concentration level for the color requiring the developer replacement. The number of copies will depend on the Vt from step 1-1.

Vt [V] SP3-210-XXX

Number of copies

A3 or DLT (SEF) A4 or LT (LEF)

2.9 ~ 2.7 30 60

2.7 ~ 2.5 40 80

2.5 ~ 2.3 50 100

NOTE: A3/DLT(SEF) or A4/LT(LEF), whichever is OK.

How to print out the full dot pattern

(1) Select "26" (Full Dot Pattern) in SP2-109-003 (Test Pattern / Pattern Selection).



(2) Specify the color requiring the developer replacement by inputting 8 digits in SP2-109-005 (Test Pattern / Color Selection 4bBkCyMaYe).

K : 00 00 10 00 C : 00 00 01 00 M : 00 00 00 10 Y : 00 00 00 01

How to change the digits

Pressing the number key "0" on the operation panel toggles the 1st digit (from far right) between "0" and "1".

Pressing the number key "1" on the operation panel toggles the 2nd digit (from far right) between "0" and "1".

Pressing the number key "2" on the operation panel toggles the 3rd digit (from far right) between "0" and "1".

and so forth......

(3) Press the "APL window" button on the SP screen. DO NOT exit from the SP mode.

(4) Run any print job from the EFI controller. Set the same number of copies as done for the Full Dot Pattern.

1-5. Execute SP3-011-001(Manual Process Control) and check the Vt in SP3-210-001

~ 004 again for the color requiring the developer replacement.

SP3-210-001: TD.Sens:Vt :Disp Current K SP3-210-002: TD.Sens:Vt :Disp Current C SP3-210-003: TD.Sens:Vt :Disp Current M SP3-210-004: TD.Sens:Vt :Disp Current Y

If the value is 2.9V or greater, go to step 2. If the value is smaller than 2.9V, repeat steps 1-2 ~ 1~5.

NOTE: Be sure to execute SP3-011-001 (Manual Process Control) after printing

out the Full Dot Pattern.



2. Emptying/Filling the Developer

Before carrying out the following procedure, change the “Toner Supply Type” and “Fixed Toner Supply Rate” back to “2: PID (factory default)” and “5% (factory default)” in SP3-400-XXX and SP3-440-XXX for the color requiring the developer replacement.

SP3-400-001: Selects Toner Supply Type: K SP3-400-002: Selects Toner Supply Type: C SP3-400-003: Selects Toner Supply Type: M SP3-400-004: Selects Toner Supply Type: Y SP3-440-001: Fixed Rate: K SP3-440-002: Fixed Rate: C SP3-440-003: Fixed Rate: M SP3-440-004: Fixed Rate: Y

2-1. Make the following SP settings.

SP3-022-013 (Developer Emission /Setup: Emission Vt) : 5 [V] SP3-024-016 (Developer Fill/ Setup Emission Vt) : 5 [V] SP3-024-017 (Developer Fill/ Setup Fill Vt) : 0 [V]

2-2. Execute SP3-022-XXX to empty the developer requiring the replacement.

SP3-022-003 (Developer Emission: Execute K) SP3-022-004 (Developer Emission: Execute C) SP3-022-005 (Developer Emission: Execute M) SP3-022-006 (Developer Emission: Execute Y)

2-3. Check the results in SP 3-023-001 (Developer Emission: Exe Result).

If the results show “1111”, developer has been emptied successfully for all colors.

If a figure other than “1" is displayed, execute SP3-022-XXX for that color.

NOTE: See the SP3-023 table in the Field Service Manual for the denotations of the error codes.

2-4. Execute SP3-024-XXX to fill the developer requiring replacement.

SP3-024-003 (Developer Fill: Execute K) SP3-024-004 (Developer Fill: Execute C) SP3-024-005 (Developer Fill: Execute M) SP3-024-006 (Developer Fill: Execute Y)



2-5. Check the results in SP 3-025-001 (Developer Fill: Exe Result).

If the results show “1111”, developer has been filled successfully for all colors.

If a figure other than "1" is displayed, execute SP3-030-XXX (TD sensor initialization) for that color.

SP3-030-003 (Init TD Sensor: Execute K) SP3-030-004 (Init TD Sensor: Execute C) SP3-030-005 (Init TD Sensor: Execute M) SP3-030-006 (Init TD Sensor: Execute Y)

APPENDIX

This is a flow chart outlining the procedures described in this bulletin.

Step 1

Is the value in SP3-210-XXX

(Current TD sensor output Vt)

2.9 V or greater?

Steps 1-2 ~ 1-4

Reduce/stabilize the TC (TD sensor output

Vt)　

Confirm that “Toner Supply Type” and

“Fixed Toner Supply Rate” are both set to

the factory default.

Start

NO

YES

Finish

Step 1-5

Execute Manual Process Control

Steps 2-1 ~ 2-6

Emptying and filling the developer



Subject: Manual Correction: SC670-00, SC990-00 Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

Service Manual Correction Please add the following information to the following section in your service manual.

6. Troubleshooting > SC600 (Controller)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC670-00 D

Engine start up error

The ready signal from the BCU board is not detected.

Signal between the controller board and BCU board is defective.

Defective PSU. Defective BCU board.

Confirm the harness connection between the controller board and BCU board.

Replace the PSU. Replace the BCU board.

6. Troubleshooting > SC900 (Controller)


SC990-00 D

Software performance error

The software makes an unexpected operation.

Defective software Defective controller Software error.

1. Turn the main switch off and on. 2. Reinstall the controller and/or engine main

firmware.


Reissued: 29-Nov-17

Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 7-Aug-15 No.: RM205077a

RTB Reissue The items in bold italics were changed or added.

SYMPTOM

Grainy images especially under the following conditions:

Full color image that contains an area composed of Black toner half tone.

Low density areas in half tone image.

CAUSE

A sufficient amount of toner is not transferred to paper due to either or both of the following:

Deterioration of the developer

Moisture content of the paper is too high

For the above reasons, the risk of the problem is higher under the following conditions:

When printing after the machine was left unused for an extended period. Developer has deteriorated while the machine was left unused.

When printing after continuous printing of low coverage/duty jobs. Developer has deteriorated while running low coverage/duty jobs.

Paper is not stored in proper conditions, for example, not sealed in a bag. Coated paper is especially affected easily, because its electric resistance is low and moisture absorption causes further reduction of the resistance.

Subject: Troubleshooting Grainy Images Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive


Action required



Tier 2


Reissued: 29-Nov-17


ACTION

1. Change the "Halftone mode print option" setting on the Fiery controller as follows.

Screen type: "dot" "line" Screen number: "200" "175" Example: "200 dot + fine text" (default) "175 line"

If the print quality is accepted, the procedure is complete. If the print quality is not accepted, do step 2.

2. If the paper was stored in a bad condition, replace with a new paper stock.


3. Check the value in SP3820-011 (Toner Refresh Mode / K Amount) to decide whether the

toner inside the development unit needs to be refreshed or not.

If the value is 10,000 mm or larger, do step 4. (step 4 is especially effective in case the value is 20,000 mm or larger)

If the value is smaller than 10,000 mm, do step 5. 4. Refresh the toner inside the development unit using the following procedure.

4-1. Change SP 3032-021(Cleaning Setup Exe / A4 Page Cover) from 6 (default) to 16. NOTE: This setting determines the number of A4 full coverage pages created for

Cleaning Initial setup.

4-2. Execute "Cleaning Initial Setting for Paper Transfer Unit."

NOTE: Execute the above three or four times.

See the following section of the TCRU/ORU manual:

4. Details of Menu Items in Adjustment Settings for Skilled Operators > Setting Values: Adjustment Settings for Skilled Operators > 05: Machine: Maintenance


Reissued: 29-Nov-17


4-3. Return the SP 3032-021 setting back to 6 (default).

NOTE: Trained operators can only perform step 4-2. Instruct the operator to execute "Cleaning Initial Setting for Paper Transfer Unit" five times or ten times.


5. Increase the Image Transfer Current.

For generic paper, increase the transfer current by 10 micro amps in SP2451-XXX [Set:ITB K:Standard: FC] for the paper in use. Example: 60 70 For custom paper, go to IMSS "Advanced Settings" and increase the value in "023: Image Transfer Current: FC: Black."

IMPORTANT The Adjustment Settings for Skilled Operators and SP do not synchronize when a

setting has been changed on either side. See RTB #RM205024 for details.


4. Details of Menu Items in Advanced Settings > Setting Values: Advanced Settings > Machine Image Quality" in "Operating Instructions Adjustment Item Menu Guide: TCRU/ORU


Reissued: 29-Nov-17


Possible side effects caused by increasing the image transfer current:

Density at paper edges may decrease in Black toner full coverage images. Residual image may remain on OPC drum. Tone balance of color images may change. Leaking image transfer may occur in a low temperature and low humidity

environment. If the print quality is accepted, the procedure is complete. If the print quality is not accepted, do step 6.

6. Decrease the value of AC transfer mode: Current: LE, if there is a grainy image

within 30 mm of the leading edge. For generic paper, decrease the value of AC transfer mode current in SP2653-XXXX [L Edge Coeff:FC] and SP2-855-xxx [PTR AC:L Edge Coeff:DC: FC] for the paper in use. Example: 140 100. For custom paper, go to IMSS "Advanced Settings" and decrease the value in "045: Paper Transfer Current: LE: FC" and "064: AC Transfer Mode: Current: LE: FC".

Ed

Sticky Note

Step#4 (#4-1 through #4-3) is written for Technicians, who can change the SP settings. In steps #4-1 and #4-3, SP3032-021 should be changed and then returned to the original setting. On the other hand, the NOTE attached in #4-3 is reference information in case a trained customer needs to refresh the toner inside the development unit.

Ed

Rectangle


Reissued: 29-Nov-17


7. Decrease the absolute value of the Paper Transfer Current. For generic paper, decrease the value in the following SP: SP2651-XXX [PTR Bias:FC: Side1] SP2652-XXX [PTR Bias:FC: Side2] SP2852-XXX [PTR AC: DC: FC: Side1] SP2853-XXX [PTR AC: DC: FC: Side2]

For custom paper, go to IMSS "Advanced Settings" and decrease the absolute value by 10 micro amps in "043, 044, 058 and 059. Example: -114 -104

Ed

Sticky Note

Decrease the absolute value by 10 microamps, as for custom paper.


Reissued: 29-Nov-17



4. Details of Menu Items in Advanced Settings > Setting Values: Advanced Settings > Machine Image Quality" in "Operating Instructions Adjustment Item Menu Guide: TCRU/ORU

Possible side effects caused by decreasing the absolute value of the paper transfer current:

The hue of the color may appear incorrect in areas where two or more colors are overlapping.

If the print quality is accepted, the procedure is complete. If the print quality is not accepted, contact your supervisor.

IMPORTANT

The Adjustment Settings for Skilled Operators and SP do not synchronize when a setting has been changed on either side.

See RTB #RM205024 for details.


Reissued: 29-Nov-17


APPENDIX: This is a flowchart outlining the procedures in this bulletin.

Is the print quality accepted?

1. Change the "Halftone mode print option" on the Fiery controller as

follows:

Screen type: from "dot" to "line"

Screen number: from "200" to "175"

START

NO

YES

2. If the paper was stored in a bad condition, replace with a new paper

stock.

3. Check the value in SP3820-011 (Toner Refresh Mode / K Amount) To

decide whether the toner inside the development unit needs to be

refreshed or not.

4. Refresh the toner inside the development unit.

5. Increase the image transfer current.

6: Decrease the absolute value of the paper transfer current.

Contact your supervisor.


Is the value in SP3820-001 ‘10,000 mm’ or greater?



Is the print quality accepted? FINISH

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

YES

YES

NO

If there is a grainy image within 30 mm of leading edge, decrease the value of AC transfer mode: Current: LE after step 5.


Reissued: 2-Nov-15



WARNING

NA ONLY: For All Regions: For TCRU accounts using the TCRU/ORU Type S4 (Set C or Set D), the trained operators replace the Fuser Unit on their own. Please inform the operators of this warning.

NOTE: Refer to the Field Service Manual (4. Replacement and adjustment>Fuser Unit) concerning the "Service Position".

Subject: WARNING regarding fuser unit maintenance Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui

From: 1st Tech Service Sect., PP Tech Service Dept.


Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required



Product Safety Other ( ) Tier 2 Tier 0.5

When pulling out the Fuser Unit for maintenance, NEVER exceed the service position by pressing the release levers [A] and [B], or the Fuser Unit

will fall from the machine and may cause fatal injury.

[A]

[B]



Subject: Saving the removed foreign object stuck between the

doctor blade and development roller

Prepared by: Takezoh Miyamoto



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

This bulletin provides instructions on how to remove foreign objects and toner clumps stuck in between the doctor blade and upper development roller (doctor gap), to prevent white streaks.

What you will need

No. p/n Description Purpose Image

1 M2053355 KNOB:DRIVE: DEVELOPMENT UNIT: ASS'Y

Manually turn the development roller

2 D1793420 JIG:SHEET:DOCTOR BLADE

Clean the doctor gap

3 -

Arrange locally

Plastic container approximately 10cc (5 fl. oz) capacity

Store the foreign object for investigation by RCL

4 -

Arrange locally

Label Describe the machine info and attach to the container

5 -

Arrange locally

Pair of tweezers Pick up the foreign object

White streaks

White streaks



Part 1. Identifying the location of the foreign object

STEP1. Identify the location of the foreign object(s) by looking for a V-shaped split in the developer adhered to the edge of the doctor blade. (See the photo below). Confirm that the location of the split and white streak on the print match.

Part 2. Removing the foreign object from the doctor gap STEP1 Slowly turn the upper development roller with the tool (p/n: M2053355) in the

direction of the white arrow and carefully look for the foreign object.

IMPORTANT - DO NOT turn the development roller in the opposite direction. - Turn the development roller slowly to identify the foreign object. NOTE - See Appendix on the last page for examples of foreign objects.

V-shaped split

White streaks



If the foreign object was removed from the gap:

Put the foreign object in the container with tweezers, and do Part 4 of the procedure.

If the foreign object was removed but could not be identified:

Pour the developer on a sheet of paper and carefully look for the foreign object. If found, put it in the container and do Part 3. If the foreign object was not found:

Insert the cleaning tool (p/n: D1793420) into the doctor blade to scrape out the foreign object. If found, put it in the container and do Part 3.

Tool p/n: D1793420



Part 3. Cleaning the doctor blade STEP1 Turn the development roller with the tool in the direction of the white arrow

until there is no more loose developer on the surface of the roller.

STEP2 Clean the doctor gap with the cleaning tool (p/n: D1793420).

STEP3 Vacuum the surface of the development roller. IMPORTANT: Work carefully to avoid any damage to the rollers.

Part 4: Attaching label to the container

STEP1 Attach a label to the container with the following information described.

NOTE: The container and label need to be prepared locally.



NOTE: See the front of the development unit for its S/N.

STEP2 Send the container to your service representative for invesigation in Japan. NOTE: In addition to foreign object(s) stuck in the doctor gap, the developer

itself may contain foreign objects. Therefore, please also collect old developer for investigation in Japan.



APPENDIX: Examples of foreign objects

Aggregation Clump of fiber

Tape Fiber

Stone Fiber and stone

Clump of fiber Plastic (Mylar)


Reissued: 11-Nov-16

Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 24-Aug-15 No.: RM205080d


Subject: Firmware Release Note: MediaLibNAa AB Prepared by: H. Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




This RTB has been issued to announce the firmware release information for the MediaLibNAa AB.









11 [R11] - 1 new media were added to the media list under ST3 type.


NA_00087, NA_00089, NA_00090, NA_00103, NA_00104, NA_00106, NA_00107, NA_00180

- Paper name was changed:

NA_00140 - Paper name of C9110 was made common with C9100.

NA_00064

9 [R9] - 1 new media were added to the media list under ST1 type. - Bulky media test results are added

NA_00045, NA_00049, NA_00053, NA_00054, NA_00061, NA_00064, NA_00068, NA_00069, NA_00072, NA_00073, NA_00081, NA_00091, NA_00092, NA_00094, NA_00095, NA_00097, NA_00098, NA_00100, NA_00101, NA_00165, NA_00172, NA_00173, NA_00174, NA_00185

- The value of "Load_upper_limit_selection" for Paper Weight 1, 2 and 3 was


8 [R8] - Add "Fuser Belt Smoothing Execution Pattern" Setting (SetValue: 1)


Reissued: 11-Nov-16



- Change Generic name [R7] Add the following media in Paper Library - POD Gloss 128gsm Deleted the following media - NA_00063, NA_00066, NA_00067, NA_00080, NA_00175, NA_00176,

NA_00177, NA_00178, NA_00179, NA_00181, NA_00182 Corrected Moses data - NA_00171



Reissued: 11-Nov-16



Subject: Firmware Release Note: MediaLibNAb AB Prepared by: H. Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




This RTB has been issued to announce the firmware release information for the MediaLibNAb AB.









11 [R11] - 1 new media were added to the media list under ST3 type.


NA_00087, NA_00089, NA_00090, NA_00103, NA_00104, NA_00106, NA_00107, NA_00180

- Paper name was changed:

NA_00140 - Paper name of C9110 was made common with C9100.

NA_00064

9 [R9]

- 1 new media were added to the media list under ST1 type. - Bulky media test results are added

NA_00045, NA_00049, NA_00053, NA_00054, NA_00061, NA_00064, NA_00068, NA_00069, NA_00072, NA_00073, NA_00081, NA_00091, NA_00092, NA_00094, NA_00095, NA_00097, NA_00098, NA_00100, NA_00101, NA_00165, NA_00172, NA_00173, NA_00174, NA_00185

- The value of "Load_upper_limit_selection" for Paper Weight 1, 2 and 3 was


8 [R8] - Add "Fuser Belt Smoothing Execution Pattern" Setting (SetValue: 1)


Reissued: 11-Nov-16



- Change Generic name [R7] Add the following media in Paper Library - POD Gloss 128gsm Deleted the following media - NA_00063, NA_00066, NA_00067, NA_00080, NA_00175, NA_00176,

NA_00177, NA_00178, NA_00179, NA_00181, NA_00182 Corrected Moses data - NA_00171




Subject: Toner scattering around the OPC drum Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SMPTOM

Toner scattering is observed especially around the OPC drum, because the front and/or rear side seals [A] of the drum cleaning unit is (are) missing.

Occurrence rate: Very low

CAUSE

A very limited number of units among the first lot of mass production did not have the side seals due to a fault in the manufacturing process.

SOLUTION

Since the affected units cannot be traced, and considering the low number of affected units, if the seal(s) is (are) missing, replace the drum cleaning unit with a new one.

P/N : M2053500

Description : CLEANING UNIT: ASS'Y

[A]

Seal missing Seal attached


Reissued: 20-Feb-17

Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 10-Nov-15 No.: RM205083b

RTB Reissue The items in italic were added.

Subject: Modification Procedure for Preventing SC499 Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




NOTE: This RTB is reference information concerning the Product Modification Request Program (NA: PMR-2016-097, EU: PMR-2016-098, AA: PMR-2016-099). Contact your regional headquarters about this Product Modification Request Program. See RTB#RM205163 and RM205085a for the normal parts and maintenance information related to this modification. SYMPTOM SC499-03 (ITB Belt Speed Sensor error: Not during light amount adjustment) occurs.

CAUSE The surface of the ITB feedback sensor or ITB speed timing stripe becomes dirty with

toner. The modification to install M2059912 (RM205083) is sometimes not enough to prevent

the error code.

SOLUTION

Production line: The following changes were made to improve the sensor cleaning capability, from the mass production middle of March, 2016.

I. Removed the bracket to move its cleaning function to area (III) II. Changed the shape for higher cleaning capability and stable ITB drive III. Added the cleaning function with a brush roller


Reissued: 20-Feb-17


In the field: Install the modification kit M2059920 SC499 PREVENTION MODIFICATION SET 2 which contains the following parts.

Description Note

[A] Brush Roller Shaft Same as M2052130

[B] Brush Roller Same as M2052091

[C] Brush Roller Bearing Same as M2052128

[D] Screw (M3x12) Same as 03603012N

[E] Brush Roller Shaft Attachment Same as assy M2052136, M2052132 and 04503008N

[F] Sensor Cover Same as M2052109

[G] Belt/Sensor Cover Same as M2052140

[H] Brush Roller Holder Same as M2052134

Note: Parts [B], [F] and [G] are supposed to clean every 900kP, and [B] to replace every

2,800kP (same interval as the ITB). See RM205085a for more detail about ITB maintenance.

If the imaging frame’s serial number is in the following list, a brand new TDRB board (M2059921, same as M2055349) is also needed.


Reissued: 20-Feb-17


NA (Type A) NA (Type B) AP (Type A) AP (Type B)

X245F410001 X614FC10001 X245F130001 X245F630001 X614FC30001 X615F430001 X245F350001 X615F350001

X245F410002 X614FC10002 X245F130002 X245F630002 X614FC30002 X615F430002 X245F450001 X615F350002

X245F410003 X614FC10005 X245F130003 X245F630003 X614FC30003 X615F430003 X615F350003




X245F410007 X614FC10007 X245F130007 X245F630007 X614FC30007 X615F430007

X245F510001 X615F110001 X245F130008 X245F630008 X615F130001 X615F430008

X245F510002 X615F110002 X245F330001 X245F630009 X615F130002 X615F530001

X245F510003 X615F110003 X245F330002 X245F630010 X615F130003 X615F530002

X245F510004 X615F110005 X245F330003 X245F630011 X615F130004 X615F530003

X245F510005 X615F110004 X245F430001 X245F630012 X615F130005 X615F530004

X245F510006 X615F410001 X245F430002 X245F630013 X615F130006 X615F530005

X615F410002 X245F430003 X245F630014 X615F130007 X615F530006

X615F410003 X245F530001 X245F630015 X615F130008 X615F530007

X615F410004 X245F530002 X615F130009 X615F530008

X615F410005 X245F530003 X615F330001 X615F530009

X615F410006 X245F530004 X615F330002 X615F530010

X615F410007 X245F530005 X615F330003 X615F530011

X615F510001 X245F530006 X615F330004 X615F530012

X615F510002 X245F530007 X615F330005 X615F530013

X615F510003 X245F530008 X615F330006 X615F530014

X245F530009 X615F330007 X615F530015

X245F530010 X615F330008 X615F530016

X245F530011 X615F330009 X615F530017

X245F530012 X615F330010 X615F630001

X245F530013 X615F330011 X615F630002

X245F530014 X615F330012 X615F630003

X245F530015 X615F330013 X615F630004

X245F530016 X615F330014 X615F630005

X245F530017 X615F330015

X615F330016

X615F330017

X615F330018

X615F330019

EU (Type A) EU (Type B)

PROCEDURE Estimated Work Time: 40 min Required Tools: A head screw driver, a hexagonal wrench (M3) 1. Remove the ITB after carefully taking off the ITB cleaning brush bracket.

Left side of the ITB Unit 2. Change the lever position to move up the image transfer rollers.


Reissued: 20-Feb-17


3. Remove the roller [1].

4. Take the spring [3] off to remove the roller attachment [2].

5. Assemble the parts [E] then set it instead of [2] to hook the spring [3].


Reissued: 20-Feb-17


6. Set the brush roller [B] on its shaft [A], then put it in position.

7. Set the bearing [C] to fix it with [D]. In the photo below, a hex wrench [4] is used so as not to rotate the bearing and shaft.

8. Fix the bearing with [H].

[AA]

[AA]

NOTE: After this modification, the existing e-ring [AA] will not be required anymore. Therefore, remove the unnecessary e-ring [AA] and dispose of it. Otherwise, unnecessary thrust force will damage the bearing [C], which leads to physical damage to the ITB.


Reissued: 20-Feb-17


TDRB board 9. Only when the serial number is in the list described above, replace the TDRB board

(M2059921) as shown in the FSM on page 835. Replace the image transfer roller for Cyan

Replace the bracket

Replace the TDRB board

Right side of the ITB Unit 10. Remove the part [6] to remove the roller [5] from the ITB frame.


Reissued: 20-Feb-17


11. Remove the cleaning parts [7].

12. Move the collar [8], originally attached on [1] which was removed in step 3, to the roller [5].

13. Reattach the roller [5] to its original position.

14. Remove the feedback sensor to replace the window [9] with the modified type [F].

15. Reattach the ITB.


Reissued: 20-Feb-17


16. Replace the belt/sensor cover [12] with the modified type [G].

17. Reattach all the parts you removed in previous steps. 18. Do the ITB sensor initialization as follows.

a. Execute SP2-912-001. b. Make sure SP2-912-002 is set to “1.” If it shows “7”, “8” or “9”, check if both SP2-

912-005 and -006 are bigger than “1.00”. YES: Go to step “f”, NO: Go to step “c”

c. Clean the feedback sensor surface with a dry cloth, and the ITB timing strip with alcohol. Then execute SP2-912-001 again to check if SP2-912-002 has changed to “1”, or if it’s still “7”, “8” or “9”, and check that both SP2-912-005 and -006 are bigger than “1.00”. YES: Go to step “f”, NO: Go to step “d”

d. Replace the feedback sensor. Then execute SP2-912-001 again to check if SP2-912-002 has changed to “1”, or if it’s still “7”, “8” or “9”, and check that both SP2-912-005 and -006 are bigger than “1.00”. YES: Go to step “f”, NO: Go to step “e”

e. Replace the ITB, then execute SP2-912-001. f. Check the values of SP2-914-003 and SP2-914-004 and write them down. g. Execute SP2-914-001. h. Execute SP2-914-002. i. Make sure that the values of SP2-914-003 and SP2-914-004 have been updated

from Step “c” and also that the values are NOT "0". If the values are "0", repeat steps "g", "h" and "i" again. .

j. Execute SP2-111-004.


Reissued: 20-Feb-17


Production line: The following changes were made to improve the sensor cleaning capability:

I. The slit through which waste toner is routed was widened. Note: This slit is located on the bracket to the left of the feedback sensor.

II. The gap between the ITB and sensor cover was widened to prevent contact. III. A cleaning brush bracket was added to the edge of the ITB.

In the field: Install the following Modification Kit. See PROCEDURE below:

P/N M2059912 SC499 PREVENTION MODIFICATION SET This kit includes the following 6 parts:

Description Note

[A] Cleaning Brush Bracket same as M2051595 (ASSY) only brush: M2051596

[B] Attachment Bracket for [A] same as M2051599

[C] ITB Feed Back Sensor Cover same as M2051590

[D] Belt/Sensor Cover Bracket same as M2051589


Reissued: 20-Feb-17


[E] Sensor Cleaning Bracket same as M2051588

[F] SCREW - M3X6 (2 pcs) same as 03603006N

Note: It is recommended to clean parts [A], [C], [D] and [E] before 900kP. For details, see

RTB #RM205085. Parts [D] and [E] are 900kP PM items.

PROCEDURE Estimated work time: 40 min. 1. Remove the ITB. 2. Remove the plate [G] that secures the roller [H] in place.

3. Rotate the lever, then remove the roller [H].

4. Remove the parts [I] and the cover bracket [J].


Reissued: 20-Feb-17


5. Rotate the lever downward and replace the cleaning bracket with the modified one [E].

IMPORTANT: Make sure the attachment position of the new cleaning bracket is as

low as possible. This will maximize the gap between it and the ITB and improve cleaning efficiency.

6. Remove the ITB feed-back sensor and replace the sensor cover with the modified one [C].


Reissued: 20-Feb-17


7. Reattach the ITB. 8. Replace the sensor/belt cover bracket [D].

IMPORTANT: Make sure the attachment position of the new bracket is as high as

possible. This will maximize the gap between it and the ITB and improve cleaning efficiency.

9. Attach the original rollers to the modified plate bracket [B], and then attach the bracket to the frame.


Reissued: 20-Feb-17


10. Attach part [A] by fitting the ITB between the upper and lower brushes (shown by the red dotted line).

11. Move part [A] along the belt to position [B], and then secure it in place here (screws x 2 [F]).


Reissued: 20-Feb-17


12. Reattach all parts removed and all covers opened in the above steps. 13. Do the ITB sensor initialization as follows.

k. Execute SP2-912-001. l. Make sure SP2-912-002 is set to “1.” m. Check the values of SP2-914-003 and SP2-914-004 and write them down. n. Execute SP2-914-001. o. Execute SP2-914-002. p. Make sure the values of SP2-914-003 and SP2-914-004 have been updated from

Step “c”. q. Execute SP2-111-004.


Reissued：5-Sep-16

Model: Andromeda-P1 (M205/M238) Date: 10-Nov-15 No.: RM205085a

RTB Reissue The items in italic were added.

Subject: ITB Maintenance Procedure for Preventing SC499 Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




Service Manual Revision The areas highlighted in bold/blue were added/changed.

- Maintenance tasks were added/changed around the ITB and ITB feedback sensor, which can prevent SC499-03.

- Procedures for each are shown below. Pg. 2549

Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB) 1. This maintenance table will be effective after installing P/N M2059920 (SC499

PREVENTION MODIFICATION SET2). See RTB #RM205083a for more details. See also RTB#RM205163 for the P/No. information as normal parts.

2. Clean the parts/areas mentioned in the table below. Items 450K 900K 1800K 2800K

Intermediate Transfer Belt R

Image Transfer Roller (KCMY) R

Paper Transfer Bias Roller R

ITB Belt Speed Sensor Cover

(Upper)

C

ITB Belt Speed Sensor Cover

(Lower)

*1 *1

ITB Belt Speed Sensor Windows

C

ITB Cleaning Brush

C

ITB Timing Scale

C*2

ITB Timing Scale Cleaning Brush

Roller *3

C R*3

*1: This part has been removed as explained in RM205083a.

*2: Do the cleaning with alcohol if needed, see RM205106.

*3: Newly added parts included in the modification kit: M2059920. Individual part number is M2052091.


Reissued：5-Sep-16


Procedure: 900kP 1. Remove the ITB after carefully removing the ITB cleaning brush bracket.

2. Clean the area circled in the red broken line. 3. Remove waste toner from the brush roller with a vacuum cleaner.

4. Clean off the contamination on the ITB FB sensor window, its cover and the brush bracket with a vacuum cleaner.

5. Reattach all the parts you removed, then do the ITB sensor initialization as follows. a. Execute SP2-912-001. b. Make sure SP2-912-002 is set to “1.” If it shows “7”, “8” or “9”, check if both SP2-

912-005 and -006 are bigger than “1.00”. YES: go to step “f”, NO: go to step “c”

c. Clean the feedback sensor surface with a dry cloth, and the ITB timing strip with alcohol. Then do SP2-912-001 again to check if SP2-912-002 changed to “1”, or if it’s still “7”, “8” or “9”. Check if both SP2-912-005 and -006 are bigger than “1.00”. YES: go to step “f”, NO: go to step “d”

d. Replace the feedback sensor. Then do SP2-912-001 again to check if SP2-912-002 changed to “1”, or if it’s still “7”, “8” or “9”. Check if both SP2-912-005 and -006 are bigger than “1.00”. YES: go to step “f”, NO: go to step “e”

e. Replace the ITB, then execute SP2-912-001.


Reissued：5-Sep-16


f. Check the values of SP2-914-003 and SP2-914-004 and write them down. g. Execute SP2-914-001. h. Execute SP2-914-002. i. Make sure the values of SP2-914-003 and SP2-914-004 have been updated from

Step “c”. j. Execute SP2-111-004.


Reissued：5-Sep-16


Procedure: 2,800kP 1. Remove the ITB after carefully removing the ITB cleaning brush bracket.

2. Change the lever position to move up the image transfer rollers.

3. Remove the screws [1], [2] then the bearing [3] to replace the brush roller ASSY [A] with a new one. When attaching it, use a hex wrench like the picture in the center below, so as NOT to rotate the bearing and shaft.

4. Replace the ITB. 5. Reattach all the parts you removed, then do the ITB sensor initialization as follows.

a. Execute SP2-912-001. b. Make sure SP2-912-002 is set to “1.” If it shows “7”, “8” or “9”, check if both SP2-

912-005 and -006 are bigger than “1.00”. YES: go to step “f”, NO: go to step “c”

c. Clean the feedback sensor surface with a dry cloth, and the ITB timing strip with alcohol. Then do SP2-912-001 again to check if SP2-912-002 changed to “1”, or if it’s still “7”, “8” or “9”. Check if both SP2-912-005 and -006 are bigger than “1.00”. YES: go to step “f”, NO: go to step “d”

d. Replace the feedback sensor. Then do SP2-912-001 again to check if SP2-912-002 changed to “1”, or if it’s still “7”, “8” or “9”. Check if both SP2-912-005 and -006 are bigger than “1.00”. YES: go to step “f”, NO: go to step “e”

e. Replace the ITB, then execute SP2-912-001.


Reissued：5-Sep-16


f. Check the values of SP2-914-003 and SP2-914-004 and write them down. g. Execute SP2-914-001. h. Execute SP2-914-002. i. Make sure the values of SP2-914-003 and SP2-914-004 have been updated from

Step “c” and also the values are NOT "0". In case the values are "0", repeat step "g", "h" and "i" again. .

j. Execute SP2-111-004.


Reissued：5-Sep-16


Service Manual Revision The areas highlighted in bold/red were added.

- Maintenance tasks were added for the ITB and ITB feedback sensor for 300K and 900K. This maintenance can prevent SC499-03.

- Procedures for each are shown below. Pg. 2549

Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB) 3. Install P/N M2059912 (SC499 PREVENTION MODIFICATION SET).

Note: See RTB #RM205083 for details. 4. Clean the parts/areas mentioned in the table below.

Items 300K *1 450K 900K 1800K 2800K

Intermediate

Transfer Belt

R

Image Transfer

Roller (KCMY)

R

Paper Transfer

Bias Roller

R

ITB Belt Speed

Sensor Cover

(Upper)

C R

ITB Belt Speed

Sensor Cover

(Lower)

C R

ITB Belt Speed

Sensor Windows

C C

ITB Cleaning

Brush

C C

ITB Timing Scale

*2

C C *3

*1: Do this cleaning when 300kP prints have been made since the previous visit. You do not need to remove

the ITB.

*2: This part was modified from P/N M2056681 to P/N M2056695. The seam has been reinforced with a

transparent seal.

*3: Remove the belt before you do this cleaning.

For the procedures, see the following pages.


Reissued：5-Sep-16


Procedure: 300kP Estimated work time: 20 minutes Required tools: Vacuum cleaner or blower, dry cloth 1. Check if SC499-03 has occurred since the previous visit.

If it has, go to Step 2. If it has not, go to Step 4.

2. Check if both SP2-914-001 and SP2-914-004 are larger than 50. If they are, go to Step 3. If they are not, go to Step 4.

3. Check the seam of the ITB timing scale. If it is damaged, as shown in the pictures below, replace it.

4. Pull out the ITB unit. 5. Clean the rear side of the sensor cover (upper) with a vacuum cleaner or blower.

6. Clean the sensor windows and sensor cover (lower) with a blower or dried cloth.

7. Remove the cleaning brush bracket.


Reissued：5-Sep-16


8. Clean the upper and lower brushes with a vacuum cleaner or blower.

9. Rotate the ITB drive motor in the normal direction manually until the belt’s lot number is

positioned in the area shown in the photo below. Note: The seam of the timing scale is on the opposite side.

10. Hold the belt edge with a dried cloth, then rotate the belt 1 cycle. IMPORTANT: DO NOT clean the area around the scale seam. This is to prevent it from peeling off.


Reissued：5-Sep-16


11. Reattach the cleaning brush, bracket, and sensor cover bracket. IMPORTANT: Attach these parts in as high a position as possible. This is to optimize the gap between it and the ITB, which will improve cleaning efficiency.

12. Reattach the ITB unit, and then close the door. 13. Wait for the warm-up to be completed. 14. Do the ITB sensor initialization as follows:

a. Execute SP2-912-001. b. Make sure SP2-912-002 is set to a value of “1.” c. Check the values SP2-914-003 and SP 2-914-004, and write them down. d. Execute SP2-914-001. e. Execute SP2-914-002. f. Make sure the values of SP2-914-003 and SP2-914-004 have been updated from

the values you checked in Step (c). g. Execute SP2-111-004.


Reissued：5-Sep-16


Procedure: 900kP Estimated work time: 30 minutes Required tools: Vacuum cleaner or blower, dry cloth 1. Check if SC499-03 has occurred since the previous visit.

If it has, go to Step 2. If it has not, go to Step 4.

2. Check if both SP2-914-001 and SP2-914-004 are larger than 50. If they are, go to Step 3. If they are not, go to Step 4.

3. Check the seam of the ITB timing scale. If it is damaged, as shown in the pictures below, replace it.

4. Pull out the ITB unit. 5. Remove the cleaning brush bracket. 6. Clean the upper and lower brushes with a vacuum cleaner or blower.

7. Remove the ITB. 8. Remove the plate [A] used to secure the roller [B] in place.


Reissued：5-Sep-16


9. Rotate the lever, then remove the roller [B].

10. Remove the part [C] and the cover bracket [D].

11. Rotate the lever downward and replace the sensor cover (lower) with the new one.

IMPORTANT: Attach this part in as low a position as possible. This is to optimize the gap between it and the ITB, which will improve cleaning efficiency.


Reissued：5-Sep-16


12. Clean the sensor window with a vacuum cleaner and dry cloth. 13. Put the ITB on a flat and level table. 14. Wipe the belt scale toward the scale seam with a dry cloth.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT clean the area around the scale seam. This is to prevent it from peeling off.

15. If the seam peels, as shown in the photos below: Clean the area with alcohol and then attach the transparent seal (M2059918).


Reissued：5-Sep-16


IMPORTANT: When removing the seal, peel it off carefully from all four corners. This is because the adhesive strength of the seal is greater than that of the scale.

16. Reattach the ITB. 17. Replace the sensor cover (upper) with the new one.

IMPORTANT: Attach this part in as high a position as possible. This is to optimize the gap between it and the ITB, which will improve cleaning efficiency.

18. Reattach all parts/units you removed in the above steps, and then close the door. 19. Wait for the warm-up to be completed.


Reissued：5-Sep-16


20. Do the ITB sensor initialization as follows: a. Execute SP2-912-001. b. Make sure SP2-912-002 is set to a value of “1.” c. Check the values SP2-914-003 and SP 2-914-004, and write them down. d. Execute SP2-914-001. e. Execute SP2-914-002. f. Make sure the values of SP2-914-003 and SP2-914-004 have been updated from

the values you checked in Step (c). g. Execute SP2-111-004.


Reissued: 06-Sep-16



Subject: Firmware Release Note: MediaLibAPa AB Prepared by: H. Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




This RTB has been issued to announce the firmware release information for the MediaLibAPa AB.










AP_00012, AP_00013, AP_00014, AP_00015, AP_00019, AP_00024, AP_00025, AP_00030, AP_00035, AP_00036


RE_00265


RE_00082, RE_00199, RE_00213, RE_00214


RE_00028, RE_00029, RE_00030, RE_00031, RE_00039, RE_00040, RE_00042, RE_00044, RE_00049, RE_00054, RE_00058, RE_00059, RE_00060, RE_00065, RE_00069, RE_00073, RE_00077, RE_00078, RE_00089, RE_00090, RE_00099, RE_00100, RE_00104, RE_00105, RE_00109, RE_00110, RE_00114, RE_00116, RE_00117, RE_00121, RE_00122, RE_00125, RE_00126, RE_00136, RE_00149, RE_00153, RE_00154, RE_00169, RE_00170, RE_00171, RE_00172, RE_00181, RE_00200, RE_00202, RE_00229, RE_00232, RE_00235, RE_00240, RE_00241, RE_00247, RE_00298, RE_00312


Reissued: 06-Sep-16



- Paper Weight was corrected from "Wt.1" to "Wt.4" for the following: RE_00136







RE_00294, RE_00022 to RE00431 - Change Generic name



Reissued: 06-Sep-16



Subject: Firmware Release Note: MediaLibAPb AB Prepared by: H. Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




This RTB has been issued to announce the firmware release information for the MediaLibAPb AB.












RE_00265


RE_00082, RE_00199, RE_00213, RE_00214





Reissued: 06-Sep-16









RE_00294, RE_00022 to RE00431 - Change Generic name



Reissued: 25-Jan-17

Model: BR-C1/Leo-C1/Leo-P1/Andromeda-P1/BR-P1 Date: 09-Sep-13 No.: RD179035c


Subject: Firmware Release Note: P-Binder_GB5010_B1 Prepared by: J.Ohno



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




This RTB has been issued to announce the firmware release information for the

P-Binder_GB5010_B1.


01.210:11 D7365021B February 2017 production Not available

01.200:11 D7365021A September 2015 production Not available

01.160:11 D7365021 February 2015 production Not available

1.02:09 D7365020A 1st Mass production Not available



01.210:11 Specification Change Feeding cover sheets from the Cover Interposer tray or the Perfect Binder tray is not possible, if the tray cover is open. Feeding from the mainframe remains possible even when these tray covers are open. Error Correction If the main power is turned OFF and then ON with the Cover Interposer Tray or the Perfect Binder inserter cover open, the operation panel may not display the "cover open" message. If attempted to run a job in this state, the system stalls with SC990. Important Note The following firmware must be installed as a set.

P-Binder_B_B1:D7365021B ：Ver01.210：11

P-Binder_B_B2:D7365071 ：Ver01.040：00

P-Binder_B_B3:D7365730 ：Ver00.050：00

P-Binder_B_B4:D7365121A ：Ver01.070：00

P-Binder_B_B5:D7365171 ：Ver01.020：00

01.200:11 Error Correction 1. System stalls, if a jam is triggered by opening the front door of the Transit

Pass Unit while running a job fed through the straight path of the glue binder.

2. System stalls, if a jam is triggered by opening top cover of the inserter or the front door of the Transit Pass Unit while the cover sheet is being fed.

3. System stalls after Jam420. 4. In a job specified of multiple copies, an extra booklet is created, if the book


Reissued: 25-Jan-17

Model: BR-C1/Leo-C1/Leo-P1/Andromeda-P1/BR-P1 Date: 09-Sep-13 No.: RD179035c


stacking tray is opened and closed while processing the first booklet. 5. Jam510 occurs after recovering from Jam420. 6. Glue temperature adjustment does not complete, disabling the job to start.

NOTE: Make sure to apply the firmware versions listed below for this release to take effect.

- P-Binder_B_B2:D7365071 ：Ver01.040：00

- P-Binder_B_B3:D7365730 ：Ver00.050：00

- P-Binder_B_B4:D7365121A ：Ver01.070：00

- P-Binder_B_B5:D7365171 ：Ver01.020：00

01.160:11 Additional Model Information Leo-C1/P1 Specification Change - Supports 178.5mm/s line speed - Supports 700mm length media (in feed direction) - Supports Leo-C1/P1 Symptoms Corrected - The Perfect Binder is not ready but receives jobs from the engine, causing

jams at the entrance. - Some of the input checks do not work. - The Perfect Binder stalls, if the job is run immediately after opening and

closing the front doors in a low temperature environment, because the glue temperature is not adjusted.

- J423 occurs, if the Buffer Pass unit is connected. - J343 occurs when the stacking tray becomes full. - Can not resume the job immediately after removing booklets from a

"tacking tray full" status. - Can not start the next job, if the previous job is canceled with the "Stop"

key at a particular timing. - Jam occurs, if the cover sheet is fed from the Inserter. - The Perfect Binder stalls, if a jam occurs and the stacking tray becomes

full at a particular timing. Important Note The following firmware must be installed as a set.

P-Binder_B_B1:D7365021 ：Ver01.160：11

P-Binder_B_B2:D7365071 ：Ver01.040：00

P-Binder_B_B3:D7365730 ：Ver00.050：00

P-Binder_B_B4:D7365121 ：Ver01.050：00

P-Binder_B_B5:D7365171 ：Ver01.020：00



Reissued: 09-Sep-15

Model: BR-C1/Leo-C1/Leo-P1/Andromeda-P1/BR-P1 Date: 09-Sep-13 No.: RD179038b


Subject: Firmware Release Note: P-Binder_GB5010_B4 Prepared by: J.Ohno



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




This RTB has been issued to announce the firmware release information for the

P-Binder_GB5010_B4.


01.070:00 D7365121A September 2015 production Not available

01.050:00 D7365121 February 2015 production Not available

1.01:00 D7365120A 1st Mass production Not available



01.070:00 Error Correction: 1. System stalls, if a jam is triggered by opening the front door of the

Transit Pass Unit while running a job fed through the straight path of the glue binder.

2. System stalls, if a jam is triggered by opening top cover of the inserter or the front door of the Transit Pass Unit while the cover sheet is being fed.

3. System stalls after Jam420. 4. In a job specified of multiple copies, an extra booklet is created, if the

book stacking tray is opened and closed while processing the first booklet.

5. Jam510 occurs after recovering from Jam420. 6. Glue temperature adjustment does not complete, disabling the job to

start. NOTE: Make sure to apply the firmware versions listed below for this release to take effect.

- P-Binder_B_B1:D7365021A ：Ver01.200：11

- P-Binder_B_B2:D7365071 ：Ver01.040：00

- P-Binder_B_B3:D7365730 ：Ver00.050：00

- P-Binder_B_B5:D7365171 ：Ver01.020：00

01.050:00 Additional Model Information Leo-C1/P1


Reissued: 09-Sep-15

Model: BR-C1/Leo-C1/Leo-P1/Andromeda-P1/BR-P1 Date: 09-Sep-13 No.: RD179038b


Specification Change - Supports 178.5mm/s line speed - Supports 700mm length media (in feed direction) - Supports Leo-C1/P1 Symptoms Corrected - The Perfect Binder is not ready but receives jobs from the engine, causing

jams at the entrance. - Some of the input checks do not work. - The Perfect Binder stalls, if the job is run immediately after opening and

closing the front doors in a low temperature environment, because the glue temperature is not adjusted.

- J423 occurs, if the Buffer Pass unit is connected. - J343 occurs when the stacking tray becomes full. - Can not resume the job immediately after removing booklets from a "tacking

tray full" status. - Can not start the next job, if the previous job is canceled with the "Stop" key

at a particular timing. - Jam occurs, if the cover sheet is fed from the Inserter. - The Perfect Binder stalls, if a jam occurs and the stacking tray becomes full

at a particular timing. Important Note The following firmware must be installed as a set. P-Binder_B_B1:D7365021 :Ver01.160:11 P-Binder_B_B2:D7365071 :Ver01.040:00 P-Binder_B_B3:D7365730 :Ver00.050:00 P-Binder_B_B4:D7365121 :Ver01.050:00 P-Binder_B_B5:D7365171 :Ver01.020:00



Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 15-Oct-15 No.: RM205089

Subject: New Custom Paper Setting -No.100 Fuser Belt Smoothing

Execution Pattern Prepared by: T. Miyamoto



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




New Custom Paper Settings for Administrators

[100: Fuser Belt Smoothing: Execution Pattern] is newly added from engine ver.4.02 and GW system 2.02.

This bulletin announces the following four items.

I. New Custom Paper Setting No.100 was added.

II. Adding this setting changes the listed number of settings after No.100.

III. Notes when updating F/W before Version Engine 4.02 and System 2.02

IV. Adjustment Settings for Skilled Operator description

[505: Fusing Belt Smoothing Setting (Set by User)]

[506: Fusing Belt Smoothing Execution Time]

I. New Custom Paper Setting No.100 [Fuser Belt Smoothing: Execution Pattern] was added

This function polishes the fusing belt automatically to remove scratches.

If there are glossy lines due to paper edge traces, select [Auto Execute: Frequently] to polish the fusing belt more frequently.

If paper which has sharp edges such as HML, it will have more chance to scratch the fuser belt and in the end a glossy line will appear.

The default value of this setting is "1" or "2". The value that will be set depends on the media qualification test result for each media. For example, HML is set to "2". (Frequent execution). Also, if you want to change the interval and time to polish the fusing belt, select [Auto Execute: Set by User].

Setting item Values Detail Description

[Fuser Belt Smoothing: Execution Pattern]

0. [Do not Execute Automatically] Do not execute

1. [Automatic Execution] 1 min / 2000 sheets

2. [Auto Execute : Frequently] 6 min / 2000 sheets + 10 sec/ 150 sheets

3. [Auto Execute : Set by User] 2.5 min / 2000 sheets + 30 sec / 500 sheets



Note:

If you select “3. [Auto Execute: Set by User]”, the fusing belt is polished according to the interval and time (underlined text in the above table) specified In [Interval for Executing Short Time Smoothing] and [Period for Performing Long Time Smoothing] in “[505: Fusing Belt Smoothing Setting (Set by User)]”. These values are changeable.

II. The listed number of settings are changed

Adding this setting changes the listed number of settings after No.100.

For customers, RCL provides a sheet to let the customers know this change.

For your reference, please see the table as follows.

Group Old No. New No. Item

Machine: Image Quality

- 100 Fuser Belt Smoothing: Execution Pattern

100 101 Cleaning Web Contact & Diseng Position

101 102 Fusing Nip Width Adj. for Envelope

102 103 Adj Fsng Temp to Tmsf Ppr: Hear Roller

103 104 Adj Fsng Temp to Tmsf Ppr: Pressr Rllr

Machine: Paper Feed/ Output

104 105 Updraft Fan

105 106 Blower Fan

106 107 Side Fan

107 108 Vacuum Fan

108 109 Updraft Fan Shutter

109 110 Side Fan Shutter

110 111 Switch Paper Load Upper Limit

111 112 Paper Feed Mode (Adjust Fan Level)

112 113 Double Feed Detection

113 114 Adjust Registration Gate Home Position

114 115 Illumin. Mode for Color Paper Detctn

115 116 Color Paper Edge Detection Adjustment

116 117 Regist Fjam Detection with Feed Dir

117 118 Deactivate Image Position Adjustment

118 119 Act Aut Crct Snsr for 2 sdd Mgnf Adj

119 120 Process Speed Setting

120 121 Feed peed Adj. of Tr.-Fusg. Tr. Belt1

121 122 Feed peed Adj. of Tr.-Fusg. Tr. Belt2

122 123 Fusing Feed Speed Adjustment

123 124 Decurlr 1 Tmsprt motor Feed Speed Adj

124 125 Decurlr 2 Tmsprt motor Feed Speed Adj

125 126 Cooling Transport Motor Feed Speed Adj

126 127 CPM Adjustment

127 128 Adjust Paper Curl

128 129 Adjust Paper Curl: Temp. Adjustment 1

129 130 Adjust Paper Curl: Temp. Adjustment 2

130 131 Adjust Paper Curl: CPM Adjustment 1



131 132 Adjust Paper Curl: CPM Adjustment 2

Machine: Productivity

132 133 Rdc. Init. CPM: 1 Sd.: Low Tmp. Envir.

133 134 Rdc. Init. CPM: 1 Sd.: N/H Tmp. Envir.

134 135 Rdc. Init. CPM: 2 Sd.: Low Tmp. Envir.

135 136 Rdc. Init. CPM: 2 Sd.: N/H Tmp. Envir.

Finishing: Fold

136 137 Adjust Z-fole Position 1

137 138 Adjust Z-fole Position 2

138 139 Half Fold Position: Single-sheet Fold

139 140 Letter Fold-out Posn 1: Single-sheet Fld

140 141 Letter Fold-out Posn 2: Single-sheet Fld

141 142 Letter Fold-in Posn 1: Single-sheet Fld

142 143 Letter Fold-in Posn 2: Single-sheet Fld

143 144 Double Parallel Fold Position 1

144 145 Double Parallel Fold Position 2

145 146 Adjust Gate Fold Position 1



III. Notes when updating F/W before Version Engine 4.02 and System 2.02

This No.100 function has been newly added from the latest firmware (Engine: 4.02, System: 2.02) as of the date when this bulletin is issued.

The No.100 value of custom paper entries that were registered before updating the firmware (Engine: 4.02, System: 2.02) will be set to "0: [Do not Execute Automatically]" by updating the latest firmware (Engine: 4.02, System: 2.02 or after) In these cases, please change No.100 setting manually from "0" to "1" or "2" to remove scratches on the fusing belt.

IV. Adjustment Settings for Skilled Operator description

[505: Fusing Belt Smoothing Setting (Set by User)]

Specify when to polish the fusing belt by selecting [Auto Execute: Set by User] in [100: Fuser Belt Smoothing: Execution Pattern] in “Advanced custom Paper Settings”.

When set to [Interval for Executing Short Time Smoothing], the fusing belt is polished with a relatively short interval and execution time.

When set to [Period for Performing Long Time Smoothing], the fusing belt is polished with a relatively long interval and execution time

Setting Items Default Value

Max. Value

Min. Value

Unit

[Interval for Executing Short Time Smoothing]

500 2000 1 sheet(s)

[Period for Performing Long Time Smoothing]

150 360 0 second(s)



[506: Fusing Belt Smoothing Execution Time]

Specify the settings for each item in [0507: Smooth Fusing Belt].

Setting Items Default Value

Max. Value

Min. Value

Unit

[Fixed Time: For Belt Scratches] 150 3600 0 second(s)

[Fixed Time: For uneven Gloss] 3 60 0 second(s)

Adding this setting changes the listed number of settings.

Please check the changes in the following table:

Group Old No. New No. Item

Machine: Maintenance

505 505 Fusing Belt Smoothing Setting (Set by User)

- 506 Fuser Belt Smoothing: Execution Time

506 507 Smooth Fusing Belt

507 508 Reset Replaceable Parts Counter

508 509 Estimated Life Already Used

509 510 Temperature/Humidity inside the Machine

510 511 Temperature/Humidity outside the Machine

511 512 Back Up/Restore Custom Paper Data

512 513 Screw-on Cap to Replace Toner Bottle

513 514 Execute Developer Refreshing

514 515 Developer Fill

515 516 Developer Fill: Result

516 517 Developer Exhaust

517 518 Developer Exhaust: Result

518 519 Developer Setup: Execute

519 520 Developer Setup: Result

520 521 Execute Charger Cleaning

521 522 Counter Settings for Fuser Unit Replacement

522 523 Imaging Unit Initial Settings on Replacement

523 524 Reset Imaging Unit Initial Settings on Replacement


Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 2- Nov -15 No.: RM205091

Subject: Manual Correction: SC373-xx, SC374-xx Prepared by: T.Miyamoto



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

Service Manual Correction Please add the following information to your service manual, in this section:

6. Troubleshooting > SC300 (Engine: Imaging 1/2: Charge/Development/Around the Drum)


SC373-01 D ID Sensor Pattern Density High Error (K)

SC373-02 D ID Sensor Pattern Density High Error (C）

SC373-03 D ID Sensor Pattern Density High Error (M)

SC373-04 D ID Sensor Pattern Density High Error (Y)

The density reading of the ID sensor patterns created between pages (SP3-300-001~004) is greater than the threshold value set by SP3-301-021~022.

Dirty ID sensor

Second transfer error

Excessive toner supply

Clean the ID sensor.

Confirm proper condition of the paper transfer belt.

Pull out the PTB unit and confirm proper connection of the ID sensor harness.

Replace the ID sensor.

Replace the toner sub hopper unit.


SC374-01 D ID Sensor Pattern Density Low Error (K)

SC374-02 D ID Sensor Pattern Density Low Error (C）

SC374-03 D ID Sensor Pattern Density Low Error (M)

SC374-04 D ID Sensor Pattern Density Low Error (Y)

The density reading of the ID sensor patterns created between pages (SP3-300-001~004) is less than the threshold value set by SP3-301-023~024 for three times in a row.

Dirty ID sensor

Abnormal development bias

Image transfer error

Second transfer error

Clean the ID sensor.


Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 2- Nov -15 No.: RM205091

Confirm proper condition of the paper transfer belt.

Pull out the PTB unit and confirm proper connection of the ID sensor harness.

Replace the ID sensor.

Check the development bias.

Check the image transfer unit.


Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 6-Nov-15 No.: RM205092

Subject: Troubleshooting white streaks along feed direction caused by

the paper feed belt Prepared by: T.Miyamoto

From: 3rd Tech Service Sect., MFP/P Tech Service Dept.


Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM

White streaks appear along the paper feed direction (= sub scan direction).

The symptom tends to occur under the following conditions:

Coated paper

Halftone images

The streaks appear in the following locations.

In main scan direction:

8.0~10.0 mm from the center in both directions



In sub scan direction, 85~87 mm from the leading edge

CAUSE

The paper feed belt scratches off the coating on the paper, causing uneven toner transfer.

Feed direction



SOLUTION

Start

Problem solved?

Yes

No

Execute Toner Refreshing.

Check SP3-820-011 (required Toner Refresh amount for Bk). Toner Refresh

is especially needed, if the value exceeds 20,000 mm.

1. Set SP3-032-021 to “16” (default: 6).

2. In the Adjustment Settings for Skilled Operators, execute 05-0504-001 three

or four times. The required Toner Refresh amount decreases approx. 6,000

mm at a time.

3. Set SP3-032-021 back to default “6”.

Reduce the power of the suction fans.

For generic paper, set SP1-953-001 to “029".

For custom paper, reduce the value in No. 108 of the IMSS Settings “10%” at

a time (default: 80%) and check the output.

* Mis-feeds may occur, if the fan power is set too low. It is recommended to

set to a value no lower than 50%.

Problem solved?

Adjust the current of the paper transfer roller.

For generic paper, adjust the following SP.

SP2-651-*** PTR Bias:FC: Side1

SP2-652-*** PTR Bias:FC: Side2

SP2-852-*** PTR AC: DC: FC: Side1

SP2-853-*** PTR AC: DC: FC: Side2

For custom paper, adjust the following IMSS Settings.

No. 043 Paper Transfer Current: FC: Side 1

No. 044 Paper Transfer Current: FC: Side 2

No. 058 Ppr Trnsf AC: DC Current: FC: Side 1

No. 059 Ppr Trnsf AC: DC Current: FC: Side 2

Make the adjustment at approximately 10μA at a time to reduce the absolute

value.

e.g. -114μA to -104μA

* Possible side effect: Images printed using multiple colors (YMCK) may not

appear as expected. Make sure to maintain an acceptable image quality when

making the adjustments.

No

Finish

Finish

Yes



Subject: Chinese Language Kit Type S4 Installation Procedure Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




Service Manual Correction Please add the following installation procedure to your service manual.

2. Installation > Chinese Language Kit Type S4 (M205-34) > Installation Procedure

Chinese Language Kit Type S4 (M205-34)

NOTE: This option is necessary for China model machines.

Accessory Check

1

2

4

3 5 6

7 8 9




1. Open the front right door [A] of the fusing section, and attach the "DECAL:POWER SOURCE:OFF:CN" [1] to location [B] above the main power switch.


1 DECAL:POWER SOURCE:OFF:CN 1

2 DECAL:CAUTION CHART:INKJET:PAPER:CHN 1

3 DECAL:KEY:MULTI-LANGUAGE:OPERATION SUB-UNIT:CHN 1

4 CD-ROM OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS CHN 1

5 MANUAL USER GUIDE CHN 1

6 MANUAL READ THIS FIRST CHN 1

7 SHEET TEL CHN 1

8 SHEET NOTES SEC AA 1

9 SHEET EULA 1

[B]

[1]



2. Attach "DECAL:CAUTION CHART:INKJET:PAPER:CHN" [2] to location [A] on the fusing section.

[2]

[A]



3. Peel off the Chinese language instruction decals No.1 through 14 from the "DECAL:KEY:MULTI-LANGUAGE:OPERATION SUB-UNIT:CHN" [3] and attach them to the Operation Panel [A] by referring to the illustration printed on the decal [3].

4. Instruct the operator to store the remaining accessories No. 4 through No. 9 somewhere close to the machine for future use.

[3]

[A]


Model: Andromeda-P1 Date:11-Nov-15 No.: RM205094

Subject: Service Manual Correction: SC694-05 Prepared by: T. Miyamoto



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




Service Manual Correction Please add the SC tables described in this bulletin to the following section. 6. Troubleshooting > SC600 (Engine: Communication and Others) > SC621 to SC625, SC669, SC682 to SC694


SC694-05 D Data Transfer Unit: IBACC Enable flag timeout

The enable flag of IBACC has not become 1 within specified time. (Data Transfer Unit cannot output the IBACC pattern)

Operation error of the Data Transfer Unit Data Transfer Unit defective Communication error between the engine and Data

Transfer Unit

If turning the main power off and on does not solve the problem, do the following. 1. Check the connection between the Data Transfer Unit

and BCU. 2. Replace the Data Transfer Unit.



Subject: Service Manual Correction: SC900 to SC919, SC990 to 994,

SC997 to C998 Prepared by: T. Miyamoto



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




Service Manual Correction The following section of the field service manual was corrected. 6. Troubleshooting > SC900 (Controller) > SC900 to SC919, SC992, SC994, SC998 Note: The descriptions in red were revised.

SC900 to SC919, SC990 to 994, SC997 to C998


SC900-00 D Electrical total counter error

The total counter contains data that is not a number.

NVRAM incorrect type NVRAM defective or corrupted Unexpected error from external source When PRT received signals at SRM, the requested

count did not complete.

Replace the NVRAM.


SC910-00 D External controller error 1

The external controller alerted the machine about an error.

Refer to the instructions for the external controller

Turn the main power off/on.


SC910-01 C External controller error 1

The external controller received unexpected command from the engine board.

Refer to the instructions for the external controller.






The external controller received illegal command from the engine board.





The external controller received unspecified engine status.





The external controller alerted the machine about an error other than SC910-01 to 03.









SC911-01 D Ethernet: Timeout

Communication error with the IPDS host system. (only occurs when the is IPDS installed on the external controller)

If rebooting the external controller does not solve the problem, replace the motherboard of external controller.


SC911-02 D Ethernet TCP/IP: Local software error

Local software error involved in the communication with the IPDS host system. (only occurs when the IPDS installed on the external controller)





SC911-03 B Ethernet TCP/IP: Remote software error

Remote software error involved in the communication with the IPDS host system. (only occurs when the IPDS is installed on the external controller)



SC911-04 D Ethernet TCP/IP: Network software error

Network software error involved in the communication with the IPDS host system. (only occurs when the IPDS installed on the external controller)



SC911-05 D Ethernet TCP/IP: General run time error

Runtime error of the software involved in the communication with the IPDS host system (only occurs when the IPDS installed on the external controller)



SC911-06 D Ethernet TCP/IP: Invalid configuration during enable

Configuration error involved in the communication with the IPDS host system (only occurs when the IPDS installed on the external controller)



SC911-10 D Internal printing: File system error

File system error of the internal print (such as file corruption)

If rebooting the external controller does not solve the problem, re-install the system software of external controller.




SC911-11 D Unexpected network condition

Unexpected errors for the network environment Motherboard of external controller is defective The configuration file or device driver corruption

If rebooting the external controller does not solve the problem, re-install the system software of external controller. Then if the problem is not solved, replace the motherboard of external software.


SC911-20 D Program check - Type 1



Programming error

Reboot the external controller.


SC911-24 D CPU0 Temperature Alert

CPU0 temperature error by H/W checking CPU or CPU cooling fan of external controller is

defective Connection error between the CPU and CPU cooling

fan of external controller Exhaust heat port of external controller is blocked

Check the connection between the CPU and CPU cooling fan of external controller.

Check the exhaust heat port of external controller and clean it up.

Replace the CPU and CPU cooling fan of external controller.

Replace the motherboard of external controller.




SC911-26 D CPU1 Temperature Alert

CPU1 temperature error by H/W checking CPU or CPU cooling fan of external controller is

defective Connection error between the CPU and CPU cooling

fan of external controller Exhaust heat port of external controller is blocked

Check the connection between the CPU and CPU cooling fan of external controller.

Check the exhaust heat port of external controller and clean it up.

Replace the CPU and CPU cooling fan of external controller.

Replace the motherboard of external controller.


SC911-27 D RDTU Fan Alert

RDTU cooling fan of external controller is stopped by H/W checking RTDU cooling fan of external controller is defective RTDU cooling fan harness of external controller os

disconnected (bad connection) Motherboard of external controller is defective

Turn off the external controller and leave it for a while. If the problem has not solved after turning it on, replace the RDTU cooling fan or the motherboard of external controller.


SC911-42 D Memory configuration has changed.

This error rarely occurs at the initial startup after the software installation of external controller because of memory shortage.

If rebooting the external controller does not solve the problem, replace the DIMM or the motherboard of external controller.


SC911-43 D Invalid features defined

Invalid features defined

Reboot the external controller.




SC911-44 D Recommended amount of memory not found

DIMM defective

If rebooting the external controller does not solve the problem, replace the DIMM.


SC911-45 D Recommended number of processors not found

CPU or motherboard of external controller defective

If rebooting the external controller does not solve the problem, replace the CPU/ CPU cooling fan or motherboard of external controller.


SC911-46 D File read error, hard disk

System files corruption

If rebooting the external controller does not solve the problem, do the following. 1. Re-install the system software of external controller. 2. Replace the HDD of external controller.


SC911-47 D File write error, hard disk


If rebooting the external controller does not solve the problem, do the following. 1. Re-install the system software of external controller. 2. Replace the HDD of external controller.


SC911-48 D Checksum error on configuration file.




SC911-49 D Hard disk backup to USB storage device failure

Abnormal termination due to incomplete backup to the USB memory of external controller.

If rebooting the external controller does not solve the problem, replace the USB memory of external controller for backup.




SC911-50 D Software update failed

Abnormal termination due to the system software update file failure of external controller

If rebooting the external controller does not solve the problem, re-install the update file of external controller.


SC911-51 D RDTU H/W error

RDTU board of external controller is defective Connection fault

If rebooting the external controller does not solve the problem, replace the RDTU board of external controller.


SC911-55 D VM option H/W error

Error (defective, harness disconnected or bad connection, or non-response) relating to the VM option (HDD, controller board, graphic board).

If rebooting the external controller does not solve the problem, replace the HDD, controller board, graphic board for VM option.


SC911-56 D Xen VM S/W error

Xen VM is not started normally or does not work normally. There is a possibility that the system file is broken.



SC911-57 D License key H/W error

USB dongle (included a license key) of external controller is defective

Connection fault

Reboot the external controller. Re-insert the USB dongle of external controller. Replace the USB dongle of external controller.




SC911-58 D License error

License key defective (nonconformity, file corruption and so on)

Unauthorized use of USB dongle for external controller (used once to another device, falsification, etc.)

If rebooting the external controller does not solve the problem, replace the USB dongle of external controller.


SC911-60 D Brand mismatch

An invalid USB dongle is inserted.

If rebooting the external controller does not solve the problem, re-install the system file of external controller. Then if the problem is not solved, replace the USB dongle.


SC911-61 D Command timeout communicating with the printer

No response of command level from the machine to external controller.

Check that the main machine is turned on. Check the cable connection between external

controller and main machine. Restart the main machine and external controller in the

correct procedure.


SC911-62 D Print Engine communication error

Connection fault Motherboard (onboard NIC) defective

Check that the main machine is turned on. Check the cable connection between external

controller and main machine. Restart the main machine and external controller in the

correct procedure. Replace the connection cable or motherboard of

external controller.


SC911-63 D A file system access error occurred in the ASCII temporary disk cache.






SC911-64 D Page processing timeout

Time-out error occurs during the page processing for print job.

If rebooting the external controller does not solve the problem, there may be a problem with the job.









SC919-00 D External controller down

While EAC (External Application Converter), the conversion module, was operating normally, the receipt of a power line interrupt signal from the FLUTE serial driver was detected, or BREAK signal from the other station was detected.

Controller power outage Controller rebooted Connection to controller loose


Here is a list of HDD status codes:

Display Meaning

(-1) HDD not connected

(-2) HDD not ready

(-3) No label

(-4) Partition type incorrect

(-5) Error returned during label read or check

(-6) Error returned during label read or check

(-7) “filesystem” repair failed

(-8) “filesystem” mount failed

(-9) Drive does not answer command

(-10) Internal kernel error

(-11) Size of drive is too small

(-12) Specified partition does not exist

(-13) Device file does not exist



Recovery from SC 925 Procedure 1 1. If the machine shows SC codes for HDD errors (SC860 to SC865) with SC 925, do the

recovery procedures for SC860 to SC865. Procedure 2 1. If the machine does not show one of the five HDD errors (SC860 to SC865), turn the

machine power off and on. 2. If this is not the solution for the problem, then initialize the NetFile partition

on the HDD with SP5-832-11 (HDD Formatting - Ridoc I/F). NetFiles: These are jobs printed from the document server using a PC and DeskTopBinder. Before you initialize the NetFile partition on the HDD, tell the customer: Received faxes on the delivery server will be erased All captured documents will be erased Desk Top Binder/Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor job history will be erased Documents on the document server, and scanned documents, will not be erased. The first time that the network gets access to the machine, the management

information must be configured again (this will use a lot of time). 3. Before you initialize the Netfile partition with SP5-832-11, do these steps: 4. In the User Tools mode, do Document Management> Batch Delete Transfer

Documents. 5. Do SP5-832-11, and turn the machine off and on. Procedure 3 1. If “Procedure 2” is not the solution for the problem, do SP5-832-1 (HDD Formatting -

All) 2. Cycle the machine off/on.

SP5-832-001 erases all document and address book data on the hard disks. Consult with the customer before you do this SP code.

Procedure 4 1. If “Procedure 3” does not solve the problem, replace the HDD.


SC990-00 D Software operation error

Software attempted an unexpected operation.

Abnormal variable Internal parameter error Insufficient work memory Hardware error not detected by SC

Turn the main power off/on. Reinstall the software of the controller and BCU board.




SC991-00 C Recoverable software operation error

The software performed an unexpected function and the program cannot continue. Recovery processing allows the program to continue.

Abnormal variable Internal parameter error Insufficient work memory Hardware error not detected by SC

Logging only In order to get more details about SC991: Execute SP5-990 (SP Print Mode) or SP7-403 (SC History) to read the history of the 10 most recent logged errors.


SC992-00 D Undefined Error (No SC Code)

An error not controlled by the system occurred (the error does not come under any other SC code).

Software defective Incorrect SC code from previous machine Short circuit on IOB1 or IOB2

Power cycle the main power off/on. If this does not resolve the SC, check for possible short circuit on IOB1 and IOB2, and replace the board(s), if necessary.


SC994-00 D Application Item Error

The numbers of executed application items on the operation panel reach the maximum limit for the operation panel structure.

Too many executed application items

Logging only


SC997-00 B Application function selection error

The application selected by the operation panel key operated abnormally (No response, abnormal ending).

Software bug (mainly the application)

Check the optional RAM, DIMM, boards required by the application program.

Check if the combination of downloaded programs are correct.




SC998-00 D Application start error

No application was registered to system within a specified time after the main power was turned on. (No application starts/All applications have been terminated abnormally)

Application started but cannot be drawn now for some reason.

Software bug (mainly the application) The optional RAM, DIMM, boards required by the

application program. Are not installed correctly.

Turn the main power off/on. Check the optional RAM, DIMM, boards Check the combination of programs Replace the controller board.



Subject: Manual Correction: Installation Color Controller E43/E83

Prepared by: T. Miyamoto



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2


2. Installation > Color Controller E43 (M465) > Installation (pg.208) 2. Installation > Color Controller E83 (M466) > Installation (pg.226)

The corrections are highlighted in red.

Color Controller E-43 (M465)

Accessory Check


1 AC Power Cord 4

2 Interface Cable 1

3 Media Pack 1

4 Grayscale Strip 1

5 Service Kit 1

6 Fiery Decal 1



Installation

The unit must be connected to a power source that is close to the unit and easily accessible. Make sure that the main power switch and AC power switch of the main machine are turned

OFF and that its power cord is disconnected before doing the following procedure. Doing the following procedure in an energized state constitutes an electric shock hazard and could cause a malfunction.

This guide covers hardware installation. It provides general information on connecting the E-43

to the customer's network. Explain the site administrator to refer the user’s manual for network setup and configuration information.

Before installation, the customer should be informed of the following: The site administrator should be available during the installation for assistance with

network connectivity issues. The site administrator should have a network cable and documentation for the network

settings. The site administrator should have a networked computer available during the installation.

The appropriate software should already be installed. There are two types of data transfer unit cables: A and B. There are two identical data transfer

unit cables. Follow the procedures and connect the cables to the correct ports. Otherwise the machine can break down.

[A]: Data Transfer Unit Port A [B]: Data Transfer Unit Port B

Do not bend data transfer unit cables A/B. Doing so may cause failure in data transfer. When bundling the cables, tie up in a rounded shape and make sure the radius [A] is more than 10cm.

Make sure to turn off the main power switch before removing the power cables. Doing so may

cause malfunctions. For details about turning off the main power switch, see page 224 “Turning



off the Main Power Switch”. When you turn off the main machine, turn off the color controller too. When you turn on the

color controller, you need to turn it on within one hour after the main machine is turned on.

1. Remove the controller cover [A] from rear side of the main machine. ( ×2)

2. Remove the protection cover [A] of the Gigabit Ethernet port for color controller.

( ×1)

3. Connect the interface cable [A] to the Gigabit Ethernet port of the main machine

and color controller. ( ×2) Main machine



Color controller

4. Connect one of the data transfer unit cables provided with the main machine to the data transfer unit port A [1] of main machine and port A [3] of color controller. ( ×2)

5. Connect the other data transfer unit cables provided with the main machine to the data transfer unit port B [2] of main machine and port B [4] of color controller. ( ×2)

Main machine

The above photo is of a pre-mass production unit, which had a green label attached to the data transfer cable to distinguish the cables [A] and [B]. The data transfer cables of mass production units are identical and no label is attached.

[1] close this TechMail




Color controller

The above photo is of a pre-mass production unit, which had a green label attached to the data transfer cable to distinguish the cables [A] and [B]. The data transfer cables of mass production units are identical and no label is attached.

There are two types of data transfer unit cables: A and B. Check [A] part of the data

transfer unit cables, and then connect the cable which is described as “A” into the port marked “A”. Connect the cable which is described as “B” into the port marked “B”.

There is no label [A] attached to the data transfer unit cables provided with the main machine. This label was attached only to pre-mass production units.





6. Connect the interface cable which is connected to a network to the Gigabit Ethernet port [A] of the color controller. ( ×1)

7. Connect the power cord [A] to color controller.

8. Plug the power cords of the main machine and color controller to the outlet. 9. Turn on the power switch [A] of color controller.

10. Press the main power switch [A] of the color controller.



11. Open the switch cover at the front left side of the fusing unit and press the main power switch [A].

12. Check the LED status of Gigabit Ethernet port [A] for color controller.

Make sure that the LED [A] is lit orange and the LED [B] is lit green. If one of these LED is

not lit, interface cable might be disconnected. Check the interface cable. When the machine is in low power mode, only the LED [A] is lit orange.

There is an interlocking switch [A] at rear side of the color controller. If you turn on the

interlocking switch (tilt downward), color controller turns off/on the power in tandem with the main machine’s operation.



13. Attach the controller cover [A] as shown below. ( ×2)

When attaching the controller cover [A], route the interface cable [B] and two data transfer

unit cables [C] through the cutouts in the controller cover.

Startup and Initial Setup

Test print

1. Press the [Home] key on the operation panel of the main machine and wait for a few minutes until the Fiery icon appears on the Home screen.

2. Press the Fiery icon to access to the Fiery menu screen.



3. Move to the [Fiery] tab.

4. Press [Printable Info].

5. Select the test page to print. Configuration Page PS Test Page

6. Examine the quality of the test pages.



Network settings

1. Move to the [Fiery] tab from the Fiery menu screen.

2. Press [Setup].

3. Log in as an administrator. Enter the user name and password (The default is "Fiery.1"), and then press [OK].



4. Press [DNS].

5. Configure the DNS address settings, and then press [Save].

6. Press [WINS].



7. Configure the WINS settings, and then press [Save].

8. Press [IP Address].

9. Press [IPv4 Address] or [IPv6 Address].



10. Configure the IP address settings, and then press [Save].

11. Press [Exit Setup].

12. Press [Reboot Now]. The system will reboot.



Color Controller E-83 (M466)

Accessory Check


1 AC Power Cord 4

2 Interface Cable 1

3 Media Pack 1

4 Grayscale Strip 1

5 Service Kit 1

6 Fiery Decal 1

Installation

The unit must be connected to a power source that is close to the unit and easily accessible. Make sure that the main power switch and AC power switch of the main machine are turned

OFF and that its power cord is disconnected before doing the following procedure. Doing the following procedure in an energized state constitutes an electric shock hazard and could cause a malfunction.

This guide covers hardware installation. It provides general information on connecting the E-83

to the customer's network. Explain the site administrator to refer the user’s manual for network setup and configuration information.

Before installation, the customer should be informed of the following: The site administrator should be available during the installation for assistance with

network connectivity issues. The site administrator should have a network cable and documentation for the network

settings. The site administrator should have a networked computer available during the installation.

The appropriate software should already be installed. There are two types of data transfer unit cables: A and B. There are two identical data transfer

unit cables. Follow the procedures and connect the cables to the correct ports. Otherwise the machine can break down.



[A]: Data Transfer Unit Port A [B]: Data Transfer Unit Port B

Do not bend data transfer unit cables A/B. Doing so may cause failure in data transfer. When bundling the cables, tie up in a rounded shape and make sure the radius [A] is more than 10cm.

Make sure to turn off the main power switch before removing the power cables. Doing so may

cause malfunctions. For details about turning off the main power switch, see page 242 “Turning off the Main Power Switch”.

When you turn off the main machine, turn off the color controller too. When you turn on the color controller, you need to turn it on within one hour after the main machine is turned on.

14. Remove the controller cover [A] from rear side of the main machine. ( ×2)



15. Remove the protection cover [A] of the Gigabit Ethernet port for color controller. ( ×1)

16. Connect the interface cable [A] to the Gigabit Ethernet port of the main machine and color controller. ( ×2) Main machine

Color controller



17. Connect one of the data transfer unit cables provided with the main machine to the data transfer unit port A [1] of main machine and port A [3] of color controller. ( ×2)

18. Connect the other data transfer unit cables provided with the main machine to the data transfer unit port B [2] of main machine and port B [4] of color controller. ( ×2)

Main machine

NOTE: The above photo is of a pre-mass production unit, which had a green label attached to the data transfer cable to distinguish the cables [A] and [B]. The data transfer cables of mass production units are identical and no label is attached.

Color controller

NOTE: The above photo is of a pre-mass production unit, which had a green label attached to the data transfer cable to distinguish the cables [A] and [B]. The data transfer cables of mass production units are identical and no label is attached.

[3] [4]

[1]

[2]



There are two types of data transfer unit cables: A and B. Check [A] part of the data

transfer unit cables, and then connect the cable which is described as “A” into the port marked “A”. Connect the cable which is described as “B” into the port marked “B”.

There is no label [A] attached to the data transfer unit cables provided with the main machine. This label was attached only to pre-mass production units.

19. Connect the interface cable which is connected to a network to the Gigabit

Ethernet port [A] of the color controller. ( ×1)

20. Connect the power cord [A] to color controller.

21. Plug the power cords of the main machine and color controller to the outlet.



22. Turn on the power switch [A] of color controller.

23. Press the main power switch [A] of the color controller.

24. Open the switch cover at the front left side of the fusing unit and press the main power switch [A].

25. Check the LED status of Gigabit Ethernet port [A] for color controller.



Make sure that the LED [A] is lit orange and the LED [B] is lit green. If one of these LED is

not lit, interface cable might be disconnected. Check the interface cable. When the machine is in low power mode, only the LED [A] is lit orange.

There is an interlocking switch [A] at rear side of the color controller. If you turn on the

interlocking switch (tilt downward), color controller turns off/on the power in tandem with the main machine’s operation.

26. Attach the controller cover [A] as shown below. ( ×2)

When attaching the controller cover [A], route the interface cable [B] and two data transfer

unit cables [C] through the cutouts in the controller cover.



Startup and Initial Setup

Test print

1. Press the [Home] key on the operation panel of the main machine and wait for a few minutes until the Fiery icon appears on the Home screen.

2. Press the Fiery icon to access to the Fiery menu screen.

3. Move to the [Fiery] tab.



4. Press [Printable Info].

5. Select the test page to print. Configuration Page PS Test Page

6. Examine the quality of the test pages.



Network settings

7. Move to the [Fiery] tab from the Fiery menu screen.

8. Press [Setup].

9. Log in as an administrator. Enter the user name and password (The default is "Fiery.1"), and then press [OK].



10. Press [DNS].

11. Configure the DNS address settings, and then press [Save].

12. Press [WINS].



13. Configure the WINS settings, and then press [Save].

14. Press [IP Address].

15. Press [IPv4 Address] or [IPv6 Address].



16. Configure the IP address settings, and then press [Save].

17. Press [Exit Setup].

18. Press [Reboot Now]. The system will reboot.


Model: BR-C1 Date: 18-Nov-15 No.: RD179113

SYMPTOM

SC720-80 or Jam 100 occurs under the following configurations: SR5050/5060 Finisher + [Pro 8100 series, Pro C7100 series, or Pro C9100 series]

CAUSE

The contact surfaces of the interlock switch on the finisher door were covered in small particles of insulating impurities during the plating process. As a result, a contact failure may occur in the switch.

Interlock SW

Bad contact:

Normal contact:

Note: The impurities are very small. As a result, the symptom only occurs on a small percentage of affected machines.

Potentially affected machines

See page 5/9

Subject: SC720-80 or Jam100 on SR5050/5060 Prepared by: Y, Tanimoto

From: QAC Field Quality Management 2G


Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier2



SOLUTION

Production line:

- All affected parts will be switched out with normal ones. - Reworks will be performed on affected finishers in field inventory.

In the field:

Replace the interlock switch using the PROCEDURE on the next page, if: 1. You are dispatched to deal with SC720-80 or Jam 100, AND 2. You can confirm in the SMC report that SC720-80 or Jam 100 has occurred at least

2 times.

IMPORTANT: If this SC or Jam has not occurred recently, you do not need to replace the switch. This is because the insulating impurities may be forced off the contact surface during the normal opening and closing of the door.



PROCEDURE

Part to be replaced (Interlock Switch, Free of Charge ) P/N: D7349900 (Free of Charge) Description: SW:FA3L-CA12 Qty: 1 Note: This part contains the 12042925 interlock switch.

1. Remove the cover (screws x4).

2. Remove the interlock switch.

See Service Manual for details (Booklet Finisher SR5060, Finisher SR5050, Machine Code: D734/D735, Field Service Manual).



3. Remove the attached cover from the interlock switch as described below.

Create a gap between the cover and switch. Insert the tip of a small standard-head (minus) screw driver into this gap. Twist the screw driver to divide the cover and switch.

4. Replace the switch. 5. Reattach all parts in the reverse order you removed them.



Potentially affected machines

Model S/N Sub-

Total Total

Reworked

(*)

Not-

reworked

ＮＡ D734-17 E844E810001～E844E810070 70

E844E910001～E84４E910102 102

E844EA10001～E844EA10140 140

E844EB10001～E844EB10008 8

E844EC10001～E844EC10040 40

E845E710020～E845E710280 261

E845E810001～E845E810110 110 68

E845E910001～E845E910080 80 811 80 663

D735-17 E854E710397～E854E710430 34

E854E810001～E854E810220 220

E854E910001～E854E910120 120

E854EA10001～E854EA10247 247

E854EB10001～E854EB10264 264

E854EC10001～E854EC10140 140

E855E710001～E855E710210 210

E855E810001～E855E810226 226

E855E910001～E855E910130 130 1591 95 1496

ＥＵ D734-27 E844E820001～E844E820018 18

E844E920001～E844E920070 70

E844EA20001～E844EA20066 66

E844EB20001～E844EB20070 70

E844EC20001～E844EC20085 85

E845E720001～E845E720100 100

E845E820001～E845E820146 146

E845E920001～E845E920101 101 656 59 597

D735-27 E854E820001～E854E820110 110

E854E920001～E854E920080 80

E854EA20001～E854EA20193 193

E854EB20001～E854EB20110 110

E854EC20001～E854EC20140 140

E855E720009～E855E720200 192

E855E820001～E855E820154 154

E855E920001～E855E920211 211 1190 111 1079

Total 4248 4248 413 3835

(*) Reworked machine S/N list (not need to replace switch)

D734-17 D735-17 D734-27 D735-27

1 E845E810001 E855E910001 E845E920001 E855E920101

2 E845E810002 E855E910002 E845E920002 E855E920102

3 E845E810003 E855E910003 E845E920003 E855E920103



4 E845E810004 E855E910004 E845E920005 E855E920104

5 E845E810005 E855E910005 E845E920006 E855E920105

6 E845E810006 E855E910006 E845E920007 E855E920106

7 E845E810007 E855E910007 E845E920008 E855E920107

8 E845E810008 E855E910008 E845E920009 E855E920108

9 E845E810009 E855E910009 E845E920010 E855E920109

10 E845E810010 E855E910010 E845E920011 E855E920110

11 E845E810011 E855E910011 E845E920013 E855E920111

12 E845E810012 E855E910012 E845E920014 E855E920112

13 E845E810013 E855E910013 E845E920015 E855E920113

14 E845E810014 E855E910014 E845E920016 E855E920114

15 E845E810015 E855E910015 E845E920017 E855E920115

16 E845E810016 E855E910016 E845E920018 E855E920116

17 E845E810017 E855E910017 E845E920019 E855E920117

18 E845E810018 E855E910018 E845E920020 E855E920118

19 E845E810019 E855E910019 E845E920022 E855E920119

20 E845E810020 E855E910020 E845E920023 E855E920120

21 E845E810021 E855E910021 E845E920024 E855E920121

22 E845E810022 E855E910022 E845E920025 E855E920122

23 E845E810023 E855E910023 E845E920026 E855E920123

24 E845E810024 E855E910024 E845E920027 E855E920124

25 E845E810025 E855E910025 E845E920030 E855E920125

26 E845E810026 E855E910026 E845E920033 E855E920126

27 E845E810027 E855E910027 E845E920036 E855E920127

28 E845E810028 E855E910028 E845E920038 E855E920128

29 E845E810029 E855E910029 E845E920039 E855E920129

30 E845E810030 E855E910030 E845E920040 E855E920130

31 E845E810031 E855E910031 E845E920054 E855E920131

32 E845E810032 E855E910032 E845E920057 E855E920132

33 E845E810033 E855E910033 E845E920058 E855E920133

34 E845E810034 E855E910034 E845E920059 E855E920134

35 E845E810035 E855E910035 E845E920060 E855E920135

36 E845E810036 E855E910036 E845E920061 E855E920136

37 E845E810037 E855E910037 E845E920062 E855E920137

38 E845E810039 E855E910038 E845E920063 E855E920138

39 E845E810041 E855E910039 E845E920064 E855E920139

40 E845E810042 E855E910040 E845E920065 E855E920140

41 E845E810043 E855E910041 E845E920066 E855E920141

42 E845E810044 E855E910042 E845E920067 E855E920142

43 E845E810045 E855E910043 E845E920068 E855E920143

44 E845E810046 E855E910044 E845E920069 E855E920144

45 E845E810048 E855E910045 E845E920070 E855E920145

46 E845E810050 E855E910046 E845E920071 E855E920146

47 E845E810053 E855E910047 E845E920072 E855E920147



48 E845E810068 E855E910048 E845E920074 E855E920148

49 E845E810071 E855E910051 E845E920076 E855E920149

50 E845E810072 E855E910052 E845E920078 E855E920150

51 E845E810073 E855E910053 E845E920080 E855E920151

52 E845E810074 E855E910054 E845E920081 E855E920152

53 E845E810075 E855E910055 E845E920082 E855E920153

54 E845E810076 E855E910056 E845E920085 E855E920154

55 E845E810077 E855E910057 E845E920087 E855E920155

56 E845E810078 E855E910058 E845E920089 E855E920156

57 E845E810079 E855E910059 E845E920090 E855E920157

58 E845E810080 E855E910060 E845E920092 E855E920158

59 E845E810081 E855E910061 E845E920097 E855E920159

60 E845E810082 E855E910062 E855E920160

61 E845E810083 E855E910063 E855E920161

62 E845E810084 E855E910064 E855E920162

63 E845E810085 E855E910065 E855E920163

64 E845E810086 E855E910067 E855E920164

65 E845E810087 E855E910070 E855E920165

66 E845E810088 E855E910076 E855E920166

67 E845E810089 E855E910077 E855E920167

68 E845E810090 E855E910078 E855E920168

69 E845E910001 E855E910080 E855E920169

70 E845E910002 E855E910082 E855E920170

71 E845E910003 E855E910083 E855E920171

72 E845E910004 E855E910084 E855E920172

73 E845E910005 E855E910085 E855E920173

74 E845E910006 E855E910087 E855E920174

75 E845E910007 E855E910089 E855E920175

76 E845E910008 E855E910110 E855E920176

77 E845E910009 E855E910111 E855E920177

78 E845E910010 E855E910113 E855E920178

79 E845E910011 E855E910114 E855E920179

80 E845E910012 E855E910115 E855E920180

81 E845E910013 E855E910116 E855E920181

82 E845E910014 E855E910117 E855E920182

83 E845E910015 E855E910118 E855E920183

84 E845E910016 E855E910119 E855E920184

85 E845E910017 E855E910120 E855E920185

86 E845E910018 E855E910121 E855E920186

87 E845E910019 E855E910122 E855E920187

88 E845E910020 E855E910123 E855E920188

89 E845E910021 E855E910124 E855E920189

90 E845E910022 E855E910125 E855E920190

91 E845E910023 E855E910126 E855E920191



92 E845E910024 E855E910127 E855E920192

93 E845E910025 E855E910128 E855E920193

94 E845E910026 E855E910129 E855E920194

95 E845E910027 E855E910130 E855E920195

96 E845E910028 E855E920196

97 E845E910029 E855E920197

98 E845E910030 E855E920198

99 E845E910031 E855E920199

100 E845E910032 E855E920200

101 E845E910033 E855E920201

102 E845E910034 E855E920202

103 E845E910035 E855E920203

104 E845E910036 E855E920204

105 E845E910037 E855E920205

106 E845E910038 E855E920206

107 E845E910039 E855E920207

108 E845E910040 E855E920208

109 E845E910041 E855E920209

110 E845E910042 E855E920210

111 E845E910043 E855E920211

112 E845E910044

113 E845E910045

114 E845E910046

115 E845E910047

116 E845E910048

117 E845E910049

118 E845E910050

119 E845E910051

120 E845E910052

121 E845E910053

122 E845E910054

123 E845E910055

124 E845E910056

125 E845E910057

126 E845E910058

127 E845E910059

128 E845E910060

129 E845E910061

130 E845E910062

131 E845E910063

132 E845E910064

133 E845E910065

134 E845E910066

135 E845E910067



136 E845E910068

137 E845E910069

138 E845E910070

139 E845E910071

140 E845E910072

141 E845E910073

142 E845E910074

143 E845E910075

144 E845E910076

145 E845E910077

146 E845E910078

147 E845E910079

148 E845E910080



Subject: Paper jams with GBC StreamPunch Ultra Prepared by: T. Miyamoto



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM

Paper jams occur with the GBC Stream Punch Ultra.

The symptom occurs in the following types of job:

Double-punch, simplex jobs printed on A4 SEF or LT SEF or A3 or DLT

Single-punch, simplex jobs printed on A3 or DLT

Single-punch, mixplex jobs in which the paper size changes from large to small (for example, from A3 to A4 LEF)

CAUSE

Software bug

SOLUTION

Update the firmware of Booklet Finisher SR5060 / Finisher SR5050 / High Capacity Stacker SK5030 to the following version or newer.

Booklet Finisher SR5060 / Finisher SR5050: Ver.02.590:10

High Capacity Stacker SK5030: Ver.01.060:06


Model: Andromeda-P1/ Vacuum Feed LCIT Date: 30-Nov-15 No.: RM205099

Subject: Preventing J002/J003/J430/J431 caused by Improper set of

Paper feed belt unit Prepared by: T. Miyamoto



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM

J002: Paper Feed Sensor (Tray1) J003: Paper Feed Sensor (Tray2) J430: LCT1 Paper Feed Sensor (Tray1) J431: LCT1 Paper Feed Sensor (Tray2)

CAUSE

Paper cannot be fed, because the spring pin [A] located at the rear side of the paper feed belt unit [B] (of the main machine or Vacuum Feed LCIT RT5100) is not connected to the coupling [C].

This photo shows the improper condition where the spring pin is not connected to the coupling.



SOLUTION

Connect the spring pin to the coupling with the following procedure. The procedure is the same for the paper feed belt unit of the main machine and of the Vacuum Feed LCIT RT5100, and can be performed either when the main power switch is turned ON or OFF.

Procedure when the main power switch is ON

1. With the paper feed belt unit [A] installed, pull out the tray(s) showing the symptom and check if there is a gap between the frames at the location indicated with the red dotted circle.

If there is no gap, do Step 5.

If there is a gap, do Steps 2 through 5.



2. Close the tray.

3. Execute the SP for the tray(s) showing the symptom. This will rotate the paper feed

belt for 5 seconds so that the spring pin connects with the coupling.

SP5-804-007 (Output Check: Paper Feed Motor: Tray1) SP5-805-026 (Output Check: Paper Feed Motor: Tray2) SP5-805-100 (Output Check: LCT1: Paper Feed Belt Motor: Tray3) SP5-805-114 (Output Check: LCT1: Paper Feed Belt Motor: Tray4) SP5-805-131 (Output Check: LCT2: Paper Feed Belt Motor: Tray5) SP5-805-145 (Output Check: LCT2: Paper Feed Belt Motor: Tray6) SP5-805-162 (Output Check: LCT3: Paper Feed Belt Motor: Tray7) SP5-805-176 (Output Check: LCT3: Paper Feed Belt Motor: Tray8)

4. Pull out the tray and confirm that there is no gap between the frames.

5. Confirm that the two screws fixing the paper feed belt unit are tightly fastened.

Procedure when the main power switch is OFF

1. With the paper feed belt unit [A] installed, check if there is a gap between the frames at the location indicated with the red dotted circle.



If there is no gap, confirm the two screws fixing paper feed belt unit are securely fastened. This completes the procedure.

If there is a gap, do Steps 2 through 4.

2. Remove the two screws to pull out the paper feed unit [A] and slowly turn the paper feed belt [B] with your hands. This will connect the spring pin with the coupling.

3. Push the paper feed belt unit back in and confirm that there is no gap between the frames. Repeat Step 2 until you confirm no gap.

4. Fasten the paper feed belt unit with the screws.



Subject: Service Manual Correction: Manual Level Adjustment Prepared by: T. Miyamoto



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




Service Manual Correction The following section of the field service manual was corrected. 2. Installation > Main Machine Installation > Installation Procedure > Machine Level Adjustment Note: The areas highlighted in red were revised. STEP1 Place eight shoes [B] under each leveling bolts [A] of the imaging section

and the fusing section. STEP2 Continue to turn the nut until the leveling bolt [A] reaches the shoe [B]. (Use

the large diameter side of the wrench (hexagon head bolt)) Example below: front side of the fusing section



Two types of wrench are provided with the main machine. Use the proper wrench depends on the purpose.

Name Description









STEP3 Open the front left door [A] of the imaging section and place a level [B] as shown below.

[C]: 50 mm

STEP4 Adjust the height of the each leveling bolt [A] to level the unit (front and rear) within the specification (±1.0mm/1000mm).

When the front side is lower: Lower the nuts of the front side of the unit (left

and right) to lift the front side of the unit. When the rear side is lower: Lower the nuts of the rear side of the unit (left and

right) to lift the rear of the unit.



STEP5 Open the front left door [A] of the imaging section and place a level [B] as shown below.

[C]: 50 mm

STEP6 Adjust the height of the each leveling bolt [A] to level the unit (left and right) within the specification (±0.5mm/1000mm). When the right side is lower: Lower the nuts of the right side of the unit (front



STEP7 Open the front left door [A] of the fusing section and set a level [B] as shown below.

[C]: 50 mm

STEP8 Adjust the height of the each leveling bolt to level the unit (front and rear) within the specification (±1.0mm/1000mm). When the front side is lower: Lower the nuts of the front side of the unit (left

and right) to lift the front side of the unit. When the rear side is lower: Lower the nuts of the rear side of the unit (left and

right) to lift the rear side of the unit.



STEP9 Open the front left door [A] of the fusing section and set a level [B] as

shown below.

[C]: 50 mm

STEP10 Adjust the height of the each leveling bolt to level the unit (left and right) within the specification (±0.5mm/1000mm). When the right side is lower: Lower the nuts of the right side of the unit (front



STEP11 Do Steps 3-6 and check the level of the imaging section again. STEP12 Close the front left door of the imaging section/fusing section.



Subject: SC625-00: TDCU communication error Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM

SC625-00 (TDCU communication error) when removing and putting back the ITB unit.

CAUSE

The ITB unit was removed and put back into the machine without turning OFF the main power switch. Note that repeated operation in such manner may blow the fuses on the TDCU.

SOLUTION

Always disconnect the power plug before performing any service maintenance.

Switching OFF the machine power and disconnecting the power plug for any service maintenance is described as an IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE in the field service manual. Be sure to follow this notice at all times not only for the prevention of SC625-00, but also to avoid fatal safety issues.

See the following section of the Field Service Manual.

Important Safety Notice > Before Installing, Maintenance > Power


Model: Andoromeda-P1 Date: 1-Dec-15 No.: RM205102

Subject: Settings for Machines Used in a Showroom Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




IMPORTANT NOTICE

DO NOT apply the setting described in SOLUTION below unless the machine is used in a showroom. This is because the setting will exhaust toner after completing every job, causing the development unit to run idle more frequently and shorten the toner yield.

SYMPTOM

Image quality problems (vertical streaks, grainy images, uneven image density)

CAUSE

Image quality problems are caused by degradation of toner inside the developer.

Toner gets degraded when it is mixed inside the developer. If the machine is used in a showroom, toner inside the developer tend to be degraded for the following reasons:

1. Process controls (both "PowerON ProCon" and "JobIn Procon"), which cause toner degradation, are executed frequently because, with the factory-default settings, they are executed when the machine is left unused for a specified period of time and machines in showrooms tend to be left unused for a long time.

2. The mixed toner stays inside the developer for a long time because machines in showrooms do not consume as much toner as machines in normal use do.

SOLUTION

(1) Discharge the toner inside the development unit. 1. Check each of the following items. If the value exceeds 20000 [mm], toner of the

corresponding color must be discharged. SP3-820-011 (Tnr Refresh Mode: K Amount) SP3-820-012 (Tnr Refresh Mode: C Amount) SP3-820-013 (Tnr Refresh Mode: M Amount) SP3-820-014 (Tnr Refresh Mode: Y Amount)

2. Discharge the toner by printing the Full Dot Pattern on A3 or larger sheets of paper. If the value of SP3-820-*** is 20000 [mm], print 40 pages. If it is 40000 [mm], print 80 pages. To avoid fusing problems, use only up to 2 colors at a time. Select "26: Full Dot Pattern" in SP2-109-003 (Test Pattern: Pattern Selection) and select the colors to be used with SP2-109-006 to 009. For the color of the toner to be used, keep the default value (15) unchanged. For the color of the toner not to be used, set the value to 0. Example: When printing 40 pages using all colors 1. Select "26: Full Dot Pattern" in SP2-109-003.


Model: Andoromeda-P1 Date: 1-Dec-15 No.: RM205102

2. Select "0" in SP2-109-008 (Test Pattern: Density: Ma) and SP2-109-009 (Test Pattern: Density: Ye).

3. Print the test pattern in duplex mode on 20 sheets. 4. Return the values of SP2-109-008 and SP2-109-009 to "15". 5. Select "0" in SP2-109-006 (Test Pattern: Density: Bk) and SP2-109-007 (Test

Pattern: Density: Cy). 6. Print the test pattern in duplex mode on 20 sheets.

(2) Change the settings of "PowerON ProCon". Set SP3-530-001 (PowerON ProCon :Set: Non-use Time Setting) to 0 (default: 30). Set SP3-530-002 (PowerON ProCon :Set: Temperature Range) to 0 (default: 10). Set SP3-530-003 (PowerON ProCon :Set: Relative Humidity Range) to 0 (default: 50). Set SP3-530-004 (PowerON ProCon :Set: Absolute Humidity Range) to 0 (default: 6). Set SP3-530-009 (PowerON ProCon :Set: Non-use Time: Long Term) to 360 (default:

120). This will reduce unnecessary process controls which cause toner degradation. (3) Enable Job End Toner Refresh. Set SP3-820-022 (Tnr Refresh Mode: Max Job End Pattern) to 1000 (default: 0). Set SP3-820-024 (Tnr Refresh Mode: Job End Ptn Start Threshold) to 10000 (default:

1). This will reduce buildup of degraded toner in the developer. If image density becomes uneven over time even though (2) and (3) are applied, execute (1) again.


Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 9-Dec-15 No.: RM205103

Subject: SP3012 Results Code Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




Please replace the existing information in your field service manual with this RTB. Appendices>3.Appendicies: SP Mode Tables>Group 3000(1/3)>SP3-011 to -251(Process)>SP3-012 Display result detail NOTE: For your reference, results code 15, 16, 41, 42, 43, 44 are added. Result code 24, 25, 26, 45, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 90 are deleted. Code category: 00 and lager

Code Result name Description Major Cause/Solution

00 Not executed Factory default setting (SP default)

-

Code category: 10 and lager: Result (Normal)


11 Succeed - -

Code category: 15 and larger: Potential Sensor


15 Vd detection error: Upper Limit

Detected Vd is greater than 950 [-V]

Potential sensor dirty (foreign object, such as toner, entering the probe window)

Potential sensor defective (Probe, board, connector pin disconnected)

FU32 on IOB1 has blown.

1. Check the potential sensor connector and harness.

2. Clean the potential sensor if it gets dirty. 3. Replace the potential sensor probe. 4. Replace the potential sensor board. 5. Replace IOB1.

16 Vd detection error: Lower Limit

Detected Vd is less than 50 [-V]

Potential sensor defective (Probe, board, connector pin disconnected)

1. Check the potential sensor connector and harness.

2. Replace the potential sensor probe. 3. Replace the potential sensor board.



Code category: 20 and lager: ID Sensor


21 ID Sensor Vsg adjust error

Vsg_reg is out of range (4.0±0.5V)

PTR belt deformed, out of position or damaged

ID sensor connector disconnected/loose connection

ID sensor defective

1. Check the ID sensor. If obstacle intercept the ID sensor, remove it and execute Process Control (SP3-011-001).

2. Check the PTR belt and fix it if it is deformed, out of position or damaged.

3. Check the ID sensor and clean it if it gets dirty. (Do not clean with dry cloth)

4. Check the ID sensor connector and harness.

5. Replace the ID sensor.

22 ID Sensor LED adjust error

Ifsg is greater than 30mA

PTR belt deformed, out of position or damaged


ID sensor defective






23

ID Sensor output error (Positive reflect)

Vsg_reg is less than 0.5V


ID sensor defective








Code category: 40 and lager: TD Sensor


41 Vt error: Upper Limit

Vt is greater than 4.7V

TD sensor disconnected (bad connection), harness defective

Toner density extremely low TD sensor defective

1. Check the TD sensor connector and harness. If there is a problem with TD sensor (damaged etc), replace the TD sensor.

2. Perform Forced Toner Supply (SP3050), then executes Density Adjustment Process Control (SP3011-002).

3. Replace the developer, if it occurs repeatedly.

4. Replace the sub hopper. 5. Replace the development unit.

42 Vt error: Lower Limit

Vt is less than 0.5V

TD sensor not connected correctly TD sensor defective


2. Replace the developer. 3. Replace the development unit if it occurs

repeatedly.

43 TD sensor error (Upper Limit)

Development Gamma is proper (0.5 ≤ Development Gamma ≤ 2.0), and Vt is greater than 4.7V



2. Execute Forced Toner Supply (SP3-050-001 to 006). Then execute Density Adjustment Process Control (SP3-011-002).

3. Replace the developer if it occurs repeatedly.

4. Replace the sub hopper. 5. Replace the development unit.

44 TD sensor error (Lower Limit)

Development Gamma is proper (0.5 ≤ Development Gamma ≤ 2.0), and Vt is less than 0.5V



2. Replace the developer. 3. Replace the development unit if it occurs



repeatedly.

Code category: 50 and larger: Patch pattern detection


55 Development gamma error (Upper Limit)

Development Gamma is greater than 6.0 [mg/cm2/-kV]

1. Execute Density Adjustment Process Control (SP3-011-002).


56 Development gamma error (Lower Limit)

Development Gamma is less than 0.3 [mg/cm2/-kV]


2. Execute Forced Toner Supply (SP3-050-001 to 006). Then execute Density Adjustment Process Control (SP3-011-002).

3. Replace the developer, if it occurs repeatedly.

4. Replace the sub hopper.

57

Development start voltage: Vk error (Upper Limit)

Development start voltage: Vk is greater than 300 [-V]



58

Development start voltage: Vk error (Lower Limit)

Development start voltage: Vk is less than -300 [-V]



59 Insufficient data enabled

At least 2 points are needed for gamma correction





Code category: 60 and lager: Potential adjust


61 LD won’t light P pattern is not written.

1. Check the toner shield glass and clean it if it gets dirty.

2. Replace the laser unit.

62 Residual potential: Vr error

Vr is greater than 200 [-V]

1. Trade the PCU of the color in which problem occur with the PCU of the color in which problem does not occur. Then execute Process Control (SP3-011-001).

2. If the problem occur in different color, replace the PCU. If the problem occur in the same color, clean the potential sensor with a blower brush.

3. Replace the potential sensor.

63 Electrified potential: Vd adjust error

Vd can not be adjusted in target range (Vd±8V).

1. Execute Cleaning Setup (SP3-032-001) three times.

2. Perform the troubleshooting for horizontal white and black streaks at 308mm intervals.

64 Exposure potential: Vpl adjust error

Vpl can not be adjusted in target range (Vpl±5V)

1. Execute Cleaning Setup (SP3-032-001) three times.

2. Perform the troubleshooting for horizontal white and black streaks at 308mm intervals.

Code category: 90 and lager: Result (End)


99 Kill Kill by door open, power off, error. (Set when execute.)

-



Subject: Vertical White Streaks in Black Halftone Images on the Second

Side of a Duplex Print Prepared by: T. Miyamoto



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM

Vertical white streaks appear in black halftone images on the second side of a duplex print.


CAUSE

The sheet was not cooled evenly in the Paper Cooling Unit after the first side was printed. When a black halftone image is printed on the second side, relatively damp parts appear as white streaks because toner is not transferred evenly.

OCCURRENCE CONDITIONS The above problem is likely to occur under the following conditions: Black halftone image Duplex printing

SOLUTION

When checking the results, print three sheets in duplex printing mode.



Action 1: Changing the position of the entrance roller of the paper cooling unit 1. Open the left front door [A] and right front door [B] of the fusing section.

2. Rotate the lever [A] at the paper cooling unit clockwise.

The position of the entrance roller shifts to the lower position (the entrance roller lowers 1mm). This brings the entrance roller into strong contact with the paper cooling belt.

If the problem is not solved, proceed to Action 2.



Action 2: Lowering the fusing temperature



Action 3: Lowering the process speed

開始In the adjustment settings for Custom Paper, change the setting of 120 (Process Speed Setting) to low-speed mode.

Adjustment made in the adjustment

settings for Custom Paper

Is the customer satisfied? EndYes

No

In the adjustment settings for

Custom Paper, lower the values

of 88/89 (Fusing Heat Roller

Temperature Adjustment) by 5 °C.




No


Custom Paper, lower the values

of 88/89 (Fusing Heat Roller

Temperature Adjustment) by 5 °C

again.




No

Start

To Action 4: Adjusting

Paper Transfer Current

Action 4: Adjusting the Paper Transfer Current Do this only if Paper Transfer Current has not already been changed in order to solve another image quality problem.

NOTE: Investigation is in process for a solution in case results are unacceptable even after completing Action 4. This bulletin will be re-issued when the solution becomes available.

Andromeda-P1 Technical Bulletin PAGE: 1/4


Subject: Troubleshooting SC472 caused by machine transport Prepared by: T. Miyamoto



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM

SC472 (Belt Centering Roller Motor HP error) occurs, if the machine is powered ON after it was transported.

CAUSE

Vibration generated during the transport slackens the wire [A] of the ITB belt centering motor [B].

SOLUTION

1. Pull out the ITB unit to the service position. (See section 4. Replacement and Adjustment > Intermediate Transfer Belt Unit (ITB) > ITB Unit (Service Position) of the service manual.)

2. From the rear side of the ITB unit, check if the wire of the ITB belt centering motor is slack.



How to check and correct the slackened wire

Look at the cutout in the roller bracket [C]. If the wire [A] is slack, the boss [B] is in contact with the top edge of the cutout instead of at the center of the cutout, because the bracket hangs down.

NOTE: In the photos below, the flywheel has been removed for easier view, but the cutout can be inspected without having to remove the flywheel.

Also, if the wire [A] is slack, it is floating from the pulley [B].



To correct the slack, turn the pulley [A] counterclockwise until the wire is tight and

the pulley can be turned no further.

3. To confirm that the wire [A] is in the correct condition, verify that there is a gap of approximately 1mm between the boss [B] and the top edge of the cutout on the roller bracket [C].

NOTE: In the photos below, the flywheel has been removed for easier view, but the cutout can be inspected without having to remove the flywheel.



The wire [A] should be pulled straight from the top edge of the pulley [B].

4. Put back the ITB unit, turn ON the main power switch and confirm that the SC does not appear.



Subject: How to Clean the ITB Encoder Strip to Prevent SC499 Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




How to Clean the ITB Encoder Strip to Prevent SC499

1. Remove the ITB. See the following section of the field service manual for the procedure.

Replacement and Adjustment > Intermediate Transfer Belt Unit (ITB) > Intermediate Transfer Belt

2. Place the intermediate transfer belt on a flat surface.

3. Wear gloves on both hands.

4. Insert, for example, a winding core [A] into the belt, to give space for cleaning.

5. Use a clean and dry piece of cloth [C] and wipe the encoder strip [B].



IMPORTANT

To prevent the encoder strip [B] from peeling off, DO NOT rub across the split [A] unless the strip is attached with the transparent seal. (See related RTB #RM205085 for information on the transparent seal.)

The blue arrow indicates the wiping direction.



6. Check if the encoder strip is clean.

After the encoder strip is clean, attach the transparent seal over the split part of

encoder strip to prevent the peeling off. See RTB #RM205085 for the procedure.

If the encoder strip is still not clean even after wiping with a dry cloth, wipe again using alcohol by taking IMPORTANT NOTE of the following points.

IMPORTANT NOTE

Be sure to use "Ethanol" as the alcohol. Other solvents, for example “Methanol” will

damage the encoder strip.

Never touch the surface of the belt [A] with alcohol. Alcohol will affect the elastic layer on the belt and cause image quality issues.

OK (Clean) NG (Not clean)



Consciously wipe the encoded strip [B] with cloth [A] dampened with alcohol inside the encoded strip as shown below, so that the alcohol does not adhere to the surface of intermediate transfer belt.

[A]: Cloth dampened with alcohol

[B]: Encoder strip

[C]: Cleaning area

[D]: Back side of the ITB



Subject: Important Note on SP5104 and FSM Correction Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




This is a very IMPORTANT NOTICE regarding SP5-104-001. Please take note of the following when servicing your customer’s machines at all times.

SP5-104-001 (A3/DLT Double Count) is set to “1” (ON) as a factory default. However, it changes to "0" (OFF), if the NVRAM is replaced or cleared without downloading the original SP settings with an SD card created with SP5-824-001 (NVRAM Data Upload). In this case, make sure to change the setting back to “1” (ON).

Make sure SP5-104-001 is set in accordance with the customer contract at a new site installation and after clearing/replacing the NVRAM.

FSM Correction

Description of the above SP in the FSM was incorrect. Please make the following correction in this section:

Appendices: SP Mode Tables>Group 5000(1/2)

Factory default = 1: ON


Reissued: 31-May-16

Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 17-Dec-15 No.: RM205108a

RTB Reissue The items in bold italics were added or changed

Service Manual Correction The following section of the field service manual was corrected. 6. Troubleshooting > Image Quality > Image Quality 004: Unevenness > Gloss unevenness occurred in paper cooling unit Note: The areas highlighted in red were revised from the original service manual.

SYMPTOM

Bands of different glossiness [A] appear which are similar to the streaks on the solid images.

Note: This symptom can be more easily confirmed by printing five continuous one-sided copies.

Occurrence Conditions

The above problems are likely to occur under the following conditions: Paper thickness/paper type: Coated paper Temperature: HH, HM Image area: Solid image Others: 1st sheet of printing

Subject: Manual Correction: Uneven Gloss Caused by the Paper

Cooling Unit Prepared by: J. Kobayashi

From: Field Quality Management Group2, FQM Dept, QAC


Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required





Reissued: 31-May-16


CAUSE

While the temperature of the toner surface on the paper is over 95°C, the surface of the toner becomes smooth and glossiness becomes high when the toner contacts the paper cooling belt in the paper cooling unit. But, if the toner which contacts the paper cooling unit is peeled off the paper, gloss unevenness occurred.

SOLUTION

Action 1: Decreasing the adjust adding fusing temperature Decrease the “Adjust Adding Fusing Temperature” (in the adjustment settings for Custom Paper) gradually, 5°C at a time. Note: This setting is applied to the fuser unit just before paper transport.


Reissued: 31-May-16


Action 2: Decreasing the fusing temperature Decrease the fusing temperature gradually, 5°C at a time.


Reissued: 31-May-16


Action 3: Lowering process speed - Reduce the process speed. - Decrease the fusing temperature gradually, 5°C at a time.


Custom Paper, change the setting

of 120 (Process Speed Setting) to

low speed mode.

Is the customer satisfied?

In the adjustment settings for Custom Paper,

lower the values of 88/89 (Fusing Heat Roller

Temperature Adjustment) by 5 °C again.


Yes

Yes

No


lower the values of 88/89 (Fusing Heat

Roller Temperature Adjustment) by 5 °C

again.


End (Not repairable

within this flow)

Yes

No

End

No

Start








Custom Paper, lower the values of

88/89 (Fusing Heat Roller

Temperature Adjustment) by 5 °C.





Subject: Troubleshooting Small Fonts/Thin Lines that Appear Blurred Prepared by: T. Miyamoto



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM

Small characters and thin lines appear blurred.

CAUSE

By the nature of the printing mechanism, small fonts and thin lines may not always appear sharp.

RECOMMENDED ACTION

Do the flowchart on the next page.

This sample image is an enlarged view of a font printed in 3 points.



Start

Is the blur observed only in text objects, or also in line/graphic objects?

Only text objects

+5

Also line/graphic objects

Improved

Did not improve

Finish

Finish(No further adjustments

available by spec.)

In Adjustment Settings for

Skilled Operators, execute

"201. Adjust Image Density/

DEMS".

In Adjustment Settings for Skilled Operators, check the setting value of “204. Adjust

Line Width”.

+5 or less

In Adjustment Settings for Skilled Operators, increase the value of “204. Adjust Line Width” by 1. Then execute

"201. Adjust Image Density/DEMS".


Reissued: 25-Dec-15



SYMPTOM

Residual image appears 308mm (=drum circumference) after the original image.

* The arrow indicates the paper feed direction. The symptom is likely to occur under the following conditions:

Solid black image (for example, bold text) is printed over a halftone background.

High number of screening lines

High temperature and high humidity environment

CAUSE

The potential on the drum surface is not even between the solid and halftone areas after the discharge process due to an unexpected inflow of image transfer current.

RECOMMENDED ACTION

Do the flowchart on the next page.

Subject: Troubleshooting Residual Images Prepared by: T.Miyamoto



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required





Reissued: 25-Dec-15


Start

999 or greater

Improved

No improvement

Finish

Check the charge potential in

SP3-643-001 ~ 004.

Set SP2-203-021 and 022 (2nd

quenching lamp Vd max threshold in

MM/HH conditions) to “999”.

In Adjustment Settings for Skilled Operators,

execute "201. Adjust Image Density/DEMS".


available by spec.)

Smaller than 999

Finish

Note on the possible side effect:

Maximizing the Vd threshold

increases the risk of density

inconsistency in halftone images.



Subject: Manual Correction: SP5150-001 (Bypass length setting) Prepared by: T.Miyamoto



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




Service Manual Correction

Please add the following correction in red to your FSM in this section:

Appendices > 3. Appendices: SP Mode Tables > Group 5000 (1/2) > SP5-009 to -725 (Mode)

5150 [Bypass Length Setting]

-

5-150-001 Bypass(0:OFF 1:Long)

CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: OFF 1: ON

The bypass tray supports the maximum paper length (=feed direction) of 487.7mm, but this can be extended to 700mm with this SP setting.

5-150-002 LCT(0:OFF 1:ON) CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: OFF 1: ON


Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 5-Jan-15 No.: RM205112

Subject: Manual Correction: Horizontal band of density unevenness

caused by corona products Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




Service Manual Correction Please add/correct the descriptions in blue in the following section of the Field Service Manual:

6. Troubleshooting > Image Quality > Image Quality 004: Unevenness > Horizontal band of density unevenness caused by corona products

SYMPTOM-1

50mm-wide and 15mm-wide horizontal bands appear at 308mm intervals in solid or halftone images.

308mm (12.1")

135mm (5.3")

50mm (1.97")

15mm (0.59")

50mm (1.97")

Paper Feed Direction



CAUSE of SYMPTOM-1

Characteristics of the drum had changed, because the machine was left unused with the power turned OFF for an extended period.

-In detail-

When the machine is not in use, it creates an enclosed space on the drum surface in two areas indicated [A] and [B] in the illustration below, while other areas are exposed to air.

[A]: Enclosed by the entrance seal and development rollers

[B]: Enclosed by the entrance seal and cleaning brush

Potential sensitivity is affected in the enclosed spaces, particularly due to the difference in humidity compared to areas exposed to air. This causes the 50mm-wide and 15mm-wide horizontal bands appearing at 308mm intervals in solid or halftone images

The symptom will disappear when the temperature around the drum reaches above 15 degrees Celsius (59 degrees Fahrenheit).

[A] [B]



SYMPTOM-2

40mm-wide horizontal bands appear at 308mm intervals in solid or halftone images.

308mm (12.1")

40mm (1.57")

40mm (1.57")




CAUSE of SYMPTOM -2

Corona products generated in the charge unit [A] penetrating into the OPC drum while the machine is left unused may cause bands in which the printed image is darker. Color bands will diminish with continued use as the corona products volatilize, but it may take several hours until they disappear completely.

NOTE:

This tends to occur in winter in a low-temperature environment.

[A]



RECOMMENDED ACTIONS

The following are actions described in the order of effectiveness and recommendation. If Action #1 does not resolve the problem, do Action #2, and so forth. Make sure to obtain customer acceptance before taking these actions.

The actions 1 to 4 are explained in detail later. The following is just a summary.

ACTION #1

Change the setting of Drum Inching / Operation Time (disabling the Sleep Mode).

ACTION #2

Keeping the fan rotating by leaving the machine power turned ON.

NOTE: Effective only for SYMPTOM-2.

ACTION #3

Pull out the charge unit at the end of the day after powering OFF.


ACTION #4

Install an external power source (p/n: M2056216) to keep the fan operating while the main power is turned OFF.




Action flow chart.

See the following pages for details on these four actions #1 through #4.

Jump if the cause has been identifed.

An abnormal image, like the one described above, was pointed out by the customer.

Yes

Check other units.No

Print a solid color image in each color.Use the pattern SP2-109-003-26 (Full Dot Pattern).

Do the pitch and width match the

description in this RTB?

Cause

determination

1.Against SYMPTOM-1: Use the machine under the temperature more than 15 degrees Celsius (59 degrees Fahrenheit)

2. Against SYMPTOM-2: Replace the OPC drum. (The problem will diminish with use even if you do not replace it, but it takes a long time.)

NOTE: If the customer accepts, apply the recommended actions #1 through #4 in the order of effectiveness and recommendation.

Action



ACTION in Detail

Action #1

Change the setting of Drum Inching / Operation

Time

Action #2

Keeping the fan rotating by leaving the machine

turned on

Action #3

Remove the charger unit at the end of the day

Action #4

Keep the fan operating with the external power

source

Procedure Do the following.

1. Change the following SP setting.

SP5305-101(Auto Off

Limit Set)：default 1:

Restrict ->0: Not restrict

2. Disable the "Sleep Mode" in User Tools > System Settings > Administrator Tools (page3/4) > Sleep Mode Entry by Sleep Mode Timer.

3. Set SP1107-005 (Standby Target Temp. Setting / Low Power:Center) to 0 degree.

4. Set SP2227-005 (Drum Inching / Operation Time) to 360.

Do the following.

1. Change the following SP setting

SP5305-101(Auto Off

Limit Set)：default 1:

Restrict ->0: Not restrict

2. Disable the "Sleep Mode" in User Tools > System Settings > Administrator Tools (page3/4) > Sleep Mode Entry by Sleep Mode Timer.

3. Set SP1107-005 (Standby Target Temp. Setting /Low Power:Center) to 0 degree.

4. Set SP1944-001 (Fan Drive Setting: Standby/Charge Entrance Fan) to 1440

Remove the charger unit after completing the last job of the day, and reinstall it the following morning.

Install and connect an external power source (p/n: M2056216 "POWER SUPPLY UNIT: FDR: ASS'Y")

After completing the last job of the day, turn OFF the main power and turn ON the external power source.

Turn OFF the external power source, if the machine will not be used for 2 days or more, for example, on weekends.



If the symptom occurs even at normal temperature, set SP2227-002 (Drum inching / Temperature Thresh) to 35 degrees.

Turn OFF the machine power only when the machine will not be used for 2 days or more, for example, on weekends.

(10 minutes to 24 hours).

At the end of operating time:

Do not turn off the power. (Turn it off when leaving the machine unused for 2 days or more on weekends etc.)

Required work time

1 to 2 minutes (to make SP settings)

1 to 2 minutes (to make SP settings)

None About 30 minutes

Parts cost Not required Not required Not required Required

Power consumption while the machine is unused (Power consumption during power off is 110 W.)

430W 430W 110W (the same as the current value)

170W

Workload for the customer

None None 5 minutes at the beginning and end of every day

None

What to do for seasons other than winter

Nothing None (just turn the machine off)

None (no need to pull out the charge unit)

Make the fan draw power from the main machine



again: about 2 minutes work

Merit Free of cost

Immediate effect

Free of cost

Immediate effect

Free of cost

No power consumption

Immediate effect

Lower power consumption (compared to Action #2)

Demerit Large power consumption

Time required for returning from low-power mode changes from 60 seconds to 350 seconds.

Large power consumption

Time required for returning from low-power mode changes from 60 seconds to 350 seconds.

Requires customer operation

Large power consumption

Large EM cost

Time-consuming work

Rework required after winter season



Action #4: Installation procedure of External Power Source

(P/N: M2056216 "POWER SUPPLY UNIT: FDR: ASS'Y")

CAUTION

Make sure that the main power switch and AC power switch of the main machine are turned OFF and that its power cord is disconnected before doing the following procedure. Doing the following procedure in an energized state constitutes an electric shock hazard and malfunction may occur.

1. Turn off the breaker switch [A] of the imaging section.

2. Turn off the breaker switch [A] of the fusing section.



3. Open the rear box. (Refer to Field Service Manual Section 4. Replacement and Adjustment>Exterior Covers/Doors>Rear Box.)

4. Connect the connector [A] of the external power source [B] to CN401 [C] of the AC Drive Board 1 [D].



5. Disconnect the connector [A] at CN342 on the IOB 1 [B].

[A]



6. Connect the connector [A] (attached with a label printed "FAN") of the external power source to the connector [B] that you removed from CN342 in the previous step. Connect the connector [C] (attached with a label printed "CN342") of the external power source to CN342 [D] on the IOB 1.

7. Install the external power source [A]. (2 screws: M3×6)



8. Wire the harnesses between the external power source [A] and IOB 1 [B] and clamp them using the existing clamps.

9. Close the rear box. (Refer to Field Service Manual Section 4. Replacement and Adjustment>Exterior Covers/Doors>Rear Box.)

10. Turn on the breaker switches of the imaging and fusing section.

[A]

[B]



Subject: Manual Correction: PCU Cleaning Unit Internal Components Prepared by: T.Miyamoto



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required





Please add the following corrections in red to your FSM in this section:

4. Replacement and Adjustment > Around the Drum > PCU Cleaning Unit Internal Components

PCU Cleaning Unit Internal Components

When you replace the PCU cleaning lubrication roller, you must replace two polystyrene

washers provided with the roller at the same time. 1. PCU cleaning unit

2. PCU cleaning lubrication blade [A] ( ×2)

3. Remove the screws on the lubricant cover [A], and then remove it from the unit without disconnecting

the harnesses. ( ×2)



4. PCU cleaning lubricant [A]

5. Gear cover [A] ( ×3)

6. Joint [A] ( ×1)



7. Remove two polystyrene washers [A].

8. Bearing [A]

9. PCU cleaning lubrication roller gear [A] ( ×1)



10. Lift the left side of the PCU cleaning lubrication roller [A], and then slide it leftward to remove it.

11. PCU cleaning blade [A] ( ×2)

12. Lubricant case [A] ( ×2)

13. Remove the plate [B] on the right side of the cleaning blade bracket [A], and three gears [C]. ( ×2)



14. Remove the plate [B] on the left of the cleaning blade bracket [A]. ( ×1)

When inserting the plate, make sure the pin [A] is engaged with the bracket at both ends.

Otherwise, cleaning will not work correctly and cause toner to pile up in the PCU. Left side

Right side

NG

NG

OK

OK

[A] [A]

[A]

[A]



15. Remove the spring on the bottom side of the PCU cleaning unit, and then remove the cleaning blade

bracket [A]. ( ×1)

16. Collection blade cover [A] ( ×3)

17. PCU cleaning collection blade [A]



18. Remove the bearing [B] and bearing holder [C] on the left of the PCU cleaning roller [A], and then

remove the gear [D] on the right. ( ×2)

19. Lift the left side of the PCU cleaning roller [A], and then slide it leftward to remove it.



Subject: Troubleshooting Unprinted White Spots Prepared by: T. Miyamoto



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM

Unprinted white spots (0.2mm to 0.5 mm in diameter)

CAUSE

Paper picks up paper dust in the paper path and the paper dust comes off after printing, resulting in unprinted white spots.

SOLUTION

Remove the dust collection tray (See section: Preventive Maintenance > Cleaning Points (2) > Registration Unit > Dust Collection Tray of the field service manual.) and clean the locations described on the next page.



Cleaning points to prevent White Spots

Simplex / 1st side of duplex 2nd side of duplex

Tray 1 , , , , , , ,

Tray 2 , , , , , , ,

Tray 3 * , , , , ,

Tray 4 * , , , , , *: Vacuum Feed LCIT RT5100 Cleaning Points Main machine




Subject: Troubleshooting Blurry Black Images Prepared by: T. Miyamoto



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM

Black images appear blurred.

CAUSE

The following are the two main causes.

1. Toner transferred to paper is insufficient as a result of excess transfer current. 2. Indentations on the paper

SOLUTION

Do the flowcharts on the following pages.



Flowchart 1: Optimizing toner transfer in solid areas

Problem solved?

Yes

Start

Does the affected image contain solid areas?

In "18. Adjust Toner Adhesion (Black)" of

Custom Paper settings, increase the

amount of black toner transfer.

Increase the value by 1 or 2 at a time.

Yes

No

No

Is "18. Adjust Toner Adhesion (Black)" set to the maximum

value of 5?

Yes

No

Apply the setting that had produced the

best results.

For solid areas, there are no further

adjustments available by spec.

Do Flowchart 2:

Optimizing toner transfer

in halftone areas



Flowchart 2: Optimizing toner transfer in halftone areas

Problem solved?

Yes

Does customer agree to change the screening settings?

In The adjustment settings for Custom

Paper, change the number of screen lines in

the order shown below.

(See Table 1. for details.)

200dot à 175dot à 200line à 175line

Yes

Finish

No

No

Start

Adjust the paper transfer current

20 uA at a time so that the

absolute value becomes smaller.

See Table 1.

Example: -114 à -94uA

Fnish

Has the density or shade of the color changed?

Solved?

Yes

Yes

No

No

Has the density or shade of the color changed?

Yes

No

Finish

Apply the setting that had

produced the best results.

No further adjustments available

by spec.



Table 1: Adjustment of the paper transfer current When printing in full-color mode

Printing side Adjustment Settings for Custom Paper Range

1st side 58. Ppr Trnsf AC: DC Current: FC: Side 1 -400 to 0 microA

1st side 43. Paper Transfer Current: FC: Side 1 -400 to 0 microA

2nd side 59. Ppr Trnsf AC: DC Current: FC: Side 2 -400 to 0 microA

2nd side 44. Paper Transfer Current: FC: Side 2 -400 to 0 microA

B/W mode

Printing side Adjustment Settings for Custom Paper Range

1st side 56. Ppr Trnsf AC: DC Current: B&W: Side 1 -400 to 0 microA

1st side 37. Paper Transfer Current: B&W: Side 1 -400 to 0 microA

2nd side 57. Ppr Trnsf AC: DC Current: B&W: Side 2 -400 to 0 microA

2nd side 38. Paper Transfer Current: B&W: Side 2 -400 to 0 microA



Subject: Troubleshooting Jams at the Pressure Roller Separation Pawl Prepared by: T. Miyamoto



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM

Paper jam occurs at the pressure roller separation pawls of the fuser unit.

RECOMMENDED ACTION

If the trailing edge margin is set to less than 3mm, increase the margin in “#14 Adjust Erase Margin of Trailing Edge” of the Custom Paper settings. If the trailing edge margin is set to 3mm or more, check the fuser unit as it may be defective. Replace the unit, if necessary.



Subject: Service Manual Correction: New laser caution decal Prepared by: T. Miyamoto



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

The laser caution decal was modified in line with the revised laser safety regulation prescribed by IEC/EN60825-1. This is also announced in RTB#RGene083a

Please apply the following corrections to your field service manual.

Correction: Field Service Manual

Important Safety Notices Safety Instructions for the Machine Laser Safety

OLD Laser Caution Decal

Correction: Field Service Manual

This decal was never used for the mass production model and was not supposed to appear on the manual.



4. Replacement and Adjustment Laser Unit

OLD Laser Caution Decal



NEW Laser Caution Decal

This decal was never used for the mass production model and was not supposed to appear on the manual. The new caution decal is attached on the laser unit, not the mainframe.



Subject: Troublshooting Blurry Left/Right Edges Prepared by: T. Miyamoto



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM

Left and/or right edges appear blurred.

The risk of the problem increases under the following conditions:

Thin paper (80gsm or lighter)

Image is close to the trailing edge

A3/DLT or larger size

Halftone and solid images



RECOMMENDED ACTION

Do the flowchart below.

No

Start

NoDoes the problem occur

within 9 mm from the left/right

edges of the sheet?

Increase the left/right margins.

To increase the left margin, increase the value of

SP2-103-003 (Erase Margin Adjustment: Left) in

1 mm steps (default:2 mm).

To increase the right margin, increase the value

of SP2-103-004 (Erase Margin Adjustment:

Right) in 1 mm steps (default: 2 mm).

Make 3 copies of a solid black pattern in

simplex on the same type of paper as the

one the problem is observed on.

Problem solved?

Is the maximum margin

(9 mm) applied?Finish


available by spec.)

Yes

Yes

No

Yes



Subject: Troubleshooting Multiple Vertical Streaks Prepared by: T.Miyamoto



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM

Multiple black streaks appear along the paper feed direction around the trailing edge.

Noticeable points about the symptom:

Occurs in low temperature / low humidity environments.

Likely to occur with solid images containing two colors, for example red and green.

The streaks appear in both image and non-image areas.

The drag-mark-like streaks are often in Black, but may also be in Cyan.

The streaks appear approximately 308mm from the leading edge.

CAUSE

Feed direction

Streaks

308mm from leading edge

Toner transferred to the ITB from the drums upstream (Y/M) reverse transfers and adheres to the drums downstream (C/K).

The cleaning units clean the toner adhered to the drums downstream (C/K), causing a counter charge on these drums.

Counter charged drums (C/K) attract lubricant and the image is developed on the drums covered with streaks of lubricant.



SOLUTION

In the Adjustment Settings for Operators, execute 0502 Execute Photoconductor Refreshing.

If this is ineffective, replace the cleaning unit of the color causing the problem.

If the problem still is not resolved, check the development unit and drum, and replace as necessary.


Reissued: 2-Feb-16

Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 22-Jan-16 No.: RM205120a

RTB Reissue The items in bold italics were added or changed.

Revision a: "Procedure NOTE" has been added on Page 6/13

This bulletin announces the adjustment procedures for each of the following registration problems. To adjust front-and-back (sides 1 and 2) registration, do all of the procedures in order from 1 through 5. It is recommended to use the Custom Media settings.

Registration Problems Illustration Adjustment Procedure / Note

1. Paper Squareness /

Length of the four sides

[A]: Deviation

Sides [1] and [2], and [3] and [4]

should be equal respectively.

See Section 1 of this bulletin on how

to measure the squareness and

length of the four sides.

2. Image Skew Skilled Operators Menu #0107

Subject: Registration Alignment Procedure Prepared by: Takatsugu Komori

/Hiroaki H Matsui From: PP Tech Service Dept., 1st PP Tech Service Sect.


Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required





Reissued: 2-Feb-16


3. Paper Skew Mechanically adjust the registration

gate.

See RTB RD777004 for paper skews

that occur with banner sheet printing.

4. Image Magnification Custom Media Advanced Settings;

No. 5-8.

5. Image Position Custom Media Advanced Settings;

No. 1-4.

Adjustable also in job properties.

What you will need

Fresh pack of A3 or DLT paper

Precision scaled eye magnifier capable of 0.1mm measurement

Example of a magnifier: Peak 1983 Scale Loupe 10x

Magnification: 10x

Minimum Scale Division: 0.1 mm

Link to web site: http://www.peakoptics.com/index.php?main_page=product_info&cPath=24&products_id=12

http://www.peakoptics.com/index.php?main_page=product_info&cPath=24&products_id=12

http://www.peakoptics.com/index.php?main_page=product_info&cPath=24&products_id=12


Reissued: 2-Feb-16


1. Paper Squareness / Length of the Four Sides

Before doing any registration adjustments, confirm that the squareness of the paper and the length of the four sides of the paper are within target by doing "Measuring the Squareness of Paper-1" and "Measuring the Squareness of Paper-2" described on the following pages.

NOTE

Poor cut, expansion and shrinkage of the paper are possible factors that may affect the squareness of paper.

Confirm that all the lengths [A] through [F] are correct. This will avoid mixing up image skew with paper skew.

If both image skew and paper skew are occurring ([A]=[B] and [C]=[D] and [E]≠[F] ),

correct the paper skew first so that [E] and [F] become equal, and then correct the image skew.

[E] [F]


Reissued: 2-Feb-16


Measuring the Squareness of Paper - 1

Procedure

1. Pull out the 5th sheet from the top of the ream and the 5th sheet from the bottom of ream.

NOTE

Use a fresh pack of A3 or DLT paper.

The 5th sheets are used to ensure there are no dog-ear folds on the paper.

2. Flip the sheet (5th from the bottom) so that its Side 2 faces up and place it on top of the other sheet (5th sheet from the top).

Side 1A

B

C

D

A1

B1 C1

D1

A2

B2 C2

D2

Side 1

Side 1

5th sheet from top

New ream of paper 5th sheet from bottom

Side 1

Side 2

A1

B1 C1

D1

A2

B2C2

D2


Reissued: 2-Feb-16


3. Align the sides A1-B1 and C2-D2 [3], and corners B1 and C2.

4. Measure the distance [2] with the precision scaled eye magnifier. If less than 0.3mm, angle [1] is +/- 0.04 degrees and is within tolerance.

A1

B1C1

D1A2

B2

C2

D2

[2]

[1]

[3]

[4]


Reissued: 2-Feb-16


5. To do the same on the other side, rotate the sheet with Side 2 facing up 180 degrees. Align the sides A1-B1 and B2-A2 [3], and corners B1 and A2 [4], and measure the distance [2] to find out the angle [1].

Procedure NOTE:

Measure the distance [2] with the precision scaled eye magnifier. If less than 0.3mm, angle [1] is +/- 0.04 degrees and is within tolerance.

If the angles are within tolerance in both Steps 4 and 5, all four corners are within 90 +/- 0.08 degrees. If otherwise, DO NOT USE the paper.

NOTE: The tolerance of registration misalignment between sides 1 and 2 when all four corners are within 90 +/- 0.08 degrees is 0.6mm at maximum with A3/DLT size paper.

A1

B1C1

D1

A2

B2C2

D2

Side 1

Side 2

A1

B1 C1

D1

A2

B2 C2

D2

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]


Reissued: 2-Feb-16


Measuring the Squareness of Paper - 2

1. Randomly pull out a sheet of paper [1] from a fresh pack of paper [2].

2. Measure the length of all four sides [1] ~ [4] using a metal scale [5] and precision scaled eye magnifier [6].

A

B C

D

A1

B1 C1

D1

[1]

[2]

A1

B1 C1

D1

[1]

[2]

[3] [4]

[5]

[6]


Reissued: 2-Feb-16


3. Check if the lengths are +/- 0.1mm against the target size.

For A3 (420 X 297 mm)

Sides [1] and [2] should both be 420 +/- 0.1mm.

Sides [3] and [4] should both be 297 +/- 0.1mm.

For DLT (11" X 17")

Sides [1] and [2] should both be 431.8 +/- 0.1mm.

Sides [3] and [4] should both be 279.4 +/- 0.1mm.

4. Pick three more sheets randomly from the same ream and repeat the above steps.

IMPORTANT

Measurements made for all four sheets must be +/- 0.1mm against the target. Otherwise, DO NOT use the paper for front-and-back registration.


Reissued: 2-Feb-16


2. Image Skew

1. Go to Skilled Op Menu #0107 [Perpendicularity Adjustment].

2. Adjust the value. Increase the value to rotate the image counterclockwise, decrease to rotate clockwise.

3. Measure [A], [B] and [E] and do the calculation below to verify if the skew is within the tolerance.

[A] – [B] / ( [E] / 200 ) = +/- 0.2mm

4. Do color registration from [User Tools] > [Maintenance] > [Color Registration].


Reissued: 2-Feb-16


3. Paper Skew

Before making the adjustment

Make sure the squareness of the paper is within the tolerance and measure [A] ~ [F], to avoid mixing up paper skew with image skew.

Procedure

1. Remove the handle and cover of the right drawer unit, and loosen the bottom screw on the adjusting plate.

2. Move the adjusting plate according to the skew direction. (1 notch on the adjusting plate scale is equivalent to 0.2mm.)

3. Measure [A], [B] and [E] and do the following calculation to verify if the skew is within the tolerance: [A] – [B] / ( [E] / 200 ) = +/- 0.2mm


Reissued: 2-Feb-16


4. Image Magnification

Do this procedure when the actual size of the image is slightly smaller or larger than the expected size. The adjustment can be made in the Custom Media settings.

Procedure

1. Measure the difference between the actual size and target size.

2. Calculate the magnification rate. <Example> Target length: 420.0 mm, Actual length: 419.5 mm 420 / 419.5 = 100.12% +0.12% needed.

3. Input the calculation result in Custom Media Advanced Setting #5 or #6 or #7 or #8 depending on where the adjustment is needed. The value can be increased/decreased by 0.025%. #5: Side 1, Magnification in main scan direction #6: Side 2, Magnification in main scan direction #7: Side 1, Magnification in sub scan direction #8: Side 2, Magnification in sub scan direction


Reissued: 2-Feb-16


5. Image Position

In Custom Media Advanced Setting, input the adjustment value for the side and direction that requires the image position adjustment.

#1: Side 1, Image Position in main scan direction #2: Side 2, Image Position in main scan direction #3: Side 1, Image Position in sub scan direction #4: Side 2, Image Position in sub scan direction


Reissued: 2-Feb-16


APPENDIX-1:

See RTB #RM205021, pages 6~8, for a procedure on “Using the Template to Align the Image Positions on Sides 1 and 2.” This will automatically apply the optimum values in Advanced Settings #1 through #8.


Reissued: 06-Sep-16

Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 25-Jan-16 No.: RM205121d


Subject: Firmware Release Note: MediaLibCHa AB Prepared by: H. Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




This RTB has been issued to announce the firmware release information for the MediaLibCHa AB.












RE_00265


RE_00082, RE_00199, RE_00213, RE_00214





Reissued: 06-Sep-16






2 [R2] - The list is updated the media name below;

CN_00001, CN_00002, CN_00007, CN_00013, CN_00017, CN_00018, CN_00022, CN_00026, CN_00034, CN_00039, CN_00045, CN_00046

1 [R.1] 1st Mass Production


Reissued: 06-Sep-16



Subject: Firmware Release Note: MediaLibCHb AB Prepared by: H. Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




This RTB has been issued to announce the firmware release information for the MediaLibCHb AB.












RE_00265


RE_00082, RE_00199, RE_00213, RE_00214





Reissued: 06-Sep-16






2 [R2] - The list is updated the media name below;

CN_00001, CN_00002, CN_00007, CN_00013, CN_00017, CN_00018, CN_00022, CN_00026, CN_00034, CN_00039, CN_00045, CN_00046

1 [R.1] 1st Mass Production


Model: Andromeda-P1 (M205/M238) Date: 25-Jan-16 No.: RM205123

SYMPTOM

White streaks along the paper feed direction appear on a pure black halftone image printed on the 2nd side of a duplexed page.

CAUSE

Uneven temperature on media surface due to uneven contact between the media and cooling belts, which affects the transferability.

SOLUTION

Perform the procedures described on the following pages.

Subject: 2nd Side Streak on Black Halftone Image Prepared by: Takatsugu Komori

From: QAC Field Quality Management Dept. FQM Group 2


Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required






Procedure – 1 Change the position of the cooling entrance lever to [A] from the default position [B]. This will make the entrance roller apply a stronger downward pressure against the media via the cooling belt, to avoid the unwanted gap between the media and cooling belt.

Procedure – 2

If the symptom cannot be fixed with “Procedure – 1”, there is a possibility that some media moves up the upper cooling belt (creates a gap).Then this gap decreases cooling efficiency as illustrated in the image below.

In order to enable the cooling belt to apply a stronger downward pressure against the media, swap the rollers [A] (illustrated in blue) and [B] (illustrated in red)

* This modification has been applied to mass production units since Jan 2016 in Japan.

See the following pages for how to swap the rollers.

[A] [B] [B] [A]



NOTE: You can distinguish the rollers by looking at the shaft. The shaft of roller [A] (illustrated in blue on the previous page) is marked with a line. The shaft of roller [B] does not have the mark.

Estimated work time : 20 min Required tool : Stubby screwdriver How to swap the rollers

1. Remove the upper cooling cover, gear and bracket.

2. Open up the cooling unit to remove the tension unit. Place a sheet of paper on the lower cooling belt, and then remove the upper cooling belt.

3. Close the cooling unit and put back the bracket removed in Step 1.

Line



4. Open up the cooling unit and remove the 4 rollers [A] and [B] using a stubby screwdriver.

5. Swap and install the rollers.

6. Put back all the parts removed.

7. Set the cooling entrance lever back to the default position [B].

[B] [A]



After the modification

NOTE: To avoid mistakes, look for the line mark on the shaft on the downward rollers [A].

P/N Description

Downward

Rollers

[A]

M2057764 ROLLER:PRESSURE:SPONGE:AL:PRESS FIT

M2057764 ROLLER:PRESSURE:SPONGE:AL:PRESS FIT

Upward

Rollers

[B]

M2057731 ROLLER:PRESSURE:BELT:SPONGE

M2057731 ROLLER:PRESSURE:BELT:SPONGE

Downward Rollers [A]

Upward Rollers [B]


Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 1-Feb-16 No.: RM205124

Subject: Airflow Adjustment Procedure for Paper Feed Tray (Main

Machine and Vacuum Feed LCIT RT5100) to Prevent Jam Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM

Double-feeds and Non-feeds occur when printing with generic settings on special types of paper or paper that have disadvantageous conditions. (See CAUSE below.)

CAUSE

The following are paper types that have disadvantageous conditions. Paper with high porosity

Excess air permeates the paper, causing the feed belt to suck the top two sheets, resulting in a double-feed. This may also cause paper jams where the center of the leading edge creases.

Paper with large face-up curls (exceeding spec level) Paper tends to float up easily by the air generated from the separation fan due to the curl, resulting in double-feeds.

Thin paper (low stiffness) The center of the paper floats up with both edges hanging down, because the paper is low in stiffness. This causes the guide plate to catch the paper edge, resulting in dog-ear creases, paper skew and non-feeds.

SOLUTION

Do the flowcharts below.

#1: Double feeds

#2: Non-feeds

#3: Paper curl

#4: Slippage on the feed belt

#5: Skew

#6: Skew/Non-feeds with thin paper (lighter than Weight 3: 80.1-105.0 gsm)



Notes on the Flowchart

Descriptions in red in the flowchart reference the procedures described in APPENDIX-1 through APPENDIX-4.

The red letters in yellow boxes in the flowchart correspond to those in the "Quick Troubleshooting Guide" attached in APPENDIX-5.

#1: Double feeds

Check if the side fence and end fence

of the tray are set properly.

Are the fences set properly?

* For details, see Appendix 1.

No

Yes

Start

Is paper curl within tolerance level?

Yes

No

Measure the paper curl.* For details, see Appendix 2.

Set the side and end fences properly

and print to verify the result.

Go to

A

Go to

B

A

Problem

solved?

Finish

No

Yes



Load the paper up side down.Is the paper

curl, face up or

face down?

Face down

Problem solved?Yes

No

A

Finish

Straighten the paper curl.* For details, see Appendix 3.

Go to

B

Face up

Problem solved?Yes

No

Finish

A2

A2



B

Fan the paper.

Problem solved?

In the adjustment settings for Custom

Paper, set "112. Paper Feed Mode

(Adjust Fan Level)" to "Moderate

Double Red. (Lower)".

YesFinish

No

Problem solved?



(Adjust Fan Level)" to "Max Dble Fd

Reduc. (Lowest)."

YesFinish

No

Problem solved?Yes

Finish

No


available by spec.

It is recommended to

change the paper.)

A1

A3

A4



#2: Non-feeds

Check if the side fence and end fence

of the tray are set properly.

Are the fences set properly?

* For details, see Appendix 1.

No

Yes

Start

Is paper curl within tolerance level?

Yes

No

Measure the paper curl.* For details, see Appendix 2.

Set the side and fences properly and

print to verify the result.

Go to

A

Go to

B

B

Problem

solved?

Finish

No

Yes

Load the paper up side down.Is the paper

curl, face up or

face down?

Face down

Problem solved?Yes

No

A

Finish

Straighten the paper curl.* For details, see Appendix 3.

Go to

B

Face up

Problem solved?Yes

No

Finish

B2

B2



B

Fan the paper.

Problem solved?



(Adjust Fan Level)" to "Moderate

Double Red. (Lower)".

YesFinish

No

Problem solved?



(Adjust Fan Level)" to "Max Dble Fd

Reduc. (Lowest)."

YesFinish

No

Problem solved?Yes

Finish

No


available by spec.

It is recommended to

change the paper.)

B1

B3

B4



#3: Paper curl

In the adjustment settings for Custom Paper:

· Set "112. Paper Feed Mode (Adjust Fan Level)" to "Max

Dble Fd Reduc. (Lowest)."

· Set "110. Side Fan Shutter" to "Active."

Problem solved?

No

Yes

Finish


· Decrease "105. Updraft Fan" by 10%.

· Decrease "107. Side Fan" by 10%.

Problem solved?

No

YesFinish


· Set "105. Updraft Fan" to “0%.”

· Set "107. Side Fan" to “20%.”

Start

Problem solved?

No

Yes

C

Finish

Finish(No further adjustments available by spec.

It is recommended to change the paper.)



#4: Slippage on the feed belt


Custom Paper, increase “108.

Vacuum Fan” by 10%.

YesFinish

Start

No

No

Problem solved?

Is “108. Vacuum Fan” set to 100%?

Clean the paper feed belt with

damp cloth.

Problem solved?

Replace the paper feed belt and

set “108. Vacuum Fan” to 80%.

Problem solved?

YesFinish

YesFinish

No Yes

No





#5: Skew

Adjust the horizontal registration of

the paper tray.

(See RTB #RD777004, Step 6.)

YesFinish

Adjust the skew with the skew

adjustment plates.

(See RTB #RD777004, Step 3 ~ 5)

No

In the adjustment settings for Custom Paper, set “111. Switch Paper Load

Upper Limit” to “High.”

Start

Is the paper size

A5?

Is the Paper Weight 1 or 0?

Problem solved?

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

FinishYes

No

Install the support fence to the paper tray.* For details, see Appendix 4.

Problem solved?

Problem solved?

Finish





No



#6: Skew/Non-feeds with thin paper (lighter than Weight 3: 80.1-105.0 gsm)

In the adjustment settings for Custom Paper, set

“111. Switch Paper Load Upper Limit” to “High.”

IMPORTANT

Make sure "112. Paper Feed Mode (Adjust Fan

Level)" is set to default [Standard].

Problem solved?Yes

Finish

Start



No

Finish


Custom Paper, set "112.

Paper Feed Mode (Adjust Fan

Level)" to "Modrate Dble Fd

Red. (Lower)."




Level)" to "Moderate Nonfdg

Red. (Higher)."

Problem solved? Problem solved?




Level)" to "Max Dble Fd

Reduc. (Lowest)."




Level)" to "Max Nonfdng

Reduc. (Highest)."

Problem solved? Problem solved?

Finish

Finish Finish

For double feeds For non-feeds

No No

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

No No

D



Recommended custom paper settings:

Thin paper with high porosity 105. Updraft Fan : 60% 107. Side Fan : 40% 108. Vacuum Fan : 50% 111. Switch Paper Load Upper Limit : High

Small envelopes

105. Updraft Fan : 0%

E



APPENDIX-1: Checking the Side and End Fences of the Paper Tray

Side Fence: GOOD

Side Fence: BAD

Excess gap [A] between the edge of the paper and side fence causes paper skew.



Side Fence: BAD The side fence is set narrower than the width of the paper. Paper may not float up in this condition and result in non-feeds.

Securing optimum clearance between the side fence and paper Roll up and hold the paper as shown and secure approximately 1-2mm at both ends.



End Fence: BAD The end fence is set too wide, creating a gap [A] of more than 3mm from the end fence and face plate. This increases the risk of double feeds.

End Fence: BAD The end fence is set narrower than the paper length and buckles the stack. The leading edge of the paper may not float up and cause non-feeds.



Securing optimum clearance between the end fence and paper

Roll up and hold the paper as shown and secure a clearance of approximately 1-2mm between the end fence and paper.



APPENDIX-2: Measuring the Paper Curl

Paper curl along the feed direction Place one sheet of paper on a table and hold the scale as shown to measure the curl at all four corners [A].

Paper curl tolerance level by paper weight (for both face-up and face-down curl): 52 ~ 300gsm : 5mm 300 ~ 400gsm : 3mm



Paper curl perpendicular to the feed direction

Place one sheet of paper on a table and hold the scale as shown to measure the curl at all four corners [A].

Paper curl tolerance level by paper weight (for both face-up and face-down curl): 52 ~ 300gsm : 8mm 300 ~ 400gsm : 3mm



APPENDIX-3: Straightening the Paper Curl

1. Place the stack so that the curled face faces down. 2. Hold the edge of the stack and bend the stack to de-curl.

Face-down curl is preferred to face-up curl.

3. Do the same for the opposite edge.

APPENDIX-4: Installing the Support Fence

1. Pull out the tray until it stops. 2. Remove the support fence [A] from the pocket [B] on the right-hand side of the tray.

3. Set the side fences according to the paper size and load the paper stack.



4. Attach the support fence [A], and press and hold the release button on the end fence

as you slide the fence gently toward the paper.

5. Close the tray.

APPENDIX-5

Quick_Troubleshooting_Guide

p. 1

RICOH Pro C9100/C9110

Quick Troubleshooting Guide:Paper Jams in the Main Machine

Use this troubleshooting guide if you frequently encounter paper jams or misfeeds. Refer to the code displayed on the

screen when jam occurs, and take the action described in the table below.

Code Action

J033

J082

Do the following when printing onto A4/LT or shorter paper.

De-curl the paper as shown.

Load the paper perpendicular to its current direction (Rotate the paper 90 degrees).

J099 Fan the paper.

Do the following when using thick paper types (Weight 8 or thicker), envelopes, or metallic paper.

Set No. 113 [Double Feed Direction] in Advanced Settings to “Off”.

Note: After this step is performed, double-feeds will not be detected.

A

A1

p. 2

Code Action

J097

J098

Do the following when using colored, pre-printed, or black paper.

1. Set No. 116 [Color Paper Edge Detection Adjustment] in Advanced Settings to [10.00].

Note: You can easily change this value using Web Image Monitor.

2. If step 1 does not solve the issue, set No. 115 [Illumin. Mode for Color Paper Detection] in

Advanced Settings to [Long Time].

3. If steps 1 and 2 do not solve the issue, set No. 118 [Deactivate Image Position Adjustment Across

Feed Dir] in Advanced Settings to [Activate].

Note: After this step is performed, the position of the image on the paper may vary.

p. 3

RICOH Pro C9100/C9110

Quick Troubleshooting Guide:Paper Jams in the Vacuum Feed LCIT

Use this troubleshooting guide if you frequently encounter paper jams or misfeeds. Refer to the code displayed on the

screen when jam occurs, and take the action described in the table below.

Code Action

J002

J003

J430

J431

J445

J446

J460

J461

Do the following.

1. Fan and decurl the paper, as shown.

2. Set No. 112 [Paper Feed Mode (Adjust Fan Level)] in Advanced Settings to [Moderate Nonfdg

Red. (Higher)].

If the above does not solve the jam, change the setting to [Max Nonfdng Reduc. (Highest)].

If none of the above solves the jam, do the following.

1. If dog ears occur on the jammed paper, and you are printing onto thin paper:

Set No. 111 [Switch Paper Load Upper Limit] in Advanced Settings to [High].

B

B1

B2

B3

B4

p. 4

J052

J053

J470

J471

J485

J486

J500

J501

J099

Do the following.

1. Make sure the Paper Size has been set correctly, and then fan/decurl the paper.

2. Set No.112 [Paper Feed Mode (Adjust Fan Level)] to [Moderate Dble Fd Red. (Lower)].

3. If the above does not solve the jam, change this setting to [Max Dble Fd Reduc. (Lowest)].

4. Set No.111 [Switch Paper Load Upper Limit] to [High].

If none of the above solves the jam, do the following.

If the paper curl is too strong, even after decurling, or face up curl in front and rear side.

Set No.110 [Side Fan Shutter] to [Active].

A

A1

A3

A4

C

A2

D

p. 5

If you are using the paper with high porosity such as recycled paper:

Set No. 108 [Vacuum Fan] in Advanced Settings around+70% through +50%

If you are using small envelopes:

Decrease No.105 [Updraft Fan] to [0].

E



Subject: Troubleshooting Worm Tracks on Envelopes Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM

Worm tracks on envelopes

* The arrow indicates the paper feed direction. The symptom tends to occur under the following conditions:

Solid image is printed close to the trailing edge.

The construction of the envelope is as follows: folded at the side and the overlapping seam is glued at the center along the feed direction.

CAUSE

The upper piece of the envelope slips against the bottom piece [A] when the envelope passes through the nip of the fusing unit, causing the printing side to warp [B].



Disadvantageous: Center seam envelope Advantageous: Side seam envelope

The overlapping seam is glued at the center.

[A]: Upper piece [B]: Bottom piece

The overlapping seam is glued at the side.

[A]: Upper piece [B]: Bottom piece

The upper piece tends to slip against the bottom piece, because the sides of the envelope are only folded and not firm.

The upper and bottom pieces tend to stay together without slipping, because the sides of the envelope are glued and firm.

SOLUTION

Do the flowcharts below.

Print five envelopes in simplex mode while confirming the output quality.

Action 1: Decreasing the Process Speed

開始In the adjustment settings for Custom Paper, set #120 Process Speed Setting to ‘Low speed’ mode.

Problem solved?No

Start

Do Action 2: Decreasing

Fusing TemperatureFinish

Yes



Action 2: Decreasing the Fusing Temperature

Fix the fusing pressure roller temperature at 20°C. Decrease the fusing heat roller temperature by 10°C at a time.

Start


Custom Paper, set #90/91 (Fusing

Pressr. Rllr. Temp. Adjst.:

FC/B&W) to 20 °C.

Problem solved?


Custom Paper, decrease #88/89

(Fusing Heat Roller Temp. Adjust.:

FC/B&W) by 10 °C.

YesFinish

Problem solved?

No

FinishYes

No

Decrease the fusing heat roller

temperature by another 10 °C.

Problem solved? FinishYes

No

Decrease the fusing heat roller

temperature by another 10 °C.

* Note that the lower limit for

printing in full color mode is 130

°C, black and white mode 120 °C.

Problem solved? FinishYes

Finish

(No further adjustments

available by spec)

No


Model: Andromeda-P1a Date: 10-Feb-16 No.: RM205126

Subject: Troubleshooting Faint Oval Spots at Paper Edges Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM

Density appears light in oval shape at the leading and side edges of the paper. The affected areas correspond to the location of the updraft, blower, and side fans in the paper tray.

[A]: Updraft fan, Blower fan [B]: Side fans



CAUSE

Electrical resistivity is affected at the leading and side edges of the paper where exposed to air blown from the fans, resulting in poor toner transfer. The following are the problem contributing factors:

High coverage solid image

Low temperature and low humidity operational environment

Thick paper

Paper stored in a low humidity environment

Long lapse of time before printing; moisture content in paper decreases considerably while the fans continue to blow air against the paper

SOLUTION

Do the flowchart on next page.

Preventive measures:

As a preventive measure, store paper in a moderately humid environment.

If the paper had been stored in a low humidity environment, acclimatize the paper to an environment that is moderately humid. This will prevent/ease the symptom.

If printing in a low humidity environment, avoid low room temperature.



In the adjustment settings for Custom Paper, decrease the

paper transfer current value by 10uA at a time.

<FC mode>

・1st side

#58. Ppr Trnsf AC: DC Current: FC: Side 1

#43. Paper Transfer Current: FC: Side 1

・2nd side

#59: Ppr Trnsf AC: DC Current: FC: Side 2

#44: Paper Transfer Current: FC: Side 2

<B/W mode>

・1st side

#56. Ppr Trnsf AC: DC Current: B&W: Side 1

#37. Paper Transfer Current: B&W: Side 1

・2nd side

#57: Ppr Trnsf AC: DC Current: B&W: Side 2

#38: Paper Transfer Current: B&W: Side 2

Note on the possible side effects:

This adjustment may decrease the density of black in FC

mode. Also, small white spots may appear.

Start

Print the affected image

and check the result.

Improved?

No

Yes

Has the symptom spread to other areas? (Has the density of

black become low?Finish

No

Yes

From the samples printed, select the

paper transfer current that produced

the best output quality.

Decrease the paper

transfer current by

10uA at a time and

check the results.

Finish



Subject: Preventing the Paper Transfer Belt from riding over the edge of

the PTR Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM

The edge of the paper transfer belt [A] rides over the edge of the PTR and the belt becomes waved (wrinkled like [B]).

The waved belt causes staple shape toner contamination [C] appearing at 76mm or 251mm intervals on the back side of printed paper.


251mm

76mm

ホチキ

[C]



CAUSE

The slide movement of slider [A], which connects the tension roller shaft [B] with the tension bracket [C], is getting worse due to too much friction between the slider and bracket when the tension roller is bent during machine operation. This situation prevents the tension roller from staying parallel with the PTR. Machine operation under this condition eventually causes twisting of the Paper Transfer Belt Unit, which leads to the transfer belt riding over the edge of the PTR.

When the PTB edge is riding on the PTR, foreign objects are likely to stick on the PTB. This leads to the toner contamination appearing at 76mm or 251mm intervals on the back side of printed paper. NOTE: 76mm comes from the PTB tension roller interval. 251mm comes from the PTB interval.

[B]

[A]

[C]



SOLUTION


NOTE 1: Lot number [A] of the paper transfer belt units that have the countermeasure is as follows.

Originally installed in mainframe: K40HT5100001 or greater.

Service parts unit (P/No. M2050637): K40ST5100001 or greater.

TCRU/ORU: K40TT5090041 or greater.

Meaning of lot number: K40HT5100001 Part [B]: K40 = Pro C9100/Pro C9110 Part [C]: H = Mainframe unit, S = Service Parts, T = TCRU/ORU Part [D]: T = Paper Transfer Belt Unit Part [E]: Production Year = 2015, Production Month = October, Lot number = 0001 NOTE 2: See the next page for how to remove the screw fixing the tension roller with the tension bracket. Removing this screw for the unit before the countermeasure has been applied, will improve the function of the “slider” by giving enough room for the tension roller to move and maintain parallel with the PTR.

[A]

[B] [C] [D] [E]

Start

Check the paper transfer belt.

Is the edge of the paper transfer belt

riding over the edge of the PTR?

Remove the screw fixing the tension roller with the bracket.

See “Removing the screw to improve the function of the Slider.”See NOTE 2

Yes

No Is the paper transfer belt unit applied of the

countermeasure?See NOTE 1

Yes

No

Replace the paper transfer belt.

(See FSM for procedure.)Finish

Finish



Removing the screw to improve the function of the Slider for the unit before the countermeasure has been applied.

1. Remove the paper transfer belt unit from the drawer unit.

See the following section of the FSM for the procedure: 4. Replacement and Adjustment > Paper Transfer Unit (PTR) > Paper Transfer Belt Unit

2. Loosen the two screws that fix the paper transfer cleaning unit with the paper transfer belt unit. (See NOTE )

NOTE: Just loosen. Never remove !

NOTE: This workaround should be performed only for the PTB unit before the cut-in lot number mentioned in page 3/6 or the old service parts with P/No. M2050622. You do not have to remove this screw from the paper transfer unit after the cut-in lot number or from the new service parts PTB unit with P/No. M2050637. These new units have already the countermeasure with different shaped sliders and tension roller, which enables better siding movement without removing this screw.



3. At the front side, remove the screw [A] that fixes the tension roller shaft with the tension

bracket. (See NOTE)

This screw [A] is used for holding the tension roller shaft so that screws [B] and [C] can be inserted into the screw hole easily when assembling the PTB unit and PTB cleaning unit in a factory. Therefore, once these two units were assembled, screw [A] is not necessary in the field. IMPORTANT DO NOT remove screws [B] and [C]. DO NOT forget to retighten these screws [B] and [C] (tightening order: Front [B], then Rear [C]) after removing the screw [A].

[B]

b

[C]

b



4. Retighten the screws loosened in Step 2.

Tighten them in the order front screw [A] at first, then rear screw [B]. NOTE: Positioning of PTB unit and PTB cleaning unit is decided by the front screw [A]


Reissued: 15-Feb-17

Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 17-Feb-16 No.: RM205128b

RTB Reissue The items in bold italics were added, the items in strikethrough were deleted.

Revision-a: Actions using the new type Paper Transfer Cleaning Blade have been deleted temporarily, because the service part of new type blade has not been ready yet.

SYMPTOM

Symptom 1: Toner stains [A] along paper feed direction appear on the back side of paper in both simplex and duplex printing.

The problem tends to occur when continuously printing on paper containing abundant paper dust.

Symptom 2: Toner stains [B] perpendicular to paper feed direction appear on the back side of paper in both simplex and duplex printing.

The problem tends to occur when printing in a low temperature, low humidity environment.

Subject: Toner stains on back side originating in the PTB unit. Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required





[B]

[A]



Reissued: 15-Feb-17


Symptom 3: Toner stains [C] in staple-like shape appear on the back side of paper at 76mm or 251mm intervals in both simplex and duplex printing.

The risk of the problem is higher if the PTB is riding over the edge of the PTR. See RTB #RM205127 for the belt overriding issue.


251mm

76mm

ホチキ

[C]


Reissued: 15-Feb-17


CAUSE

Cause of Symptom 1: The paper transfer cleaning blade [7] is not in tight contact with the PTB [A], because abundant paper dust is accumulated on the edge of the blade, disabling proper belt cleaning. Cause of Symptom 2: Extended machine operation in a low temperature and low humidity environment causes small toner particles to slip through the slight gap between the PTB [A] and paper transfer cleaning blade [7], which gradually abrades the cleaning blade, disabling proper belt cleaning. Cause of Symptom 3: The paper transfer cleaning blade [7] is not in tight contact with the PTB [A], because foreign objects are adhered to the PTB or PTB tension roller [B], disabling proper belt cleaning.

NOTE: 76mm corresponds to the circumference of the PTB tension roller. 251mm corresponds to the circumference of the PTB.

#1 : Paper Transfer Roller (PTR) #5 : Paper Transfer Cleaning Roller #7 : Paper Transfer Cleaning Blade A : Paper Transfer Belt (PTB) B : Paper Transfer Belt Tension Roller

[A]

[B]

PTB override

See RTB #RM205127.


Reissued: 15-Feb-17


SOLUTION

Action for Symptoms 1 and 2:

1. Set SP2-906-002 (Stop Time Reverse Ctrl/Set Interrupt Exe Interval: PTR) to “500” (default: 0). See NOTE 1.

2. Clean the components inside the Paper Transfer Belt Unit and Paper Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit.

For the rollers (except for Paper Transfer Cleaning Roller) and stays, clean with

cloth dampened with water. DO NOT use any solvents, i.e. alcohol or toluene.

For the paper transfer cleaning roller, clean with a vacuum cleaner. DO NOT use a wet cloth, because this is a brush roller.

If the problem is not resolved even after doing the above, replace the Paper Transfer Cleaning blade with the new type, p/n: D2586321. See NOTE 2.

Action for Symptom 3:

1. Clean the components inside the Paper Transfer Belt Unit and Paper Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit.

For the rollers (except for Paper Transfer Cleaning Roller) and stays, clean with cloth dampened with water. DO NOT use any solvents, i.e. alcohol or toluene.

For the paper transfer cleaning roller, clean with a vacuum cleaner. DO NOT use a wet cloth, because this is a brush roller.

2. Replace the Paper Transfer Belt.

3. Replace the Paper Transfer Belt Unit with the new type, p/n: M2050637.

4. Replace the Paper Transfer Cleaning Blade with the new type, p/n: D2586321. See NOTE 2.

5. Check if the PTB is riding over the edge of the PTR. If yes, do the procedures described in RTB #RM205127.

NOTE 1: By spec, the paper transfer belt reverse-rotates for a moment after the end of a job, to drop toner/dust from the cleaning blade. However, if the machine tends to run high duty jobs, this feature is not activated enough and the cleaning blade will accumulate toner/dust, causing poor cleaning. Setting SP2-906-002 to “500” will activate the reverse-rotation feature during the job every 500 pages with a trade-off in productivity, which will decrease approximately 6%. If set to every 1000 pages, the productivity decrease is 2.6%. NOTE 2: For higher tolerance against low temp / low humidity environments, the material of the Paper Transfer Cleaning Blade was modified.


Reissued ：30-Jan-17

Model: Andromeda-P1 (M205/M238) Date: 18-Feb-16 No.: RM205129a


SYMPTOM The following may occur: Toner end is detected although there is still toner remaining in the toner bottle. SC348 (Toner Supply Error) SC361 (TD sensor output error: Upper Limit) SC374 (ID Sensor Pattern Low Display) – see #RM205091 for details

Note: These tend to occur with only Magenta and Cyan.

ESTIMATED CAUSE Clogging of the exit of the development station for waste toner and/or entrance to the waste toner path When this happens, waste developer cannot be removed from the development station, and the proportion of developer in the mixture increases. As a result, it becomes full, and the machine cannot supply enough toner from the sub hopper to the station (triggering SC361 or SC374). If these SCs are not triggered, too much toner stays in the path [F], resulting in a motor step-out error and vibration. The sub hopper incorrectly detects “No toner”, and the engine supplies toner from the bottles to the sub hopper, triggering SC348.

ACTION

Do ACTION #1 if any of the symptoms occur. Do ACTION #2 to prevent future occurrences.

Subject: Troubleshooting: False toner end detection, SC348, 361, 374

due to toner overflow

Prepared by: Takatsugu Komori

From: Field Quality Management Group 2, FQM Dept, QAC


Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required







ACTION #1 (when the symptom occurs) IMPORTANT: DO NOT open the toner bank and sub hopper. This is to prevent the toner

from scattering and spilling peripherally.

1. Gently remove the development station. 2. If the developer entrance is clogged as shown in the photo, clean it with a vacuum

cleaner.

3. Check the weight of the developer + developer station.

If the weight is about 9500g or more AND the entrance was clogged in Step 2, go

to Step 4 and continue this procedure. Note: Under normal conditions, this weight is about 8500g.

Otherwise, stop this procedure and refer to the steps in the FSM.




4. Put a sheet of paper on top of the ITB, then clean the entrance of the waste toner path with a vacuum cleaner.

5. Tap around the exit of development station with the handle of a screw driver. 6. Insert a vacuum cleaner head and clean for 10 seconds.

7. Reattach the station, then turn ON the main power with the door open. 8. To reduce the quantity of developer in the development station, attach a waste

developer bag and do each of the following SPs for 20 seconds, depending on the color concerned: SP 5-804-085 (K), -086 (C), -087 (M) or -088 (Y).

9. To reduce the quantity of developer in the sub hopper, do each of the following SPs 3 times, depending on the color concerned: SP 3-050-003 (K), -004 (C), -005 (M) or -006 (Y).

10. Replace the developer (see FSM pg. 780).




ACTION #2 (as a preventative) IMPORTANT: Do the following every 300kP for Magenta and Cyan.

Required tools: Small, flat-head screwdriver, vacuum cleaner Estimated worktime: 20 min.

1. Push down the small pin [1] on the development station, and then carefully open the

shutter cover [2]. IMPORTANT: Be careful that the pin does not pop out when you open the cover.

2. Check the quantity of developer in the mixture. If you can clearly see the fin inside the developer station, stop this procedure

(no further action is necessary). If it appears like the photo in the middle or right, go on to Step 3.

3. Remove the PCDU.




4. Put a sheet of paper on the ITB, and then clean the entrance of the waste toner path with a vacuum cleaner.

5. Tap around the exit area for waste developer with the handle of a screw driver. 6. Insert a vacuum cleaner head and clean for 10 seconds.

Note: The development station can hold a maximum of about 2,100g of developer, it is usually 1,100g if there is NO clogging in the area mentioned above. One toner bottle includes 135g of developer, and so the symptom does not occur until about 7 bottles have been used after clogging occurs. Because this model can print about 50kP with one toner bottle, ACTION #2 allows about 350kP to be printed before the symptom can occur again.



Subject: Troubleshooting Wrinkles/Worm Tracks on Envelope Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM

Wrinkles or worm tracks on envelopes

CAUSE

Fusing nip width is not optimum.

SOLUTION

Adjust the fusing nip width using the procedure below.

1. Enter the adjustment settings for Custom Paper.

2. Set [92. Fusing Nip Width Setting] to “1” to enable the adjustment.

3. Increase the fusing speed in [123. Fusing Feed Speed Adjustment] by “5%.” If a jam occurs, increase the speed in steps of “0.5%.”

4. In [102. Fusing Nip Width Adj. for Envelope], decrease the nip width in steps of “50” (default: 638). Print to check the output every time after modifying the value. IMPORTANT: Do not set to a value below 400.

If the above causes poor fusing, increase the value of [88./89. Fusing Heat Roller Temp. Adjust.] in steps of 5°C. Again, print to check the output every time after modifying the value.



Reference

[92. Fusing Nip Width Setting] corresponds to [SP1-989-xxx].

[102. Fusing Nip Width Adj. for Envelope] corresponds to [SP1-995-xxx].

Relation between the cam and the value applied in [102. Fusing Nip Width Adj. for Envelope]



Subject: Troubleshooting Horizontal Glossy Streaks caused by

Scratched Fusing Belt Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM

Horizontal glossy streaks in solid areas

CAUSE

The fusing belt is scratched by the burrs on the leading/trailing edges of paper.

SOLUTION

In adjustment settings for Skilled Operators, do [0525 Smooth Fusing Belt] until the symptom disappears.

This operation polishes the belt for 150 seconds.

Print out 1 copy of the affected image after every operation to check the result.

Width of the glossy streaks corresponds to the width of the leading/trailing edges.

Glossy streaks appear perpendicular to the paper feed direction.

Burrs on the leading/trailing edges of the paper cause scratches on the fusing belt.


Reissued: 19-Feb-16

Model: Leo-C1/ Leo-P1/ Andromeda-P1/ BR-P1 Date: 03-Feb-15 No.: RD194037a


Subject: Firmware Release Note: Fin_IFBox Prepared by: A.Tajima



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




This RTB has been issued to announce the firmware release information for the Fin_IFBox.


01.010:02 M4625510A February 2016 production Not available

01.000:02 M4625510 1st Mass production Not available



01.010:02 Specification Change: 1. Line speed data is transferred to third party vendor peripherals. Symptom corrected: 1. When connected to a third party vendor peripheral, "Printing" status

falsely remains displayed on the control panel. 2. Falsely sends on-line status to the engine without receiving on-line

status from third party vendor peripheral. 3. If printing stops during a booklet job (stapling, ring binding, perfect

binding) and resumes, part of the job is duplicated. 4. Time-out jam (J225) occurs before reaching the set time-out. 5. The operation panel does not display the part number of custom RPIP

Interface Box Type S3 firmware.




Subject: Alternative Method for Input Check SP 5803-048, -049, -095, -

097, -100, -101, -158, -159, -163, -164, -165 and SP5804-107, -108 Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




As a product limitation, the following Input Check SPs do not work:

SP5803-048, -049, -095, -097, -100, -101, -158, -159, -163, -164, -165

SP5804-107, -108

Please refer to the alternative methods described in the table below.

Input Check SP Alternative Check Method

SP5-803-048 (Regist Roller HP Sn 1)

Remove and then reinstall the registration roller lift motor 1 or registration roller home position sensor 1. If initialization completes normally after closing the front door, both motor and sensor are functioning properly. If SC515-01 (Contact Motor Error (Registration Roller HP

Sensor 1)) occurs and the registration roller lift motor 1 rotates after turning ON the machine, registration roller home position sensor 1 is defective.

The motor will not be damaged even if it continues to rotate due to a faulty sensor.

SP5-803-049 (Regist Roller HP Sn 2)

Remove and then reinstall the registration roller lift motor 2 or registration roller home position sensor 2. If initialization completes normally after closing the front door, both motor and sensor are functioning properly. If SC515-02 (Contact Motor Error (Registration Roller HP

Sensor 2)) occurs and the registration roller lift motor 2 rotates after turning ON the machine, registration roller home position sensor 2 is defective.


SP5-803-095 (INPUT Check: ITB Belt Speed Sn)

Set SP2-915-001 (Scale FB Control Enable, default: 1) to ‘1’ and close the front door. If initialization completes normally, the ITB belt speed sensor is functioning properly. If SC499-03 appears, the sensor is defective. (If SP2-915-001 is set to ‘0’, SC499-01 is not detected even if the sensor is defective). Even if the initialization process does not complete for some

reason, the sensor is not defective as long as the ITB rotates and stops during the initialization process.



SP5-803-097 (INPUT Check: ITB Belt Centering Sensor)

If initialization completes normally by closing the door, the ITB belt centering sensor is functioning properly. If there is a problem, SC477-xx (ITB Belt Centering Sensor error) will appear. Even if the initialization process does not complete for some

reason, the sensor is not defective as long as the ITB rotates and stops during the initialization process.

SP5-803-100 (INPUT Check: ITB Motor Rotation Sn 1)

If initialization completes normally by closing the door, ITB motor rotation sensor 1/2 are normal. If there is a problem, one of the following SC codes will appear:

SC441-01, 02, 03, 05, 06, 07, 08, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 16, 17, 18 (See the last pages of this bulletin for details of these SC codes.)

Even if the initialization process does not complete for some reason, the sensor is not defective as long as the ITB rotates and stops during the initialization process.

SP5-803-101 (INPUT Check: ITB Motor Rotation Sn 2)

SP5-803-158 (De-curler Unit HP Sn 1)

If initialization completes normally by closing the door, de-curler unit HP sensor 1 and de-curler unit motor 1 are functioning properly. Remove and then reinstall the sensor or motor. If initialization completes normally after closing the front door, both sensor and motor are functioning properly. If SC516-01 (de-curler HP error (de-curler unit HP sensor 1))

occurs and the de-curler unit motor 1 rotates after turning ON the machine, the de-curler unit home position sensor 1 is defective.


SP5-803-159 (De-curler Unit HP Sn 2)

If initialization completes normally by closing the door, de-curler unit HP sensor 2 and de-curler unit motor 2 are functioning properly. Remove and then reinstall the sensor or motor. If initialization completes normally after closing the front door, both sensor and motor are functioning properly. If SC516-02 (de-curler HP error (de-curler unit HP sensor 2))

occurs and the de-curler unit motor 1 rotates after turning ON the machine, the de-curler unit home position sensor 2 is defective.




SP5-803-163 (Paper Exit Inverter Roller HP Sn)

If initialization completes normally by closing the door, the paper exit inverter roller HP sensor and paper exit inverter motor are functioning properly. Remove and then reinstall the sensor or motor. If initialization completes normally after closing the front door, both sensor and motor are functioning properly. If SC514-00 (exit junction gate HP error) occurs and the paper

exit inverter roller motor rotates after turning ON the machine, the paper exit roller HP sensor is defective.


SP5-803-164 (Duplex Inverter Roller HP Sn)

If initialization completes normally by closing the door, the duplex inverter roller HP sensor and duplex inverter motor are functioning properly. Remove and then reinstall the sensor or motor. If initialization completes normally after closing the front door, both sensor and motor are functioning properly. If SC515-04 (contact motor error (duplex inverter roller HP

error) occurs and the duplex inverter roller motor rotates after turning ON the machine, the duplex inverter roller HP sensor is defective.


SP5-803-165 (Exit Junction Gate HP Sn)

If initialization completes normally by closing the door, the exit junction gate HP sensor and exit junction gate motor are functioning properly. Remove and then reinstall the sensor or motor. If initialization completes normally after closing the front door, both sensor and motor are functioning properly. If SC515-03 (paper exit inverter roller HP error) occurs and the

exit junction gate motor rotates after turning ON the machine, the exit junction gate HP sensor is defective.




SP5-804-107 (PTR Lift Motor (CW))

1. Open the left door [A] of the imaging section. 2. Cheat the door lock switch [B] with a piece of paper or

cardboard. 3. Turn ON the machine, then open and close the right door [C]

of the imaging section.

4. Visually check the PTR lift motor [A]. If the motor is rotating

and the timing belt [B] and pulley [C] are moving, the motor is functioning properly.

SP5-804-108 (PTR Lift Motor (CCW))



If the inner cover [A] is attached and the PTR lift motor is not visible, remove the cover.

Visually check the PTR lift motor behind the inner cover [A] through the gap [B]. If the motor is rotating and the timing belt and pulley are moving, the motor is functioning properly.



SC codes that indicate problems with the ITB motor rotation sensors 1/2:

SC No. Error Name/Major Cause

SC441-01 ITB motor error: ENC1 pulse nonexistent

Pulse is not detected from encoder sensor 1.

SC441-02

ITB motor error: ENC1 pulse skipping

Pulse skipping of encoder sensor 1 exceeds the prescribed limit per rotation.

SC441-03 ITB motor error: ENC1 pulse chattering

Pulse chattering of encoder 1 exceeds the prescribed limit per rotation.

SC441-05 ITB motor error: ENC2 pulse nonexistent


SC441-06

ITB motor error: ENC1 pulse nonexistent/ ENC2 pulse nonexistent

Pulse is not detected from both encoder sensor 1 and encoder sensor 2.

SC441-07

ITB motor error: ENC1 pulse skipping / ENC2 pulse nonexistent



SC441-08

ITB motor error: ENC1 pulse chattering / ENC2 pulse nonexistent

Pulse chattering of encoder sensor 1 exceeds the prescribed limit per rotation.


SC441-10 ITB motor error: ENC2 pulse skipping

Pulse skipping of encoder sensor 2 per exceeds the prescribed limit per rotation.

SC441-11

ITB motor error: ENC1 pulse nonexistent/ ENC2 pulse skipping

Pulse is not detected from encoder sensor 1. Pulse skipping of encoder sensor 2 exceeds the

prescribed limit per rotation.

SC441-12 ITB motor error: ENC1 pulse skipping / ENC2 pulse skipping

Pulse skipping exceeds the prescribed limit for both encoder sensor 1 and encoder sensor 2 per rotation.

SC441-13

ITB motor error: ENC1 pulse chattering / ENC2 pulse skipping



SC441-15 ITB motor error: ENC2 pulse chattering




SC No. Error Name/Major Cause

SC441-16

ITB motor error: ENC1 pulse nonexistent/ ENC2 pulse chattering

Pulse is not detected from encoder sensor 1. Pulse chattering of encoder sensor 2 exceeds the

prescribed limit per rotation.

SC441-17

ITB motor error: ENC1 pulse skipping / ENC2 pulse chattering



SC441-18

ITB motor error: ENC1 pulse chattering / ENC2 pulse chattering

Pulse chattering exceeds the prescribed limit for both encoder sensor 1 and encoder sensor 2 per rotation.



Subject: Troubleshooting non-feed with mid-thick paper from Vacuum

Feed LCIT RT5100 Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM

Non-feed jam occurs immediately after job start, especially under the following conditions:


3rd sheet from the top of the stack

Weight 6-7 (220.1-300.0g/m2)

Coated

CAUSE

At the start of the job when the top few sheets float up by the air blown from the float and side fans, the sheets are pressed too strongly against the plates [A] due to excessive air, disabling proper separation and delaying the feed by the feed belt.

SOLUTION

In adjustment settings for Custom paper, decrease the value of [#107. Side Fan] by 10%.

If the problem still persists, set [#112. Paper Feed Mode (Adjust Fan Level)] to "Max Nonfdng Reduc. (Highest)."


Model: Andoromeda-P1 Date: 1-Mar-16 No.: RM205134

Subject: Recovery procedure of SC520-00 Prepared by: J. Kobayashi



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM

SC520-00 occurs

CAUSE 1. Unusually high torque was generated in the moving parts of the fusing unit

- Torque overload caused by defective parts - Incorrect assembly of the smoothing roller feeler (cam)

2. The fusing motor is disconnected 3. No supply to the 24V 4. Defective fusing motor driver (IOB2 board)

SOLUTION Do ACTIONS #1-4 below, which correspond to the four estimated CAUSES above. ACTION 1 1. Make sure that the bearings and gears are rotating normally/smoothly. 2. Check whether or not the feeler for the smoothing roller was assembly correctly.

Use the photos below, and reassemble the feeler (cam) correctly if necessary.

CORRECT assembly (left photo): The curved part of the feeler is facing downward, i.e. under the shaft. INCORRECT assembly (right photo): The curved part of the feeler is facing upward, i.e. above the shaft.



ACTION 2 1. Check the following connections (circled in red in the diagram) and reconnect any

connectors that are loose: CN 124, CN3/JCN1/CN1, CN2/CN. 2. Check whether any of the harnesses are damaged, pinched, or pressed against the

metal plate or cover. Replace any damaged harnesses. If parts are not immediately available, repair

the harnesses with electrical tape and replace them at the next service visit. Return (re-route) any pinched/pressed harnesses to their original paths



ACTION 3 1. Connect CN1 pin 1 with GND (machine frame) and measure the voltage of the 24V

line on PSU8 (marked with the yellow rectangle below). 2. If the value is not 24V, check the connector inserted in CN444 and reconnect it firmly. 3. Recheck the 24V line as described above. 4. If you still cannot confirm 24V, replace FU5 on PSU8.

If you do not have this part available, replace PSU8.

ACTION 4: 1. If the SC still occurs after you do ACTIONS #1-3, replace the IOB2. 2. If the SC still occurs, replace the fusing motor.



Subject: Troubleshooting glossy steaks caused by scratched fusing belt Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM Glossy streaks that correspond to the edges of the previously-used paper appear

on the prints after switching the paper to a larger size.

CAUSE

The fusing belt is scratched by the edges of the paper.

SOLUTION

Polish the fusing belt using the Skilled Operators menu or SP mode.

0525-001 "Smooth Fusing Belt"

SP1-133-110 “Manual Refresh Roller Setting: Manual Refresh:Exe”

Feed direction

[A]: Small paper [B]: Glossy streaks on larger paper



Subject: New Debug Cable for Andromeda-P1 Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




New Debug Cable for Andromeda-P1 The debug cable connector for Andromeda-P1 [A] is different to that for the Aries series and Taurus-C1/P1 [B]. To connect the old type debug cable (p/n: G1785397) [B] with Andromeda-P1, use the conversion cable below:

p/n: D1945398 HARNESS:DEBUG:MONITOR:SERVICE:CONNECTING

NOTE:

The type [A] connector can be used also for Leo-C1/P1 and Charis-C1 Pro.

[A]

[B]



Subject: Troubleshooting uneven gloss caused by toner adhered to the

fusing belt Prepared by: T. Miyamoto



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM 1

Stripes perpendicular to the feed direction appears in a band along the sides of the paper in the feed direction.

SYMPTOM 2

Uneven gloss appears in a band along the sides of the paper in the feed direction.

NOTE: Print 10 copies of a solid image in simplex to verify the symptom. The following are conditions that increase the risk of the problem:

When printing a large image after running a large volume job.

When printing a large image after printing a large quantity of the same image.

Paper feed direction

Paper feed direction



CAUSE

The fusing belt has adhered toner from the previous job.

[A]: Paper feed direction [B]: Affected areas of the fusing belt with adhered toner [C]: Clean area of the fusing belt

SOLUTION

Polish the fusing belt from the Adjustment Setting for Skilled Operators menu, #0525 “Smooth Fusing Belt.”

Fusing belt



Subject: Troubleshooting droplet-shaped uneven gloss on 2nd side Prepared by: T. Miyamoto



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM

Gloss is removed in a droplet-like shape on the 2nd side of duplex outputs. The symptom tends to occur and is especially noticeable when printing a solid image on coated thin paper.

[A]: The affected part has the gloss removed.

CAUSE

The fusing belt pulls away the toner from the 2nd side when the paper separates from the fusing belt and pressure roller.

SOLUTION

Do the flowchart(s) on the following pages.



Flowchart 1: Reducing the Fusing Nip Width

Set #92 (Fusing Nip Width Setting) to

“3.”

Start

Problem solved?No

Set #92 (Fusing Nip Width Setting) to

“2.”

Problem solved?

Yes

Yes

No

Is fuseability OK?Yes No

FinishDo Flowchart 2: Increasing

the Fusing Temperature

Adjustment Settings for Custom Paper


Do Flowchart 3: Lowering

the Process Speed

NOTE: Reduce the fusing nip width only in steps of one.



Flowchart 2: Increasing the Fusing Temperature

Problem solved?

Yes

No

Can the fusing heat roller

temperature be increased by 5 °C

and not reach 185 °C?

Finish

· Do not set to a temp higher than 185 °C.· Do not increase the temp, if jams occur.

Yes

Start

Do Flowchart 3: Lowering

the Process Speed

Check the fusing temperature in Adjustment

Setting for Custom Paper; #89/90 Fusing Heat

Roller Temperature Adjustment.

No

Increase the temp by 5 °C.



Flowchart 3: Lowering the Process Speed

Set #120 (Process Speed Setting) to

“Low” speed mode.

Problem solved?No

Yes

Finish

Start


In #88/89 (Fusing Heat Roller

Temperature Adjustment), decrease the

temp as follows:

M205: Decrease by 10 °C.

M238: Decrease by 15 °C.


Go to

A



temp by another 5 °C.




Problem solved?No

Yes

Finish

A



temp by 5 °C.


Finish

(No further adjustments

available by spec.)

Problem solved?

Yes

No



Subject: Troubleshooting white spots caused by machine cold start Prepared by: T. Miyamoto



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM

White spots appear when running the job in cold start after the machine had been left in a low room temperature below 10 degrees Celsius.

The risk of the problem is higher in Magenta compared to other colors.

CAUSE

Electrical discharge occurs at the image transfer rollers when transferring the image from the drums to the belt. In detail Electrical resistivity of the image transfer roller increases while the machine is left unused in a cold room. As the room temperature increases in the morning, the difference in temperature between the room and the image transfer rollers becomes considerable and causes an abnormal increase in the voltage, resulting in the discharge.



SOLUTION

As a preventive measure, warm up the machine or air condition the room to approximately 20 degrees Celsius before starting the job.

However, if the above is not possible, decrease the drum-to-belt transfer current of the affected color(s) in steps of 5 μA in the SP mode or Adjustment Settings for Custom Paper only until the machine warms up. Set back to the original values after the symptom has eased.

If the affected color(s) cannot be identified, increase the value for all colors.

SP Range (default: 60)

2-451-xxx Set:ITB K:Standard: FC 0 to 150 μA

2-452-xxx Set:ITB K:Standard: BW 0 to 150 μA

2-461-xxx Set:ITB C:Standard: FC 0 to 150 μA

2-471-xxx Set:ITB M:Standard: FC 0 to 150 μA

2-481-xxx Set:ITB Y:Standard: FC 0 to 150 μA

* xxx corresponds to the paper type and paper weight

Adjustment Settings for Custom Paper Range (default: 60)

22. Image Transfer Current: B&W 0 to 150 μA

23. Image Transfer Current: FC: Black 0 to 150 μA

24. Image Transfer Current: FC: Cyan 0 to 150 μA

25. Image Transfer Current: FC: Magenta 0 to 150 μA

26. Image Transfer Current: FC: Yellow 0 to 150 μA



Subject: Troubleshooting for Foreign Objects on the Printed Paper Prepared by: T. Miyamoto



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




Service Manual Correction The following section of the field service manual was corrected. 6. Troubleshooting > Image Quality > Image Quality 005: Stains > Foreign objects on the printed paper Note: The descriptions in red were added.

SYMPTOM

Foreign objects adhere to the printout via the pressure roller separation pawls. (The foreign objects are paper dust and can be removed by gently rubbing with fingers.)



[A]: Front side [B]: Rear side [C]: Pressure roller separation pawl (7) [D]: Feed direction [E]: The area where foreign objects are most likely to appear (corresponds to the positions of the pressure roller separation pawls).

CAUSE

During duplex printing, the 1st side of fed paper catches the paper dust and toner on the pressure roller separation pawls.

CONDITIONS

A large amount of paper with a lot of dust and offset toner has been fed first. And then images that cause paper to wind around the pressure roller are printed in duplex mode. Feed mode: Duplex mode (The 1st side consumes more toner than the 2nd side). Relatively thin paper. Weak paper tends to wind around the pressure roller.



SOLUTION

Is the separation pawl clean?

Finish

Yes

No

Start

[Clean the pressure roller separation pawls]

Remove the foreign objects adhered to the

surface of the pawls with a dry cloth. (Fig.1)

[Feed paper to remove the foreign object]

Make 5 copies of a 5-sheet duplex job that has

a solid color image on the 1st side and nearly

a blank on the 2nd side.

* If in hand, use coated paper of Weight 2 or 3

(63.1-105.0 g/m2), as this type of paper is

effective for removing foreign objects from the

pawls.

If the pawls cannot be cleaned by feeding

paper, remove the stay and Manually clean

the pawls. (Fig. 2 and 3)

How to clean the pressure roller separation pawls

It is recommended to clean the pressure roller separation pawls as frequently as possible. Cleaning procedure for operators:

1 Pull out the fuser unit to the service position. (See section 4. Replacement and Adjustment > Fuser Unit > Fuser Unit (Service Position))

2 Open the fusing cover [A].



3 Clean the surface where the paper passes and the edges of the pressure roller

separation pawls [A] with a dry cloth to remove the foreign objects.

Cleaning procedure only for technicians: 1 Remove the separation pawls stay. (See section 4. Replacement and Adjustment

> Fuser Unit > Fuser Belt Unit) 2 Clean both top [A] and bottom [B] sides of the pawls with a dry cloth. Do not

remove the screws circled in blue.



How to clean the fusing unit separation plate

Toner adhered to the fusing unit separation plate may transfer to the paper and cause paper jams and may also damage the front edge of the tape attached to the plate. To prevent this, it is recommended to also clean this plate as frequently as possible.

1 Pull out the fuser unit to the service position. (See section 4. Replacement and

Adjustment > Fuser Unit > Fuser Unit (Service Position).)

2 Open the fusing cover [A].

3 Clean both top [A] and bottom [B] sides of the pressure unit separation plate with a dry cloth.


Model: Andromeda―P1 Date: 7-Mar-16 No.: RM205141

SYMPTOM

SC542-01 or SC545-01 occurs.

Note: These SCs are described in the Service Manual as follows. SC542-01: Heater can’t supply enough heat to raise the temperature, and

Heating Roller Thermopile detected a Heating Roller temperature below 100 degrees 265 seconds consecutively after the heater was turned on during startup or returning from sleep mode.

SC545-01: The DUTY of one of Heaters A to E was equal to the maximum DUTY (excluding 0%) for 115 seconds continuously after the heater was turned on during Ready status/preheating/low-power and the fusing unit stopped. Excluded time: 90 seconds

CAUSE 1. The heater (AX430215) is not connected correctly 2. Electrical failure of the heater 3. Electrical failure of the thermostat (AW110124) 4. The thermopile (AW100138) lens is smudged 5. Input voltage out of specification

Subject: Recovery procedure of SC54X Error Prepared by: J. Kobayashi

From: Field Quality Management Department/Group2


Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




Fig.1 Heater lamp circuit



SOLUTION Do the following ACTIONS in the order shown. ACTION 1 (for CAUSES 5 and 4) 1. CAUSE 5:

Check whether the input voltage is within 10% of the rated voltage. If it is not, reset the input voltage to this range.

2. CAUSE 4: 1) Pull out the fusing unit (fig. 3). 2) Remove the connector for the thermopile cover (fig. 4), then the two screws, and

then the cover itself. 3) Clean the thermopile lens surface (fig. 5), if necessary.

IMPORTANT: Do not replace the thermopile right away. If it is broken, SC541 is displayed.

Fig.3 Thermopile window location

Fig.4 Thermopile location in the Exit section

Fig.5 Thermopile lens



ACTION 2 (for CAUSES 1, 2, and 3) 1. Measure the resistance of each heater. [For identification of defective parts]

1-1. Remove the fuser unit. 1-2. Remove both front and rear covers. 1-3. Measure the resistance at the points shown in Fig. 6. 1-4. Replace the defective part.

2. Check for loose connections [Incorrect connection (Case 1)]

2-1 Pull out the fuser unit 2-2 Remove both front and rear covers. 2-3 Measure the resistance at the points shown in picture 1. 2-4 Connect tightly if it is loose

Fig. 6: Resistance measurement points



3. Measure the resistance as follows. [heater failure (Case 2)] 3-1 Disconnect all points from A and B in Fig. 6. 3-2 Remove all heater connectors (5 in front and rear). 3-3 Measure the resistance at the points circled in red in picture 2 (5 heaters). 3-4 Values of almost 0 Ohms are normal, and “O.L.” is not normal (overloaded). 3-5 Replace the defective part.



4. Measure the resistance as follows. [thermostat failure (Case 3)]

4-1 Disconnect all points from A and B in Fig. 6. 4-2 Remove the cover plate of the fuser unit on the entrance side (screws x 2; circled in red in picture 3). 4-3 Measure the resistance at the points circled in red in picture 4 (5 thermostats). 4-4 Values of almost 0 Ohms are normal, and “O.L.” is not normal (overloaded). 4-5 Replace the defective part.

Picture 4



Subject: Manual Correction: Horizontal Streaks on Thick Paper Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




Service Manual Correction The following section of the field service manual was corrected. 6. Troubleshooting > Image Quality > Image Quality 002: Streaks > Horizontal streaks on thick paper Note: The descriptions in red were added or corrected.

SYMPTOM

Horizontal streaks (shock-jitter) appear on thick paper. It does not appear on the first sheet of the print. The area where horizontal streaks appear differs depending on the color and length of the paper. The symptom is noticeable especially when printed on thick paper. When using A3 paper, horizontal streaks appear at following position from leading

edge. Y: At about 238 mm from leading edge M: Horizontal streaks do not appear. C: At about 188 mm from leading edge K: At about 412 mm from leading edge

When using SRA3 paper, horizontal streaks appear at following position from leading edge. Y: At about 86 mm from leading edge M: At about 361 mm from leading edge C: At about 87 mm from leading edge K: At about 361 mm from leading edge For example, when printing black color with SRA3 paper, horizontal streaks appear as shown below.



CAUSE

A shock occurred when the paper entered the paper transfer unit, and disturbed the image.

SOLUTION

1. From the Custom Paper settings menu, adjust line speed in [#127: CPM Adjustment] so that the shock occurs in between the sheets. Check the result.

Set the value to 54% for A3/DLT, 60% for SRA3.

As a side effect, productivity will drop to the above values.

2. If the productivity is unacceptable, change the position of the pressure lever in the intermediate transfer belt unit from “normal” to “pressure” position. Check the result.

As a side effect, line scattering may occur at the leading edge.

3. If the symptom has not improved to an acceptable level, set [#120: Process Speed Setting] of the Custom Paper settings to “Low.” Check the result.

As a side effect, productivity drops to 60%.

4. If the productivity is unacceptable, adjust the gap between the intermediate transfer belt and the paper transfer roller in [#84: Adjust Gap of Paper Transfer] of the Custom Paper settings. Change the gap in the order of small, medium, large. Check the result.

As a side effect, productivity drops to 91%.



How to change the pressure lever position in the ITB unit

1. Open the front left door [A] and front right door [B] of the imaging section.

2. Open the toner supply unit cover [A].

3. Lift the upper front cover [A] and remove it. ( ×3)



4. Remove the inner cover [A] of the ITB unit. ( ×4)

5. Change the pressure lever position from the normal position to the pressure position.

1. Remove the shoulder screw of pressure lever [A], and then rotate it counter-

clockwise by 180 degrees. ( ×1)

2. Tighten the pressure lever with the shoulder screw. ( ×1)


Reissued：25-Jun-18

Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 15-Mar-16 No.: RM205143c

RTB Reissue The Items in bold italics were changed or added.

SYMPTOM The size of the image fluctuates from page to page along the sub-scan (feed) direction. Note: This tends to occur more frequently with heavy coated media. It becomes longer with lower image coverage (and vice-versa).

CAUSE The media slips out of position slightly during toner transfer. Note: This depends on the surface characteristics of the media, how much toner is transferred,

and the slight speed differential between (1) and (3) in the diagram below.

ACTION Program the media into Customer Paper entry, then 1. To decrease the fluctuation, do ACTION 1 below. 2. ACTION 1 could change the image size a bit longer/shorter a bit, do ACTION 2 for adjusting it.

Subject: Troubleshooting for Image Size Fluctuation Prepared by: J. Kobayashi

From: PP CS section CIP QM Department QAC


Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required





Model: Andromeda-P1 (M205/M238) Date: 15-Mar-16 No.: RM205143a

ACTION 1 1. Print a job (known image size) in simplex mode.

Note: This is to identify the 2 min. and max. variation sheets which fluctuate the least and most.

2. Change the Advanced Settings for both No.16 (Transfer Timing Roller Feed Speed Adjustment) and No.17 (Paper Transfer Feed Speed Adjustment), depending on the paper weight, as shown below: Paper Weight 5, 6 (163.1 – 256.0 gsm): No.16: 0.0% (default) to “1.0%” “1.5%” “1.0%” No.17: 0.0% (default) to “1.0%” “1.5%” “1.0%” Paper Weight 7, 8, and 9 (256.1 – 400.0 gsm): No.16: -0.3% (default) to “0.2%” “0.7%” “1.2%” “0.7%” No.17: 0.0% (default) to “0.5%” “1.0%” “1.5%” “1.0%” IMPORTANT: Change No. 16 and No. 17 by the same amount (whether increasing or decreasing). Note: This change will reduce the difference in speed between the ITB and PTB, which could be

one of the main factors for the media to slip in this area. As a side effect of this change, following phenomenon may appeared. Please consult

it with customer when applying this workaround. 1) The shape of dots is slightly deformed and halftone IQ is decreased. 2) Partial uneven density and degradation of color registration appear.

3. Print the job again and check if the symptom improves (especially the two sheets identified in

Step 1). If more adjustment is needed, as in Fig. A, increase both No.16 and No.17 by 0.1% until

its upper limit or until you can get the best result. As shown in Fig B, decrease by 0.1%.

If the symptom still remains after this, increase the strength of the transfer high pressure mode No.87. This may cause image problems such as partial uneven density, so carefully check the image quality after applying this setting.

4. If the size of the image is NOT acceptable to the customer, do ACTION 2 below.


Model: Andromeda-P1 (M205/M238) Date: 15-Mar-16 No.: RM205143a

ACTION 2 1. Measure the difference between the target length and actual length.

2. Calculate the difference in magnification.

Example: Target Length: 420.0 mm, actual length: 419.5 mm 420.0 / 419.5 = 100.12% +0.12% is required

3. Input the results in Advanced Setting No.7 (Adjust Magnification of Side 1 with Feed) or No.8

(Adjust Magnification of Side 2 with Feed). The unit for these settings is 0.025%. Therefore, +0.125% should be used in the example above.

4. Check the results.

5. See RTB RM205120 for more details about other registration adjustments.



Subject: Troubleshooting low image density at the leading edge Prepared by: T. Miyamoto



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM 1

The image density of black is low at the leading edge of paper.

[A]: Image density is low only at the leading edge.

SYMPTOM 2

The image density of images printed with two or more colors is low at the leading edge.

Feed direction

Feed direction



CAUSE of Symptom 1

The paper transfer current is too high.

CAUSE of Symptom 2

The paper transfer current is too low.

The following are conditions that increase the risk of the problem:

Printing on thick paper (because the transfer current is set high for thick paper)

Printing on paper with a rough surface

Printing on paper with low electrical resistivity in a high temperature / high humidity environment for Symptom 1, printing on paper with high electrical resistivity in a low temperature / low humidity environment for Symptom 2

SOLUTION

Increase or decrease the following settings in adjustment settings for Custom Paper in steps of 10%.

#45. Paper Transfer Current, Lead Edge: FC

#64. Paper Transfer AC: Lead Edge DC: FC

NOTE

Always increase or decrease both of the above settings together by the same amount in steps of 10%. For example, if #45 and #64 are currently set to 130% and 165% and you wish to decrease the value, modify the values to 120% and 155%.



Start

Is there a paper in the Custom Paper settings that matches with

the paper in use?

Select that paper.

Problem solved?

Finish

Go to A

Yes

No

Yes



Finish

Go to

B

Problem solved?

No

Yes

Yes

A

No

Do the following, if you cannot judge whether the problem Is occurring

only in Bk.

increase the value of

[#45.PaperTransferCurrent,Lead Edge:FC]

and

[#64.Paper Transfer AC:Lead Edge:FC]

by 20-40%.

· If the symptom has eased, the problem is occurring where printed

in CMYK.

· If the symptom has worsened, the problem is occurring where

printed only in Bk.

Is the problem observed in areas printed in

monochrome only with Bk toner ?

In adjustment settings for Custom Paper,

decrease the value of [#45.PaperTransferCurrent,Lead Edge:FC]

and


by 10% from the current value.

Minimum value: 100%

Have # 45 and #64 reached the min 100%?

No

Yes

Finish

(No further adjustments available by

spec. Apply the value that produced

the best results.)



Problem solved?

Finish

Yes

Are #45 and #64 set to 250% or higher?

B

No No

Yes

In adjustment settings for Custom Paper,

increase the value of

[#45.PaperTransferCurrent,Lead Edge:FC]

and


by 10% from the current value.

Maximum value: 250%

Finish

(No further adjustments available by

spec. Apply the value that produced

the best results.)


Reissued: 11-Apr-16

Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 18-Mar-16 No.: RM205145a


Please add SC670-00 described in this bulletin to the following section. 6. Troubleshooting > SC600 (Controller) > SC636 to SC637, SC641 to SC653, SC672


SC670-00 D

Engine start up error

Case 1

/ENGRDY signal was not acknowledged after power ON or when the machine returned from energy saver mode.

EC response was not received within the prescribed time after power ON.

PC response was not received within the prescribed time after power ON.

Writing to Rapi driver failed (correspondent not found via PCI).

Case 2

Unexpected failure was detected after acknowledging the /ENGRDY signal.

Case3

DEMS execution for yellow failed. (M205 model)

The engine board was reset, triggered by an irregular process control run during a print operation. (Engine firmware defect)

Case 1

Engine board did not start up.

Case 2

Engine board was reset unexpectedly.

Subject: Details of SC670-00 Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required





Reissued: 11-Apr-16



Case3

HP sensor in the yellow drum motor is defective. (M205 model)

NOTE:

This error does not occur with the M238 model.

This error does not occur with the magenta/cyan/black drum motors of the M205 model.

Case 1, 2

Check the connection between the engine board and the controller board.

If the error occurs at a 100% rate, replace the engine board. If this does not resolve the error, consider replacing the controller board and other boards in between.

If the frequency of the error is low, the problem may be caused by various factors including the firmware, engine board, controller board, and PSU.

Case 3

Check if the HP sensor in the yellow drum motor is defective or not by following the steps below.

1. Set SP3-600-030 (IBACC:ON/OFF) to "1" or "2" (default: 1).

2. Execute SP3-040-005 (DEMS:Execute:Y).

3. Check the result in SP3-041-001 (DEMS Exe OK?: From Left:YMCK).

If the result code is "4XXX", the HP sensor in the yellow drum motor is defective. Replace the yellow drum motor.


Reissued: 11-Apr-16


How to Identify the Hardware Fault Causing the SC670 for Cases 1 and 2

Checking the IOB1

NOTE: Before you do the following procedure, check if the SC disappears or not by disconnecting and then connecting all the connectors on the IOB1.

1. Check the status of LED32 and LED17 of IOB1.

If the LEDs are FLASHING, go to "Checking the IOB2".

If the LEDs are OFF, go to Step 2.

2. Check the status of LED21 (+5V).

If the LED is ON, go to "Checking the BCU".

If the LED is OFF, go to Step 3.

3. Measure the voltage of pin 1 of CN302.

If the measurement is 5V, FU12 of IOB1 is blown out. Go to Step 4.

If the measurement is 0V, PSU2 may be defective or the harness is in a ground fault. Go to Step 5.


Reissued: 11-Apr-16


4. Measure the resistance between FU12 output and GND.

If the measurement is less than 1ohm, disconnect all the connectors connected to the IOB1 one at a time to identify the ground fault. Repair the ground fault and replace the IOB1.

If the measurement is more than 1ohm, replace the IOB1.

5. Do the following.

Check FU12 of IOB1. If the fuse is blown out, replace the IOB1.

Measure the resistance between FU12 output and GND. If the measurement is less than 1ohm, disconnect all the connectors connected to the IOB1 one at a time to identify the ground fault. Repair the ground fault.

Go to "Checking the Voltage of PSU2".


Reissued: 11-Apr-16


Checking the IOB2

NOTE: Before you do the following procedure, check if the SC disappears or not by disconnecting and then connecting all the connectors on the IOB2.

1. Check the status of LED2 of IOB2 (+5V).

If the LED is ON, go to "Checking the Status of IPU/DTU".


2. Measure the voltage of pin 1 of CN116 (+5V).

If the measurement is 5V, FU9 of IOB2 is blown out. Go to Step 3.


3. Measure the resistance between FU9 output and GND, because the harness may have a ground fault.

If the measurement is less than 1ohm, disconnect all the connectors connected to the IOB2 one at a time to identify the ground fault. Repair the ground fault and replace the IOB2.

If the measurement is more than 1ohm, replace the IOB2.


Reissued: 11-Apr-16



Check FU9 of the IOB2. If the fuse is blown out, replace the IOB2.

Measure the resistance between FU9 output and GND.

If the measurement is less than 1ohm, disconnect all the connectors connected to the IOB2 one at a time to identify the ground fault. Repair the ground fault.


Checking the IPU/DTU

NOTE: Before you do the following procedure, check if the SC disappears or not by disconnecting and then connecting all the connectors between the IPD and DTU.

1. Check the status of LED3 of IPU (3.3V).

If the LED is ON, go to Step 2.


2. Check the status of LED1 and LED2 of the DTU.


Reissued: 11-Apr-16


If LED 1 and 2 are both ON, check the status of LED17 of DTU (+3.3V).

If LED17 is ON, check the status of LED5/LED6/LED7.

If LED5/LED6/LED7 are FLASHING, check the harness connection between the BCU and IPU. If properly connected, replace the IPU.

If LED5/LED6/LED7 are OFF, the DTU is defective. Replace the DTU.

If LED17 is OFF, the DTU is defective. Replace the DTU.

If LED1 is OFF, PSU2 may be defective or the harness is in a ground fault.

Check the harness connection between PSU2 and DTU.


If LED2 is OFF, connection between DTU and IPU is faulty. Check the connections between the DTU, IPU, and GW.


If the measurement is 5V, the IPU is defective. Replace the IPU.


4. Measure the resistance between pin1 of CN566 and GND.

If the measurement is less than 1ohm, disconnect all the connectors connected to the IPU one at a time to identify the ground fault. Repair the ground fault.



Reissued: 11-Apr-16


Checking the BCU

NOTE: Before you do the following procedure, check if the SC disappears or not by disconnecting and then connecting all the connectors on the BCU.

1. Check the status of LED4 of BCU (+5V).

If the LED is ON, the BCU is defective. Replace the BCU.



Reissued: 11-Apr-16



If the measurement is 5V, the BCU is blown out. Go to Step 3.


3. Measure the resistance between TP41 and GND, because the harness is in a ground fault.

If the measurement is less than 1ohm, disconnect all the connectors connected to the BCU to identify the ground fault. Repair the ground fault and replace the BCU.

If the measurement is more than 1ohm, replace the BCU.


Check FU4 of the BCU. If the fuse is blown out, replace the BCU.

Measure the resistance between TP41 and GND. If the measurement is less than 1ohm, disconnect all the connectors connected to the BCU one at a time to identify the ground fault. Repair the ground fault.



Reissued: 11-Apr-16


Checking the Voltage of PSU2

NOTE: Before you do the following procedure, check if the SC disappears or not by disconnecting and then connecting all the connectors on the PSU2.

1. Measure the voltage of pin 1, 5 and 8 of CN2.

If the measurement is 5V, check the harness connections between PSU2 and boards including the relay connectors.

If the measurement is 0V, go to Step 2.

2. Check the AC input of PSU2.

If there is input, replace the PSU2.

If there is no input, go to "Checking the NRYF2".


Reissued: 11-Apr-16


Checking the Voltage of PSU3

NOTE: Before you do the following procedure, check if the SC disappears or not by disconnecting and then connecting all the connectors on the PSU3.

1. Measure the voltage of pins 1 and 2 of CN410.

If the measurement is 5V, check the harness connections between PSU3 and boards including the relay connectors.

If the measurement is 0V, go to Step 2.

2. Check the AC input of PSU3.

If there is input, replace the PSU3.

If there is no input, go to "Checking the NRYF2".


Reissued: 11-Apr-16


Checking the NRYF2

1. Check if FU3 is blown out or not.

If the fuse is blown out, replace the NRYF2.

If the fuse is not blown out, check the harness connections between NRYF1 and NRYF2, and between NRYF2 and PSU2.

2. Check if FU4 is blown out or not.

If the fuse is blown out, replace the NRYF2.

If the fuse is not blown out, check the harness connections between NRYF1 and NRYF2, and between NRYF2 and PSU3.


Model: Andromeda-P1 (M205/M238) Date: 25-Mar-16 No.: RM205146

Subject: Troubleshooting: How to increase the productivity in mixed job Prepared by: Takatsugu Komori



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM It takes a long time to switch to a different paper size while printing a mixed-size job using paper of different weights loaded in different trays.

CAUSE

1. The engine adjusts the fusing temperature when switching to paper of a lighter weight. Note: This is to prevent the glossy ghost image issue.

2. The engine adjusts the fusing temperature when switching to paper of a heavier weight. Note: This is to prevent the unfused toner problem.

3. It takes some time to adjust the fusing nip position when using one paper type with a weight greater than 4 together with other types with a weight of 4 or less. Note: This is to prevent wrinkles, creasing or worm tracks.

ACTION

Register the media as a Custom Paper, then each waiting time can be disabled with the following settings. Possible side effects are mentioned above. 1. For CAUSE 1:

Set SP1-131-001 to “1”, AND Set the Advanced Settings for both entries No.103 and No.104 (Adj Fsng Temp to

Trnsf Ppr: Heat Roller, and Pressr Rllr) to “7”.

2. For CAUSE 2: Set the same temperature in Advanced Settings for both entries No.88 and No.89 (Fusing Heat Roller Temp. Adjust.: B&W, and FC)

3. For CAUSE 3: Set the same adjustment in Advanced Settings for both entries No.92 (Fusing Nip Width Setting).



EXAMPLE

Job Condition: 1 sheet as a front cover (plain, weight 5), 26 sheets as a body (plain, weight 2) then 1 sheet as a back cover (plain, weight 5)

Default After applying the above settings

Body Sheets

(plain, wt.2)

Front & Back

Cover (plain, wt.5)

Body Sheets

(plain, wt.2)

Front & Back

Cover (plain, wt.5)

SP 1-131-001 0 1

Advanced Setting

No.88, 89 154 165 165 165

Advanced Setting

No.92 3 4 4 4

Advanced Setting

No.103 3 3 7 7

Advanced Setting

No.104 1 3 7 7

Productivity to

finish this 1 job 63 seconds 18 seconds


Reissued: 30-Mar-16

Model: BR-C1/Leo-C1/Leo-P1/BR-P1/Andromeda-P1 Date: 23-Aug-13 No.: RD179019b


Subject: Firmware Release Note: Inserter_INSERTER Prepared by: J.Ohno



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




This RTB has been issued to announce the firmware release information for the Inserter_INSERTER.


01.060:03 D7385510C April 2016 production Not available

01.050:03 D7385510B 1st Mass production Not available



01.060:03 Specification Change: - Automatic detection of SRA3 size on EU machines - When 12x18 inch or SRA3 is loaded on the tray of an EU machine, the size is automatically detected as SRA3 instead of 12x18. Note: This automatic size detection will not apply to NA machines.



Reissued: 4-Dec-17

Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 16-Mar-17 No.: RM205147b


Excel SMC analysis file for Andromeda-P1

This RTB announces the release of the excel file for SMC analysis. The Excel SMC analysis file is used for rendering the SMC data obtained with an SD card with SP5992-001 to make it easier to understand. You can download the Excel file for SMC analysis from the GKM website Answer ID: 239792 File name: SMC_Analysis(Pro C9100)_Ver1.2.1.xlsm

How to read SMC data

1. Open the excel file.

2. Press "Add-Ins" on the tool bar. Note: Make sure macros are enabled.

3. Press "Read SMC data"

4. Open the SMC data directory taken with SP5992-001, and select one of the csv files. Note It does not matter which one you select. The macro will sort/read all related data automatically as long as they are in the same directory.

5. Macros start processing the SMC data. Wait until the processing finishes.

Subject: Excel SMC analysis file for Andromeda-P1 Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required





Reissued: 4-Dec-17

Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 16-Mar-17 No.: RM205147b

History V1.2.1

New Feature

Sheet History

Engine diagnosis Calculation of the following items has been corrected. Total Running Distance Distance distribution by environment

V1.1

New Feature

Sheet History

Readme Translated into English.

Firmware&Setting Added information about which external controller is set.

Counter Added colors to indicate the PM status of PM parts to improve the readability. 0%-70% Green 71%- 95% Orange 95% - More: Red

SC&JAM Highlighted high incidences of jam codes, preferably based on Jam Ratio.

Engine diagnosis In process control data indicated using colors (Green, Orange, Red) to show how “healthy” the values are.

Bug Correction

All sheet Total Counter is wrong when set double counting


Reissued: 11-May-16



SYMPTOM

SC682 (PCU: ID Chip Communication Error) occurs when TD sensor initialization is simultaneously performed for two or more colors, for example, when after two or more developers were replaced.

Standard procedure as described in the FSM is as follows. The SC occurs during step 3.

1. Install (replace) the developer.

2. Close the doors.

3. TD sensor initialization is automatically executed.

4. The warm-up processing (adjustment such as process control) is automatically executed.

5. The setting is complete.

CAUSE

Engine firmware bug

SOLUTION

Upgrade the Engine F/W to ver.4.06:14 (M2055309J) or newer.

Subject: Troubleshooting SC682 Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




IMPORTANT!

The procedure to upgrade the Engine F/W to the latest (V4.06:14 ) or newer is different depending on the version of the Engine F/W currently installed. (See SP7-801-255 to verify the current Engine F/W version.) Be sure to follow the instructions mentioned in the release note RTB#RM205001a or newer bound together with the latest Engine F/W, otherwise the machine may result in a fatal error.



Subject: Troubleshooting SC586-02, -03 Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM

The following SCs occur even when there are no defective components:

SC586-02 Heating roller thermistor (edge) paper feed permission timeout

SC586-03 Pressure roller thermopile (center) paper feed permission timeout

CAUSE

The following are the two possible causes:

Fusing temperature does not drop to the permissible range for printing, which can occur after changing from thick media to thin media, especially when the target pressure roller temperature is set low to avoid print problems such as wrinkles and worm tracks.

[ #128: Adjust Paper Curl ] of the Advanced Settings is enabled. This causes delay in the time needed for the pressure roller to reach the permissible temperature range to start printing.



SOLUTION

For SC586-02, set [ #103: Adj Fung Temp to Trnsf Ppr: Heat Roller ] of the Advanced Settings to ‘7.’

For SC586-03, set [ #104: Adj Fung Temp to Trnsf Ppr: Press Roller ] of the Advanced Settings to ‘7.’

The above settings will shorten the time needed to reach the pemissible temperature range by increasing the fusing temperature, creating a wider range.

IMPORTANT Note the following side effects as a result of increased fusing temperature: Wrinkles, Worm tracks, Uneven gloss, Black spots, Glossy residual image, Blurry image

Provided that [ #128: Adjust Paper Curl ] of the Advanced Settings is enabled, make the following adjustments (A) or (B) depending on the relative humidity.

NOTE To verify the relative humidity, enter the SP mode and refer to the lowest value among the following:

SP3-260-002: Relative humidity of PCU 1

SP3-260-102: Relative humidity of PCU 2

SP3-261-002: Relative humidity of the main unit

(A) Relative humidity is 65% or higher

1. Set [ #93: Put pressure before fusing ] of the Advanced Settings to ‘1’ for the paper in use.

2. Set [ #129: Adjust paper curl: temp. adjustment 1 ] and [ #130: Adjust paper curl: temp. adjustment 2 ] of the Advanced Settings to ‘30 degrees C’ for the paper in use.

(B) Relative humidity is below 65%

1. Set [ #93: Put pressure before fusing ] of the Advanced Settings to ‘1’ for the paper in use.

2. Set [ #129: Adjust paper curl: temp. adjustment 1 ] and [ #130: Adjust paper curl: temp. adjustment 2 ] of the Advanced Settings to ‘30 degrees C’ for the paper in use.

3. Enter the SP mode and set SP1-113-002 (Curl correction: Humidity: Threshold: M-humidity) to ‘0%’ and SP1-113-003 (Curl correction: Humidity: Threshold: H-humidity) to ‘100%.’



Subject: Details on log files saved on SD card Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SD card directory structure for saving log files

Log files are stored on the SD card using a directory structure as shown below.

Types of logs that can be saved on the SD card

Debug monitor log

Debug monitor logs saved on the SD card are the same as the logs captured by connecting the PC and BCU with a serial cable. These logs are constantly logged while the machine power is ON.

Filenames:

Master: dbg1_yyyymmddHHMMSS

Slave: dbg2_yyyymmddHHMMSS

LOG_LIST file



Engine Debug log

The engine debug log contains information needed for problem analysis of all modules of the engine. These logs are constantly logged while the machine power is ON.

Filenames:

Master: unf1_yyyymmddHHMMSS

Slave: unf2_yyyymmddHHMMSS

RAPI log

The RAPI log contains records of the RAPI command, which is the communication I/F between the engine and GW controller. These logs are constantly logged while the machine power is ON.

Filenames:

Master: unfr_yyyymmddHHMMSS

Engine SP log

Saves all the engine SP settings. The logs are saved one time when the machine power is turned ON.

Filenames:

Master: unfs_yyyymmddHHMMSS

The filenames are composed of the date and time the log file was created. For example, filename of a debug monitor log file created on January 12th, 2016, at 03:23:45 PM is indicated as follows:

dbg1_20160112152345

Log control

1. Opening the log file

1-1. The ‘Machine serial number’ folder is created on the SD card when the machine power turns ON. If a folder with the same name already exists, the folder will not be created.

1-2. The ‘Date’ folder is created in the machine serial number folder. If a folder with the same date already exists, the folder will not be created.

1-3. The system opens the log files in the date folder and writes the logs onto the SD card. The log files containing the SP data are closed as soon as the entire SP data is saved on the SD card after turning ON the machine power.



A file named ‘LOG_LIST’ is created in the machine serial number folder to keep records of all the dates of when the ‘date’ folders were created. Handle this file with care as the system refers to this file when automatically deleting outdated log files to secure storage capacity on the SD card.

2. Closing the log file

The system closes the log file when either of the following conditions is met.

Data size of the log files exceeds the maximum storage capacity Debug monitor log and engine debug log can be saved up to 8MB and RAPI log 1MB. When the data size exceeds the upper limit, the system closes the log file after saving all the SP settings and opens a new log file.

Machine shutdown

When the machine is shut down with the main power button [A], the system closes all log files.

NOTE: Never turn OFF the machine by pressing the main power switch [B] inside the fusing section front cover [A], or the system will not be able to close and save the log files on the SD card.



3. Deleting the log file

The system checks the remaining storage capacity of the SD card when the machine power turns ON. If the capacity is below 10%, date folders past 30+ days are deleted from the oldest until 30% storage capacity is secured on the SD card. If 30% storage is still not secured, folders past 21+ days are deleted. Similarly, folders are deleted until 30% capacity is secured by searching and deleting folders past 14+ days, 7+ days, 3+ days and 1+ day.

* The system refers to the ‘LOG_LIST’ file to verify the dates the date folders were created on.

Important

Dates of the date folders [B] and that contained in the LOG_LIST file [D] must always match for the system to automatically delete old date folders. For this reason, never manually delete the date folders, or the system will not be able to automatically delete the folders.

If you need to manually delete data contained in the SD card, format the SD card using an SD card formatter. If an SD card formatter is not at hand, delete the entire ‘machine serial number’ folder [A] instead of deleting date folders and log files.

For the same reason, do NOT cut & paste the date folders from SD card to your PC. The captured log files inside the SD card should be copy & pasted to your PC.

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]



Recommended SD card

The following SD card is recommended and can be procured as a service part.

P/N: B6455040 (SD-CARD:SERVICE PARTS:8GB:ASS'Y)

8GB, Class 10

Manufacturer: Panasonic



Subject: How to replace the Development Entrance Seals Prepared by: H. Matsui

From: 1st PP Tech Service Sec., PP Tech Service Dept.,


Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

Please add the procedure of replacing the following Development Entrance Seals to your field service manual.

p/n: M2053083 ENTRANCE SEAL:FRONT:DEVELOPMENT

p/n: M2053084 ENTRANCE SEAL:REAR:DEVELOPMENT

Important The development entrance seals must be attached correctly, or they may peel off and cause the following problems:

- Damage to the drum surface, resulting in a drum replacement

- SC39x (Drum Motor Error) caused by excess friction between the drum and seals

- Miscellaneous problems, if the seals completely come off

Procedure 1. Pull out the PCDU according to the procedure described in the following section of the

service manual: 4. Replacement and Adjustments > Around the Drum > PCDU

Front Side Rear Side



2. Remove the old seal [A] and clean the surface where the seal was attached.

3. Attach the new seal [D] by taking note of the following points.

Avoid air bubbles.

The top edge of the seal must align with the line [A] of the frame.

The left edge of the FRONT seal and right edge of the REAR seal must align with the edge [B].

The seal must be attached over a part of the Entrance seal [C].

[A]

Front Rear

[A]

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[C]

[D]

[A]

[B]

Front Rear


Reissued: 18-May-16



Service Manual Correction Please add the following NOTE to your FSM in this section:

4. Replacement and Adjustment > Intermediate Transfer Belt Unit(ITB) > Image Transfer Roller (KCMY)

NOTE: The descriptions in red were added.

NOTE: Image transfer rollers for K and for YMC are different, and are given different part numbers as follows.

Image transfer roller for K p/n: M2056684 (ROLLER:INTERMEDIATE TRANSFER:BLACK:ASS'Y)

Image transfer roller for Y, M and C p/n: D1796051 (ROLLER:INTERMEDIATE TRANSFER:ASS'Y)

DO NOT use the K roller for YMC, because it could cause unexpected image quality problems. The shape and the replacement procedure are the same between K and YMC rollers.

NOTE: None of these rollers have been modified and they are the same since the 1st mass production. The purpose of this bulletin is to simply remind you of the difference between the K and YMC rollers when you replace them at your regular PM visits.

Subject: Manual Correction: Replacement procedure of image transfer roller.




Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2


Reissued: 18-May-16


Background Information The ITB roller of K is designed to have a smaller electrical resistance compared to the ITB rollers of YMC. This is to prevent electrical discharge at the PTR that may occur unexpectedly, resulting in uneven density. Tests have verified that reducing the electrical resistance of the ITB roller of K is effective in preventing this problem.


Model: Andromeda-P1 (M205/M238) Date: 26-Apr-16 No.: RM205153

Subject: Troubleshooting: How to fix the Fan Noise on Sleep Mode Prepared by: Junji Kobayashi



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM The engine may generate a loud noise when the machine receives packet data while in STR (Suspend to RAM).

CAUSE

The engine fans are on while the machine is in STR, as per specification.

Note: STR is one level of Sleep Mode. The other level, Engine Off mode, does not transit to a “Fan ON” status when packet data is received.

SOLUTION

Set SP5-191-001 to a value of “0”. SP5-191-001 0: Off, and stay in Engine Off

1: On, and transit and stay in STR

Note: Engine Off mode consumes more power than STR. See the table below for details.

Sleep mode Board status Power consumed

Transit to fan on

Engine Off Engine board and operation panel are suspended, but controller board is active

~ 20 Watts No

STR Engine board, operational panel, and controller board are suspended

~ 2 Watts Yes


Reissued: 09-May-16

Model: Leo-C1/Leo-P1/BR-C1/BR-P1/Andromeda-P1 Date: 11-Dec-14 No.: RD194028b


Subject: Firmware Release Note: LCT1_LCIT5100 Prepared by: H. Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




This RTB has been issued to announce the firmware release information for the LCT1_LCIT5100.


01.040:06 D7775510F_LCT1 April 2016 production Not available

01.030:06 D7775510E_LCT1 February 2015 production Not available

01.020:06 D7775510D_LCT1 1st Mass production Not available



01.040:06 Specification Change: - Automatic detection of SRA3 size on EU machines - When 12x18 inch or SRA3 is loaded on the tray of an EU machine, the size is automatically detected as SRA3 instead of 12x18. Note: 1. This automatic size detection will not apply to NA machines. 2. For Pro 8100EX/8100S/8110S/8120S, Engine F/W should be upgraded

to Ver 4.05:08 or newer as a set. 3. For Pro 8110/8120, Engine F/W should be upgraded to Ver 1.05:00 or

newer as a set. 4. For Pro C9100/C9110, this automatic size detection will not be

activated for Multi Bypass Tray BY5010.

01.030:06 Error Correction: Minor bug fix



Reissued: 09-May-16

Model: Leo-C1/Leo-P1/BR-C1/BR-P1/Andromeda-P1 Date: 11-Dec-14 No.: RD194029b





Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required











01.040:06 Specification Change: - Automatic detection of SRA3 size on EU machines - When 12x18 inch or SRA3 is loaded on the tray of an EU machine, the size is automatically detected as SRA3 instead of 12x18. Note: 1. This automatic size detection will not apply to NA machines. 2. For Pro 8100EX/8100S/8110S/8120S, Engine F/W should be upgraded

to Ver 4.05:08 or newer as a set. 3. For Pro 8110/8120, Engine F/W should be upgraded to Ver 1.05:00 or

newer as a set. 4. For Pro C9100/C9110, this automatic size detection will not be





Reissued: 09-May-16

Model: Leo-C1/Leo-P1/Andromeda-P1 Date: 11-Dec-14 No.: RD194030b





Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required











01.040:06 Specification Change: - Automatic detection of SRA3 size on EU machines - When 12x18 inch or SRA3 is loaded on the tray of an EU machine, the size is automatically detected as SRA3 instead of 12x18. Note: 1. This automatic size detection will not apply to NA machines. 2. For Pro C9100/C9110, this automatic size detection will not be






Subject: Troubleshooting non-feed caused by clogged blower filters Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM

Non-feeds (J002, J003, J052, J053) occur, particularly when using paper containing abundant paper dust.

CAUSE

The vacuum blower filters are clogged, degrading the vacuum feeding performance.

SOLUTION

Clean the paper dust in the duct and replace with new vacuum blower filters in both imaging and fusing sections at every 2700K. NOTE: Check also the filters mounted on the Vacuum Feed LCIT at the same time. If the filters on the Vacuum Feed LCIT are clogged with paper dust, perform the workaround mentioned in RTB#RD777007 at the same time.



How to replace the vacuum blower filters Imaging section 1. Open the rear box [A]. (screw x10)

2. Remove the duct [A] on the front exhaust filter. (screw x2)

[A]

[A]



3. Remove the old filter [A] and remove the paper dust inside the duct [B]. Clean the

surface of the duct, where the new filter is to be attached, with alcohol. Then attach the new filter [A] on the duct [B].

NOTE: The P/N of filter [A] is D7771172.

[A]

[B]



Fusing Section 1. Remove the rear lower cover [A] of the fusing section. (screw x6) 2. Remove the filter [A] and remove the paper dust inside the duct [B]. Clean the surface

of the duct, where the new filter is to be attached, with alcohol. Then attach the new filter [A] on the duct [B].

NOTE: The P/N of filter [A] is D7771172.

[B]

[A]


Reissued: 04-Aug-16

Model: BR-C1/Leo-C1/Leo-P1/BR-P1/Andromeda-P1 Date: 23-Aug-13 No.: RD179018d

RTB Reissue The items in bold italics have been corrected.

Subject: Firmware Release Note: Folder_FD5020 Prepared by: J. Ohno



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




This RTB has been issued to announce the firmware release information for the Folder_FD5020.


02.010:04 D7405300G September 2016 production Not available

02.000:04 D7405300F June 2016 production Not available

01.030:04 D7405300E January 2014 production Not available

01.020:04 D7405300D December 2013 production Not available

01.000:04 D7405300C 1st Mass production Not available



02.010:04 Error Correction: When turning ON the machine power or recovering from energy saver mode, the following stepper motors may not activate in the initialization process: Stopper 1 Motor, Stopper 2 Motor, Stopper 3 Motor, Dynamic Roller Lift Motor, Jogger Fence Motor

02.000:04 Specification Change: Added specification for future model. No effect on the current models.

01.030:04 Symptom corrected: When jams occur in a peripheral connected to the downstream of the Folding unit the operation panel might continue to display "Copying" instead of "Jam."

01.020:04 Error Correction: - If the door of the Multi-folder unit is opened during a job, a jam code

indicating jammed sheet in the Multi-folder unit appears even if there are no jammed sheets in the unit.

- If running multi-fold jobs from the ADF or in Batch mode and the Multi-folder unit door is opened immediately after pressing the # key (to determine the last page of job), the system could freeze.



Reissued: 9-Nov-16

Model: Andoromeda-P1 Date: 21-Jun-16 No.: RM205155a


Follow the procedure in this bulletin when replacing the controller board originally installed at the factory with a new board procured as a service part. NOTE: The System f/w installed on the controller board procured from the parts center may be of a version older than the one currently installed on your machine. Replacing with a controller board of an older version may overwrite incorrect data onto the NVRAMs. The following procedure is necessary to prevent this. PROCEDURE

NOTE: The steps below show only the outline. See RTB #RM205062c (Manual Correction: NVRAM replacement procedure) for detailed steps.

1. Do SP5-990-001, to print out the SMC data (“ALL”). 2. Do SP5-846-051 (UCS Setting / Back Up All Addr Book), to upload the Address Book

Data to a blank SD card#1. 3. Do SP5-824-001 (NVRAM Data Upload), to upload the NVRAM data to another blank

SD card#2. 4. Replace the original controller board with the new controller board procured as a

service part. NOTE: When replacing the controller board, remove the NVRAMs from the original controller board and mount them on the new board.

Subject: Notes for replacing the Controller Board Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required





Reissued: 9-Nov-16

Model: Andoromeda-P1 Date: 21-Jun-16 No.: RM205155a

5. DO NOT close the front doors. Keep the doors open (until you complete Step 9)

and check the f/w version in SP7-801-255. Then, update the following f/w to the latest version.

Engine System Web Support OpePanel Network Support TDCU NOTE: The update procedure for the above f/w differs depending on the version of the Engine f/w currently installed. Be sure to follow the instructions described the Engine f/w release note RTB#RM205001c or newer.

6. Download the NVRAM data from SD card#2 to the NVRAMs on the new controller

board in SP5-825-001 (NVRAM Data Download). 7. Keep the front doors open and turn the main power OFF and then ON.

NOTE: This step is required to correctly download the NVRAM data from SD card#2 to the NVRAM on the new controller board.

8. Do SP5-846-052 (UCS Setting / Restore All Addr Book) , to download the Address

Book Data from SD card#1 to the NVRAMs on the new controller board. 9. Enter the SP mode and confirm that the SP settings displayed on the operation

panel match with the SMC data printed out in Step 1. If there are any differences, manually input the original SP settings.

10. Close the front doors and do the self-check Process Control (SP3-011-001).



Subject: Black streaks along the feed direction in halftone areas Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM

Black streaks along the paper feed direction in halftone areas

CAUSE

Developer deterioration, excess lubrication on the drum surface, foreign material adhered to the corona wire

SOLUTION


Fee

d d

irectio

n



Start

Print the 2-dot independent pattern (SP2-109-003-12) in Bk, Cyan Magenta and Green

(instead of Yellow) to verify the affected color.

Is the problem observedin a particular color?

Do [0502: Execute Photoconductor Refreshing] of the Skilled Operators menu.

Improved?

Do [0514: Execute Developer Refreshing] of the Skilled Operators menu.

Improved?

Do [0521: Execute Charger Cleaning] of the Skilled Operators menu.

Improved?

Replace the charger unit of the affected color(s).

Problem solved?

Replace the drum cleaning unit and drum of the affected color(s).

Problem solved?

Replace the developer of the affected color(s).

Problem solved?

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

YesFinish

Finish

Finish

No

No

No

No

No

No

Finish(No further adjustments available

by spec. The problem may be caused by a different unit.)

Confirm proper operation of units other than the drum, drum cleaning unit, charger unit, and development unit, i.e., check the image transfer and paper transfer units.

Repeat 0502 until the streaks disappear, or replace the drum cleaning unit of the affected color(s).

Repeat 0514 until the streaks disappear, or replace the developer of the affected color(s).

Repeat 0521 until the streaks disappear, or replace the charger unit of the affected color(s).

Finish

Finish

Finish

Finish


Reissued: 27-Jul-16

Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 28-Jun-16 No.: RM205157b


SYMPTOM

Dog-ear and Non-feed jam in the Vacuum Feed LCIT with Weight 1~3 paper

CAUSE

Paper load upper limit set for Paper Weight 1 ~ 3 was incorrect.

SOLUTION

Upgrade the Media Library List to the versions described below. This will automatically change the paper load upper limit for paper weight 1~3 from "Low" to "High".

NOTE:

If the customer has created new custom paper types in the Media Library List, make sure to manually change the paper load upper limit by changing the Advanced Setting [#111:Switch Paper Load Upper Limit] from "Low" to "High" after upgrading the Media Library List to the version below. Also in case the customer has created some new custom paper libraries not based on the existing Media Library List, but manually, be sure to change the paper load upper limit by manually changing the Advanced Setting [#111:Switch Paper Load Upper Limit] from "Low" to "High".

NA

MediaLibNAa AB: Ver.10 (M2381917_R10) or newer.

MediaLibNAb AB: Ver.10 (M2381918_R10) or newer.

EU

MediaLibEUa AB: Ver.11 (M2381915_R11) or newer.

MediaLibEUb AB: Ver.11 (M2381916_R11) or newer.

AP

MediaLibAPa AB: Ver. 9 (M2381911_R9) or newer.

MediaLibAPb AB: Ver. 9 (M2381912_R9) or newer.

CN

MediaLibCHa AB: Ver. 4 (M2381913_R4) or newer.

MediaLibCHb AB: Ver. 4 (M2381914_R4) or newer.

Subject: Dog-ear/Non-feed Jam from Vacuum Feed LCIT Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2


Model: Andromeda-P1 (M205/M238) Date: 29-Jun-16 No.: RM205158

Subject: Rework procedure: How to improve wire-cut risk w/ paper tray Prepared by: Junji Kobayashi



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM The lift wire for the bottom plate may be cut.

CAUSE

There is a small clearance between the side plates and the bottom plate. This creates up-and-down movement of the bottom plate that is not smooth, and loosens the lift wire. As a result, the wire may become tangled with the pulley and create excessive tension in the wire.

SOLUTION

Adjust the distance between the side plates (see Rework PROCEDURE below).

Rework PROCEDURE Normal Tray 1. Remove the front cover of the problem tray. 2. Put a few sheets of paper on the bottom tray to raise the tray to its upper position (Fig.

1). 3. Remove the paper tray while holding the pulley.

Note: This is so that the bottom plate does not fall when you remove the tray.

Fig. 1



4. Measure the distance (span) between the two side plates (Fig. 2). Important: The scale ends should touch the bent portion of the side plates.

Fig. 2

5. Take the same measurement with the tray in the middle and lower positions (Fig. 3).

Fig. 3

6. Measure the clearance between the bent portion of the side plate and the bearing

flange. Important: To do this, shift the bottom plate toward the rear side (Fig. 4).

Fig. 4



Target dimensions a. Span between the two side plates (Fig. 2, 3): 446.8 – 448.4 mm b. Clearance (Fig. 4): 0.5 – 3.0 mm

If BOTH the span and clearance are within these dimensions when the tray is in ALL THREE positions (upper, middle, lower positions), this Rework is complete. If ANY of these measurements is not within the dimensions mentioned above, continue this procedure.

7. Check for the following, which indicate a higher risk of the wire breaking. 1) Presence of scraped powder generated by bottom plate sliding

Fig. 5

2) Less smooth up-and-down movement of the bottom plate.

a. Set a sheet of paper in the tray b. Close the tray, then pull out the tray when tray ascends to its upper limit. c. Make sure there is no friction while the bottom plate is descending (Fig. 6).

Fig. 6



8. Rework the tray assembly:

Adjust the tray dimensions if any of the spans or clearances are less than the target (See page 3). Important: Do not adjust the span or clearance beyond the target dimensions. Procedure (Fig. 7): a. Loosen the 4 screws circled in red on the right side of the tray plate d. Shift the front & rear side plates in the direction of the white arrow as far as they will

go, until each screw touches the inner edge of the screw hole. e. Tighten the 4 screws.

Fig. 7



Banner Tray 1. Measure the distance between the two side plates

- Set the scale in the same way as described above. - Measure the span as the distance between the two side plates at two positions,

Upper (Fig. 8) and Lower (Fig. 9).

Upper Position

Fig. 8 Lower Position

Fig. 9



2. Measure the clearance between the bent portions of the side plate and bearing flange by shifting the bottom plate to the rear side (both the Upper (Fig. 10) and Lower (Fig. 11) positions). Upper Position

Fig. 10

Lower Position

Fig. 11

Target dimensions: a. Span between the two side plates (Fig.8, 9): 446.8 – 448.4 mm b. Clearance (Fig. 10, 11): 0.5 – 3.0 mm

If BOTH the span and clearance are within these dimensions when the tray is in BOTH positions (upper and lower positions), this Rework is complete. If ANY of these measurements is not within the dimensions mentioned above, continue this procedure.



3. Check for the following, which indicate a higher risk of the wire breaking. See Page 3 above for details.

1) Presence of scraped powder generated by bottom plate sliding 2) Less smooth up-and-down movement of the bottom plate. 3) Adjust the tray dimensions if either the span or clearance at EITHER of the two

positions is less than the target (See Page 6). Important: Do not adjust the span or clearance beyond the target dimensions. Procedure (Fig. 12): a. Loosen the 2 screws circled in red on the right side of the tray plate b. Shift the front & rear side plates in the direction of the white arrow as far as they will

go, until each screw touches the inner edge of the screw hole. c. Tighten the 2 screws.

Fig. 12

Replace the side plate as shown in Table 1 below if the span is not adjustable to within the target dimension and the cut-off portion is deformed.

Table 1 No. Part Number Part Description

1 D7772615 Side Plate: Tray: Front: Peen

2 D7772620 Side Plate: Tray: Rear: Peen



Deformation check procedure for the side plate

1) Put the scale in the cut-out portion, as shown in Fig. 13 below. 2) Check the deformation of the cut-out portion circled in red.

If you can see light in between the plate and scale, this portion may be deformed. Important: Check both the front and rear.

Fig. 13


Reissued: 25-Apr-18 Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 4-Jul-16 No.: RM205159d


SYMPTOM Grid-like rough screen pattern appears in light halftone images.

CAUSE The symptom is caused by a combination of all of the following factors: Operation environment is low in temperature and humidity. The above condition lowers the development capacity (gamma). Less development mixture on the development roller as a result of low development

gamma creates dot patterns bolder than the target to an extent that they become visible with the naked eye. (This is because low development gamma tends to increase the electrical resistivity of the developer, which causes the problem known as the “edge effect” in which the outline of the images is printed bolder than expected.)

Smallest dot size of Andromeda is relatively larger compared to other Ricoh printers. Symptom is difficult to avoid under the above conditions, especially if the screening is set to 300 lines.

Subject: Troubleshooting: Rough Screen appears in solid/halftone images

Prepared by: Junji Kobayashi

From: PP Tech Service Dept., 1st PP Tech Service Sect. Classification: Troubleshooting

Mechanical Paper path Product Safety





SOLUTION Apply the following two four solutions as a set. Solution-1: Change the halftone screen setting. 1. Set the halftone mode to “200 dot + fine text” or “200 line + fine text.”

If the problem has resolved, finish the process now. If not, continue with Step 2. NOTE: 300 line screen is designed for text/thin line, thus the risk is higher.

2. Set the halftone mode to “175 dot” or “175 line + fine text.” If the problem has resolved, finish the process now. If not, continue with Step 3.



3. Set the halftone mode to “Interference reduction.”

NOTE: Take note of the possible side effects below: Grainy image Halo Color inconsistency

If the problem has resolved without causing any of the above side effects, finish the process now. If not, continue with Step 4.

4. Modify the target toner mass per area for Cyan, Magenta and Yellow in the following steps.

4-1. In [203: Adjust Maximum Image Density] of the Skilled Operators menu, decrease the value by “2” from the current value for CMY. Note: Bk must maintain the default value.

4-2. Do “Image Density Adjustment: Manual Execute” in [201: Adjust Image Density/DEMS] of the Skilled Operators menu.

4-3. Do Color Calibration. 4-4. If improvement is not enough even after the above, decrease the value again

in [203: Adjust Maximum Image Density], this time by “1” (total of decrease by 3). Repeat steps 4-2 and 4-3.

NOTE: Color images will appear low in density as a side effect of the above

adjustment. The value in [203: Adjust Maximum Image Density] can be decreased by

a maximum of 5 (levels) in total.

If the problem has resolved provided that the low density of color images is accepted, finish the process now. If not, do Step 5.



Solution-2: Upgrade the Engine F/W to the version V4.09:14(M2055309M) or newer.

Reference Information: This Engine F/W changes the process control parameters as follows. Developer Gamma Lower Limit: from 0.65 to 0.85 Developer Potential Upper Limit: from 625V to 460V.

NOTE: If the temporary Engine V4.08a:14 (M2055309L_LR0804) has been already applied to your printer, you do not have to upgrade it to V4.09:14 (M2055309M). Because the functions of both F/W are exactly same.

IMPORTANT! Procedure to upgrade the Engine F/W to the temporary version (V4.09:14) is different depending on the version of the Engine F/W currently installed. (See SP7-801-255 to verify the current Engine F/W version.) Be sure to follow the instructions mentioned in the F/W release note, or the machine may result in a fatal error.



NOTE: After upgrading the Engine F/W to the temporary Engine V4.08a:14 (M2055309L_LR0804) or V4.09:14(M2055309M) or newer, return all of the SP settings to the default value, which were changed according to the previous version RTB#RM205159. Run the SP batch file "SP_RTRN_TO_DEF_ALL#01.txt" according to the procedure in step 5 below. This batch file will return all of the relating SP settings to default value.

5. Modify the laser power and target toner density in the Factory SP mode with the SP

batch file using debug cable and Tera Term. NOTE: Required SP batch files are attached to APPENDIX at the end of this RTB. NOTE: Required SP batch file is "SP_RTRN_TO_DEF_ALL#01.txt" This batch file will return all of the relating SP settings to default value. IMPORTANT Take note of the possible side effects below. [0204: Adjust Line Width: Adjust the intensity of laser transferring image] of the

Adjustments for Skilled Operators will become inactive. Shorter drum life Ghosting

A. Connect the debug cable to the Master connector on the BCU board and the other

end to your PC.

Ed

Sticky Note

Included on the disk: proc9100\service.man\SP_RTRN_TO_DEF_ALL#01 (2).txt



B. Set up Tera Term as follows.

To confirm proper connection, type in “ver” in the window and press the Enter key.



C. Drag and drop the “SP_RTRN_TO_DEF_ALL#01.txt” file to the Tera Term window.

Solution-3: Change the development gamma target value. 6.Apply the batch file “AndroP1_SP_Change_Dev_Gamma.txt” (attached in the Appendix), and this batch modify the “Development gamma target value” by changing following SPs.

SP3-539-011 (Dev Agitating Time: Set by AbsHum:1) : 5 (default: 0) SP3-539-012 (Dev Agitating Time: Set by AbsHum:2) : 10 (default: 5) SP3-539-021 (Dev Agitating Time: Set AbsHum Threshold:1) : 7 (default: 3) SP3-539-022 (Dev Agitating Time: Set AbsHum Threshold:2) : 9 (default: 7) SP3-630-081 (Dev gamma: Disp/Set Environ Corr1: Col) : 0.00 (default: -0.50) SP3-630-082 (Dev gamma: Disp/Set Environ Corr2: Col) : -0.30 (default: -0.50)

Note: The effectiveness of development gamma modification is effective when saturated water vapor amount (absolute humidity) is 9 gram / m 3 or less, and it is not effective in environments exceeding 9 gram / m 3. 7.Do the Process control twice or three times in SP3-011-002. 8.Do the Color calibration.

If the above SP modifications do not provide satisfactorily results, SP settings can be returned to default value by running the SP batch file "AndroP1_SP_Default_Dev_Gamma.txt" (attached in Appendix).

Note: Background noise as the side effect of this work-around might be observed.



Solution-4: Change the environmental condition to recommended settings. 9.Try to set the environmental condition to Temp: 23 degree-C & Hum: 50%RH if you can manage to control them. Note: Refer the table below as the environmental condition that tends to occur the “Rough screen” and the effects of improvement can be expected with troubleshooting.

Appendix

No SP batch file name SP batch file

Double-click the icon to open

1 AndroP1_SP_Change_Dev_Gamma AndroP1_SP_Change_Dev_Gamma.txt

2 AndroP1_SP_Default_Dev_Gamma AndroP1_SP_Default_Dev_Gamma.txt



The batch file "SP_CHANGE_ALL#02.txt" (attached in APPENDIX) will modify the Factory SP settings as follows: Target Process Control Development Gamma Related Factory SPs SP3-539-011 (Dev Agitating Time: Set by AbsHum:1) : 5 (default: 0) SP3-539-012 (Dev Agitating Time: Set by AbsHum:2) : 10 (default: 5) SP3-539-021 (Dev Agitating Time: Set AbsHum Threshold:1) : 7 (default: 3) SP3-539-022 (Dev Agitating Time: Set AbsHum Threshold:2) : 9 (default: 7) SP3-630-081 (Dev gamma: Disp/Set Environ Corr1: Col) : -0.1 (default: -0.5) SP3-630-082 (Dev gamma: Disp/Set Environ Corr2: Col) : -0.4 (default: -0.5) Laser Intensity Related Super SPs SP3-623-071 (LD Power: Set Slope (alpha)) : 0 (default: -0.5554) SP3-623-072 (LD Power: Set Slope (beta)) : 0 (default: 58.50) SP3-623-073 (LD Power: Set Slope (gamma) : 683 (default: -963) SP3-623-074 (LD Power: Set Intercept (alpha)) : 0 (default: 0.0223) SP3-623-075 (LD Power: Set Intercept (beta)) : 0 (default: -5.43) SP3-623-076 (LD Power: Set Intercept (gamma)) : 20 (default: 265) SP3-623-081 (LD Power: Set V.*Calc: Slope (alpha)) : 0 (default: -7.78) SP3-623-082 (LD Power: Set V.*Calc: Slope (beta)) : 0 (default: 821.9) SP3-623-083 (LD Power: Set V.*Calc: Slope (gamma)) : 1120 (default: -21264) SP3-623-084 (LD Power: Set V.*Calc: Intercept (alpha)) : 0 (default: 2.4516) SP3-623-085 (LD Power: Set V.*Calc: Intercept (beta)) : 0 (default: -268.85) SP3-623-086 (LD Power: Set V.*Calc: Intercept (gamma)) : -198 (default: 7331)

6. Take notes of the current development gamma values by referring to SP3-630-001(K),

-002(C), -003(M) and -004(Y). 7. Take notes of the current toner density values by referring to SP3-200-001(K), -002(C),

-003(M) and -004(Y). 8. Set the initial development gamma to “3.07” by running the SP batch file

"SP_DEV_GAMMA_3.07.txt" (attached in APPENDIX). This batch file will modify the Factory SP settings as follows:

SP3-630-021 (Dev gamma :Dips/Set Initial: K) 3.07 (default 2.20) SP3-630-022 (Dev gamma :Disp/Set Initial: C) 3.07 (default 2.20) SP3-630-023 (Dev gamma :Disp/Set Initial: M) 3.07 (default 2.20) SP3-630-024 (Dev gamma :Disp/Set Initial: Y) 3.07 (default 2.20)



9. Do Process Control twice in SP3-011-002. 10. Confirm that the development gamma in SP3-630-001~004 has increased from Step5.

11. Confirm that the toner density in SP3-200-001~004 is below 7.0wt%. If it exceeds

7.0wt%, set the initial development gamma to 2.78 by running the SP batch file "SP_DEV_GAMMA_2.78.txt" (attached in APPENDIX). This batch file will modify the Factory SP settings as follows:

SP3-630-021 (Dev gamma :Dips/Set Initial: K) 2.78 (default 2.20) SP3-630-022 (Dev gamma :Disp/Set Initial: C) 2.78 (default 2.20) SP3-630-023 (Dev gamma :Disp/Set Initial: M) 2.78 (default 2.20) SP3-630-024 (Dev gamma :Disp/Set Initial: Y) 2.78 (default 2.20)

Repeat steps 9 and 10. 12. Confirm that the toner density in SP3-200-001~004 is below 7.0wt%

If it still exceeds 7.0wt%, set the initial development gamma to 2.49 (default) by running the SP batch file "SP_DEV_GAMMA_2.49.txt"(attached in APPENDIX).

SP3-630-021 (Dev gamma :Dips/Set Initial: K) 2.49 (default 2.20) SP3-630-022 (Dev gamma :Dips/Set Initial: C) 2.49 (default 2.20) SP3-630-023 (Dev gamma :Dips/Set Initial: M) 2.49 (default 2.20) SP3-630-024 (Dev gamma :Dips/Set Initial: Y) 2.49 (default 2.20)

Repeat steps 9 and 10.

13. Confirm that the toner density in SP3-200-001~004 is below 7.0wt% If it still exceeds 7.0wt%, return the initial development gamma to 2.20 (default) by running the SP batch file "SP_DEV_GAMMA_2.20.txt" (attached in APPENDIX).

SP3-630-021 (Dev gamma :Dips/Set Initial: K) 2.20 (default) SP3-630-022 (Dev gamma :Dips/Set Initial: C) 2.20 (default) SP3-630-023 (Dev gamma :Dips/Set Initial: M) 2.20 (default) SP3-630-024 (Dev gamma :Dips/Set Initial: Y) 2.20 (default)

Repeat steps 9 and 10.



14. If the above SP modifications do not provide satisfactorily results, SP settings can be

returned to default value by running the SP batch file "SP_DEFAULT_ALL#02.txt" (attached in APPENDIX).

Target Process Control Development Gamma Related Factory SPs SP3-539-011 (Dev Agitating Time: Set by AbsHum:1) : 0 (default) SP3-539-012 (Dev Agitating Time: Set by AbsHum:2) : 5 (default) SP3-539-021 (Dev Agitating Time: Set AbsHum Threshold:1) : 3 (default) SP3-539-022 (Dev Agitating Time: Set AbsHum Threshold:2) : 7 (default) SP3-630-081 (Dev gamma: Disp/Set Environ Corr1: Col) : -0.5 (default) SP3-630-082 (Dev gamma: Disp/Set Environ Corr2: Col) : -0.5 (default) Laser Intensity Related Super SPs SP3-623-071 (LD Power: Set Slope (alpha)) : 0.5554 (default) SP3-623-072 (LD Power: Set Slope (beta)) : 58.50 (default) SP3-623-073 (LD Power: Set Slope (gamma) : 983 (default) SP3-623-074 (LD Power: Set Intercept (alpha)) : 0.0223 (default) SP3-623-075 (LD Power: Set Intercept (beta)) : -5.43 (default) SP3-623-076 (LD Power: Set Intercept (gamma)) : 265 (default) SP3-623-081 (LD Power: Set V.*Calc: Slope (alpha)) : -7.78 (default) SP3-623-082 (LD Power: Set V.*Calc: Slope (beta)) : 821.9 (default) SP3-623-083 (LD Power: Set V.*Calc: Slope (gamma)) : -21264 (default) SP3-623-084 (LD Power: Set V.*Calc: Intercept (alpha)) : 2.4516 (default) SP3-623-085 (LD Power: Set V.*Calc: Intercept (beta)) : -268.85 (default) SP3-623-086 (LD Power: Set V.*Calc: Intercept (gamma)) : 7331 (default)

15. This completes the process.





Subject: Change in IMSS Advanced settings log-in/out Spec Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui

From: 1st Tech Service Sec. PP Tech Service Dept.


Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required



Product Safety Other (Spec change) Tier 2

Change: IMSS Advanced settings log-in/log-out spec

Reason: Better user-friendliness (For users other than the machine administrator, having to log

out and log in every time after making a change to the IMSS settings is time consuming and inconvenient when they want to make multiple changes.)

The new spec will be effective with the following System firmware:

Andromeda-P1: System version 2.06

The firmware will be released by the end of August, 2016.

In detail

Once logged in to the IMSS Advanced settings menu on a machine configured in either of the following ways, the new spec allows users to make multiple changes without having to log out and log in repeatedly.

[User Tools] [System Settings] [Administrator tools]

[Administrator Authentication Management] [Machine Management] [Admin. Authentication: ON] [Available Settings: Tray Paper Settings: OFF]

[User Authentication Management: OFF]

[User Tools] [System Settings] [Administrator tools]

[Administrator Authentication Management] [Machine Management] [Admin. Authentication: ON] [Available Settings: Tray Paper Settings: OFF]

[User Authentication Management: ON]



Subject: Notes on Handling of the PCDU Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

This bulletin provides notes on handling the PCDU to prevent the following:

・ Toner accumulation on the development rollers

・ Narrowed PG (potential gap; gap between the drum and development roller) – the PG becomes narrower at the front site compared to the rear side

・ Scratched drum

・ SC320 (development power pack output error)

・ White streaks caused by toner clumps on the development roller

・ White streaks caused by clogged doctor gap

・ SC39x (drum motor error) caused by excess load on the drum

・ Uneven image density between right and left sides of a page

NOTE: The PCDU includes the photoconductive drum and the development unit.

1. Attaching the Inner Cover

After completely sliding the PCDU into the mainframe, make sure to attach the inner cover with the three knob screws. These screws do not only hold the cover but also fix the PCDU to the mainframe.

If these screws are loose or fastened without the inner cover attached, the PCDU will not be fixed to the mainframe and this will narrow the PG.



2. Confirming Correct Installation of the Development Unit- Proper engagement of the drum internal and drum drive external gears -

Confirm proper installation of the development unit by looking at the drum shaft.

The tip of the drum shaft must be approximately flush against the periphery of the molded (black and silver) parts.



The PCDU cannot slide all the way in to the mainframe, because the drum internal and

drum drive external gears are not properly engaged.

Do not forcefully push in the unit or fasten the knob screws in this condition, as doing so will narrow the PG, causing toner to adhere to the development rollers and scratch the drum.

To correct it, pull out the PCDU and turn the drum in the direction indicated with the arrow so that the gears engage properly.



3. Correct Procedures for Fastening the Drum Knob

1. Insert the tips of the metal plates of the drum fastening tool into the holes on the drum knob and turn clockwise as you press.

2. Turn the tool until the metal plates no longer turn and only the grip turns.

3. After fastening the drum knob in the above steps, set the drum cleaning unit. Do not set the drum cleaning unit before fastening the drum knob.



IMPORTANT

Do not fasten the drum knob in this condition, as doing so will narrow the PG, causing toner to adhere to the development rollers and scratch the drum.



4. Handling of the Development Unit

When holding the PCDU, make sure to hold both ends (as described in the FSM). Holding other locations may cause damage to the unit.

Transporting the PCDU

If the PCDU needs to be transported, make sure that it is packed with both inner and outer boxes. Never attempt to transport it only with the inner box. Shock during transport may affect the PG and cause toner adhesion on the development roller.



Subject: How to replace the SHAFT:DRIVE:CLEANER:ASS'Y Prepared by: Rie Shohda



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

The following parts were registered as new service parts to meet requests received from the field. Please add the procedure of replacing the following SHAFT:DRIVE:CLEANER:ASS'Y to your field service manual.

Old p/n New p/n Description Q’ty Int Note

- M2051308 SHAFT:DRIVE:CLEANER:ASS'Y 1 - Add

Important Take note of the following points:

⁃ Before you replace the shaft, make sure to remove the MAIN DRIVE from the machine.

⁃ Work carefully to prevent losing the E-type retaining ring and the parallel pin.



Procedure 1. Remove the screw (09544008N: SCREW - M4X8) that fixes the side plate with the

bearing. (The shaft rotates together when attempting to fasten this screw and you cannot hold the shaft via the joint on the left hand side, because you cannot access from the front side, which is why the MAIN DRIVE unit needs to be removed in advance.)

2. Remove the E-type retaining ring and parallel pins. Be careful not to lose these parts.

The shaft has grease on it. If grease was removed, add some grease. Grease: Molykote EM50-L

09544008N: SCREW - M4X8

PARALLEL PINS

E-ring


Reissued: 1-Mar-17

Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 6-Sep-16 No.:RM205163a


PART INFORMATION The parts mentioned in this RTB have been applied after the Middle of March 2016 production against the SC499-03 problem.

NOTE: For the machines before the Middle of March 2016 Production, the PMR (Product Modification Request) Program has been running by your regional headquarters. Contact your regional headquarters about this PMR program.

See the related RTB#RM205083a and RTB#RM205085a.

Newly added parts:

Subject: Service parts information relating SC499-03 countermeasure Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




[B] [C]

[E]

[H]

[I]

[J]

[K]

[D]

[A]

[G] [F]


Reissued: 1-Mar-17


Call out Service Part Number

Service Part Description Note

[A] M2052130 ROLLER:FIX:INTERMEDIATE TRANSFER:PRESS FIT

Brush Roller Shaft

[B] M2052091 BRUSH ROLLER:COVER:ASS'Y Brush Roller

[C] M2052128 CAP:ROLLER:INTERMEDIATE TRANSFER:PRESS FIT

Brush Roller Bearing

[D] 03603012N SCREW:M3X12

[E]

[I] M2052136 LEVER:ON-OFF:DRIVEN:YELLOW:FRONT [E] "Brush Roller

Shaft Attachment" consists of [I], [J] and [K]

[J] M2052132 HOOK:LEVER:ON-OFF:COLOR:REAR

[K] 04503008N TAPPING SCREW - M3X8

[F] M2052109 PLATE:LOWER:POSITIONING SENSOR:INTERMEDIATE TRANSFER:ASS'Y

Sensor Cover

[G] M2052140 PLATE:UPPER:POSITIONING SENSOR:INTERMEDIATE TRANSFER:ASS'Y

Belt/Sensor Cover

[H] M2052134 PLATE:RADIAL BALL BEARING Brush Roller Holder

[L] M2052099 POSITIONING SENSOR:SCALE:INTERMEDIATE TRANSFER:P1:ASS'Y

See page 4/5


Reissued: 1-Mar-17


Part locations:

Area [1]

[H]

Area [1]

[A]

[B]

[C]

[E]

[D]


Reissued: 1-Mar-17


NOTE: 1. The ITB position sensor board should be replaced as a set [L]. 2. If you need to replace the parts with call out [10], [11] for some reason, replace them as assembly [L] as a set.

Area [2]

Area [2]

[F]

[11] [10]

[L]


Reissued: 1-Mar-17


[G]


Reissued: 29-Sep-16



SYMPTOM

Productivity decreases with jobs that use setting “Pressure 1” of SP1151-010 (Pressure Setting: Pressure Position 1).

CAUSE

Engine firmware bug

The bug causes the system to falsely adjust the fusing temperature within the job even when printing on the same paper size and type.

SOLUTION

Upgrade the Engine F/W to the version 4.08:14 (M2055309L) or newer.

Subject: Fusing nip pressure adjustment to prevent low productivity Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2


Model: Andromeda-P1 (M205/M238) Date: 15-Sep-16 No.: RM205165

Subject: Rework procedure: How to improve Fuser belt shift and torn-out Prepared by: Junji Kobayashi



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM The fuser belt breaks/tears.

CAUSE

1) The positioning pin of the fuser unit was incorrectly adjusted at factory assembly. As a result, the belt shifts toward the front or rear during printing.

2) Paper with rough edges is used, which scratches the surface of the pressure roller and then damages the belt.

SOLUTION

CAUSE 1: Do the following. If the belt shifts toward the REAR (non-operator side): 1. Loosen the screw for the positioning pin and rotate the pin toward the RIGHT one

position (Fig. 1, 2). 2. If the belt still shifts, rotate the pin one more position toward the RIGHT. 3. If the belt still shifts, this workaround cannot solve the issue.

Fig. 1 (positioning pin)



Fig. 2

If the belt shifts toward the FRONT (operator side):

Do the same as above, except rotate the pin toward the LEFT (Fig. 3).

Fig. 3



CAUSE 2: Do the following. 1. Check the surface of the pressure roller. 2. If the coated layer has peeled or is scratched, as in Fig. 4, replace the roller.

Fig. 4

IMPORTANT NOTICE To prevent damage to the fuser belt, make sure to do the following two items at every service visit, which are mentioned in the Field Service Manual. Printer leveling Make sure to perform this maintenance item so that the machine leveling is within specification. Specification: Front and Rear: +/- 1.0mm/1,000mm Left and Right: +/- 0.5mm/1,000mm

Procedure: 2. Installation >> Main Machine Installation >> Installation Procedure >>

Machine Level Adjustment Applying grease to the slip ring Whenever you replace the fuser belt, apply Grease Barrierta S552R to the area [A] of the heat roller slip ring shown in Fig. 5.



Note: This grease should be applied every 1,800KP, however this includes a safety margin in order to prevent shifting and tearing of the fuser belt.

Fig. 5


Model: Andromeda-P1(M205/M238) Date: 4-Oct-16 No.: RM205166

Subject: How to replace the FILTER:DEVELOPMENT Prepared by: Rie Shohda



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




The following development filter was registered as a new service part to meet requests received from the field.

Old p/n New p/n Description Q’ty Int Note

- M2053085 FILTER:DEVELOPMENT 4 - Add



Notes on handling of the development filter

⁃ Pay extra attention to prevent scratches and folds on the filter.

⁃ The film on the filter is very delicate. DO NOT touch the film. Hold the edges as shown below.

The side attached with the film faces down – contacts the development unit.

The side without the film faces up.

Protection sheet

Film

Protection sheet

Film



Notes on installing the development filter

Before you start

A transparent protection sheet is attached to the film. Make sure to peel off this sheet before installing the filter.

Note: Ventilation is not secured and the filter will not work, if the sheet is not removed.

Direction of the filter

The side attached with the film faces down toward the development unit. Match the c-cut corners of the filter and the development unit.

Check after attaching the filter

1) Make sure the filter is not running over the surrounding case, or it will be damaged when the cover is closed.

2) Gently close the cover and make sure the filter is not caught between the case and the cover.

Front

Check the edges here.

Cover



Subject: How to replace the DRIVE UNIT:WEB CLEANING Prepared by: M. Kudo



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

Please add the procedure for replacing the following DRIVE UNIT:WEB CLEANING UNIT ASSY to your field service manual.

p/n: M2054349 DRIVE UNIT:WEB CLEANING UNIT ASSY

Important Take note of the following points:

- The fusing unit weighs more than 35kg (77lb). At least two people are required for removal.

- Several types of screws need to be removed. Do not mix up the screws when reassembling.

Procedure 1. Pull out the WEB:CLEANING UNIT:ASS'Y.

2. Remove the FUSING UNIT:ASS'Y from the mainframe.



3. Remove the covers from the FUSER LOWER ASS'Y.

4. Remove the DRIVE UNIT:WEB CLEANING.

1

4 6

7

8

9

Remove this spring.

Remove this bracket.

5

2 Remove this screw.

Be careful of the sensor wires.

Remove the bracket

Remove these screws.

Remove this screw. 3

Remove these gears.



10 11 12

13 M2054349

Remove these clamps.

Pull out this arm.

Be careful of the wires.

Disconnect this connector.

Follow the above procedure in reverse order to reassemble. Take note of the following.

Be careful of the electric wires and clamps.

Be careful of the sensors.

Do not forget to attach the spring.

Do not use wrong screws.

Be careful of the edges of the metal components.



Subject: SC285/SC374 caused by abraded PTR drive pulley Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

SYMPTOM

The PTR drive pulley is abraded, causing SC285 / SC374 and affecting the length of the image.

NOTE: See RTB RM205091 for detail on SC374, as this SC is not described in the FSM.

CAUSE

The following are the conditions that cause the PTR drive pulley to abrade:

Excess load is put on the PTR drive after the PTR belt or the PTR cleaning blade was replaced due to insufficient lubrication (toner) on the belt surface.

Waste toner or a foreign substance is clogging the waste toner exit, putting excess load on the PTR drive.

The PTR belt tension is too low due to a loose or missing belt tensioner screw.

SOLUTION

Check the condition of the pulley and timing belt and replace, if necessary. (See the flowchart on the next page.)

Abrasion is taking place, but the teeth are still visible.

GOOD BAD VERY BAD

The teeth are completely stripped off and invisible.

The timing belt and pulley engage properly and do not slip.



As a preventive measure, take note of the following points before turning ON the machine whenever servicing the PTR unit:

Before installing the paper transfer unit (PTR) in the machine, manually turn the PTR pulley and confirm smooth rotation.

Confirm that the belt tensioner screw is securely fastened.

Troubleshooting flowchart

Start

Abnormal noise from the PTR drive unit?

SC374 at process control? SC285 at MUSIC?

Image length affected?

Replace the pulley and timing belt.

PTR drive pulley abraded?

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Finish

No

No

Eliminate the conditions that cause excess load on the PTR drive and confirm proper belt tension.

PTR pulley

Belt tensioner screw


Reissued: 11-Nov-16

Model: Andromeda-P1 (M205/M238) Date: 13-Oct-16 No.: RM205169a


SYMPTOM The side fence cannot slide smoothly.

CAUSE

Paper dust gets on the surface of the slide shaft and inside the bearings.

SOLUTION

Do the PROCEDURE below every 900K pages (PM cycle).

PROCEDURE 1. Clean the shaft of the side fence with a cloth as shown.

Important: If you cannot clean off all the dust and foreign material with the cloth, use a vacuum cleaner.

Fig. 1

Subject: Rework procedure: Side Fence Cleaning and Oil lubrication Prepared by: Takuya Hirakawa



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required





Reissued: 11-Nov-16


2. Apply engine oil to the right side of the side fence shaft (positions are marked by red stars in Fig. 2).

Fig. 2

IMPORTANT: Apply 3 large drops of the oil to each shaft, near the shaft bearing, as shown in

Fig. 3. You only need to apply the oil to the right side of each shaft. This is because

POM bearings are used on the left side, and these are not affected by paper dust. (Dry bearings are used on the right side).

Fig. 3

NOTE: The recommended oil is Car Engine Oil with a viscosity grade of 10W-30. (Any supplier, for example Shell, Castrol, Mobil, etc. is OK.)


Reissued: 11-Nov-16


3. Slide the side fence back and forth about ten round trips.

Fig. 4 4. Remove any paper dust or foreign material that was scraped out, using a cloth. 5. Repeat Steps 2-4 until there are no foreign materials or dust on the cloth after

cleaning the shaft. 6. Apply small drops of engine oil to the shaft in the areas shown in Fig. 5 (marked by red

stars).

Note: Each small drop would amount to roughly 0.0570±0.0114g.

7. Slide the side fence back and forth for three round trips.

Fig. 5


Model: Andromeda-P1 (M205/M238) Date: 13-Oct-16 No.: RM205170

Subject: Rework procedure: How to improve image shift on main scan Prepared by: Takuma Hirakawa



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM The image shifts along the main-scan direction.

CAUSE

The top/bottom and front/rear side fences are either deformed or tilted slightly. As a result, the span between the fences at the top/bottom is not the same as for the front/rear.

SOLUTION

Do the following: Do Oil lubrication and cleaning. See RTB RM205169. Do the work PROCEDURE below.

Rework PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front cover of the tray on which the symptom occurs. 2. Put a few sheets of paper onto the bottom tray, in order to raise the tray to its upper

position (Fig. 1). 3. Remove the paper tray while holding the pulley.

Note: This is so that the bottom plate does not fall when you remove the tray.

Fig. 1



4. Measure the distances (spans A, B, C, D) between the two side fences as shown in

Figs. 2 and 3.

Fig. 2

Fig. 3



IMPORTANT: - Make sure the scale ends touch the bent portion of each side fence. - See Fig. 4 below for the correct and incorrect measuring positions.

Fig. 4

5. Compare span A to B, and then C to D.

Specification: Difference between top and bottom is 0-2.0 mm.

If the difference for either is more than 2.0mm, go to Step 6. Otherwise, the procedure is finished.

6. Disassemble the tray as shown in Fig.5.

Fig. 5



7. Loosen the screw shown below.

Note: This screw is located inside the round hole in the side plate on the operator side

of the machine.

Fig. 6

8. Loosen the screw shown below.

Note: This screw is located on the non-operator side of the machine.

Fig. 7

9. Adjust the side fences into the correct position (within 2.0mm).

10. Hold the side fences in place while you tighten the two screws mentioned in Steps 7

and 8.

11. Do the same correction for the other side fence.

12. Reassemble the tray and measure the spans again to make sure they are within specification.



Subject: SC285/Dirty background caused by damaged PTR belt Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

SYMPTOM

SC285/dirty background caused by damaged PTR belt.

CAUSE

The reinforcement tape surrounding the edge of the PTR belt is peeled off and caught inside the belt.

-In detail-

This may occur if the PTR (with the reinforcement tape slightly peeled off at the overlapping points) was set with the overlapping points of the tape directly above the side seal of the PTR cleaning unit. The peeling worsens if the unit is set in this manner, because the overlapping point of the tape gets caught in between the PTR belt and the PTR cleaning unit side seal.

Overlapping points of the reinforcement tape



SOLUTION

If the reinforcement tape is severely peeled off or if the PTR belt is scratched or torn due to the detached tape, replace with a new PTR belt. If otherwise, cut off the portion of the tape that is detached from the overlapping point.

When setting the PTR, make sure the overlapping points of the reinforcement tape are visible (facing top) so that they do not interfere with the PTR cleaning unit side seal. Setting the unit in this manner will prevent the reinforcement tape from peeling off.

Reinforcement tape

PTR cleaning unit side seal

Use a pair of scissors and pull the tape as you cut, to leave as less tape as possible on the belt.

This much of tape left on the belt will be no problem.

Scratch on the belt appears perpendicular to the feed direction.

In such case, replace with a new belt.



Subject: Non-feed jams caused by bent end-fence of the LCIT Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

SYMPTOM

The end-fence of the Vacuum Feed LCIT is bent inward (feed direction) and causes non-feed jams.

CAUSE

The end-fend was pressed too hard when setting the paper on the tray.

SOLUTION

Permanent Solution The end-fence will be modified for higher durability.

Temporary Solution Do the check procedure below and replace with a new end-fence, if necessary.

Check Procedure

Measure the distance between the end fence and the face plate of the tray at the upper limit position and the bottom limit position by following the procedure on the next page.

Feed position

Lower limit

Feed direction

Tolerance:

0mm inward (feed direction) 2mm outward (against feed direction)

Upper limit

If the span measured at the upper limit position is smaller than that measured at the bottom limit position, the end fence is bent inward.

If the span measured at the upper limit position is 2mm+ greater than that measured at the bottom limit position, the end fence is bent outward and exceeding the tolerance. Replace with a new end fence in the above cases.



How to measure

1. Remove the front cover of the top tray. (Screw x4)

2. To verify the tray upper limit position, place a sheet of paper on the tray and lift up the tray by manually turning the pulley counterclockwise. Then, pull out the tray as you hold the pulley, to prevent the tray from descending.

3. Remove the sheet and measure the span between the end fence and the face plate of the tray at the upper limit position.

Cover



4. Lower the tray and similarly measure the span at the lower limit.

How to replace the end-fence

1. Remove the feeler of the end-fence. (Screw x2)

2. Remove the end-fence. (Screw x2)



3. Install the new end-fence with the feeler removed. (Screw x2)

4. Attach the feeler. (Screw x2)

Keep the feeler removed.



Subject: Troubleshooting of SC39x-52 caused by dev. side seal Prepared by: Junji Kobayashi



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM SC395-52, SC396-52, SC397-52 or SC398-52 continues to occur.

CAUSE

The development side seal is not completely attached to the unit, causing the drum torque to increase.

SOLUTION

Do the PROCEDURE below. PROCEDURE

1. Remove the PCU (Development unit) for the affected color.

Note: See the FSM and RTB RM205161 for the procedure.

2. Put the removed PCU on a flat surface. Note:

Make sure to put the PCU on a clean and flat surface in a vertical position, as shown in Fig. 1.

Fig. 1

Make sure that developer does not leak out from the entrance and exit area

openings (Figs. 2, 3).



Entrance Exit

Fig.2 Fig.3 3. Remove the bracket from the PCU (screws x3).

Fig.4 4. Clean the side seal with alcohol.

Note: Fig. 5 shows the portions to be cleaned.

Fig. 5



5. Peel off (partially) the side seal.

IMPORTANT: Peel off the side seal carefully, and make sure the Urethane seal is not damaged.

Fig. 6

6. Re-attach the side seal by pressing the edge of the Urethane seal. See Fig 7

Fig. 7



7. Confirm that the side seal is properly re-attached and check the shape of the bracket as shown in Fig. 8.

Fig. 8

8. Attach the SEAL:PG1 (p/n: D2583452 ) to the side seal as shown below.

Fig. 9 Fig. 10 9. Re-attach all parts you removed from the PCU (Development unit) in the reverse

order.


Reissued: 17-Jan-16

Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 20-Oct-16 No.: RM205174b

RTB Reissue The items in bold italics were changed or added. The items in cross were deleted.

The following parts were modified to prevent the tray lift wire from breaking.

The modified parts have been applied to mass production since July 2016.

Follow the procedures described in this bulletin when installing or replacing with the modified parts for units manufactured before July 2016.

Modified parts

Items New P/N Description Qty required

for 1 Tray Page # in this RTB

Pulley Cover D7772784 COVER:WIRE:PULLEY 2 5

Collar D7772769 COLLAR:BASE 2 8

Stud D7777769 STUD:PAPER TRAY 2 9

Ball Bearing Ass'y (Rear)

D7772745 ROLLER:TRAY BOTTOM

PLATE:REAR RIGHT:SUB-ASS'Y

1 9

Ball Bearing Ass'y (Front)

D7772746 ROLLER:TRAY BOTTOM

PLATE:FRONT RIGHT:SUB-ASS'Y

1 9

Sheet (Front) D7772655 SHEET:HOOK:WIRE:FRONT 2 10

Sheet (Rear) D7772657 SHEET:HOOK:WIRE:REAR 2 11

Subject: Modified parts to prevent paper tray lift wire breakage /

replacement procedure




Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required





Reissued: 17-Jan-16


Common procedure 1. Pull out the paper tray and remove the front cover [A]. (screw x4)

[A]


Reissued: 17-Jan-16


2. Remove the paper tray [B] from the main frame and place it on a flat sturdy table or a

bench. (screw x4)

NOTE: The tray is very heavy. Two persons are needed to remove the tray.

[B]


Reissued: 17-Jan-16


3. Remove the Operation Sub Ass'y [A] from the tray unit [B] by pulling it toward the

direction indicated with the yellow arrow. (screw x8, connector x1) NOTE: Step 3 in the previous version RTB#RM205174a turned out to be not necessary.

[B]

[A]

Connector

Left Top Right


Reissued: 17-Jan-16


How to replace the Pulley Cover (p/n: D7772784)

1. Replace the pulley cover [A] with the new type cover.

NOTE: The pulley used to stick out from the pulley cover with the old type cover, so the new type cover has been made wider [B] (37.4mm 42.4mm) and covers the edge of the pulley as shown in [C].

[A]

The pulley cover is installed at front and rear sides of the paper tray respectively. (1 screw for each)

[B] [C]

New type pulley cover


Reissued: 17-Jan-16


How to replace the Collar (p/n: D7772769, 2pcs), Ball Bearing - Front (p/n: D7772746, 1pc), Ball Bearing - Rear (p/n: D7772745, 1pc) and Stud (p/n: D7777769, 2pcs) 1. At the front side, remove the two pulleys [A]. (E-ring x2)

2. At the rear side, remove the two pulleys [B]. (E-ring x2)

[B]

[A]


Reissued: 17-Jan-16


3-1. Remove the feeler [A]. (screw x1)

[A]


Reissued: 17-Jan-16


NOTE: Step 3-2 and 3-3 have been added. 3-2 Remove the plates [A] (if installed) and [B] – (See step 3-3)

[A] [B] 3-3. To remove plates [B] gently skew the plate as indicated in the picture below. Some force is required.

Remark: When re-installing be sure to hook part [A] under the bottom plate. [A]


Reissued: 17-Jan-16


4. Remove the bottom plate [A] from the tray and place it upside down on a flat sturdy table or a bench, and then replace the collars [B] and [C] with the new type collars. NOTE: The new type collars are tapered.

[A]

Place the bottom plate [A] upside down.

[B]

[C]

The flange faces inside.

The flange faces inside.


Reissued: 17-Jan-16


5. Replace the studs [A] and [B] with the new type studs, and then install the ball bearing assemblies front [C] and rear [D]. (screw x4)

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]


Reissued: 17-Jan-16


How to attach the Front Sheet (p/n: D7772655) to the front wire hook 1. At the front side of the tray, remove the two wire hooks [A]. (screw x2)

2. Attach the front sheet [B] which has double-sided tape to the front wire hook [A] as

shown below.

[A]

Front side

Align the upper edges.

[A] [B]

DO NOT attach it to the rounded corner of the hook.

The sheet should not cross over the edge of the hook.


Reissued: 17-Jan-16


How to attach the Rear Sheet (p/n: D7772657) to the rear wire hook 1. At the rear side of the tray, remove the two wire hooks [B]. (screw x2)

2. Attach the rear sheet [B] which has double-sided tape to the rear wire hook [A] as

shown below.

[B]

Align the upper edges.

[B]

[A] The sheet should not cross over the edge of the hook.

DO NOT attach it to the rounded corner of the hook.

Rear side


Reissued: 17-Jan-16


Common procedure for front and rear sides 1. Hook the wire [A] onto the wire hook [B] as you slightly bend the sheet [C].

Do the same for the remaining three hooks. Reassembling

Reassemble the paper tray by following the above steps in reverse order.

[A]

[B] [C]



Subject: SC590-41/42 Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

SYMPTOM

SC590-41 is falsely alerted as SC590-42, and SC540-42 as SC540-41.

SC590-41: De-curler transport motor 1 error

SC590-42: De-curler transport motor 2 error

CAUSE

Firmware bug

ACTION

If the machine alerts SC590-41, check de-curler transport motor 2.

If the machine alerts SC590-42, check de-curler transport motor 1.

Note: When this firmware bug will be corrected, it will be announced officially by revision of this RTB.



Subject: Troubleshooting SC488 Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

SYMPTOM

SC488

⁃ Turning the machine OFF/ON does not resolve the SC.

⁃ Clanking sound

CAUSE

The vibration plate in the lower waste toner path abrades over time and interferes with the cam, locking the waste toner path.

SOLUTION

Do the flowchart on the following page.

Vibration plate

View from rear Waste toner flows in from the vertical path.

Interference

Cam

Enlarged

view

Upper path Vertical path

Lower path

Waste toner bottle



Flowchart

See the following pages for procedures ‘a’, ‘b’ and ‘c’ on how to check if the waste toner path is clogged, how to clear a clogged path, and how to replace the waste toner collection unit

Start

a. Check if the waste toner path is clogged.

Is the waste toner path clogged?

YES

b. Clear the clogged waste toner path.

NO

c. Replace with a new waste toner collection unit (p/n: M2056708).



How to check if the waste toner path is clogged

1. Check if the path up to the waste toner bottle aperture is filled with waste toner.

2. Check if the conditions of the waste toner full-detection feeler and sensor are normal.

How to clear a clogged waste toner path

1. Remove the cap and use a long screwdriver to remove the clogged toner.

Aperture

Feeler

Waste toner bottle

Aperture

Sensor

Mainframe

Clamp (x3)

Clamp

Cap



How to replace the waste toner collection unit

1. Turn off the breaker switch.

2. Pull out the waste toner bottle and disconnect the connector.



3. Open the rear box. (screw x10)

4. Remove the TDCU bracket [A] (screw x4, clamp x14). Also, remove 1 connector and 6 screws from IOB 1 and its bracket.

A

IOB 1



5. Remove NRFY-2 by disconnecting, unlocking and removing the following connectors, harness clamps and screws.

NRFY-2





6. Remove the bracket holding the NRYF 1/2 and AC drive board by unlocking and removing the following harness clamps and screws.



7. Loosen the screw circled in blue and remove the screw circled in red.



8. Remove the following two screws fixing the tube.

9. Remove the screws (x3) from the bracket holding the HVP boards, and release the bottom stay by removing the screws (x2) fixed to the bottom right hand side of IOB 1.



10. Tap the vertical waste toner path with the grip of a screwdriver to drop the toner.

11. Remove the PTB drive motor bracket and lower waste toner transport motor bracket.

Use a stubby screwdriver for the screw circled in yellow.



12. Remove the motor bracket to pull out the lower waste toner path.

13. Install the new waste toner collection unit.

14. Reassemble by following the above steps in reverse order.



Subject: Troubleshooting: How to fix SC685-01 Prepared by: Takuya Hirakawa



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM

SC685-01 (DC power supply error 1) may occur.

CAUSE

The CSI harness jacket touches the registration timing arm inside the registration unit, damaging the harness.

SOLUTION

Production line: The CSI harness is fixed in place with a rivet and clamp to prevent contact with the timing arm. RI (Japan) Production: Applied from: October 2016 production

Name Destination Product Code Cut-in Serial #

Pro C9100 Entrance unit NA M205-57 X246F710015～

EU M205-66 X246F830001～

Asia M205-68 X246F950001～

Pro C9110 Entrance unit NA M238-57 X616F810001～

EU M238-66 X616F830001～

Asia M238-68 X616F850001～



In the field If the symptom occurs on machines produced before the modification, re-route the CSI harness as shown in the PROCEDURE below.

PROCEDURE

1. Pull out the drawer unit

2. Put the drawer unit on a flat surface. 3. Push down on the CSI harness as shown in the photos, so that it does not contact the

timing arm.


Reissued: 8-Nov-16

Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 27-Oct-16 No.: RM205178a


PROBLEM

The two screws [B] included in the Stay [A] (p/n: M2054223, Stay: Pressure: Pickoff Pawl) are the wrong screws. DO NOT use these screws to mount the stay on the fusing unit, or the edge of the stay will bend due to the wrong screw pressure and may cause damage to the fusing belt and pressure roller.

Subject: Part Information - Wrong screws in Stay M2054223 Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

[A] [B]

[B] The wrong screw is shorter.

Correct screw (p/n: AA143866)

Wrong screw (p/n: AA143520)


Reissued: 8-Nov-16


CAUSE

The component list of the stay (p/n: M2054223) was incorrect.

SOLUTION

The component list of the stay was corrected. The parts catalog will also be corrected.

Note: The service part stay P/No. M2054223 will not contain the wrong screw from end of October 2016 production. Until the stock of service part stays that have the wrong screws runs out, please take the following actions when ordering and replacing the stay:

Dispose of the wrong screws included as an accessory to the stay.

Reuse the original screws.

If the original screws have been lost, place an order for the correct screw below: p/n: AA143866

In addition, check if the correct screws are used on your machine, to prevent the edge of the stay from bending and damaging the fusing belt and pressure roller.


Reissued: 8-Nov-16


APPENDIX Screw Information in this area.

Screw P/No. AA143866 should be used in position [A] (front and rear)

Screw P/No. D1494235 should be used in position [B] (front and rear)

Screw P/No. AA143520 is NOT used in this section.

[A]

[B]

P/No. D1494235

P/No. AA143866

P/No. AA143520 is not used


Model: Andromeda-P1 (M205/M238) Date: 1-Nov-16 No.: RM205179

Subject: Troubleshooting: How to fix Fiery frozen in "PRINTING" status Prepared by: Takuya Hirakawa



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM

The fiery indicated the spooled job is printing but nothing prints after System version up to 2.06 or later.

CAUSE

GW System firmware bug. Note:

If the system firmware version is 2.04 or older, do not update firmware until the modified firmware is released.

Occurrence condition:

1. System firmware version is 2.06 or later. 2. Transition "Yes" or "No" settings while printing from DFE to Skilled Operator

Menu Items is enabled (bit 0 of "SP5-748-102" is "1") 3. Before the problem occurs, there is a track record of transition to the press" to

print screen" from Operator menu or Skilled Operator Menu Items screen

Affected units on RI (Japan) Production: Name Destination Product Code Cut-in Serial #

Pro C9100 Entrance unit NA M205-57 X246F910001 -

EU M205-66 X246F830014 -

Asia M205-68 X246F950001 -


EU M238-66 X616F930001 -

Asia M238-68 X616F950001 -

SOLUTION

Apply the modified firmware to be released at the beginning of Dec.2016.

Workaround Change SP5-748-102 from “1” to “0.”



Subject: How to replace the ANTISTATIC BRUSH Prepared by: Rie Shohda



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

The following parts were registered as new service parts to meet requests received from the field.

Old p/n New p/n Description Q’ty Int Note Call out

- M2051322 HOLDER:ANTISTATIC BRUSH:PHOTOCONDUCTOR 4 - Add [A]

- G1781268 ANTISTATIC BRUSH:DRUM 4 - Add [B]

The antistatic brush [B] is attached to the holder [A].

These parts can be detached in the procedure below.

[A]

[B]



Procedure

1. Open the rear box. (See FSM Section 4. Replacement and Adjustment>Exterior Covers/Doors>Rear Box.)

2. Remove the screw [C (x1)] to remove the holder [A] and antistatic brush [B] together.

3. Remove the screw [D (x1)] to detach the antistatic brush [B] from the holder [A].

[A] M2051322: HOLDER:ANTISTATIC BRUSH:PHOTOCONDUCTOR [B] G1781268: ANTISTATIC BRUSH:DRUM [C] 03604008N: SCREW – M4X8 [D] 03604008N: SCREW – M4X8

[C] [A]

[B]

[D]



Subject: Service Manual Correction: Jam Codes and Display Codes 48 Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




Service Manual Correction The following section of the field service manual was corrected. 6. Troubleshooting > Jam Detection > Paper Engine Jam History > Jam Codes and Display Codes > Main Machine Note: The part highlighted in red was revised.

Jam Code Jam description Display code

48 PTR Timing Sensor ON not detected -

Ed

Cross-Out



Subject: The change of Printer name for Heidelberg model Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




Change of Printer name for Heidelberg model Printer name for the Heidelberg model was changed from Linoprint to Versafire. This change may not be correctly reflected to the user interface depending on the combination of the engine system firmware version and DFE microcode version. When connecting the DFE with Andromeda-P1, make sure to update the microcode and firmware to the versions below. System Firmware (Andromeda-P1) Version 2.07 (M2056020J) or later. Prinect DFE MicroCode ver 1.6.004 or later


Reissued: 25-Apr-17


RTB Reissue The items in italics were corrected or added.

Service Manual Correction Please add the following SP to your FSM, in section:

3. Appendices: SP Mode Tables > Group 5000

5748 [OpePanel Setting]

External Controller Action Setting

102 *CTL * See BitSwitch below:

Bit meanings Description

0 1

Bit 0 Off (disable)

On (enable)

- Enables or disables the Paper Setting / Adjustment Settings for Skilled Operator menu while printing.

- Enables or disables the Adjustment Settings for Operators or Adjustment Settings for Skilled Operators while printing.

Subject: Service Manual Correction: SP 5748-102 Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui

From: Sales Strategy Section 1st CP Business Department


Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required





Model: Andromeda-P1 (M205/M238) Date: 9-Feb-17 No.: RM205184

Subject: Troubleshooting: How to fix SC161-06 Prepared by: Takuya Hirakawa



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM SC161-06 (IPU Error (M2P Error)) occurs with DTU firmware version 2.01.

CAUSE DTU firmware bug.

Affected units, RI (Japan) production:

Name Destination Product Code Affected Serial #

Pro C9100 Entrance unit NA M205-57 X246FA10015 - X246FC10009

EU M205-66 X246FA30023 - X246FC30014

Asia M205-68 X246FB50001 - X246FB50010

Pro C9110 Entrance unit NA M238-57 X616FA10012 - X616FB10031

EU M238-66 X616FA30011 - X616FC30004

Asia M238-68 X616FB50001

SOLUTION

Production line (Temporary solution) Install the previous DTU firmware (ver. 2.00). Applied from: Dec. 2016 production

Note: This is a temporary solution that was applied until a permanent solution is developed.

Cut-in S/No.

Name Destination Product Code Cut-in Serial #

Pro C9100 Entrance unit NA M205-57 X246FC10009 -

EU M205-66 X246FC30015 -

Asia M205-68 X246FC50001 -

Pro C9110 Entrance unit NA M238-57 X616FC10001 -

EU M238-66 X616FC30005 -

Asia M238-68 X616FC50001 -

In the field If the symptom occurs on an affected unit, downgrade the DTU firmware to ver. 2.00. SEE THE PROCEDURE BELOW.



FPGA Configuration Data Downgrade Procedure

IMPORTANT: Keep the front doors open throughout the entire procedure.

1. Turn off the machine power. 2. Remove the rear lower left cover as shown below.

3. Connect the USB Blaster cable to the DTU board as shown below, and the other end to your

PC.

4. Turn on the machine power. 5. Save the FPGA (Field-programmable Gate Array) configuration file to a directory of your

choice. 6. Start up “Quartus II 13.1 Programmer.”

The “L-shaped” board is the DTU board.



7. Click “Hardware Setup.”

8. From the “Currently selected hardware” option, select USB-Blaster [USB-0], and then click

“Close.”



9. Click “Add File...” and select the FPGA configuration file ("brulee_rev2_1_C313_R200.jic") saved in step 5.

10. Specify the three check boxes as shown below.



11. Click “Start” to download the FPGA configuration data.

12. Confirm that “100% (Successful)” appears in “Progress.” If the download fails, click “Start” and

redo the download.

13. Turn off the machine power and disconnect the USB Blaster cable from the DTU board. 14. Reattach the cover, and then turn on the main power. 15. Access SP 7-801-255 and check that the DTU_CONFIG version is 02.00.



APPENDIX 1 Prerequisites

1.1 Download “Quartus II 13.1 Programmer” from the ALTERA website. http://www.altera.com/ Note: You will need to create an account to download Quartus. Navigate to: “Support” “Downloads” “Software Selector” (shown below).

1.2 Connect the USB Blaster cable to your PC and install the USB Blaster driver from the Device Manager. Note: The driver file is located in the following directory.

\altera_programmer\13.1\qprogrammer\drivers

2 Examples showing incorrect connection of the USB Blaster cable. Example 1 Example 2

④

②

③

①

http://www.altera.com/



Subject: Cooling Unit registered as a new service part Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

SERVICE PART INFOMATION

The entire Paper Cooling Unit was registered as a service part.

P/N: M2057850

Description: LIQUID COOLING:ASS'Y

NOTE: The following three parts are NOT included in the above cooling unit assembly. Reuse the ones currently installed, or procure new ones if they have already been disposed of.

p/n: M2052756 INNER COVER:LIQUID COOLING:UPPER

p/n: M2052772 INNER COVER:LIQUID COOLING:LOWER

p/n: M2057403 GRIP:PICK-UP PAPER JAM:TRANSPORT SUB-UNIT:OPEN AND CLOSE



How to replace the cooling unit

1. Remove the cooling unit from the machine and install the new unit. (See FSM, section 4. Replacement and adjustment>Paper Cooling Unit>Paper Cooling Unit for the procedure.)

NOTE: To avoid spillage of the cooling liquid, disconnect the cooling liquid tube properly before removing the cooling unit. See the FSM for the procedure.

2. Turn the main pwer switch ON and check if any of the following SCs appear or not.

SC517: Belt Centering Roller HP Error SC518: Paper Cooling Belt Overrun Error SC521: Paper Cooling Belt Motor Error

Do the corrective actions as described in the FSM, if any SCs appear. If no SCs appear, turn the main power switch OFF.

3. Pour cooling liquid into the container until it reaches the maximum level.

[A]: Cooling liquid level detection sensor

[B]: Minimum and Maximum levels

[C]: Appropriate level; approximately 70~80%

NOTE:

The cooling liquid is available as a service part registered for Taurus-1.

p/n: D0747261 (LIQUID COOLING:PT:ASS'Y)

The cooling liquid is common with Andromeda-P1.

To prevent spillage, use a funnel when pouring in the cooling liquid.

[B]

[A]

[C]

60%

100%



4. Do SP5-804-228 (Paper Coolant Pump) to pump the cooling liquid into the new cooling unit.

NOTE:

After pumping in the cooling liquid, the cooling liquid level in the container will decrease. Make sure the liquid level is around 70%. If not, add more.

If the liquid level is below 60%, SC597-01 (Paper Cooling Remain Switch Error (Cooling liquid volume decreasing)) will appear after turning ON the main power switch. In this case, add cooling liquid and power cycle the machine OFF and then ON.



Subject: Abnormal noise from tray set with A3/DLT or heavier paper Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM

Abnormal noise is heard from trays set with A3/DLT or larger paper.

CAUSE

A tray loaded with A3/DLT or larger paper causes the shaft of the tray lift-up gear to slant over time due to the heavy load, preventing proper engagement of the gears.

SOLUTION

Modify the gear assembly by procuring the following parts.

Call-out #

P/N Description Photo Q’ty

1 D7773013 BRACKET:DAMPER:PEEN

1



Call-out #

P/N Description Photo Q’ty

2 D7773020 BRACKET:DAMPER: GEAR:PLATE

1

3 D7773018 BRACKET:GEAR: PEEN

1

4 04543006N TAPPING SCREW: ROUND POINT:3X6

2



Rework procedure 1. Pull out the paper tray [A] and remove it from the LCIT (screw x4). 2. Remove the left slide rail [A] (screw x4) and the upper left cover [A] (screw x4) and

disconnect the connector [C].

[A]

[B]

[A]

[C]



3. Remove the paper feed unit [A] from the paper tray (screw x4). 4. Remove the lower face plate [A] (screw x2).

[A]

[A]

[B]

View from the direction indicated with the arrow [B]



5. Remove the grounding wires [A] (screw x1).

6. Remove the edge saddles [A] and disconnect the harness connector [B].

[A]

[A]

[B]



7. Remove the drawer connector bracket [A] (screw x3).

8. Remove the gear box [A] (screw x6).

[A]


[B]

[B]

[A]




9. Disassemble the gear box [A] as shown below.

Divide the gear box [A] into the small sub assembly [B] and the large sub assembly [C] (screw x5, sensor x1, sensor feeler, E-ring x2).

[A]

[B]

[C]



Disassemble the small sub assembly [B] as follows.

Remove the gear assembly [D] from the small sub assembly [C] (E-ring x1).

[D]

[C]

[B]

E-ring x1 E-ring x2 Screw x2

Shaft with

three gears



10. Replace the bracket [A] removed in Step 9 with the new type bracket [B] (call-out [#1] in the table on page 1).

NOTE: Reuse the edge saddle [C].

NOTE: The new type bracket [B] has an additional stud [D] and a bent edge [E].

[A] [B]

[C] [C]

[D]

[E]



11. Attach the plastic gear [A] (removed in Step 9) to the new type bracket (screw x2). 12. Attach the new bracket [A] (call-out [#2] in the table on page 1) with two screws (call-

out [#4] in the table on page 2) and reattach all remaining parts removed in Step 9 (except for the shaft with three gears) to the new type bracket [B].

[A]

[A]

[B]



13. Attach the clamps [A] and gear assy [B] removed in Step 9 to the new bracket [C] (call-out [#3] in the table on page 2).

14. Attach the shaft with three gears [A] removed in Step 9 to the new bracket [B] (call-

out [#3] in the table on page 2).

[A] [B]

[C]

[B]

[A]



15. Couple the sub assembly units [A] and [B] to reassemble the gear box [C].

NOTE: Reattach the following components also: Bearings (Install the bearings so that the flanges face outside.) Feelers and E-rings

16. Reinstall the gear box by following Steps 1-8 in reverse order.

[A] [B] [C]



Subject: How to replace the ITB Cleaning Drive Unit Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

Please add the following procedure for replacing the ITB cleaning drive unit to your FSM:

P/N : M2053702

Part description : DRIVE UNIT:BELT CLEANING:INTERMEDIATE TRANSFER ASS’Y

Important Take note of the following when you work:

- Be careful of the sharp edges of metal components to avoid injuries.

- Several kinds of screws are used. Do not mix them up.

Procedure 1. Open the rear box.

2. Remove these two stays from the frame.



3. Open the IOB 1 bracket.

4. Disconnect this connector.

5. Remove the following four screws from the drive unit.



6. Remove the drive unit from the mainframe.

7. Install the new drive unit and reassemble by following the above steps in reverse order.

Take note of the following when reassembling:

Work carefully to prevent the wires and clamps from getting caught with the components.

Work carefully to prevent damage to the sensors.

Do not mix up the screws.

Be careful of the sharp edges of metal components to avoid injuries.



Subject: How to Upgrade/Downgrade DTU FPGA Config Data file Prepared by: Takuya Hirakawa



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




FPGA Configuration Data Upgrade/Downgrade Procedure NOTE: To upgrade the DTU FPGA Config Data file, special tool "USB Blaster Cable" is required. Contact your supervisor to obtain this tool, or procure it as a service part (p/n: M2059500)

IMPORTANT: Keep the front doors open throughout the entire procedure.

1. Turn off the machine main power. 2. Remove the rear lower left cover as shown below.

3. Connect the USB Blaster cable to the DTU board as shown below, and the other end to your

PC.

4. Turn on the machine main power. 5. Save the FPGA (Field-programmable Gate Array) configuration file to a directory of your

choice. 6. Start up “Quartus II 13.1 Programmer” or later version.

The “L-shaped” board is the DTU board.



7. Click “Hardware Setup.”

8. From the “Currently selected hardware” option, select the USB-Blaster [USB-0], and then click

“Close.”



9. Click “Add File...” and then select the FPGA configuration file saved in step 5.

10. Specify the three check boxes as shown below.



11. Click “Start” to download the FPGA configuration data.

12. Confirm that “100% (Successful)” appears in “Progress.” If the download fails, click “Start” and

redo the download.

13. Turn off the machine power and disconnect the USB Blaster cable from the DTU board. 14. Reattach the cover, and then turn on the main power. 15. Access SP 7-801-255 and check that the DTU_CONFIG version is correct.



APPENDIX 1 Prerequisites

1.1 Download “Quartus II 13.1 Programmer” or later version from the ALTERA website. http://www.altera.com/

IMPORTANT: 1. You will need to create an account to download Quartus. 2. Quartus does not support Windows 7 (64-bit).

Navigate to: “Support” “Downloads” “Software Selector” (shown below).

1.2 Connect the USB Blaster cable to your PC and install the USB Blaster driver from the Device Manager. Note: The driver file is located in the following directory.

\altera_programmer\13.1\qprogrammer\drivers

2 Examples showing incorrect connection of the USB Blaster cable. Example 1 Example 2

④

②

③

①

http://www.altera.com/



Subject: Firmware Release Note: DTU FPGA Config Data Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




This RTB has been issued to announce the firmware release information of

DTU FPGA Config Data.

NOTE:

1. To upgrade the DTU FPGA Config Data file, special tool "USB Blaster Cable" is required. Contact your supervisor to obtain this tool, or procure it as a service part (p/n: M2059500).

2. Refer to RTB# RM205187 for the upgrade procedure.


2.00 M2056113J December 2016 production. Not available

Note: “Available” means the firmware can be updated via RFU or SD card. “Not available” means the firmware can only be updated via SD card.

Version Modified Points or Symptoms Corrected

2.00 Error correction: SC161-06 (IPU Error (M2P Error)) appears frequently on machines installed with DTU FPGA Config Data version 2.01.



Subject: Troubleshooting: Noise in the fusing unit Prepared by: Takuya Hirakawa



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM Noise may occur in the fusing unit during operation.

CAUSE The plate is worn out by contacting the side of the idler gear, and the ball bearing is damaged due to generated metal pieces going inside.

Affected unit on RI (Japan) Production: Name Destination Product Code Cut-in Serial #


EU M205-67 X247F140004 -

Asia M205-69 X247F260001 -


EU M238-67 X617F140011 -

Asia M238-69 X617F260001 -

SOLUTION Replace the following new parts as a set with related gears.

Old part number

New part number

Description Q’ty Int Set

M2054184 (See Note)

M2053965 REINFORCING PLATE:GEAR:IDLER 1 X/X X/O as a set

A M2054419 M2053966 PLATE: BRACKET:GEAR:SWIVEL 1 X/X

M2054296 M2053967 SHAFT:IDLER:SWIVEL 1 X/X

03604008N M2053968 SHOWLDER SCREW 1 X/X

NOTE: P/No. M2054184 was not registered as a service part.

Part number Description Q’ty AB010207 GEAR:M1Z28:ASS'Y 1

AB010196 GEAR:M1Z17:ASS'Y 1





Rework PROCEDURE 1. Disassemble the fusing belt unit [A].

2. Remove the fusing web unit [A].

3. Wrap paper around the pressure roller to protect the surface.

4. Remove the thermistor holder (Connector x 1, Screw x 1)



5. Remove the reinforcing plate. (Screw x 3, Spring x 1)

6. Remove the Gear:M1Z30 and the Gear:M1Z19.



7. Remove the bracket ass’y.

Note: Slide the bracket to the front side, lifting it up so that it does not contact the

pressure roller.

8. Disassemble the bracket ass’y. (Screw x 1)



9. Replace with the new plate, the new shaft, and the gears (M1Z28, M1Z17).

PLATE: BRACKET:GEAR:SWIVEL

SHAFT:IDLER:SWIVEL

GEAR:M1Z28:ASS'Y, GEAR:M1Z17:ASS'Y



10. Re-assemble the bracket ass’y with the above procedure in reverse.

11. Replace Gear:M1Z30 and Gear:M1Z19.



12. Replace with the reinforcing plate and the screw.

Reinforcing plate

NOTE: The old type plate (P/No. M2054184) was not registered as a service part. Screw

13. Re-attach the reinforcing plate with a new screw.

Note: Replace the new screw shown in the yellow circle. It is not necessary to replace the screws shown in red circles.

14. Re-assemble the fusing belt unit with the above procedure in reverse.

(See NOTE)


Reissued：7-Jun-17



SYMPTOM SC39X-52 (Drum motor error / continued overload error) tends to occur, especially under any of the following conditions:

Brand-new drum or drum cleaning unit Jobs are run continuously without pauses. Low toner coverage jobs

CAUSE Friction between the drum and the drum cleaning unit / development unit increases due to the lack of lubricant powder on the development unit side seals.

SOLUTION Apply lubricant power on the side seals attached to the drum cleaning unit at the following times.

When SC39X-52 appears.

When replacing the Development Unit, OPC drum, Drum Cleaning Unit.

At every 900K PM.

NOTE: See also RTB #RM205028d for related troubleshooting information.

Procedure: 1. Procure the lubricant powder (zinc stearate) (p/n: D0159501) [A] and the blower brush

(p/n: D0747690) [B].

2. Remove the drum cleaning unit from the machine. (See the FSM for the procedure.)

Subject: SC39X-52 (Drum motor error Continued overload error) Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui

From: 1st CP Business Department CP Business Center


Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




[B]


Reissued：7-Jun-17


3. Apply the lubricant powder to the rear and front cleaning unit seals [A] and [B] using the blower brush.

[A] SEAL:CLEANING BLADE:REAR [B] SEAL:CLEANING BLADE:FRONT [C] SEAL:APPLY:REAR [D] SEAL APPY: FRONT The lubricant powder does not have to be applied to the seals [C] and [D]. See Note 1 on the next page for detailed instructions on how and where to apply the powder.

[C] [D]

[A] [B]


Reissued：7-Jun-17


NOTE 1

Refer to the photos below for the optimum amount of lubricant powder.

Minimum

Standard

Maximum

See IMPORTANT notice on the next page.


Reissued：7-Jun-17


IMPORTANT If there is some powder outside areas A and B (above the blue line and/or to the left or right of the red lines), there is no problem. If there is some powder in area C (below the red line), there is no problem. But if powder goes into areas D (left of the red dotted line) and E (right of the red dotted line), remove it with a vacuum cleaner or a blower brush or a dry cloth.

.

NOTE 2

Work carefully to prevent the powder from spilling on the PCDU stay, as this may cause image quality problems. To prevent spillage, make sure to apply the optimum amount of powder and carefully set the drum cleaning unit.



Subject: Service Manual Correction: Amount of grease for the gears of

the drum cleaning unit Prepared by: J. Ohno



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




Service Manual Correction Please apply the following correction regarding application of grease (Barrierta S552R) to the gears of the drum cleaning unit to your field service manual in this section:

4. Replacement and Adjustment > Around the Drum > PCU Cleaning Unit Internal Components > Applying the Grease to the Gears of PCU Cleaning Unit

Correction:

The amount of grease that should be applied to the gear of the drum cleaning unit shown in the current FSM is not enough. Photos showing the minimum/maximum amount have been replaced and a note to apply grease every 900kp has been added.

Before After Maximum amount of grease 2.0g 2.5g Minimum amount of grease 1.0g 1.5g

Before the correction

[A]: Maximum amount

[B]: Minimum amount



After the correction

[A]: Maximum amount

[B]: Minimum amount

NOTE: Apply grease to the gears every 900kp.


Model: Andromeda-P1 (M205/M238) Date: 5-Jul-17 No.: RM205193

Subject: Part Information (Tension roller for cooling belt unit) Prepared by: Takuya Hirakawa



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




Change: The material of the tension belt roller was changed.

Reason: To minimize glossy lines on the image, which may occur when printing at high

volumes onto paper with a high CaCO3 content.

Note:

- This change was applied to machines in production from the cut-in serial numbers

listed below.

- For MIF that use the aluminum (old) roller, installing the sponge (new) roller can

minimize glossy lines if the customer prints at high volumes onto paper with a high

calcium-carbonate (CaCO3) content.

Old part number

New part number

Description Q’ty Int

M2052705 M2057796 ROLLER:TENSION:BELT:MAIN:ASS'Y 2 X/O

Old tension roller New tension roller

Cut-in S/N, RI (Japan) Production:

Model Destination Product Code Cut-in Serial # Pro C9100 Entrance unit NA M205-58 X247F520028 -

EU M205-67 X247F640001 -

Asia M205-69 X247F660001 -


EU M238-67 X617F640001 -

Asia M238-69 X617F660001 -



Subject: Parts catalog revision – Side seals of the drum cleaning unit Prepared by: J. Ohno

From: Sales Strategy Sect., 1st CP Business Dept.


Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




The side seals of the drum cleaning unit were registered as service parts to meet requests received from the field.

Old P/N New P/N Description Q’ty Int Note

- M2053662 SEAL:APPLY:FRONT 1 - Add

- M2053663 SEAL:APPLY:REAR 1 - Add

- M2053585 SEAL:CLEANING BLADE: FRONT 1 - Add

- M2053586 SEAL:CLEANING BLADE: REAR 1 - Add

Rear Front

p/n: M2053585

p/n: M2053662

p/n: M2053586

p/n: M2053663



How to replace the side seals

Important:

Work with extreme care and precision when attaching the side seals. Inaccurate attachment will cause image quality issues and SC39x (drum motor error).

1. Remove the drum cleaning unit. (FSM p.756)

2. Completely remove all four old seals from the drum cleaning unit.

3. Clean the area to where the new seals attach with alcohol to ensure secure attachment of the new seals.

4. At the front and rear, attach the larger of the two types of side seals (p/n: M2053585 and p/n: M2053586) by aligning the edges with the edges of the drum cleaning blade.

IMPORTANT:

There should be no gap between the seal and the cleaning blade at both edges A and B.

The side seal must not have contact with the blade of the drum cleaning blade.

Confirm clean and secure attachment; no air bubbles.

p/n: M2053586 p/n: M2053585

Drum cleaning blade

A

B B

A



5. Attach the smaller of the two side seals at the front and rear (p/n: M2053663 and p/n: M2053662) so that the edges align with the side seals attached in Step 4 and the edges of the drum lubricant blade.

IMPORTANT:

There should be no gap between the seal and the cleaning blade at both edges A and B.

The side seal must not have contact with the blade of the drum lubricant blade.

Confirm clean and secure attachment; no air bubbles.

6. Apply lubricant powder to the newly attached side seals using a blower brush, to prevent SC39x-52 (drum motor error / continued overload error).

See RTB #RM205191a for detailed information.

7. Put back the drum cleaning unit.

p/n: M2053586 p/n: M2053585

p/n: M2053663 p/n: M2053662

A A

B B Drum lubricant blade



Subject: Installation Requirements Prepared by: H.K.



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




Service Manual correction

2. Installation

Installation requirements (pg.104)

Incorrect

3. Do not install the machine at any location over 2,500 m (8,200 ft.) above sea level.

Correct

3. Do not install the machine at any location over the following heights above sea level.

Locations except China: 2,500 m (8,200 ft.)

China: 2,000 m (6,560 ft.)


Reissued: 20-Sep-17

Model: Andromeda-P1 (M205/M238) Date: 15-Sep-17 No.: RM205196a

RTB Reissue The items in bold italics was added.

Subject: Harness covers in the cooling unit to prevent of SC670 Prepared by: J. Ohno



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




Change: - A cover was attached to the two harnesses installed in the cooling unit (upper side) respectively.

- A protective sheet was added to the centering roller motor bracket.

Reason: Burrs on the centering roller motor bracket abrade the harnesses, causing a ground fault followed by SC670.


M2055811 M2055818 HARNESS:COOLING UNIT:MOTOR: UPPER

1 X/O Change

M2055812 M2055819 HARNESS:COOLING UNIT:SENSOR: UPPER

1 X/O Change

- M2052730 SHEET:PTFE:COOLING 1 - Add

Note: For the modification to take effect, make sure to replace the 3 parts together as a set.

[A] p/n: M2055818 [B] p/n: M2055819 [C] p/n: M2052730


Reissued: 20-Sep-17

Model: Andromeda-P1 (M205/M238) Date: 15-Sep-17 No.: RM205196a

Cooling unit (upper side)


Model Region Product Code Cut-in S/N Pro C9100 Exit unit NA M205-58 X245F720011 ~ (*1)

EU M205-67 X245F840001 ~ (*2)

Asia M205-69 X245F860001 ~

Pro C9110 Exit unit NA M238-58 X615F720009 ~ (*3)

EU M238-67 X615F840001 ~

Asia M238-69 X615F860001 ~

Note: The following units were already reworked in the field and have the new

parts installed.

*1 …… X245F720001~04 and X245F720007~09

*2 …… X245F740018

*3 …… X615F720001,02,05,07

p/n: M2055818

p/n: M2055819

Centering roller motor

Fold the protective sheet (p/n: M2052730) in half and attach it to this bracket.

Harnesses could be damaged by the burrs on the edges of this motor bracket.

The harnesses are covered for durability.


Model: Andromeda-P1 Date: 19-Sep-17 No.: RM205197

Subject: Parts catalog revision – Stripper Pawl of the fusing unit Prepared by: J. Ohno



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




The stripper pawl of the fusing unit was registered as a new service part to meet requests from the field.


- M2053999 STRIPPER PAWLS:SERVICE PARTS 1 - Add

Note: Hex head cap screw (x1) is included as an accessory.

Stripper pawl Hex head cap screw (1pcs)

How to replace the stripper pawl

1. Remove the separation pawls assembly from the fusing unit. (FSM p.1162)



2. Remove the old stripper pawl. (Screw x1 )

NOTE:

Work carefully so that you don’t strip the screw.

The pawl is delicate and loses precision after it is removed. DO NOT reuse.

Take note of the following points, to avoid a change in the gap between the pawls and the pressure roller.

DO NOT adjust the Adjustment Screws.

Handle the assembly with care to prevent the Stopper and Stay from bending.

To prevent any damage to the Fusing Exit Sensor, remove the sensor(s) close to the pawl(s) requiring replacement, by removing the sensor(s) together with the holder. (Screw x1 per holder)

Stay

Stopper

Adjustment screw



3. Attach the new pawl and fix it with the hex head cap screw. (Cap screw x1)

Note:

Do not fasten the screw too tight.

Work carefully to avoid damage to the holder with the wrench. Damage to the holder affects the gap between the pawl and the pressure roller.

Hex head cap screw

Stripper pawl

Allen key wrench

Holder



4. Confirm proper behavior of the new pawl.

The base of the pawl where circled in yellow in the photo above should be touching the Stopper.

Make sure the holder (spring plate) and the torsion spring function properly, by moving the pawl toward the direction shown with the red arrow. When released, the pawl should retrieve the original position.

Verify that the new pawl(s) align(s) with the rest of the pawls.

5. Put back the separation pawl assembly.

Stopper

Torsion spring

Holder



Subject: Insulation on field-effect transistor to prevent PSU damage Prepared by: J. Ohno



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




Change: Field-effect transistors (FET) on the PSU were covered with insulation.

Reason: To prevent short-circuits caused by foreign substances (like paper dust) adhering to the FET, which may result in a damaged PSU.


AZ240263 AZ240305 POWER SUPPLY UNIT:AN-P1:ECO:200V 4 X/O Change

AZ240265 AZ240306 POWER SUPPLY UNIT:AN-P1:FW:200V 4 X/O Change

AZ250061 AZ250063 POWER SUPPLY UNIT:AN-P1:200V 1 X/O Change

Imaging Section

PSU 1 new p/n: AZ240305





PSU 1 PSU 2 PSU 4

PSU 5

PSU 3



Fusing Section


Model Region Product Code Cut-in S/N Pro C9100 Entrance unit NA M205-57 X246F410006 ~

EU M205-66 X246F430010 ~

Asia M205-68 X246F550001 ~

Pro C9100 Exit unit NA M205-58 X246F420001 ~

EU M205-67 X246F440010 ~

Asia M205-69 X246F560001 ~

Pro C9110 Entrance unit NA M238-57 X616F610001 ~

EU M238-66 X616F430010 ~

Asia M238-68 X616F550001 ~

Pro C9110 Exit unit NA M238-58 X616F620001 ~

EU M238-67 X616F440001 ~

Asia M238-69 X616F560001 ~





PSU 6

PSU 7 PSU 8

PSU 9



Subject: Parts catalog revision – Development Unit Side Seals Prepared by: J. Ohno



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




The following side seals for the development unit were registered as new service parts to meet requests received from the field.


- D1793055 SEAL:CASE:FRONT:DEVELOPMENT 1 - Add

- M0773390 SEAL:DRUM:FRONT 1 - Add

- M0773480 SEAL:CASE:REAR:DEVELOPMENT UNIT 1 - Add

- M2053379 SEAL:DRUM:REAR 1 - Add

p/n: M0773390 p/n: M2053379

p/n: D1793055

p/n: M0773480




Important:

Work with extreme care and precision when attaching the side seals. Inaccurate attachment will cause image quality issues and SC39x (drum motor error).

1. Remove the development unit from the main frame. (FSM p.779)

2. Remove the three screws from the cover [A].

3. Remove the cover [A] carefully not to damage the tapes [B] on both ends of the cover.



4. Remove the three screws from the lower cover.

5. Completely remove all four old seals from the development unit.

6. Clean the area to where the new seals attach with alcohol for secure attachment of the

new seals.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT wipe the surface of the development roller. Doing so will cause image quality problems.

Bottom side of the development unit



7. Attach the seal (p/n: D1793055) to the left hand side of the development unit.

Note:

Carefully attach the seal along the curve. Do not stretch the seal, as doing so will create air bubbles.

If it is difficult to peel off the sponge part of the seal from the liner tape, press the corner of the sponge or use pincers.

If the sponge warps like this, do not attempt to fix it and use it. Make sure to procure a new one.

Make sure the edge of the seal does not protrude from this edge.

Attach along the ridge. No more than 0.5mm gap. Press the edges of the

sponge as you attach the seal.

Confirm no gap along both of these edges.



8. Attach the seal (p/n: M0773390) on top of the seal (p/n: D1793055) attached in the previous step.

Note:

Do not peel off all the liner tapes at this time. Keep three liner tapes unremoved as shown below.


p/n: M0773390

p/n: D1793055

Peel off the remaining liner tapes one by one as you attach the seal.



Attach the seal along the curve.

No more than 0.5mm gap along the edge.

Set the left edge flush against here.


Align this edge against the sponge on the seal (p/n: D1793055) attached in the previous step.

No more than 0.5mm gap.

Confirm no excessive tension.

Work carefully to prevent the seal from touching the development roller.

Attach it along this edge.


Press the edges of the sponge as you attach the seal.

Make sure the seal does not sag.

Attach it so that the corner of the seal is in between the top edge of the blade and the ridge slightly below the top edge.

Set this edge flush against the edge of the blade.




9. Make a mark with a black marker to indicate that the seals (p/n: D1793055 and p/n: M0773390) have been replaced.

10. Attach the seal (p/n: M0773480) to the right hand side of the development unit.

Note:


Attach along the ridge. No more than 0.5mm gap. Make sure the edge of

the seal does not protrude from this edge.

Press the edge of the sponge as you attach the seal.

Confirm no gap along this edge.



11. Attach the seal (p/n: M2053379) on top of the seal (p/n: M0773480) attached in the previous step.

Note:

Do not peel off all the liner tapes at this time. Keep three liner tapes unremoved as shown below.


Peel off the remaining liner tapes one by one as you attach the seal.



Attach the seal along the curve.


Set the right edge flush against here.


Align this edge against the sponge on the seal (p/n: M0773480) attached in the previous step.


Confirm no excessive tension.

Work carefully to prevent the seal from touching the development roller.

Attach it along this edge.


Attach it so that the corner of the seal is in between the top edge of the blade and the ridge slightly below the top edge.

Set this edge flush against the edge of the blade.


Press the edges of the sponge as you attach the seal.

Make sure the seal does not sag.



12. Make a mark with a black marker to indicate that the seals (p/n: M0773480 and p/n: M2053379) have been replaced.

13. Put back the covers on the development unit.

14. For secure attachment, press the seals on both ends of the cover with your fingers.

15. Put back the development unit.

16. Apply lubricant powder to the side seals of the drum cleaning unit using a blower brush, to prevent SC39x-52 (drum motor error / continued overload error).

See RTB #RM205191a for detailed information.

Attach it along the curve of the case from top to bottom.

After reaching the bottom, press the corner firmly to prevent it from touching the drum.

The edge at the very bottom portion may not align, but this is no problem.

Confirm no air bubbles.



Subject: Parts catalog revision – Side seals of the ITB cleaning unit Prepared by: J. Ohno



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




The side seals of the three ITB cleaning sub units were registered as service parts to meet requests received from the field.


- M205 3785 SEAL:SIDE:FRONT 1 - Add

- M205 3786 SEAL:SIDE:REAR 1 - Add

- M205 3485 SEAL:SIDE:UPPER 1 - Add

- One sub unit requires replacement of four seals in total; front (x1), rear (x1), upper (x2).

- The three seals (front/rear/upper) are the same for all three sub units.

Front

Front

p/n: M205 3785

Upper

p/n: M205 3485



Rear


Important:

Work with extreme care and precision when attaching the side seals. Inaccurate attachment may cause damage to the ITB and result in image quality issues.

1. Remove the ITB cleaning unit. (FSM p.853)

2. Completely remove all old seals from the ITB cleaning unit.

Rear

p/n: M205 3786

Upper

p/n: M205 3485



3. Clean the area where the new seals will be attached with alcohol to ensure secure attachment of the new seals.

4. At the front and rear, attach the small upper seal (p/n: M205 3485) by aligning the edges with the edges of the ITB cleaning blade.

5. Attach the front and rear seals (p/n: M205 3785 and p/n: M205 3786) on top of the upper seal (p/n: M205 3485) attached in the previous step.

6. Put back the ITB cleaning unit.

Attach along the ridge. No more than 0.5mm gap.

Upper (2pcs) p/n: M205 3485


Align the edges with the edges of the entrance seal.

Flip the white entrance seal to attach the front and rear seals.

Front p/n: M205 3785


Flip the white entrance seal to attach the side seal.

Rear p/n: M205 3786

Align the edges. No more than 0.5mm gap along the edges.

Align the edges. No more than 0.5mm gap along the edges.


Reissued: 23-Jan-18 Model: Andromeda-P1 (M205/M238) Date: 8-Dec-17 No.: RM205201a

RTB Reissue The items in bold italics was added.

SYMPTOM Jam codes 34 and 82 (PTB Transport Sensor 2) tend to occur at the beginning of a continuous print job within 100kp of installation. CAUSE Abrasion powder is generated on the TH transport belt over time, which then melts in the fusing section and becomes sticky. As a result, the torque of the drive motor in the TH transport unit increases. SOLUTION Do the PROCEDURE below. PROCEDURE

Note: This procedure applies to the TH transport unit on the fusing section side only.

1. Remove the TH transport unit on the fusing section side and remove the TH

conveyance belt.

2. Wipe the ribs of the frame with a cloth and remove any deposits.

Important: Make sure the deposits on the ribs have been removed by touching the area directly.

Subject: Troubleshooting: Jam code34, 82 (PTB Transport Sensor 2) Prepared by: Takuya Hirakawa From: Field Quality Management Group 4, FQM Dept, QAC Classification: Troubleshooting

Mechanical Paper path

Part information Electrical Transmit/receive

Action required Service manual revision Retrofit information




3. Dry the drive roller, driven roller, and rotating shaft with the cloth.

4. Apply DRYSURF (p/n: VSSG0006, DRYSURF:MDF-2400E 25G) to the ribs of the

frame with a brush.

Important: - Do not attach DRYSURF to the drive rollers and sensors. - DRYSURF can be applied to the outside of the ribs. - DRYSURF can be applied twice.



5. Wait 5 minutes for the DRYSURF to dry. 6. Reassemble the TH transport unit and then reattach it to the machine.


Model: Andromeda-P1 (M205/M238) Date: 19-Dec-17 No.: RM205202

Subject: Troubleshooting: SC50X-05 Prepared by: Takuya Hirakawa



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM SC50X-05 Paper Feed Tray Error (Bottom plate ascending too much) may occur. This SC appears when the over limit sensor turns ON.

CAUSE - Paper is not set correctly

- The side or end fence is deformed

SOLUTION Adjust the side or end fence at the appropriate position according to the paper size.

If there is deformation of the side or end fence, correct it. Shown below are good and bad examples of

setting paper on the tray. Refer to the "Good” example to make the tray adjustments.


Model: Andromeda-P1 (M205/M238) Date: 19-Dec-17 No.: RM205202


Model: Andromeda-P1 (M205/M238) Date:19-Dec-17 No.: RM205203

Subject: Troubleshooting: SC720-71 Prepared by: Takuya Hirakawa



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM SC720-71 (Shift Motor Error) may occur.

CAUSE If paper of more than the product spec is loaded on the shift tray, the motor may be out of synchronization due to the loaded weight when the tray is shifted, resulting in jam / SC.

SOLUTION Change the maximum number of sheets stacked on the shift tray in the SP mode according to the length of the sheet in the paper feed direction. In the case that the paper feed direction length is 216 mm to 432 mm

SP 6-238-001 [Tray Full Set (216 <Length ≤ 432)] Change from 0 (default) to 1 (1000 sheets)

In the case that the paper feed direction length exceeds 432 mm

SP 6-239-001 Loading number setting (432 <paper length) Change from 0 (default) to 1 (500 sheets)



Subject: Service Manual Correction: SC590-52~59 Prepared by: Hiroaki Matsui From: Sales Strategy Sect., 1st CP Business Dept. Classification: Troubleshooting

Mechanical Paper path

Part information Electrical Transmit/receive

Action required Service manual revision Retrofit information


Service Manual Correction The following section of the field service manual was corrected. 6. Troubleshooting > SC500 (Engine: Paper Transport, Fusing) > SC501-02 to SC598-00 Note: The descriptions in red were revised. Incorrect


SC590-52 D Toner Bottle Open Motor (K1) Error

SC590-53 D Toner Bottle Open Motor (K2) Error

SC590-54 D Toner Bottle Open Motor (C1) Error

SC590-55 D Toner Bottle Open Motor (C2) Error

SC590-56 D Toner Bottle Open Motor (M1) Error

SC590-57 D Toner Bottle Open Motor (M2) Error

SC590-58 D Toner Bottle Open Motor (Y1) Error

SC590-59 D Toner Bottle Open Motor (Y2) Error

Correct


SC590-52 D Toner Bottle Open Motor (K1/K2) Error

SC590-53 D Toner Bottle Open Motor (C1/C2) Error

SC590-54 D Toner Bottle Open Motor (M1/M2) Error

SC590-55 D Toner Bottle Open Motor (Y1/Y2) Error

SC590-56 D -

SC590-57 D -

SC590-58 D -

SC590-59 D -




Reissued:1-Nov-18




The following section of the field service manual was corrected.

Appendices> 3. Appendices: SP Mode Table > Group 3000 (1/3) > SP3-011 to 251(Process) > SP3014 Note: The descriptions in bold and italic were added.

Subject: Service Manual Correction: SP3014 Prepared by: Hiroaki Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




NOTE: Execution results are displayed using 4 digits from left to right in the order of Y, M, C, K.


Reissued:1-Nov-18


Reference Information:

The IBACC patterns are created on the PTB in the order of K, C, M, Y from the front edge to the rear edge of the PTB. An ID sensor is installed for each color pattern, totaling to four ID sensors across the PTB.

NOTE: "256 gradations x 2 for each color " indicates the following two patterns as shown in the above illustration:

Dark to Light (Pattern 1) Light to Dark (Pattern 2)


Reissued:1-Nov-18


Note on IBACC execution result code ‘4: Density Increasing Error’ Error code ‘4: Density Increasing Error’ indicates that the amount of toner used to print the IBACC pattern on the PTB has exceeded the upper threshold. On machines manufactured since Oct 2017, this threshold value was increased to lower the error occurrence rate. Action For machines manufactured prior to the above date, overwrite the upper threshold value with the batch file (attached below), TeraTerm and debug cable. (Note that these SPs are factory SPs and cannot be accessed manually in the standard service procedure.)

Default Change to SP3-660-044 644 664 SP3-660-045 644 654 SP3-660-064 644 664 SP3-660-065 644 654 SP3-660-084 644 664 SP3-660-085 644 654



Subject: FSM Correction: Replacing the Rotary Gate Motor Prepared by: R. Shohda From: 1st Tech Service Sect., PP Tech Service Dept. Classification: Troubleshooting




Please make the following corrections to your FSM in section: Replacement and Adjustment > Registration Unit > Rotary Gate Motor

The following note on the timing belt of the rotary gate motor described in the FSM is incorrect.

The above motor can be reassembled in the field. If replacement of the motor and/or its components is required, procure the component(s) and reassemble by referring to the procedure described on the following pages.



P/N & Description

1 p/n: AX060424 (DC STEPPER MOTOR:MM56XL76)

2 p/n: AA161122 (MOTOR CUSHION)

3 p/n: D1792754 (BRACKET:DC STEPPER MOTOR:PAPER FEED)

4 p/n: D1792757 (TIGHTENER:BRACKET:DC STEPPER MOTOR)

5 p/n: B2346533 (TIMING BELT - S2M152)

6 p/n: B2346508 (TENSION SPRING)

7 p/n: D1792758 (GEAR:Z41:TIMING PULLEY:T41)

8 p/n: 03604008N (SCREW - M4X8) 4pcs

9 p/n: 07200060E (RETAINING RING - M6)

10 p/n: 09514008N (SCREW:POLISHED ROUND:M4X8) 3pcs

NOTE: Bracket indexed #3 (p/n: D1792754) does not come with the harness clamps (x3).

When replacing this bracket with a new one, remove the three harness clamps from the original bracket and reuse them on the new bracket.

1

10

2 3

4 5 6

7

8 9



IMPORTANT The tension of the timing belt should be the same before and after the replacement.

Press the center of the belt with your finger and check the tension before removing the motor. Do the same after reassembling and verify that the tension is about the same.

Low tension can cause skew and registration problems. How to reassemble the motor 1. Put together the tightener bracket and cushion. (screw x2; callout #8)

2. Fix the motor to the bracket and cushion assembled in Step1. (screw x2; callout #8)

NOTE: The bracket and motor attach in the orientation shown above. Fasten the screws

from the bottom as indicated with the arrows.



3. Set the timing belt, gear and the retaining ring to the shaft on the bracket.

NOTE: If this bracket was newly procured as a spare part, remove the three harness

clamps from the original bracket and reuse them on the new bracket.

4. Put together the bracket and motor, and set the timing belt, then the spring. (screw x3; callout #10)

5. Attach the motor bracket assembly to the registration unit. (screw x3; reuse the screws originally removed from the unit) NOTE: When attaching the assembly, align the red markings on the gears.



How to verify the timing belt tension 1. After attaching the motor assembly to the registration unit, slightly loosen the two belt

tension adjustment screws by making a half-rotation counterclockwise. 2. Hold the motor and firmly turn it clockwise and counterclockwise, to verify the tension

generated by the spring. 3. Press the center of the belt and confirm the same tension as before the replacement. 4. Once confirming the same tension, fasten the screw in the order of screw #1, and then

#2. 5. Reconfirm the belt tension.

Press and confirm proper belt tension.

#2

Belt tension adjustment screws

Spring

#1

Turning the motor clockwise: Spring loosens and increases the tension on the timing belt. Turning the motor counterclockwise: Spring tightens and decreases the tension on the belt.



Subject: PM parts replacement alert message spec Prepared by: R. Shohda From: 1st Tech Service Sect., PP Tech Service Dept. Classification: Troubleshooting




Notice Regarding PM Alert Banner Message

Specification of the PM parts replacement alert banner message that appears on the operation panel for the following parts is not explained in the FSM and has caused confusion in the field. This bulletin clarifies on this point.

- PCU CL(Bk): Lubricant- PCU CL(C): Lubricant- PCU CL(M): Lubricant- PCU CL(Y): Lubricant- ITB Lubrication Unit: Lubricant- Paper Transfer Unit: Lubricant- #Fuser Cleaning Unit- Toner(Bk)- Toner(C)- Toner(M)- Toner(Y)- Waste Toner Bottle

SP5062 provides the option to choose whether or not to display the PM parts replacement alert (0: Not display, 1: Display). However, by spec, the alert message will appear for the above parts regardless of the SP5062 setting, because these are critical components to maintain machine operation. Note that the machine will automatically stop if they are not replaced at the appropriate timing.



Subject: Instruction of Color Shift Check Prepared by: Takuya Hirakawa From: 1st Tech Service Sect., PP Tech Service Dept. Classification: Troubleshooting




SYMPTOM Color tone change either in the Jobs or among the Jobs and jobs.

CAUSE Developer deterioration, calibration trouble and banding trouble etc.

SOLUTION Implement the recommended actions according to the procedure described below. Color shift could be caused by multiple possibilities. Follow the flowchart below and refer to the procedure.



Action: Implement “Procon and IBACC” in SP3-011-002 then check the result in SP3-012 Possible Cause: Improper process control might cause toner amount variation during and among jobs

Action: Implement “Toner refresh” in SP3-820-011, 012, 013 and 014 Possible Cause: Sitting toner inside dev units for a long period might make development and transfer process unstable

Action: Implement “MUSIC” in SP2-111-004 then check the result in SP2-194-010, 011 and 012

Action: Adjust “Transfer settings”, e.g. increase the transfer current by 10 micro amps, decrease the absolute value of paper transfer current by 10 micro amps Possible Cause: Poor transfer might cause image quality variation during and among jobs

Action: Check “Banding” then correct it as needed Possible Cause: Banding might cause image density variation over sheets

Action: Change a “Halftone screen”, e.g. 175 dot or interference reduction Possible Cause: Some halftone screens might cause irregular, unwanted interference pattern

t i j b

End

Action: Check the “Fiery calibration result by the difference (delta e) between targets and measured” Possible Cause: Inaccurate calibration might cause color inconsistency page by page

Action: Check SC history, e.g. SC285 (MUSIC error), SC360/361/362 (TD sensor error), SC370/371/373/374/496 (ID sensor error) Possible Cause: Chronic error codes might be related to color shift

Recommend Action: Read the “Color variances” between pages or within single sheet by using a measuring instrument

Start

Recommend Action: Read the improved color variances between pages or within single sheet by using a measuring instrument



[Read the “Color variances” between pages and pages]

ES-1000/2000 and X-rite series are typically used for reading colors. Delta e would be the good index to explain color differences. In general, 3 and over of delta e reading means a visible color difference in eyes. For ES-1000/2000 series, free PC program called Measure Tool for reading delta e can be downloaded from the following link: http://www.xrite.com/service-support/downloads/p/profilemaker_v5_0_10 Follow the steps below to read the color variances:

1. Connect ES-1000/2000 series to a computer. 2. Open the Measure Tool program and click OK in the next dialog (below is a

screen shot) to discard it.

3. Navigate from the menu to Spot then calibrate ES-1000/2000 series by following

the dialog below.

4. Select measurement options as shown below.

http://www.xrite.com/service-support/downloads/p/profilemaker_v5_0_10



5. Click Start button in the screen or press the button on ES-1000/2000 series to

measure color then delta e is calculated automatically to appear in the screen. [Implement “Procon and IBACC” then check the result] Execute Density Adjustment Procon in SP3-011-002 then check the result in SP3-012 that should be 11111111. If not, further investigation is needed. Refer to error codes below.

<Procon result>

Check the result of IBACC in SP3-014 that should be 1111 after implementing process control (IBACC is implemented at the same time when process control is implemented). If not, further investigation is needed. Refer to error codes below.

<IBACC result> 0: Not executed 1: Success 2: Pattern extraction error 4: Density increasing error 5: Density decreasing error 6: Gradation error 9: Forced end



[Implement “MUSIC” then check the result] Execute MUSIC mode d: Rough adjustment and fine adjustment in SP2-111-004 then check the result in SP2-194-010, 011 and 012 that should be 1. If not, further investigation is needed. Refer to error codes below. 0: MUSIC not executed 1: MUSIC correctly done 2: Failure to detect patches 3: Not enough patterns to detection 5: Sampling data out of correction range 6: Failure to detect patches due to scratches on the paper transfer belt [Implement “Toner refresh”] Discharge the toner inside the Development Unit. 1.Check each of the following items. If the value exceeds 20000 [mm], toner of the corresponding color must be discharged. • SP3-820-011 (Tnr Refresh Mode: K Amount) • SP3-820-012 (Tnr Refresh Mode: C Amount) • SP3-820-013 (Tnr Refresh Mode: M Amount) • SP3-820-014 (Tnr Refresh Mode: Y Amount) 2.Discharge the toner by printing the Full Dot Pattern on A3 or larger sheets of paper. If the value of SP3- 820-*** is 20000 [mm], print 40 pages. If it is 40000 [mm], print 80 pages. To avoid fusing problems, use only up to 2 colors at a time. Select "26: Full Dot Pattern" in SP2-109-003 (Test Pattern: Pattern Selection) and select the colors to be used with SP2-109-006 to 009. For the color of the toner to be used, keep the default value (15) unchanged. For the color of the toner not to be used, set the value to 0. Example: When printing 40 pages using all colors 1. Select "26: Full Dot Pattern" in SP2-109-003. 2. Select "0" in SP2-109-008 (Test Pattern: Density: Ma) and SP2-109-009 (Test Pattern: Density: Ye). 3. Print the test pattern in duplex mode on 20 sheets. 4. Return the values of SP2-109-008 and SP2-109-009 to "15". 5. Select "0" in SP2-109-006 (Test Pattern: Density: Bk) and SP2-109-007 (Test Pattern: Density: Cy). This will reduce buildup of degraded toner in the developer. If image density becomes uneven over time even though (2) and (3) are applied, execute (1) again. [Check the “Fiery calibration result by the difference (delta e) between targets and measured”] Checking the difference (Delta E) between target and measured is a great way to make sure you have an accurate calibration and the engine is reproducing color correctly. As a general rule the difference between target and measures should be as follows:



0 to 2% is normally good enough for most users. Color critical users should aim for 0 to 1%. A difference of 3% or greater is definitely a problem and indicates an engine side problem. Or if 3 of the 4 colors are 0 to 1 percent and then you have 1 of the colors at 2% or more it can still suggest a problem with that color even though it is technically within desired values. Repeating the calibration is ok to do just in case we had bad results. However if a second attempt still shows the difference as being out of tolerance then we need to look at the engine for possible problems. Basically it is saying the engine cannot reproduce that color correctly. You can see the difference (delta e) between targets and measured just after Fiery calibration or as follows:

1. Open CommandWorkstation 2. Navigate to Device Center 3. Click “Manage” under the menu of General > Tools > Calibrate 4. Click “View Measurements” after selecting the calibration settings from a list



[Check “Banding” then correct it] Print out banding test charts such as 75%, 30% and 15% chart. If some noticeable bandings at regular intervals show up, correct them. [Adjust “Transfer settings”] Follow the steps below to address grainy / mottling Change SP 3032-021 (Cleaning Setup Exe / A4 Page Cover) from 6 (default) to 16. Execute "Cleaning Initial Setting for Paper Transfer Unit" in user tool #0504 three or four times. Return the SP 3032-021 setting back to 6 (default). Increase the Image Transfer Current. For generic paper, increase the transfer current by 10 micro amps in SP2451-XXX [Set:ITB K:Standard:FC] for the paper in use. Example: 60 to 70. For custom paper, go to IMSS "Advanced Settings" and increase the value in "023: Image Transfer Current: FC: Black." Decrease the absolute value of the Paper Transfer Current. For generic paper, decrease the value in the following SP: SP2651-XXX [PTR Bias:FC: Side1] SP2652-XXX [PTR Bias:FC: Side2] SP2852-XXX [PTR AC: DC: FC: Side1] SP2853-XXX [PTR AC: DC: FC: Side2] For custom paper, go to IMSS "Advanced Settings" and decrease the absolute value by 10 micro amps in "043, 044, 058 and 059. Example: -114 to -104 / -70 / -50 beside change #64 Paper Transfer AC Lead Edge from 140 to 100% [Change a “Halftone screen”] Change the halftone screen, e.g. 200dot to 175line. Changing halftone screen might cause side effects such as moiré.



Subject: Request regarding Brush Roller inside ITB cleaning unit


From: PP Tech Service Dept., 1st PP Tech Service Sect. Classification: Troubleshooting




This is a notice and a request regarding the following cleaning brush roller (p/n: M2056550) contained inside the ITB cleaning unit. This brush roller is not prescribed as a PM part and does not have to be

replaced field. This roller should last machine life. The photos below show the brush roller in proper condition, requiring no replacement.

NOTE: This bulletin will be reissued when photos become available to show an example of

the brush roller in poor condition that requires replacement.


Model: Andromeda-P1 (M205/M238) Date: 7-May-18 No.: RM205211

Subject: Troubleshooting: SC50X-03/12 Prepared by: Takuya Hirakawa



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




Symptom

SC50X-03/12 may occur (Tray error: Paper Height Middle Sensor or Lower Limit Sensor error).

Cause

The paper is loaded repeatedly in the tray, causing the bottom plate to deform slightly. As a result, the intermediate remaining amount sensor moves away from the feeler and the intermediate position cannot be detected.

Solution

Cut and paste the black Mylar (P/N: AA150394) to the sensor feeler on the bottom plate.

Procedure

1. Remove the feeler attached to the tray bottom plate (1 screw).

2. Paste the Mylar to the feeler.



IMPORTANT:

Paste it so that it does not extend beyond the edge [a] of the feeler. The detection timing may be change, which may cause other trouble.

Does not use transparent Mylar.

Adjust the length [b] according to the gap [c] of the actual machine.

GAP [c] mm Length [b] mm

1 0.5

2 1

2.5 2

3 2.5

3.5 3

4 3.5

3. Attach the feeler in the reverse order and check the following to confirm the effectiveness:

- Whether the SC recurs by lifting the tray

- Whether Mylar is interfering with other parts during lifting

- Whether there is any indication that the Mylar has hit/contacted something

- Whether the bottom plate is inclined



Subject: Troubleshooting: Paper Tray Lift Wire breakage Prepared by: Takuya Hirakawa

From: PPCS section CIP FQM Department QAC


Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM

The tray lift wire may break.

CAUSE

The cable used to lift and lower the tray is worn out.

When the GW CTL receives a packet from an external network, it recovers from STR mode to Engine Off mode. At this time, the EFI CTL communicates with the GW CTL and commands the tray to be lifted, after which the GW CTL shifts back to STR mode. This operation is repeated each time the machine recovers from STR mode when a packet is received, which increases the wear on the tray cable.

SOLUTION

Permanent

An EFI patch will be released at the end of May 2018.

Temporary

Until the patch is released, set SP5-191-001 to a value of “0”.

Note: This will keep the GW CTL from shifting to STR mode, which in turn reduces the wear on the cable.

IMPORTANT:

- Replace all four tray cables at once, even if only one is broken.

- If the modified part has not been installed, do the action mentioned in RTB# RM205174b.



Subject: Troubleshooting: Paper Jam 028 (Registration Relay Sensor) Prepared by: Takuya Hirakawa



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




Symptom

Paper Jam 028 (Registration Relay Sensor) may occur. With the increase in printing volume about 15 million sheets, J 028 starts to be occurred gradually. When the printing volume over 20 million sheets, it frequently occurs or becomes unprintable.

Cause

The hole of the frame is scraped by the rotation of the shaft, and the amount of separation of the registration timing driven roller is reduced. As the amount of separation decreases, it becomes impossible to transport paper, and it will not reach the resist relay sensor within the specified time.

Solution

Install the supporting plate (p/n: M2057485).

Procedure

1. Open the left front door [A] and right front door [B] of the imaging section

2. Rotate the handle [A] counter-clockwise, and then withdraw the drawer unit [B].



3. Remove the drawer unit [A] with both hands and place it on a flat place.

4. Remove the motor cover [A],and then remove the harness clamp [B], shift the harness [C] and remove the screws [D].

5. Pass the shaft [A] through the hole of the supporting plate [B] and fix it with the screws [C].

IMPORTANT:

Fix the supporting plate pushing the shaft [A] in the direction of the arrow.

6. Install the drawer unit with reverse procedure.



Subject: Troubleshooting of Uneven density on sub-scan

direction Prepared by: Junji Kobayashi



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

SYMPTOM

Uneven density occurs at a pitch of 310 mm on sub-scan direction. In some cases, it may appear as a short cycle (one to several pages) page-to-page variation depending on the paper feed cycle at continuous printing. See the picture below as the image of this phenomenon.

CAUSE

- Fluctuation of the photosensitive body and variation of PG due to serration rattling with the drive unit.

- DEMS effect to reduce uneven density varies depending on the print coverage.

- After DEMS correction, uneven density may be conspicuous in the low print coverage.

SOLUTION

Implement the recommended actions according to the procedure described below. Uneven density could be caused by multiple possibilities. Follow the flowchart below and refer to the procedure.



Note: If there are components around the PCU that exceed the PM life, replace them first.

Work-around 1: OPC drum motor check 1-1 Check the DEMS results code SP3-041-001.

If there is a number “4” in 4-digit number of results code, do the step 1-2. If there is no number of “4”, Go to Work-around 2.

1-2 Replace the OPC drum motor for the color corresponding to the 4 digits of the result

code. (Refer the figure below as the case of Magenta OPC drum.)

1-3 Execute the DEMS SP3-040-001, and confirm there is no number of “4” in results code

SP3-041-001.

If print quality is accepted, procedure is completed. If print quality is Not accepted, Go to Work-around 2.

Work-around 2: DEMS corrected amplitude value check 2-1 Execute the DEMS SP3-040-001

If print quality is accepted, procedure is completed. If print quality is Not accepted, do the step 2-2.

2-2 Implement the phase rotation of the OPC drums 2-2-1 Check the DEMS corrected amplitude value SP3-676-00x.

If all SP values are less than the Judgement value shown below, then turn off the DEMS, and the procedure is completed. If any SP values are more than the Judgement values, do the step 2-2-2.



2-2-2 Draw out the PCDU of corresponding color, then turn the OPC drum 90 degrees to

counter clock wise direction. (Refer the Note and picture below.)

Note: 1) Treat step 2-2-2 with the drum cleaning units attached. 2) Rotation of 90 degrees corresponds to rotation of three holes in the flange of the OPC drum.

Front view of PCDU 2-2-3 Put the PCDU back to the machine, then execute the DEMS SP3-040-001.

2-2-4 Record the rotation angle of the OPC drums and DEMS correction amplitude value

after re-execution. If any colors in which the DEMS corrected amplitude value are sufficiently less than the judgment values in step 2-2-1, the phase rotation of the OPC drums is finished at that point and Go to step 2-3. If there are any colors more than the judgement values, then do the step 2-2-5.

2-2-5 Repeat steps 2-2-1 to 2-2-4, then Go to step 2-2-6 If you execute up to 3 times. 2-2-6 Make sure the rotation angle of the OPC drums that minimizes the correction

amplitude value by comparing the four sets of "OPC drum rotation angle” and “DEMS correction amplitude value" including the initial state of step 2-2-1.

2-2-7 Draw out the PCDU, and rotate the OPC drums to the angle at which the corrected amplitude value become the minimum in step 2-2-6, then put the PCDU back to the machine and Execute the DEMS SP3-040-001. 2-3 Output the claimed images, and confirm that they are improved.

If print quality is accepted, procedure is completed. If print quality is Not accepted, then turn off the DEMS, and the procedure is completed.

Note: In the case of high image coverage, such as the one on the left side of picture on Symptom, there might be no further improvement means and no good with DEMS



turn-off even after all troubleshooting was done. In this case, try RTB 205112 first, then execute DEMS again, since it is assumed that DEMS picks up and corrects the abnormal image of OPC drum pitch, such as "Enclosed space density unevenness".



Subject: Service Manual Correction: Recommended Ventilation Env. Prepared by: J. Ohno



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




Please make the following correction to your Andromeda FSM regarding the recommended ventilation environment, in section:

2. Installation > Installation Requirements > Environment (page. 103)

The FSM mentions the recommended ventilation environment as ‘at least 50 m3/hr/ person’ as in above, but should be corrected to ‘at least 80 m3/hr/person.’

NOTE: The safety standards on ozone density prescribed by JACA (Japan Air Cleaning Association) is maximum 0.2mg/m3. However, the recommended ventilation according to RICOH standards is calculated based on half the value of this ozone density, to secure even further safety. ‘50 m3/hr/person’ meets the JACA safety standards, but not the RICOH standards, thus the FSM requires correction.

If you receive questions from your customers about installation requirements regarding ventilation, please answer as follows.

There are no safety risks at ‘50 m3/hr/person’, but there is a risk of ozone smell. Therefore, the ventilation environment recommended by RICOH is ‘80 m3/hr/person.’

80m3/hr/person



Subject: Exhaust fan capacity information unavailable Prepared by: Hiroaki H Matsui



Mechanical

Paper path

Product Safety

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Other ( )

Action required



Tier 2

Note on the exhaust fan capacity of Andromeda-P1

There have been requests from the field for information on the exhaust fan capacity of the fusing unit and radiator for customers who wish to install external exhaust fan systems.

However, please be noted that this information for Andromeda-P1 is unavailable for the following reasons.

Reason:

As for the fusing unit, the exhaust fan is controlled to activate only when the unit needs to reject heat. That is, the fan operation is inconsistent. Forcibly exhausting air with an additional fan will affect the optimal fan capacity and may lead to fusing problems.

As for the radiator, the exhaust fan capacity is controlled according to the weight of the media in use. Forcibly exhausting air with an additional fan will affect the optimal fan capacity and may cause alert or other unexpected problems to the operation of the fan originally installed.


Model: Andromeda-P1 Date:3-Aug-18 No.: RM205217

Subject: Troubleshooting: Preventing abrasion of the rotary gate roller

drive gear Prepared by: J. Ohno



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM

The following symptoms start to occur when reaching about 15k:

Jam 028 (Registration Relay Sensor)

Jam 097 (Over Skew)

SC512 (Rotary Gate HP Error)

CAUSE

The rotary gate roller drive gear abrades, because the grease initially applied to the gear at the factory dries up.

SOLUTION

Apply grease (p/n: VSSG9006) only to the drive gear (p/n: BB013040) at 900k PM cycle.

If the gears are abraded, replace the three gears below and apply grease.

Grease p/n: VSSG9006 MOLYKOTE(R) G-1077 GREASE 50G

Gears p/n: D1792758 GEAR:Z41:TIMING PULLEY:T41

p/n: BB013040 GEAR:SHIFT:ROLLER:Z30

p/n: AB014243 GEAR:IDLER:Z30

p/n: D1792758

p/n: AB014243 p/n: BB013040


Model: Andromeda-P1 Date:3-Aug-18 No.: RM205217

Note: Abraded gears are adhered with gear particles, therefore need to be replaced.

Make sure to apply grease after replacing with new gears.

Grease amount: Maximum

Apply grease to at least 10 teeth.

Grease reaches to the very top of the teeth height.

Grease amount: Minimum

Apply grease to at least 10 teeth.

Grease reaches only to about 2/3 of the teeth height.



Subject: Troubleshooting: Fuser belt tears out Prepared by: Takuya Hirakawa



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM

Fuser belt leans to either the front or rear side and tears.

CAUSE

As the side plate wears, the pressure roller cannot press properly, and the belt is likely to move to the side.

Note: The gap between the side plate and pressure roller on the new fuser unit is normally about 0.1mm. However, after about 120,000 times of pressure and release, the gap increases. As a result, the belt tends to move to the side.

e.g. Ave. 150P/J: 150 X 120,000 = 18,000 Kp

The machine used with a low P/J will wear out the side plates with a low PV.

e.g. Ave. 75P/J: 75 X 120,000 = 9,000 Kp

SOLUTION

Replace to the following modified parts using the PROCEDURE below.

Old part number

New part number

Description Q’ty Int

M2054189 M0B14189 STOPPER:PRESSURE ROLLER:FRONT 1 X/O

M2054199 M2054598 STOPPER:PRESSURE ROLLER:REAR 1 X/O

Procedure overview

1. Withdraw the fuser unit forward (service position).

2. With the belt unit removed, the stopper is assembled. The pressure roller is then lifted by turning the coupling, so stop the pressure roller at a position where the gap between the pressure bearing and the side plate is at its maximum.

3. Push the pressure bearing by hand to the side opposite to the wear direction, and then measure the gap between the bearing and side plate as shown in the picture. If the gap exceeds 0.5 mm, replace with countermeasure parts.

IMPORTANT:

Before replacing with countermeasure parts, apply the grease (p/n: A2579300, GREASE - BARRIERTA S552R) to the surface.



PROCEDURE

1. Oepn the left front door [A] and right front door [B] of the fusing section.

2. Rotate the handle [A] counter-clockwise and withdraw the fuser unit [B].



3. Press the release levers [A] and [B], and then withdraw the fuser unit [C] forward (service position).

4. Remove the fusing cover.

5. Loosen the fixing screws of the fuser belts smoothing roller unit [A].

6. Hold the grip and remove the fuser belt smoothing roller unit [A].



7. Remove the fusing front cover [A], handle [B].

8. Remove the fusing rear cover [A].

9. Open the fusing over [A] and remove the refresh roller contact feeler [B].

10. Remove the refresh roller contact coupling [A].



11. Remove the fixing screws and disconnect the connector of the fusing cover [A].

12. Rotate the fusing cover [A] clockwise and remove it.

Important:

When installing the fusing cover, route the harness [A] between the infrared heater connectors [B].



13. Remove the fuser cleaning unit.

14. Remove the refresh roller contact cam unit [A].

15. Remove the terminal cover [A].

16. Remove the heat holder (rear) [A].

17. Remove the heat holder (front) [A].



18. Pull the heating roller lamps (5) [A] out forward.

Important:

When installing the heating roller lamps, use the jig (pipe) provided with the machine.

19. Remove the fusing exit guide plate (lower) [A].

20. Disconnect three connectors and remove a screw from the separation pawls stay [A].



21. Remove the springs [A] at the front and rear of the separation pawls stay.

22. Remove the discharge brush [A].

23. Lift the separation pawls stay [A] upward, and then remove it by sliding it backwards.



24. Remove the handle shaft [A].

25. Remove the fusing roller gear (rear) [A].

26. Remove the fixing screw and lower the position of the bracket [A].



27. Remove the stopper (front) [A].

28. Remove the stopper (rear) [A].

29. Remove the holder [A].



30. Remove the positioning pin bracket [A].

Note:

The position of positioning pin bracket [A] is adjusted at the factory. Therefore, when installing the positioning pin bracket, align the mark of pin bracket [A] and adjust (for heating roller) [B]. Otherwise, the fusing belt will lean to either the front or rear side and be bitten by the gear, which will lead to machine failures.

31. Adjust (for heating roller) [A].



32. Rotate the fusing belt unit [A] counter-clockwise and lift it.

33. The stopper (front and rear) are assembled.

34. The pressure roller is lifted by turning the coupling, so stop the pressure roller at a position where the gap between the pressure bearing and the side plate is at its maximum.

35. Push the pressure bearing by hand to the side opposite the wear direction, and then measure the gap between the bearing and the side plate as shown in the picture. If the gap exceeds 0.5 mm, replace with countermeasure parts.



How to attach the modified parts [STOPPER:PRESSURE ROLLER:FRONT]

[STOPPER:PRESSURE ROLLER:REAR]

Note: For the rear side, remove the screw of the stay and then tighten together with the stay.



How to apply the grease (p/n: A2579300, GREASE - BARRIERTA S552R) to the modified parts

1. Apply grease to the STOPPER:PRESSURE ROLLER:FRONT.



2. Apply grease to the STOPPER:PRESSURE ROLLER:REAR.



Subject: Preventive measure for white streaks due to clogged toner Prepared by: Takuya Hirakawa



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




Symptom

・ White streaks caused by toner clumps on the development roller

・ White streaks caused by clogged doctor gap

Cause

Toner accumulated on the development rollers or development MAG seal due to narrowed PG because the drum is not tightened properly with the drum tightening tool.

Solution

Confirm the adhesion amount of the development sleeve using SP values of the main-scan shading correction before and after the following tasks, and then adjust the values as necessary.

・ Replacement of drum

・ Replacement of development unit

・ Removing/attachment of drum for maintenance

PROCEDURES

1. Before the replacement or maintenance work, execute SP3-069-011 to 015.

Note:

You do not always need to execute all colors. The target is only the color for which you did the task. If you only replace the K drum, execute SP3-069-012 (Clear: K)

2. Execute the main shading correction of the cleared colors with SP 3-069- 001 to 005.



3. Note the values of the main-scan patch M/A of the executed color with SP3-069-021/ -031/ -041/ -051, -026/ -036/ -46/ -056. Then, calculate the difference between the values for the Front and Rear.

Difference in values = Front – Rear

(This value is called the “Previous value” in the following steps)

Note:

- In the case of the replacement with only K drum, note the values of SP3-069-021 (Patch M/A (latest): K (Front)) and SP3-069-026 (Patch M/A (Latest): K (Rear)).

- e.g. In the cause of SP3-069-021 is 0.290 and SP3-069-026 is 0.300, the previous value is “- 0.010”.

4. Replace the target parts or do maintenance that includes removing/attaching the drum.

5. After the task, execute SP3-069-011 to 015.

Note:

You do not always need to execute all colors. The target is only the color for which you did the task. If you only replace the K drum, execute SP3-069-012 (Clear: K)

6. Execute the main shading correction of the cleared colors with SP 3-069- 001 to 005.

7. Note the values of the main scan patch M/A of the executed color with SP3-069-021/ -031/ -041/ -051, -026/ -036/ -46/ -056. Then, calculate the difference between the values for the Front and Rear. (This value is called as “Current value” in the following steps)



Note:

- Ex, If SP3-069-021 is 0.290 and SP3-069-026 is 0.285, the current value is “0.005”.

8. Check the difference between the “Current value” and “Previous value”.

Note:

- “Current value” - “Previous value” = Difference in value

- In the above case, the Current value is “0.005” – Previous value: “- 0.010” = “0.015”.

9. If the difference in value is less than +“0.01”, the drum is tightened properly, and the

PROCEDURE is finished.

10. If the difference is not less than +“0.01”, the drum may not be properly tightened. Remove and

attach the drum again.

11. Return to Step 5 to confirm the “Current value”. In this case, the value checked in Step 7

before forwarding to Step 10 becomes the “Previous value”.

12. If the difference in value is less than +“0.01”, the drum is tightened properly, and the

PROCEDURE is finished.

13. If the difference is not less than +“0.01”, you do not need to remove/attach the drum again.

The difference may be out of the proper range even though the drum is tightened properly.

This is because the characteristic value may change after replacing the drum or the

development unit.



Subject: Troubleshooting: Paper Jam 028/097 and SC512 Prepared by: Takuya Hirakawa



Mechanical

Paper path

Part information

Electrical

Transmit/receive

Action required




SYMPTOM

The following symptoms may occur.

・ Jam 028 (Registration Relay Sensor)

・ Jam 097 (Over Skew)

・ SC512 (Rotary Gate HP Error)

CAUSE

There are three factors that cause frequent occurrence of these symptoms.

#1. The hole of the frame is scraped by the rotation of the shaft, and the amount of separation of the registration timing driven roller is reduced. As the amount of separation decreases, it becomes impossible to transport paper, which does not reach the registration relay sensor within the required time.

#2. The rotary gate roller drive gear abrades, as the grease initially applied to the gear at the factory dries up.

#3. Due to the wear of the spacer and the bearing for the PTR timing roller, the E-ring disengages, causing the transfer timing roller to contact the encoder and break.

SOLUTION

#1. See RTB #RM205213

#2. See RTB #RM205217

#3. Check the spacer every PM cycle, and if it is less than 0.5mm in thickness or has broken or is not present, do the following.

- Replace the spacers - Apply FLUOTRIBO MG GREASE (p/n: VSSG9002) to the shaft

If the thickness is 0.5mm or more, apply FLUOTRIBO MG GREASE (p/n: VSSG9002) to the E-ring to prevent wear.



PROCEDURES

Checking the spacer

1. Open the front doors of the imaging section, and then withdraw the drawer unit.

2. Remove the screw of the side rails.

3. Hold the handles [A] and [B], and then remove the drawer unit [C].

PM Cycle every 900Kp

The thickness of the spacer is 0.5 mm or less, or is not present.

Apply grease to E-ring

Finish

Replace the spacer

Apply grease to the shaft



4. Remove the knob [A] and the handle [B].

5. Remove the inner cover [A].

6. Check the spacer [A] and if the thickness is 0.5 mm or less (New one: 1.6 mm), replace the spacers. If it is 0.5 mm or more, apply grease to the shaft.



[Replacing the spacer and applying grease to the shaft]

Apply FLUOTRIBO MG GREASE (p/n: VSSG9002) to the shaft of the following parts.

- [A]: TIMING ROLLER:DRIVEN:TRANSFER

- [B]: TIMING ROLLER:TRANSFER:DRIVEN

See the Service Manual, section “4. Replacement and adjustment” for PTR timing roller (Drive/Idle).

1. Remove the PTR timing roller (Drive/Idle).

2. Replace the original spacer with the modified spacers (3pcs; P/N: G0603293).

Note: The original spacer is p/n: H5194238. The part number is different and the installed quantity was changed from one to three pieces.

3. Apply grease to the both shafts.





[Applying grease to the E-ring]

1. Withdraw the drawer unit and remove the inner cover [A].

2. Remove the encoder [A].

3. Remove the spring [A], E ring, and spacer [B], and float the encoder.

IMPORTANT: Do not remove the screw connecting the bracket and encoder cover.

4. Apply grease to the E-ring [A].



［A］